Home

User Manual

Contents

1. SG300 10 SRW2008 K9 8 GE ports and 2 special purpose combo N A N A ports GE SFP SG300 10MP SRW2008MP 8 GE ports and 2 special purpose combo 124W 8 K9 ports GE SFP SG300 10P SRW2008P 8 GE ports and 2 special purpose combo 62W 8 K9 ports GE SFP SG300 20 SRW2016 K9 16 GE ports and 4 special purpose ports N A N A 2 uplinks and 2 combo ports SG300 28 SRW2024 K9 24 GE ports and 4 special purpose ports N A N A 2 uplinks and 2 combo ports SG300 28P SRW2024P 24 GE ports and 4 special purpose ports 180W 24 K9 2 uplinks and 2 combo ports SG300 52 SRW2048 K9 48 GE ports and 4 special purpose ports N A N A 2 uplinks and 2 combo ports SF300 08 SRW208 K9_ 8FE ports N A N A 58 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration Device Models Model Name Product ID PID Description of Ports on Device Power Dedicated to PoE No of Ports that Support PoE SF302 08 SRW208G 8 FE ports plus 2 GE ports N A N A K9 SF302 08MP SRW208MP 8 FE ports plus 2 GE ports 124W 8 K9 SF302 08P SRW208P K9 8 FE ports plus 2 GE ports 62W 8 SG300 10PP SG300 10PP 8 Port 10 100 PoE Managed Switch 62W 8 K9 SG300 10MPP SG300 10 Port Gigabit PoE Managed Switch 124W 8 1OMPP K9 SF300 24 SRW224G4 24 FE ports plus 4 GE special purpose N A N A K9 ports 2 uplin
2. no_ip_phone no_ip_phone macro description no ip_phone macro keywords S voice_vlan macro key description Svoice_vlan The voice VLAN ID Default Values are Svoice_vlan 1 smartport switchport trunk allowed vlan remove voice_vlan no smartport switchport trunk native vlan smartport switchport trunk allowed vlan remove all no port security no port security mode no port security max no smartport storm control broadcast enable no smartport storm control broadcast level no smartport storm control include multicast spanning tree portfast auto 182 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Smartport Built in Smartport Macros 11 ip_phone_desktop ip_phone_desktop macro description ip_phone_desktop macro keywords native_vlan voice_vlan max_hosts macro key description Snative_vlan The untag VLAN which will be configured on the port Svoice_vlan The voice VLAN ID Smax_hosts The maximum number of allowed devices on the port Default Values are Snative_vlan Default VLAN Svoice_vlan 1 Smax_hosts 10 the default mode is trunk smartport switchport trunk allowed vlan add voice_vlan smartport switchport trunk native vlan Snative_vlan port security max max_hosts port security mode max addresses port security discard trap 60 smartport storm control broadcast lev
3. Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 375 Security First Hop Security Defining ARP Inspection VLAN Settings To enable ARP Inspection on VLANs and associate Access Control Groups with a VLAN STEP 1 Click Security gt ARP Inspection gt VLAN Settings STEP 2 To enable ARP Inspection on a VLAN move the VLAN from the Available VLANs list to the Enabled VLANs list STEP 3 To associate an ARP Access Control group with a VLAN click Add Select the VLAN number and select a previously defined ARP Access Control group STEP 4 Click Apply The settings are defined and the Running Configuration file is updated First Hop Security Security IPV6 First Hop Security 376 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security First Hop Security 18 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 377 Security First Hop Security 378 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security First Hop Security 18 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 379 Security First Hop Security 380 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Versi
4. In NBI NDP proof of address ownership is based on the First Come First Served principle The first host that claims a given source address is the owner of that address until further notice Since no host changes are acceptable a way must be found to confirm address ownership without requiring a new protocol For this reason whenever an IPv6 address is first learned from an NDP message the switch binds the address to the interface Subsequent NDP messages containing this IPV6 address can be checked against the same binding anchor to confirm that the originator owns the source IP address The exception to this rule occurs when an IPv6 host roams in the L2 domain or changes its MAC address In this case the host is still the owner of the IP address but the associated binding anchor might have changed To cope with this case the defined NBI NDP behavior implies verification of whether or not the host is still reachable by sending DAD NS messages to the previous binding interface If the host is no longer reachable at the previously recorded binding anchor NBI NDP assumes that the new anchor is valid and changes the binding anchor If the host is still reachable using the previously recorded binding anchor the binding interface is not changed To reduce the size of the Neighbor Binding table NBI NDP establishes binding only on perimeterical interfaces see Pv6 First Hop Security Perimeter and distributes binding information through in
5. Multicast Packets Received Number of good Multicast packets received CRC amp Align Errors Number of CRC and Align errors that have occurred Undersize Packets Number of undersized packets less than 64 octets received Oversize Packets Number of oversized packets over 2000 octets received Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Status and Statistics Managing RMON 2 Fragments Number of fragments packets with less than 64 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets received Jabbers Total number received packets that were longer than 1632 octets This number excludes frame bits but includes FCS octets that had either a bad FCS Frame Check Sequence with an integral number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS with a non integral octet Alignment Error number A Jabber packet is defined as an Ethernet frame that satisfies the following criteria Packet data length is greater than MRU Packet has an invalid CRC Received Rx Error Event has not been detected Collisions Number of collisions received If Jumbo Frames are enabled the threshold of Jabber Frames is raised to the maximum size of Jumbo Frames Frames of 64 Bytes Number of frames containing 64 bytes that were received Frames of 65 to 127 Bytes Number of frames containing 65 127 bytes that were received Frames of 128 to 255 Bytes Number o
6. smartport storm control broadcast level 10 smartport storm control include multicast smartport storm control broadcast enable spanning tree portfast no_ip_camera no_ip_camera macro description No ip_camera no switchport access vlan no switchport mode no port security no port security mode no smartport storm control broadcast enable no smartport storm control broadcast level no smartport storm control include multicast spanning tree portfast auto ip_phone ip_phone macro description ip_phone macro keywords Snative_vlan voice_vlan max_hosts Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 181 11 Smartport Built in Smartport Macros macro key description Snative_vlan The untag VLAN which will be configured on the port voice_vlan The voice VLAN ID Smax_hosts The maximum number of allowed devices on the port Default Values are native_vlan Default VLAN Svoice_vlan 1 Smax_hosts 10 the default mode is trunk smartport switchport trunk allowed vlan add voice_vlan smartport switchport trunk native vlan Snative_vlan port security max max_hosts port security mode max addresses port security discard trap 60 smartport storm control broadcast level 10 smartport storm control include multicast smartport storm control broadcast enable spanning tree portfast
7. macro key description Svoice_vlan The voice VLAN ID no smartport switchport trunk native vlan smartport switchport trunk allowed vlan remove all no spanning tree link type router router macro description router 184 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Smartport Built in Smartport Macros 11 macro keywords Snative_vlan voice_vlan macro key description S native_vlan The untag VLAN which will be configured on the port voice_vlan The voice VLAN ID Default Values are Snative_vlan Default VLAN Svoice_vlan 1 the default mode is trunk smartport switchport trunk allowed vlan add all smartport switchport trunk native vlan Snative_vlan smartport storm control broadcast level 10 smartport storm control broadcast enable spanning tree link type point to point no_router no_router macro description No router macro keywords voice_vlan macro key description voice_vlan The voice VLAN ID no smartport switchport trunk native vlan smartport switchport trunk allowed vlan remove all no smartport storm control broadcast enable no smartport storm control broadcast level no spanning tree link type Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 185 Smartport Built in Smartport Macros ap ap
8. HTTP Service Displays whether HTTP is enabled disabled HTTPS Service Displays whether HTTPS is enabled disabled SNMP Service Displays whether SNMP is enabled disabled Telnet Service Displays whether Telnet is enabled disabled SSH Service Displays whether SSH is enabled disabled Other Summary Information Model Description Device model description Serial Number Serial number PID VID Part number and version ID Firmware Version Active Image Firmware version number of the active image Firmware MD5 Checksum Active Image MD5 checksum of the active image Firmware Version Non active Image Firmware version number of the non active image Firmware MD5 Checksum Non active Image MD5 checksum of the non active image Boot Version Boot version number Boot MD5 Checksum MD5 checksum of the boot version Locale Locale of the first language This is always English Language Version Language package version of the first or English language Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 61 Administration System Settings Language MD5 Checksum MD5 checksum of the language file PoE Power Information Maximum Available PoE Power W Maximum available power that can be delivered by the PoE Total PoE Power Consumption W Total PoE power delivered to connected PoE devices PoE Power Mode Port Limit o
9. The Multicast TV VLAN configuration is defined per port Customer ports are configured to be member of Multicast TV VLANs using the Multicast TV VLAN Page IGMP Snooping Multicast TV VLAN relies on IGMP snooping which means that Subscribers use IGMP messages to join or leave a Multicast group Device performs IGMP snooping and configures the access port according to its Multicast membership on Multicast TV VLAN The device decides for each IGMP packet that is received on an access port whether to associate it with the access VLAN or with the Multicast TV VLAN according to the following rules If an IGMP message is received on an access port with destination Multicast IP address that is associated with the port s Multicast TV VLAN then the software associates the IGMP packet with the Multicast TV VLAN Otherwise the IGMP message is associated to the access VLAN and the IGMP message is only forwarded within that VLAN The IGMP message is discarded if The STP RSTP state on the access port is discard The MSTP state for the access VLAN is discard The MSTP state for the Multicast TV VLAN is discard and the IGMP message is associated with this Multicast TV VLAN Differences Between Regular and Multicast TV VLANs Characteristics of Regular vs Multicast TV VLANs Regular VLAN Multicast TV VLAN VLAN Membership Source and all receiver Source and receiver ports ports must be static cannot be members i
10. Viewing Ethernet Interfaces The Interface page displays traffic statistics per port The refresh rate of the information can be selected This page is useful for analyzing the amount of traffic that is both sent and received and its dispersion Unicast Multicast and Broadcast Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 13 Status and Statistics Viewing Ethernet Interfaces To display Ethernet statistics and or set the refresh rate STEP 1 Click Status and Statistics gt Interface STEP 2 Enter the parameters Interface Select the type of interface and specific interface for which Ethernet statistics are to be displayed Refresh Rate Select the time period that passes before the interface Ethernet statistics are refreshed The available options are No Refresh Statistics are not refreshed 15 Sec Statistics are refreshed every 15 seconds 30 Sec Statistics are refreshed every 30 seconds 60 Sec Statistics are refreshed every 60 seconds The Receive Statistics area displays information about incoming packets Total Bytes Octets Octets received including bad packets and FCS octets but excluding framing bits Unicast Packets Good Unicast packets received Multicast Packets Good Multicast packets received Broadcast Packets Good Broadcast packets received Packets with Errors Packets with errors received The Trans
11. Welcome Message FEnter the text of the message to be displayed when the end user logs on Instructional Message Enter the instructions to be displayed to the end user RADIUS Authentication Displays whether RADIUS authentication is enabled If so the username and password must be included in the login page Username Textbox Select for a username textbox to be displayed Username Textbox Label Select the label to be displayed before the username textbox Password Textbox Select for a password textbox to be displayed Password Textbox Label Select the label to be displayed before the password textbox Language Selection Select to enable the end user to select a language Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 405 Security 802 1X Authentication 8021X Configuration Through the GUI Language Dropdown Label Enter the label of the language selection dropdown Login Button Label Enter the label of the login button Login Progress Label Enter the text that will be displayed during the login process STEP 8 Click Apply and the settings are saved to the Running Configuration file STEP 9 Click Edit4 The following fields are displayed Terms and Conditions Select to enable a terms and conditions text box Terms and Conditions Warning Enter the text of the message to be displayed as instructions to enter the terms and
12. 13 VLAN Management VLAN Groups STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 a Assign the VLAN group to a VLAN using Mac Based Groups to VLAN page The interfaces must be in General mode b If the interface does not belong to the VLAN manually assign it to the VLAN using the Port to VLAN page Assigning MAC based VLAN Groups See Table 1 for a description of the availability of this feature To assign a MAC address to a VLAN Group Click VLAN Management gt VLAN Groups gt MAC Based Groups Click Add Enter the values for the following fields MAC Address Enter a MAC address to be assigned to a VLAN group NOTE This MAC address cannot be assigned to any other VLAN group _Mask Enter one of the following Host Source host of the MAC address Length Prefix of the MAC address Group ID Enter a user created VLAN group ID number Click Apply The MAC address is assigned to a VLAN group Mapping VLAN Group to VLAN Per Interface See Table 1 for a description of the availability of this feature Ports LAGs must be in General mode To assign a MAC based VLAN group to a VLAN on an interface Click VLAN Management gt VLAN Groups gt MAC Based Groups to VLAN Click Add Enter the values for the following fields Group Type Displays that the group is MAC Based 208 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version
13. Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version VLAN Management Voice VLAN 13 and default voice VLAN A numeric low MAC address is of higher priority than a numeric high MAC address It maintains the voice VLAN until a new voice VLAN from a higher priority source is discovered or until the Auto Voice VLAN is restarted by the user When restarted the device resets the voice VLAN to the default voice VLAN and restarts the Auto Voice VLAN discovery When anew voice VLAN is configured discovered the device automatically creates it and replaces all the port memberships of the existing voice VLAN to the new voice VLAN This may interrupt or terminate existing voice sessions which is expected when network topology is altered NOTE If the device is in Layer 2 system mode it can synchronize with only VSDP capable switches in the same management VLAN If the device is in Layer 3 system mode it can synchronize with VSDP capable switches that are in the directly connected IP subnets configured at the device Auto Smartport works with CDP LLDP to maintain the port memberships of the voice VLAN when voice end points are detected from the ports When CDP and LLDP are enabled the device sends out CDP and LLDP packets periodically to advertise the voice VLAN to the voice endpoints to use When a device attaching to a port advertises itself as a voice endpoint through CDP and or LLDP
14. Power savings current power consumption and cumulative energy saved can be monitored The total amount of saved energy can be viewed as a percentage of the power that would have been consumed by the physical interfaces had they not been running in Green Ethernet mode The saved energy displayed is only related to Green Ethernet The amount of energy saved by EEE is not displayed 138 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Port Management 9 Configuring Green Ethernet Power Saving by Disabling Port LEDs The Disable Port LEDs feature allows the user to save extra power consumed by device LEDs Since most of the time the devices are in an unoccupied room having these LEDs lit is a waste of energy The Green Ethernet feature enables you to disable the port LEDs for link speed and PoE when they are not required and to enable the LEDs if they are needed debugging connecting additional devices etc On the System Summary page the LEDs that are displayed on the device board pictures are not affected by disabling the LEDs On the Green Ethernet gt Properties page the device enables the user to disable the ports LEDs in order to save power 802 3az Energy Efficient Ethernet Feature This section describes the 802 3az Energy Efficient Ethernet EEE feature It covers the following topics 802 3az EEE Overview Advertise Capabilities Negotiation Link Lev
15. Protocol Dropped message protocol Message Type Type of message dropped Count Number of messages dropped Reason Reason that the messages were dropped 436 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security IPV6 First Hop Security 2 O Configuring First Hop Security through Web GUI Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 437 Security Secure Sensitive Data Management Introduction Secure Sensitive Data SSD is an architecture that facilitates the protection of sensitive data on a device such as passwords and keys The facility makes use of passphrases encryption access control and user authentication to provide a secure solution to managing sensitive data The facility is extended to protect the integrity of configuration files to secure the configuration process and to support SSD zero touch auto configuration Introduction SSD Rules SSD Properties Configuration Files SSD Management Channels Menu CLI and Password Recovery Configuring SSD SSD protects sensitive data on a device such as passwords and keys permits and denies access to sensitive data encrypted and in plain text based on user credentials and SSD rules and protects configuration files containing sensitive data from being tampered with In addition SSD enables the secure backup a
16. Pv6 router discovery Stateless address configuration A malicious host could send RA messages advertising itself as an IPv6 router and providing counterfeit prefixes for stateless address configuration RA Guard provides protection against such attacks by configuring the interface role as a host interface for all interfaces where IPv6 routers cannot be connected Protection against IPv6 Address Resolution Spoofing A malicious host could send NA messages advertising itself as an IPv6 Host having the given IPv6 address NB Integrity provides protection against such attacks in the following ways If the given IPv6 address is unknown the Neighbor Solicitation NS message is forwarded only on inner interfaces If the given IPv6 address is known the NS message is forwarded only on the interface to which the IPv6 address is bound Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 419 Security IPV6 First Hop Security Attack Protection A Neighbor Advertisement NA message is dropped if the target IPv6 address is bound with another interface Protection against IPv6 Duplication Address Detection Spoofing An IPv6 host must perform Duplication Address Detection for each assigned IPv6 address by sending a special NS message Duplicate Address Detection Neighbor Solicitation message DAD_NS message A malicious host could send reply to a DAD_RS message advert
17. Reason lf Short Reach mode is not operational displays the reason Cable Length Displays VCT returned cable length in meters Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 143 Port Management Configuring Green Ethernet STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP NOTE Short reach mode is only supported on RJ45 GE ports it does not apply to Combo ports 802 3 Energy Efficient Ethernet EEE State of the port regarding the EEE feature Administrative Displays whether EEE was enabled Operational Displays whether EEE is currently operating on the local port This is a function of whether it has been enabled Administrative Status whether it has been enabled on the local port and whether it is operational on the local port LLDP Administrative Displays whether advertising EEE counters through LLDP was enabled LLDP Operational Displays whether advertising EEE counters through LLDP is currently operating EEE Support on Remote Displays whether EEE is supported on the link partner EEE must be supported on both the local and remote link partners NOTE The window displays the Short Reach Energy Detect and EEE settings for each port however they are not enabled on any port unless they are also enabled globally by using the Properties page To enable Short Reach and EEE globally see Setting Global Green Ethernet Properties Se
18. STEP 1 STEP 2 Click IP Configuration gt IPv6 Management and Interfaces gt DHCPv6 Relay gt Global Destinations To add a default DHCPV6 server click Add Enter the fields IPv6 Address Type Enter the type of the destination address to which client messages are forwarded The address type can be Link Local Global or Multicast All_DHCP_Relay_Agents_and_Servers DHCPv6 Server IP Address Enter the address of the DHCPV6 server to which packets are forwarded Destination IPv6 Interface Enter the interface on which packets are transmitted when the address type of the DHCPV6 server is Link Local or Multicast Click Apply The Running Configuration file is updated Interface Settings To enable the DHCPVv6 Relay feature on an interface and to configure a list of DHCPV6 servers to which DHCP V6 packets are relayed when they are received on this interface Click IP Configuration gt IPv6 Management and Interfaces gt DHCPv6 Relay gt Interface Settings To enable DHCPV6 on an interface and optionally add a DHCPV6 server for an interface click Add Enter the fields Source Interface Select the interface port LAG VLAN or tunnel for which DHCPV6 Relay is enabled Use Global Destinations Only Select to forward packets to the DHCP v6 global destination servers only IPv6 Address Type Enter the type of the destination address to which client messages are forwarded The address type c
19. The OUI Global table can hold up to 128 OUls This section covers the following topics Adding OUls to the Telephony OUI Table Adding Interfaces to Voice VLAN on Basis of OUIs Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 221 13 VLAN Management Voice VLAN STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 Adding OUls to the Telephony OUI Table Use the Telephony OUI page to configure Telephony OUI QoS properties In addition the Auto Membership Aging time can be configured If the specified time period passes with no telephony activity the port is removed from the Voice VLAN Use the Telephony OUI page to view existing OUls and add new OUls To configure Telephony OUI and or add a new Voice VLAN OUI Click VLAN Management gt Voice VLAN gt Telephony OUI The Telephony OUI page contains the following fields Telephony OUI Operational Status Displays whether OUls are used to identify voice traffic CoS 802 1p Select the CoS queue to be assigned to voice traffic Remark CoS 802 1p Select whether to remark egress traffic Auto Membership Aging Time Enter the time delay to remove a port from the voice VLAN after all of the MAC addresses of the phones detected on the ports have aged out Click Apply to update the Running Configuration of the device with these values The Telephony OUI table appears Telephony OUI First six digits
20. The device can act as a TACACS client that uses the TACACS server for the following services Authentication Provides authentication of users logging onto the device by using usernames and user defined passwords 332 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security Configuring TACACS 18 Authorization Performed at login After the authentication session is completed an authorization session starts using the authenticated username The TACACS server then checks user privileges _Accounting Enable accounting of login sessions using the TACACS server This enables a system administrator to generate accounting reports from the TACACS server In addition to providing authentication and authorization services the TACACS protocol helps to ensure TACACS message protection through encrypted TACACS body messages TACACS is supported only with IPv4 Some TACACS servers support a single connection that enables the device to receive all information in a single connection If the TACACS server does not support this the device reverts to multiple connections Accounting Using a TACACS Server The user can enable accounting of login sessions using either a RADIUS or TACACS server The user configurable TCP port used for TACACS server accounting is the same TCP port that is used for TACACS server authentication and authorization Cisco
21. This page displays the following fields for all VLANs VLAN ID User defined VLAN ID VLAN Name User defined VLAN name Originators VLAN type GVRP VLAN was dynamically created through Generic VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP Static VLAN is user defined Default VLAN is the default VLAN Click Add to add a new VLAN The page enables the creation of either a single VLAN or a range of VLANs To create a single VLAN select the VLAN radio button enter the VLAN ID VID and optionally the VLAN Name To create a range of VLANs select the Range radio button and specify the range of VLANs to be created by entering the Starting VID and Ending VID inclusive When using the Range function the maximum number of VLANs you can create at one time is 100 Click Apply to create the VLAN s 200 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version VLAN Management Configuring VLAN Interface Settings 13 Configuring VLAN Interface Settings The Interface Settings page displays and enables configuration of VLAN related parameters for all interfaces To configure the VLAN settings STEP 1 Click VLAN Management gt Interface Settings STEP 2 Select an interface type Port or LAG and click Go Ports or LAGs and their VLAN parameters are displayed STEP 3 Toconfigure a Port or LAG select it and click Edit STEP 4 Enter the values for the fol
22. 25 Quality of Service Managing QoS Statistics STEP 4 Click Apply The Queue Statistics counter is added and the Running Configuration file is updated 519 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Quality of Service 2 5 Managing QoS Statistics Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 520 Quality of Service Managing QoS Statistics 521 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Quality of Service 2 5 Managing QoS Statistics Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 522 Quality of Service Managing QoS Statistics 523 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Quality of Service 2 5 Managing QoS Statistics Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 524 SNMP This section describes the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP feature that provides a method for managing network devices It covers the following topics SNMP Versions and Workflow Model OIDs SNMP Engine ID Configuring SNMP Views Creating SNMP Groups Managing SNMP Users Defining SNMP Communities Defining Trap Settings Notification Rec
23. 338 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security 1 8 Configuring RADIUS Interactions With Other Features You cannot enable accounting on both a RADIUS and TACACS server Radius Workflow To user a RADIUS server do the following STEP 1 Open an account for the device on the RADIUS server STEP 2 Configure that server along with the other parameters in the RADIUS and ADD RADIUS Server pages NOTE If more than one RADIUS server has been configured the device uses the configured priorities of the available RADIUS servers to select the RADIUS server to be used by the device To set the RADIUS server parameters STEP 1 Click Security gt RADIUS STEP 2 Enter the RADIUS Accounting option The following options are available Port Based Access Control 802 1X MAC Based Web Authentication Specifies that the RADIUS server is used for 802 1x port accounting Management Access Specifies that the RADIUS server is used for user login accounting Both Port Based Access Control and Management Access Specifies that the RADIUS server is used for both user login accounting and 802 1x port accounting None Specifies that the RADIUS server is not used for accounting STEP 3 Enter the default RADIUS parameters if required Values entered in the Default Parameters are applied to all servers If a value is not entered for a specific server in t
24. 525 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version SNMP SNMP Engine ID 26 The private Object IDs are placed under enterprises 1 cisco 9 otherEnterprises 6 ciscosb 1 switchOO 1 10 1 SNMP Engine ID A CAUTION STEP 1 STEP 2 The Engine ID is used by SNMPv3 entities to uniquely identify them An SNMP agent is considered an authoritative SNMP engine This means that the agent responds to incoming messages Get GetNext GetBulk Set and sends trap messages to a manager The agent s local information is encapsulated in fields in the message Each SNMP agent maintains local information that is used in SNMPv3 message exchanges The default SNMP Engine ID is comprised of the enterprise number and the default MAC address This engine ID must be unique for the administrative domain so that no two devices in a network have the same engine ID Local information is stored in four MIB variables that are read only snmpEngineld snmpEngineBoots snmpEngineTime and snmpEngineMaxMessageSize When the engine ID is changed all configured users and groups are erased To define the SNMP engine ID Click SNMP gt Engine ID Choose which to use for Local Engine ID Use Default Select to use the device generated engine ID The default engine ID is based on the device MAC address and is defined per standard as First 4 octets First bit 1 the res
25. Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 92 Administration Discovery 8 Bonjour STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 When Bonjour Discovery is disabled the device stops any service type advertisements and does not respond to requests for service from network management applications To globally enable Bonjour when the system is in Layer 2 system mode Click Administration gt Discovery Bonjour Select Enable to enable Bonjour Discovery globally on the device Click Apply Bonjour is enabled or disabled on the device according to the selection Bonjour in Layer 3 System Mode In Layer 3 system mode each interface VLAN port or LAG can be assigned an IP address When Bonjour is enabled the device can send Bonjour Discovery packets on all interfaces that have IP addresses Bonjour can individually be assigned on a per port and or per VLAN basis When Bonjour is enabled the device can send Bonjour Discovery packets to interfaces with IP addresses that have been associated with Bonjour on the Bonjour Discovery Interface Control table When the device is operating in Layer 3 system mode go to IP Configuration gt Management and IP Interface gt IPv4 Interface to configure an IP address to an interface If an interface such as a VLAN is deleted Goodbye packets are sent to deregister services the device is advertising from the neighboring cache table within the lo
26. IGMP Querier Status Enable or disable the IGMP Querier Administrative Querier Source IP Address Select the source IP address of the IGMP Querier This can be the IP address of the VLAN or it can be the management IP address Operational Querier Source IP Address Displays the source IP address of the elected querier IGMP Querier Version Select the IGMP version used if the device becomes the elected querier Select IGMPv3 if there are switches and or Multicast routers in the VLAN that perform source specific IP Multicast forwarding STEP 5 Click Apply The Running Configuration file is updated MLD Snooping Hosts use the MLD protocol to report their participation in Multicast sessions and the device uses MLD snooping to build Multicast membership lists It uses these lists to forward Multicast packets only to device ports where there are host nodes that are members of the Multicast groups The device does not support MLD Querier Hosts use the MLD protocol to report their participation in Multicast sessions The device supports two versions of MLD snooping MLDv1 snooping detects MLDv1 control packets and sets up traffic bridging based on IPv6 destination Multicast addresses MLDv2 snooping uses MLDv2 control packets to forward traffic based on the source IPv6 address and the destination IPv6 Multicast address The actual MLD version is selected by the Multicast router in the network Cisco Small Business 20
27. IP Configuration 1 7 Domain Name Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 333 IP Configuration Domain Name 334 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration 1 7 Domain Name Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 335 IP Configuration Domain Name 336 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration 1 7 Domain Name Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 337 IP Configuration Domain Name 338 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security This section describes device security and access control The system handles various types of security The following list of topics describes the various types of security features described in this section Some features are used for more than a single type of security or control and so they appear twice in the list of topics below Permission to administer the device is described in the following sections Defining Users Configuring TACACS lt 300 500 gt Configuring RADIUS Management Access Method Management Access Method Secure Sensit
28. If the DHCP client does not renew the allocated IP Address the IP address is revoked at the end of this period and the client must request another IP address This is done in the Network Pools page 292 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration DHCP Server 17 Dependencies Between Features It is impossible to configure DHCP server and DHCP client on the system at the same time meaning if one interface is DHCP client enabled it is impossible to enable DHCP server globally If DHCPv4 Relay is enabled the device cannot be configured as a DHCP server Default Settings and Configurations The device is not configured as a DHCPV4 server by default If the device is enabled to be a DHCP V4 server there are no network pools of addresses defined by default Workflow for Enabling the DHCP Server Feature To configure the device as a DHCPV4 server STEP 1 Enable the device as a DHCP server using the DHCP Server gt Properties page STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP 2 If there are any IP addresses that you do not want to be assigned configure them using the Excluded Addresses page 3 Define up to 8 network pools of IP addresses using the Network Pools page 4 Configure clients that will be assigned a permanent IP address using the Static Hosts page 5 Configure the required DHCP options in the DHCP Options page
29. RA Guard discards RA and CPA messages received on interfaces whose role are not router The interface role is configured in the Security gt IPv6 First Hop Security gt RA Guard Settings page Validation of RA messages RA Guard validates RA messages using the filtering based on the RA Guard policy attached to the interface These policies can be configured in the RA Guard Settings page If a message does not pass verification it is dropped If the logging packet drop configuration on the FHS common component is enabled a rate limited SYSLOG message is sent Neighbor Discovery Inspection Neighbor Discovery ND Inspection supports the following functions Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 415 20 Security IPV6 First Hop Security DHCPv6 Guard Validation of received Neighbor Discovery protocol messages Egress filtering Message Validation ND Inspection validates the Neighbor Discovery protocol messages based on an ND Inspection policy attached to the interface This policy can be defined in the ND Inspection Settings page If amessage does not pass the verification defined in the policy it is dropped and a rate limited SYSLOG message is sent Egress Filtering ND Inspection blocks forwarding of RS and CPS messages on interfaces configured as host interfaces DHCPv6 Guard DHCP v6 Guard treats the trapped DHCPv6 messages DHCP v6 G
30. The entry was manually configured by a user DHCPv6 Relay DHCPV6 Relay is used for relaying DHCPv6 messages to DHCPV6 servers It is defined in RFC 3315 When the DHCPV6 client is not directly connected to the DHCPV6 server a DHCPV6 relay agent the device to which this DHCPV6 client is directly connected encapsulates the received messages from the directly connected DHCP V6 client and forwards them to the DHCPV6 server In the opposite direction the relay agent decapsulates packets received from the DHCPV6 server and forwards them towards the DHCPV6 client The user must configure the list DHCP servers to which packets are forwarded Two sets of DHCPV6 servers can be configured Global Destinations Packets are always relayed to these DHCPV6 servers Interface List This is a per interface list of DHCPv6 servers When a DHCPvV6 packet is received on an interface the packet is relayed both to the servers on the interface list if it exists and to the servers on the global destination list Dependencies with Other Features The DHCPV 6 client and DHCPV6 relay functions are mutually exclusive on an interface Global Destinations To configure a list of DHCPv6 servers to which all DHCP v6 packets are relayed 314 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration IPv6 Management and Interfaces 1 7 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4
31. VLAN List Select the VLANs to which the policy is attached Select All VLANs or enter a range of VLANs STEP 3 Click Apply to add the settings to the Running Configuration file 432 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security IPV6 First Hop Security 2 O Configuring First Hop Security through Web GUI STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Policy Attachment Port To attach a policy to one or more ports or LAGs Click Security gt First Hop Security gt Policy Attachment Port The list of policies that are already attached are displayed along with their Interface number Policy Type Policy Name and VLAN List To attach a policy to a port or LAG click Add and enter the following fields Interface Select the interface on which the policy will be attached Policy Type Select the policy type to attach to the interface Policy Name Select the name of the policy to attach to the interface VLAN List Select the VLANs to which the policy is attached Select All VLANs or enter a range of VLANs Click Apply to add the settings to the Running Configuration file Neighbor Binding Table To add or modify entries in the Neighbor Binding table Click Security gt First Hop Security gt Neighbor Binding Table Select one of the following clear table options Static Only Clear all static entries in the tabl
32. VLAN Management VLAN Groups 13 _Interface Enter a general interface port LAG through which traffic is received Group ID Select a VLAN group defined in the MAC Based Groups page VLAN ID Select the VLAN to which traffic from the VLAN group is forwarded STEP 4 Click Apply to set the mapping of the VLAN group to the VLAN This mapping STEP 1 does not bind the interface dynamically to the VLAN the interface must be manually added to the VLAN Protocol based VLANs Groups of protocols can be defined and then bound to a port After the protocol group is bound to a port every packet originating from a protocol in the group is assigned the VLAN that is configured in the Protocol Based Groups page Workflow To define a protocol based VLAN group 1 Define a protocol group using the Protocol Based Groups page 2 For each required interface assign the protocol group to a VLAN using Protocol Based Groups to VLAN page The interfaces must be in General mode and cannot have a Dynamic VLAN DVA assigned to it Protocol Based Groups To define a set of protocols Click VLAN Management gt VLAN Groups gt Protocol Based Groups The Protocol Based Groups Page contains the following fields Encapsulation Displays the protocol on which the VLAN group is based Protocol Value Hex Displays the protocol value in hex Group ID Displays the protocol group ID to which the interfac
33. _Timeout Enter the length of time that the system waits for a frame to return before declaring it lost or select Use Default STEP 3 Click Activate Traceroute The operation is performed A page appears showing the Round Trip Time RTT and status for each trip in the fields Index Displays the number of the hop Host Displays a stop along the route to the destination Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration 5 Traceroute Round Trip Time 1 3 Displays the round trip time in ms for the first through third frame and the status of the first through third operation Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 73 Administration Traceroute 74 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration Traceroute Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 75 Administration Traceroute 76 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration Traceroute Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 77 Administration Traceroute 78 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series
34. macro description ap macro keywords Snative_vlan S voice_vlan macro key description S native_vlan The untag VLAN which will be configured on the port 186 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Port Management PoE The Power over Ethernet PoE feature is only available on PoE based devices For a list of PoE based devices refer to the Device Models section This section describes how to use the PoE feature It covers the following topics PoE on the Device Configuring PoE Properties Configuring PoE Settings PoE on the Device A PoE device is PSE Power Sourcing Equipment that delivers electrical power to connected PD Powered Devices over existing copper cables without interfering with the network traffic updating the physical network or modifying the network infrastructure See Device Models for information concerning PoE support on various models PoE Features PoE provides the following features Eliminates the need to run 110 220 V AC power to all devices on a wired LAN Removes the necessity for placing all network devices next to power sources Eliminates the need to deploy double cabling systems in an enterprise significantly decreasing installation costs Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 187 Port Management PoE PoE on the Device Power ov
35. 2 Define MSTP instances Each MSTP instance calculates and builds a loop free topology to bridge packets from the VLANs that map to the instance Refer to the Mapping VLANs to a MSTP Instance section 3 Decide which MSTP instance be active in what VLAN and associate these MSTP instances to VLAN s accordingly 4 Configure the MSTP attributes by Defining MSTP Properties Defining MSTP Instance Settings Mapping VLANs to a MSTP Instance Defining MSTP Properties The global MSTP configures a separate Spanning Tree for each VLAN group and blocks all but one of the possible alternate paths within each spanning tree instance MSTP enables formation of MST regions that can run multiple MST instances MSTI Multiple regions and other STP bridges are interconnected using one single common spanning tree CST MSTP is fully compatible with RSTP bridges in that an MSTP BPDU can be interpreted by an RSTP bridge as an RSTP BPDU This not only enables compatibility with RSTP bridges without configuration changes but also causes any RSTP bridges outside of an MSTP region to see the region as a single RSTP bridge regardless of the number of MSTP bridges inside the region itself For two or more switches to be in the same MST region they must have the same VLANs to MST instance mapping the same configuration revision number and the same region name Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Inte
36. 508 25 Quality of Service QoS Advanced Mode STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 NOTE STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 To map DSCP values Click Quality of Service gt QoS Advanced Mode gt Out of Profile DSCP Mapping This page enables setting the change the DSCP value of traffic entering or leaving the device DSCP In displays the DSCP value of the incoming packet that needs to be re marked to an alternative value Select the DSCP Out value to where the incoming value is mapped Click Apply The Running Configuration file is updated with the new DSCP Mapping table Defining Class Mapping A Class Map defines a traffic flow with ACLs Access Control Lists A MAC ACL IP ACL and IPv6 ACL can be combined into a class map Class maps are configured to match packet criteria on a match all or match any basis They are matched to packets on a first fit basis meaning that the action associated with the first matched class map is the action performed by the system Packets that matches the same class map are considered to belong to the same flow Defining class maps does not have any effect on QoS it is an interim step enabling the class maps to be used later If more complex sets of rules are needed several class maps can be grouped into a super group called a policy see Configuring a Policy The Class Mapping page shows the list of defined class maps and the ACLs comprising each and enables you to add delete class
37. Configuring LLDP STEP 1 Accessing LLDP Statistics The LLDP Statistics page displays LLDP statistical information per port To view the LLDP statistics Click Administration gt Discovery LLDP gt LLDP Statistics For each port the fields are displayed Interface lIdentifier of interface Tx Frames Total Number of transmitted frames Rx Frames Totak Number of received frames Discarded Total number of received frames that were discarded Errors Total number of received frames with errors RxTLVs Discarded Total number of received TLVs that were discarded Unrecognizea Total number of received TLVs that were unrecognized Neighbor s Information Deletion Count Number of neighbor ageouts on the interface STEP 2 Click Refresh to view the latest statistics LLDP Overloading LLDP adds information as LLDP and LLDP MED TLVs into the LLDP packets LLDP overload occurs when the total amount of information to be included in a LLDP packet exceed the maximum PDU size supported by an interface The LLDP Overloading page displays the number of bytes of LLDP LLDP MED information the number of available bytes for additional LLDP information and the overloading status of every interface Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 113 Administration Discovery Configuring LLDP To view LLDP overloading information
38. Defining VLAN Membership Admit Tagged Only tThe interface accepts only tagged frames Admit Untagged Only tThe interface accepts only untagged and priority frames Ingress Filtering Available only in General mode Select to enable ingress filtering When an interface is ingress filtering enabled the interface discards all incoming frames that are classified as VLANs of which the interface is not a member Ingress filtering can be disabled or enabled on general ports It is always enabled on access ports and trunk ports STEP 5 Click Apply The parameters are written to the Running Configuration file Defining VLAN Membership The Port to VLAN and Port VLAN Membership pages display the VLAN memberships of the ports in various presentations You can use them to add or remove memberships to or from the VLANs When a port is forbidden default VLAN membership that port is not allowed membership in any other VLAN An internal VID of 4095 is assigned to the port To forward the packets properly intermediate VLAN aware devices that carry VLAN traffic along the path between end nodes must either be manually configured or must dynamically learn the VLANs and their port memberships from Generic VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP Untagged port membership between two VLAN aware devices with no intervening VLAN aware devices must be to the same VLAN In other words the PVID on the ports between the two devices must be the sa
39. Global The IPv6 address is a global Unicast IPV6 type that is visible and reachable from other networks d Link Local Interface Select the link local interface from the list e TFTP Server Enter the IP address of the TFTP server f Source File Name Enter the source file name File names cannot contain slashes or cannot start with a period and must include between 1 and 160 characters Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 _ g Destination File Type Enter the destination configuration file type Only valid file types are displayed The file types are described in the Files and File Types section 44 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration File Management 4 Download Backup Configuration Log Backup Save Action Specifies that a file type is to be copied to a file on another device Enter the following fields a Server Definition Select whether to specify the TFTP server by IP address or by domain name IP Version Select whether an IPv4 or an IPv6 address is used IPv6 Address Type Select the IPv6 address type if used The options are Link Local The IPv6 address uniquely identifies hosts on a single network link A link local address has a prefix of FE80 is not routable and can be used for communication only on the local network Only one link local address is supported If a link lo
40. STEP 2 Enter the fields Interface Select the port or LAG Smartport Type Displays the Smartport type currently assigned to the port LAG Smartport Application Select the Smartport type from the Smartport Application pull down Smartport Application Method If Auto Smartport is selected Auto Smartport automatically assigns the Smartport type based on the CDP and or LLDP advertisement received from the connecting devices as well as applying the corresponding Smartport macro To statically assign a Smartport type and apply the corresponding Smartport macro to the interface select the desired Smartport type 174 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Smartport Built in Smartport Macros 11 Persistent Status Select to enable the Persistent status If enabled the association of a Smartport type to an interface remains even if the interface goes down or the device is rebooted Persistent is applicable only if the Smartport Application of the interface is Auto Smartport Enabling Persistent at an interface eliminates the device detection delay that otherwise occurs Macro Parameters Displays the following fields for up to three parameters in the macro Parameter Name Name of parameter in macro Parameter Value Current value of parameter in macro This can be changed here Parameter Description Description of parameter STEP
41. Secure Sensitive Data Management 2 1 NOTE is recommended that the user authentication process on a device is secured To secure the user authentication process you can use the local authentication database as well as secure the communication through external authentication servers such as a RADIUS server The configuration of the secure communication to the external authentication servers are sensitive data and are protected under SSD The user credential in the local authenticated database is already protected by a non SSD related mechanism If a user from a channel issues an action that uses an alternate channel the device applies the read permission and default read mode from the SSD rule that match the user credential and the alternate channel For example if a user logs in via a secure channel and starts a TFTP upload session the SSD read permission of the user on the insecure channel TFTP is applied Default SSD Rules The device has the following factory default rules Table 3 Rule Key Rule Action User Channel Read Default Read Mode Permission Level Secure XML Plaintext Only Plaintext 15 SNMP Level Secure Both Encrypted 15 Level Insecure Both Encrypted 15 All Insecure XML Exclude Exclude SNMP All Secure Encrypted Only Encrypted All Insecure Encrypted Only Encrypted The default rules can be modified but they cannot be deleted If the SSD default rules hav
42. Select a specific port LAG VLAN or ISATAP tunnel for the IPv6 address To configure the interface as a DHCPV6 client meaning to enable the interface to receive information from the DHCPV6 server such as SNTP configuration and DNS information enter the DHCPv6 Client fields 302 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration 1 7 IPv6 Management and Interfaces Stateless Select to enable the interface as a stateless DHCPV6 client This enables reception of configuration information from a DHCP server Minimum Information Refresh Time This value is used to put a floor on the refresh time value If the server sends a refresh time option that is less than this value this value is used instead Select either Infinite no refresh unless the server sends this option or User Defined to set a value Information Refresh Time This value indicates how often the device will refresh information received from the DHCPV6 server If this option is not received from the server the value entered here is used Select either Infinite no refresh unless the server sends this option or User Defined to set a value STEP 5 Toconfigure additional IPv6 parameters enter the following fields IPv6 Address Auto Configuration Select to enable automatic address configuration from router advertisements sent by neighbors NOTE The device does not support stateful
43. Single Session Single Host mode from a host whose MAC address is not the supplicant MAC address The options are Protect Discard Discards the packets Restrict Forward Forwards the packets Shutdown Discards the packets and shuts down the port The ports remains shut down until reactivated or until the device is rebooted Traps on single host violation Select to enable traps Trap Frequency on Single Host Violation Defines how often traps are sent to the host This field can be defined only if multiple hosts are disabled Number of Violations Displays the number violations number of packets in Single Session Single Host mode from a host whose MAC address is not the supplicant MAC address STEP 4 Click Apply The settings are written to the Running Configuration file Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 401 19 Security 802 1X Authentication 8021X Configuration Through the GUI STEP 1 l STEP 1 Viewing Authenticated Hosts To view details about authenticated users Click Security gt 802 1X MAC Web Authentication gt Authenticated Hosts This page displays the following fields User Name Supplicant names that were authenticated on each port Port Number of the port Session Time DD HH MM SS Amount of time that the supplicant was logged on the port Authentication Method Method by
44. The SSH User Key Table contains the following fields for each key Key Type RSA or DSA Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 464 Security SSH Client SSH Client Configuration Through the GUI Key Source Auto Generated or User Defined Fingerprint Fingerprint generated from the key STEP 6 Tohandle an RSA or DSA key select either RSA or DSA and perform one of the following actions Generate Generate a new key Edit Display the keys for copying pasting to another device Delete Delete the key Details Display the keys SSH Server Authentication To enable SSH server authentication and define the trusted servers STEP 1 Click Security gt SSH Client gt SSH Server Authentication STEP 2 Select Enable to enable SSH server authentication IPv4 Source Interface Select the source interface whose IPv4 address will be used as the source IPv4 address for messages used in communication with IPv4 SSH servers IPv6 Source Interface Select the source interface whose IPv6 address will be used as the source IPv6 address for messages used in communication with IPv6 SSH servers NOTE If the Auto option is selected the system takes the source IP address from the IP address defined on the outgoing interface STEP 3 Click Add and enter the following fields for the SSH trusted server Server Definition Select one
45. add a loopback interface in IP Configuration gt IPv6 Management and Interfaces gt IPv6 Interface Configure the IPv6 address of that interface in the IP Configuration gt IPv6 Management and Interfaces gt IPv6 Addresses page IPv4 Management and Interfaces IPv4 Interface IPv4 interfaces can be defined on the device when it is in Layer 2 or Layer 3 system mode Defining an IPv4 Interface in Layer 2 System Mode To manage the device by using the web based configuration utility the IPv4 device management IP address must be defined and known The device IP address can be manually configured or automatically received from a DHCP server To configure the IPv4 device IP address STEP 1 Click Administration gt Management Interface gt IP v4 Interface STEP 2 Enter values for the following fields Management VLAN Select the Management VLAN used to access the device through telnet or the Web GUI VLAN1 is the default Management VLAN IP Address Type Select one of the following options Dynamic Discover the IP address using DHCP from the management VLAN Static Manually define a static IP address NOTE DHCP Option 12 Host Name option is supported when the device is a DHCP client If DHCP Option 12 is received from a DHCP server it is saved as the server s host name DHCP option 12 will not be requested by the device The DHCP server must be configured to send option 12 regardless of what is reque
46. configuration is disabled by the user the manual settings are used Dynamic configuration of the time zone and DST continues after the IP address lease time has expired Manual configuration of the time zone and DST becomes the Operational time zone and DST only if the dynamic configuration is disabled or fails NOTE The DHCP server must supply DHCP option 100 in order for dynamic time zone configuration to take place SNTP Modes The device can receive the system time from an SNTP server in one of the following ways Client Broadcast Reception passive mode SNTP servers broadcast the time and the device listens to these broadcasts When the device is in this mode there is no need to define a Unicast SNTP server Client Broadcast Transmission active mode The device as an SNTP client periodically requests SNTP time updates This mode works in either of the following ways SNTP Anycast Client Mode The device broadcasts time request packets to all SNTP servers in the subnet and waits for a response Unicast SNTP Server Mode The device sends Unicast queries to a list of manually configured SNTP servers and waits for a response The device supports having all of the above modes active at the same time and selects the best system time received from an SNTP server according to an algorithm based on the closest stratum distance from the reference clock 74 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series
47. if the Interface Status field is locked To change the Learning Mode the Lock Interface must be cleared After the mode is changed the Lock Interface can be reinstated The options are Classic Lock Locks the port immediately regardless of the number of addresses that have already been learned Limited Dynamic Lock Locks the port by deleting the current dynamic MAC addresses associated with the port The port learns up to the maximum addresses allowed on the port Both re learning and aging of MAC addresses are enabled Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 355 18 Security 8021X 802 1X Secure Permanent Keeps the current dynamic MAC addresses associated with the port and learns up to the maximum number of addresses allowed on the port set by Max No of Addresses Allowed Relearning and aging are enabled Secure Delete on Reset Deletes the current dynamic MAC addresses associated with the port after reset New MAC addresses can be learned as Delete On Reset ones up to the maximum addresses allowed on the port Relearning and aging are disabled Max No of Addresses Allowed Enter the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port if Limited Dynamic Lock learning mode is selected The number 0 indicates that only static addresses are supported on the interface Action on Violation Select an action to be applied to pa
48. if used The options are Link Local The IPv6 address uniquely identifies hosts on a single network link A link local address has a prefix of FE80 is not routable and can be used for communication only on the local network Only one link local address is supported If a link local address exists on the interface this entry replaces the address in the configuration Global The IPv6 address is a global Unicast IPV6 type that is visible and reachable from other networks Link Local Interface Select the link local interface from the list SCP Server IP Address Name Enter the IP address or domain name of the TFTP server If Save Action is Download replacing the file on the device with a new version from another device enter the following fields Source File Name Enter the name of the source file Destination File Type Select the configuration file type Only valid file types are displayed The file types are described in the Files and File Types section Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 47 Administration File Management Configuration Files Properties STEP 6 If Save Action is Backup copying a file to another device enter the following fields in addition to those fields listed above Source File Type Select the configuration file type Only valid file types are displayed The file types are described in the Files and Fi
49. the Auto Smartport automatically adds the port to the voice VLAN by applying the corresponding Smartport macro to the port if there is no other devices from the port advertising a conflicting or superior capability If a device advertises itself as a phone the default Smartport macro is phone If a device advertises itself as a phone and host or phone and bridge the default Smartport macro is phone desktop Voice VLAN QoS Voice VLAN can propagate the CoS 802 1p and DSCP settings by using LLDP MED Network policies The LLDP MED is set by default to response with the Voice QoS setting if an appliance sends LLDP MED packets MED supported devices must send their voice traffic with the same CoS 802 1p and DSCP values as received with the LLDP MED response You can disable the automatic update between Voice VLAN and LLDP MED and use his own network policies Working with the OUI mode the device can additionally configure the mapping and remarking CoS 802 1p of the voice traffic based on the OUI Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 215 13 VLAN Management Voice VLAN By default all interfaces are CoS 802 1p trusted The device applies the quality of service based on the CoS 802 1p value found in the voice stream In Auto Voice VLAN you can override the value of the voice streams using advanced QoS For Telephony OUI voice streams you can override the quality o
50. 3 Click Reset to set an interface to Default if it is in Unknown status as a result of an unsuccessful macro application The macro can be reapplied on the main page STEP 4 Click Apply to update the changes and assign the Smartport type to the interface Built in Smartport Macros The following describes the pair of built in macros for each Smartport type For each Smartport type there is a macro to configure the interface and an anti macro to remove the configuration Macro code for the following Smartport types are provided desktop printer guest server host ip_camera ip_phone ip_phone_desktop switch Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 175 17 Smartport Built in Smartport Macros router n ap desktop desktop interface configuration for increased network security and reliability when connecting a desktop device such as a PC to a switch port macro description Desktop macro keywords native_vlan max_hosts macro key description Snative_vlan The untag VLAN which will be configured on the port Smax_hosts The maximum number of allowed devices on the port Default Values are native_vlan Default VLAN max_hosts 10 the port type cannot be detected automatically the default mode is trunk smartport switchport trunk native vlan native_vlan port security max max_hosts port security mo
51. 802 1X MAC Web Authentication gt Web Authentication Customization STEP 2 Click Add STEP 3 Select a language from the Language drop down list STEP 4 Select Set as Default Display Language if this language is the default language the default language pages are displayed if the end user does not select a language STEP 5 Click Apply and the settings are saved to the Running Configuration file Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 403 19 Security 802 1X Authentication 8021X Configuration Through the GUI To customize the web authentication pages STEP 1 Click Security gt 802 1X MAC Web Authentication gt Web Authentication Customization This page displays the languages that can be customized STEP 2 Click Edit Logon Page Figure 4 The following page is displayed gg Edit ema nema a Fassari Pee 1y aga Edit Welcome to Cisco lt Edit or miene aiena For my Qurutrn eain lt Edit Edt STEP 3 Click Editt The following fields are displayed Language Displays the page s language Color Scheme Select one of the contrast options If the Custom color scheme is selected the following options are available Page Background Color Enter the ASCII code of the background color The selected color is shown in the Text field Header and Footer Background Color Enter the ASCII code of the header an
52. 802 1x authentication fails 802 1x Authentication Success Traps Select to generate a trap if 802 1x authentication succeeds MAC Authentication Failure Traps Select to generate a trap if MAC authentication fails MAC Authentication Success Traps Select to generate a trap if MAC authentication succeeds When the switch is in Layer 2 switch mode Web Authentication Failure Traps Select to generate a trap if Web authentication fails Web Authentication Success Traps Select to generate a trap if Web authentication succeeds Web Authentication Quiet Traps Select to generate a trap if a quiet period commences When the device is in Layer 3 router mode the VLAN Authentication Table displays all VLANs and indicates whether authentication has been enabled on them Click Apply The 802 1X properties are written to the Running Configuration file Defining 802 1X Port Authentication The Port Authentication page enables configuration of 802 1X parameters for each port Since some of the configuration changes are only possible while the port is in Force Authorized state such as host authentication it is recommended that you change the port control to Force Authorized before making changes When the configuration is complete return the port control to its previous state A port with 802 1x defined on it cannot become a member of a LAG To define 802 1X authentication Cisco Small Business 200 300
53. 82 82 Option 82 Packet is sent Packet is Relay inserts Relay Insertion without Option sent with the Option 82 discards the Disabled 82 original packet Option 82 Bridge ee Option 82 is Bridge inserted Packet is sent with the original Option 82 282 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration IPv4 Management and Interfaces 17 DHCP Relay VLAN with IP Address DHCP Relay VLAN without IP Address Option 82 Insertion Enabled Relay is sent with Option 82 Bridge Option 82 is added if port is trusted behaves as if DHCP Snooping is not enabled Packet is sent with the original Option 82 Relay is sent with Option 82 Bridge Option 82 is inserted if port is trusted behaves as if DHCP Snooping is not enabled Relay discards the packet Bridge Packet is sent with the original Option 82 The following describes how DHCP Reply packets are handled when DHCP Snooping is disabled DHCP Relay VLAN with IP Address DHCP Relay VLAN without IP Address Packet arrives Packetarrives Packetarrives Packet arrives without with Option without with Option Option 82 82 Option 82 82 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 283 17 IP Configuration IPv4
54. Apply The file is upgraded or backed up STEP 5 If you selected via SCP Over SSH see SSH Client Configuration Through the GUI for instructions Then enter the following fields Remote SSH Server Authentication To enable SSH server authentication it is disabled by default click Edit which takes you to the SSH Server Authentication page to configure this and return to this page Use the SSH Server Authentication page to select an SSH user authentication method password or public private key set a username and password on the device if the password method is selected and generate an RSA or DSA key if required 46 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration File Management 4 Download Backup Configuration Log SSH Client Authentication Client authentication can be done in one of the following ways Use SSH Client Sets permanent SSH user credentials Click System Credentials to go to the SSH User Authentication page where the user password can be set once for all future use Use SSH Client One Time Credentials Enter the following Username Enter a username for this copy action Password Enter a password for this copy SCP Server Definition Select whether to specify the TFTP server by IP address or by domain name IP Version Select whether an IPv4 or an IPv6 address is used IPv6 Address Type Select the IPv6 address type
55. Apply to update the global setting Jumbo frames configuration changes take effect only after the Running Configuration is explicitly saved to the Startup Configuration File using the Copy Save Configuration page and the device is rebooted STEP 4 To update the port settings select the desired port and click Edit STEP 5 Modify the following parameters Port Select the port number Port Description Enter the port user defined name or comment Port Type Displays the port type and speed The possible options are Copper Ports Regular not Combo support the following values 10M 100M and 1000M type Copper Combo Ports Copper Combo port connected with copper CAT5 cable supports the following values 10M 100M and 1000M type ComboC Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 125 Port Management Setting Port Configuration Combo Fiber SFP Fiber Gigabit Interface Converter Port with the following values 100M and 1000M type ComboF 10G Fiber Optics Ports with speed of either 1G or 10G NOTE SFP Fiber takes precedence in Combo ports when both ports are being used Administrative Status Select whether the port must be Up or Down when the device is rebooted Operational Status Displays whether the port is currently Up or Down If the port is down because of an error the description of the error is displayed L
56. CDP packets not containing the mandatory TLVs are discarded and the invalid error counter is incremented Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration Discovery Configuring CDP 8 CDP Version Select the version of CDP to use CDP Hold Time Amount of time that CDP packets are held before the packets are discarded measured in multiples of the TLV Advertise Interval For example if the TLV Advertise Interval is 30 seconds and the Hold Multiplier is 4 then the LLDP packets are discarded after 120 seconds The following options are possible Use Default Use the default time 180 seconds User Defined Enter the time in seconds CDP Transmission Rate The rate in seconds at which CDP advertisement updates are sent The following options are possible Use Default Use the default rate 60 seconds User Defined Enter the rate in seconds Device ID Format Select the format of the device ID MAC address or serial number The following options are possible MAC Address uUse the MAC address of the device as the device ID Serial Number Use the serial number of the device as the device ID Host Name uUse the host name of the device as the device ID Source Interface IP address to be used in the TLV of the frames The following options are possible Use Default Use the IP address of the outgoing interface User De
57. Configuration file IPv6 Based ACLs The IPv6 Based ACL page displays and enables the creation of IPv6 ACLs which check pure IPv6 based traffic IPv6 ACLs do not check IPv6 over IPv4 or ARP packets 483 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Access Control 2 4 IPv6 Based ACLs NOTE ACLs are also used as the building elements of flow definitions for per flow QoS handling see QoS Advanced Mode Defining an IPv6 based ACL To define an IPv6 based ACL STEP 1 Click Access Control gt IPv6 Based ACL This window contains the list of defined ACLs and their contents STEP 2 Click Add STEP 3 Enter the name of a new ACL in the ACL Name field The names are case sensitive STEP 4 Click Apply The IPv6 based ACL is saved to the Running Configuration file Adding Rules ACEs for an IPv6 Based ACL NOTE Each IPv6 based rule consumes two TCAM rules STEP 1 Click Access Control gt IPv6 Based ACE This window contains the ACE rules for a specified ACL group of rules STEP 2 Select an ACL and click Go All currently defined IP ACEs for the selected ACL are displayed STEP 3 Click Add STEP 4 Enter the parameters ACL Name Displays the name of the ACL to which an ACE is being added Priority Enter the priority ACEs with higher priority are processed first Action Select the action assigned to the packet matching the ACE The option
58. First Hop Security feature This is the global default value if no policy is defined STEP 3 Create a FHS policy if required by clicking Add Enter the following fields Policy Name Enter a user defined policy name Packet Drop Logging Select to create a SYSLOG when a packet is dropped as a result of a First Hop Security feature within this policy Inherit Use the value from the VLAN or the global configuration Enable Create a SYSLOG when a packet is dropped as a result of First Hop Security Disable Do not create a SYSLOG when a packet is dropped as a result of First Hop Security Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 425 Security IPV6 First Hop Security Configuring First Hop Security through Web GUI RA Guard Settings Use the RA Guard Settings page to enable the RA Guard feature on a specified group of VLANs and to set the global configuration values for this feature If required a policy can be added or the system defined default RA Guard policies can be configured in this page To configure RA Guard on ports or LAGs STEP 1 Click Security gt First Hop Security gt RA Guard Settings STEP 2 Enter the following global configuration fields RA Guard VLAN List Enter one or more VLANs on which RA Guard is enabled Minimal Hop Limit This field indicates whether the RA Guard policy will check the minimum hop limit of th
59. Groups gt Protocol Based Groups to VLAN The currently defined mappings are displayed STEP 2 To associate an interface with a protocol based group and VLAN click Add STEP 3 Enter the following fields Interface Port or LAG number assigned to VLAN according to protocol based group Group ID Protocol group ID VLAN ID Attaches the interface to a user defined VLAN ID 210 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version VLAN Management 1 3 Voice VLAN STEP 4 Click Apply The protocol ports are mapped to VLANs and written to the Running Configuration file Voice VLAN Ina LAN voice devices such as IP phones VoIP endpoints and voice systems are placed into the same VLAN This VLAN is referred as the voice VLAN If the voice devices are in different voice VLANs IP Layer 3 routers are needed to provide communication This section covers the following topics Voice VLAN Overview Configuring Voice VLAN Voice VLAN Overview This section covers the following topics Dynamic Voice VLAN Modes Auto Voice VLAN Auto Smartports CDP and LLDP Voice VLAN QoS Voice VLAN Constraints Voice VLAN Workflows The following are typical voice deployment scenarios with appropriate configurations UC3xx UC5xx hosted All Cisco phones and VoIP endpoints support this deployment model For this model the UC3xx UC5xx Cisco phones and VoIP en
60. Guard enabled ports To view the DHCP Snooping Binding database and see TCAM usage set Insert Inactive Click Security gt IP Source Guard gt Binding Database The DHCP Snooping Binding database uses TCAM resources for managing the database Complete the Insert Inactive field to select how frequently the device should attempt to activate inactive entries It has the following options Retry Frequency tThe frequency with which the TCAM resources are checked Never Never try to reactivate inactive addresses Click Apply to save the above changes to the Running Configuration and or Retry Now to check TCAM resources Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 369 18 Security ARP Inspection The entries in the Binding database are displayed VLAN ID VLAN on which packet is expected MAC Address MAC address to be matched IP Address IP address to be matched Interface lInterface on which packet is expected Status Displays whether interface is active Type Displays whether entry is dynamic or static Reason If the interface is not active displays the reason The following reasons are possible No Problem tinterface is active No Snoop VLAN DHCP Snooping is not enabled on the VLAN Trusted Port Port has become trusted Resource Problem TCAM resources are exhausted To see a subset of these entries enter the rele
61. IP address when this is relevant for the DHCP option selected IP List Enter list of IP addresses separated by commas Integer Select if you want to enter an integer value of the parameter for the DHCP option selected Boolean Select if the parameter for the DHCP option selected is Boolean Boolean Value If the type was Boolean select the value to be returned True or False Value If the type is not Boolean enter the value to be sent for this code Description Enter a text description for documentation purposes Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 299 17 IP Configuration DHCP Server Address Binding Use the Address Binding page to view and remove the IP addresses allocated by the device and their corresponding MAC addresses To view and or remove address bindings STEP 1 Click IP Configuration gt IPv4 Management and Interfaces gt DHCP Server gt Address Binding to display the Address Binding page The following fields for the address bindings are displayed IP Address The IP addresses of the DHCP clients Address Type Whether the address of the DHCP client appears as a MAC address or using a client identifier MAC Address Client Identifier A unique identification of the client specified as a MAC Address or in hexadecimal notation e g 01b608 19681172 Lease Expiration The lease expiration date
62. IPv6 addresses are written as eight groups of four hexadecimal digits for example FE80 0000 0000 0000 0000 9C00 876A 130B The abbreviated form in which a group of zeroes can be left out and replaced with is also acceptable for example FE80 9C00 876A 130B IPv6 nodes require an intermediary mapping mechanism to communicate with other IPv6 nodes over an IPv4 only network This mechanism called a tunnel enables IPv6 only hosts to reach IPv4 services and enables isolated IPv6 hosts and networks to reach an IPv6 node over the IPv4 infrastructure Tunneling uses either an ISATAP or manual mechanism see IPv6 Tunnel Tunneling treats the IPv4 network as a virtual IPv6 local link with mappings from each IPv4 address to a link local IPv6 address The device detects IPv6 frames by the IPv6 Ethertype IPv6 Global Configuration To define IPv6 global parameters and DHCPV6 client settings STEP 1 In Layer 2 system mode click Administration gt Management Interface gt IPv6 Global Configuration In Layer 3 system mode click IP Configuration gt IPv6 Management and Interfaces gt IPv6 Global Configuration STEP 2 Enter values for the following fields ICMPv6 Rate Limit Interval Enter how often the ICMP error messages are generated ICMPv6 Rate Limit Bucket Size Enter the maximum number of ICMP error messages that can be sent by the device per interval Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed
63. Internal Version Port Management Q Link Aggregation Configuring LACP A dynamic LAG is LACP enabled and LACP is run on every candidate port defined in the LAG LACP Priority and Rules LACP system priority and LACP port priority are both used to determine which of the candidate ports become active member ports in a dynamic LAG configured with more than eight candidate ports The selected candidate ports of the LAG are all connected to the same remote device Both the local and remote switches have a LACP system priority The following algorithm is used to determine whether LACP port priorities are taken from the local or remote device the local LACP System Priority is compared to the remote LACP System Priority The device with the lowest priority controls candidate port selection to the LAG If both priorities are the same the local and remote MAC addresses are compared The priority of the device with the lowest MAC address controls candidate port selection to the LAG A dynamic LAG can have up to 16 Ethernet ports of the same type Up to eight ports can be active and up to eight ports can be in standby mode When there are more than eight ports in the dynamic LAG the device on the controlling end of the link uses port priorities to determine which ports are bundled into the LAG and which ports are put in hot standby mode Port priorities on the other device the non controlling end of the link are ignored The following
64. LLDP Neighbors Information page contains information that was received from neighboring devices After timeout based on the value received from the neighbor Time To Live TLV during which no LLDP PDU was received from a neighbor the information is deleted To view the LLDP neighbors information STEP 1 Click Administration gt Discovery LLDP gt LLDP Neighbors Information This page contains the following fields Local Port Number of the local port to which the neighbor is connected Chassis ID Subtype Type of chassis ID for example MAC address Chassis ID Identifier of the 802 LAN neighboring device s chassis Port ID Subtype tType of the port identifier that is shown Port ID Identifier of port System Name Published name of the device Time to Live Time interval in seconds after which the information for this neighbor is deleted STEP 2 Selecta local port and click Details 108 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration Discovery Configuring LLDP The LLDP Neighbor Information page contains the following fields Port Details Local Port Port number MSAP Entry Device Media Service Access Point MSAP entry number Basic Details Chassis ID Subtype Type of chassis ID for example MAC address Chassis ID ldentifier of the 802 LAN neighboring device chassis Port ID Subtype Type of the port identifier
65. Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration Time Settings 6 Configuring System Time Configuring System Time AS CAUTION STEP 1 STEP 2 Selecting Source of System Time Use the System Time page to select the system time source If the source is manual you can enter the time here If the system time is set manually and the device is rebooted the manual time settings must be reentered To define system time Click Administration gt Time Settings gt System Time The following fields are displayed Actual Time Static System time on the device This shows the DHCP time zone or the acronym for the user defined time zone if these were defined Last Synchronized Server Address stratum and type of the SNTP server from which time was last taken Enter these parameters Clock Source Settings Select the source used to set the system clock Main Clock Source SNTP Servers If you enable this the system time is obtained from an SNTP server To use this feature you must also configure a connection to an SNTP server in the SNTP Interface Settings page Optionally enforce authentication of the SNTP sessions by using the SNTP Authentication page Alternate Clock Source PC via active HTTP HTTPS sessions Select to set the date and time from the configuring computer using the HTTP protocol NOTE The Clock Source Setting needs to be set to either of the above in
66. Other flag Off tThe value of the flag must be 0 Minimal Route Preference This field indicates whether the RA Guard policy will verify the minimum advertised Default Router Preference value in RA messages within an RA Guard policy No Verification Disables verification of the low boundary of Advertised Default Router Preference Low Specifies the minimum allowed Advertised Default Router Preference value The following values are acceptable low medium and high see RFC419 1 Medium Specifies the minimum allowed Advertised Default Router Preference value The following values are acceptable low medium and high see RFC419 1 High Specifies the minimum allowed Advertised Default Router Preference value The following values are acceptable low medium and high see RFC419 1 Maximal Route Preference This field indicates whether the RA Guard policy will verify the maximum advertised Default Router Preference value in RA messages within an RA Guard policy No Verification Disables verification of the high boundary of Advertised Default Router Preference Low Specifies the maximum allowed Advertised Default Router Preference value The following values are acceptable low medium and high see RFC419 1 Medium Specifies the maximum allowed Advertised Default Router Preference value The following values are acceptable low medium and high see RFC419 1 High Specifies the maximum allowed Adver
67. Querier does not exist The device is not a full capability IGMP Querier 252 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Multicast 1 6 Defining Multicast Properties If the device is enabled as an IGMP Querier it starts after 60 seconds have passed with no IGMP traffic queries detected from a Multicast router In the presence of other IGMP Queriers the device might or might not stop sending queries based on the results of the standard querier selection process Multicast Address Properties Multicast addresses have the following properties Each IPv4 Multicast address is in the address range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 The IPv6 Multicast address is FFOO 8 To map an IP Multicast group address to an Layer 2 Multicast address For IPv4 this is mapped by taking the 23 low order bits from the IPv4 address and adding them to the 01 00 5e prefix By standard the upper nine bits of the IP address are ignored and any IP addresses that only differ in the value of these upper bits are mapped to the same Layer 2 address since the lower 23 bits that are used are identical For example 234 129 2 3 is mapped to a MAC Multicast group address 01 00 5e 0 1 02 03 Up to 32 IP Multicast group addresses can be mapped to the same Layer 2 address For IPv6 this is mapped by taking the 32 low order bits of the Multicast address and adding the prefix of 33 33
68. Received frames that failed the CRC cyclic redundancy checks Single Collision Frames Frames that were involved in a single collision but were successfully transmitted Late Collisions Collisions that have been detected after the first 512 bits of data Excessive Collisions Number of transmissions rejected due to excessive collisions Oversize Packets Packets greater than 2000 octets received Internal MAC Receive Errors Frames rejected because of receiver errors Pause Frames Received Received flow control pause frames Pause Frames Transmitted Flow control pause frames transmitted from the selected interface To clear statistics counters Click Clear Interface Counters to clear the selected interfaces counters Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 15 Status and Statistics Viewing GVRP Statistics Click View All Interfaces Statistics to see all ports on a single page Viewing GVRP Statistics STEP 1 STEP 2 The GVRP page displays information regarding GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP frames that were sent or received from a port GVRP is a standards based Layer 2 network protocol for automatic configuration of VLAN information on switches It was defined in the 802 1ak amendment to 802 1Q 2005 GVRP statistics for a port are only displayed if GVRP is enabled globally and on the port See the GVRP page To view GVRP
69. Running Configuration after reboot Running and Startup Configuration files are formatted in internal format Mirror Backup and the remote configuration files are text based files usually kept for archive records or recovery During copying uploading and downloading a source configuration file a device automatically transforms the source content to the format of the destination file if the two files are of different formats File SSD Indicator When copying the Running or Startup Configuration file into a text based configuration file the device generates and places the file SSD indicator in the text based configuration file to indicate whether the file contains encrypted sensitive data plaintext sensitive data or excludes sensitive data The SSD indicator if it exists must be in the configuration header file A text based configuration that does not include an SSD indicator is considered not to contain sensitive data The SSD indicator is used to enforce SSD read permissions on text based configuration files but is ignored when copying the configuration files to the Running or Startup Configuration file Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 447 Security Secure Sensitive Data Management Configuration Files The SSD indicator in a file is set according to the user s instruction during copy to include encrypted plaintext or exclude sensitive dat
70. STEP 1 Click Administration gt Discovery LLDP gt LLDP Overloading This page contains the following fields for each port _Interface Port identifier Total Bytes Total number of bytes of LLDP information in each packet Left to Send Bytes Total number of available bytes left for additional LLDP information in each packet Status Whether TLVs are being transmitted or if they are overloaded STEP 2 To view the overloading details for a port select it and click Details This page contains the following information for each TLV sent on the port LLDP Mandatory TLVs Size Bytes Total mandatory TLV byte size Status lf the mandatory TLV group is being transmitted or if the TLV group was overloaded LLDP MED Capabilities Size Bytes Total LLDP MED capabilities packets byte size Status lf the LLDP MED capabilities packets were sent or if they were overloaded LLDP MED Location Size Bytes Total LLDP MED location packets byte size Status l f the LLDP MED locations packets were sent or if they were overloaded LLDP MED Network Policy Size Bytes Total LLDP MED network policies packets byte size Status lf the LLDP MED network policies packets were sent or if they were overloaded LLDP MED Extended Power via MDI Size Bytes Total LLDP MED extended power via MDI packets byte size 114 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Adm
71. Sensitive data is presented in plaintext form Each management channel allows specific read presumptions The following summarizes these Read Permission Default Read Mode Allowed Exclude Exclude Encrypted Only Encrypted Plaintext Only Plaintext Both Plaintext Encrypted The Read mode of a session can be temporarily changed in the SSD Properties page if the new read mode does not violate the read permission Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 441 21 Security Secure Sensitive Data Management SSD Rules NOTE Note the following The default Read mode for the Secure XML SNMP and Insecure XML SNMP management channels must be identical to their read permission Read permission Exclude is allowed only for Secure XML SNMP and Insecure XML SNMP management channels Exclude is not allowed for regular secure and insecure channels Exclude sensitive data in secure and Insecure XML SNMP management channels means that the sensitive data is presented as a 0 meaning null string or numeric 0 If the user wants to view sensitive data the rule must be changed to plaintext By default an SNMPv3 user with privacy and XML over secure channels permissions is considered to be a level 15 user SNMP users on Insecure XML and SNMP SNMPv1 v2 and v3 with no privacy channel are considered as All users SNMP community names are not used as user
72. Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Smartport Smartport Types 11 Statically from a Smartport macro by name only from the CLI A Smartport macro can be applied by its Smartport type statically from CLI and GUI and dynamically by Auto Smartport Auto Smartport derives the Smartport types of the attached devices based on CDP capabilities LLDP system capabilities and or LLDP MED capabilities The following describes the relationship of Smartport types and Auto Smartport Smartport Type Supported by Auto Supported by Auto Smartport Smartport by default Unknown No No Default No No Printer No No Desktop No No Guest No No Server No No Host Yes No IP camera No No IP phone Yes Yes IP phone desktop Yes Yes Switch Yes Yes Router Yes No Wireless Access Yes Yes Point Special Smartport Types There are two special Smartport types default and unknown These two types are not associated with macros but they exist to signify the state of the interface regarding Smartport The following describe these special Smartport types Default An interface that does not yet have a Smartport type assigned to it has the Default Smartport status Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 159 17 Smartport Smartport Macros If Auto Smartport assigns a Smartport t
73. Settings When using factory default settings the device automatically creates VLAN 1 as the default VLAN the default interface status of all ports is Trunk and all ports are configured as untagged members of the default VLAN The default VLAN has the following characteristics It is distinct non static non dynamic and all ports are untagged members by default t cannot be deleted it cannot be given a label 198 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version VLAN Management 1 3 Configuring Default VLAN Settings It cannot be used for any special role such as unauthenticated VLAN or Voice VLAN This is only relevant for OUl enabled voice VLAN lfa portis no longer a member of any VLAN the device automatically configures the port as an untagged member of the default VLAN A port is no longer a member of a VLAN if the VLAN is deleted or the port is removed from the VLAN RADIUS servers cannot assign the default VLAN to 802 1x supplicants by using Dynamic VLAN Assignment When the VID of the default VLAN is changed the device performs the following on all the ports in the VLAN after saving the configuration and rebooting the device Removes VLAN membership of the ports from the original default VLAN possible only after reboot Changes the PVID Port VLAN Identifier of the ports to the VID of the new default VLAN The original def
74. Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration File Management 4 Copy Save Configuration STEP 3 configuration file if it exists is deleted See System Files for a description of mirror files and why you might not want to automatically create mirror configuration files If required select either the Startup Configuration Backup Configuration or both and click Clear Files to delete these files Copy Save Configuration A CAUTION STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 When you click Apply on any window changes that you made to the device configuration settings are stored only in the Running Configuration To preserve the parameters in the Running Configuration the Running Configuration must be copied to another configuration type or saved on another device Unless the Running Configuration is copied to the Startup Configuration or another configuration file all changes made since the last time the file was copied are lost when the device is rebooted The following combinations of copying internal file types are allowed From the Running Configuration to the Startup Configuration or Backup Configuration From the Startup Configuration to the Running Configuration Startup Configuration or Backup Configuration From the Backup Configuration to the Running Configuration Startup Configuration or Backup Configuration From the Mirror Configuration to t
75. Statistics Managing RMON STEP 1 Defining RMON Events Control You can control the occurrences that trigger an alarm and the type of notification that occurs This is performed as follows Events Page Configures what happens when an alarm is triggered This can be any combination of logs and traps Alarms Page Configures the occurrences that trigger an alarm To define RMON events Click Status and Statistics gt RMON gt Events This page displays previously defined events STEP 2 Click Add STEP 3 Enter the parameters Event Entry Displays the event entry index number for the new entry Community Enter the SNMP community string to be included when traps are sent optional Note that the community must be defined using the Defining SNMP v1 2 Notification Recipients or Defining SNMPv3 Notification Recipients pages for the trap to reach the Network Management Station Description Enter a name for the event This name is used in the Add RMON Alarm page to attach an alarm to an event Notification Type Select the type of action that results from this event Values are None No action occurs when the alarm goes off Log Event Log Table Add a log entry to the Event Log table when the alarm is triggered Trap SNMP Manager and SYSLOG Server Send a trap to the remote log server when the alarm goes off Log and Trap Add a log entry to the Event Log table and send a
76. Tagged Select whether the port is tagged This is not relevant for Access ports Untagged Select whether port is untagged This is not relevant for Access ports PVID Port PVID is set to this VLAN If the interface is in access mode or trunk mode the device automatically makes the interface an untagged member of the VLAN If the interface is in general mode you must manually configure VLAN membership STEP 5 Click Apply The settings are modified and written to the Running Configuration file To see the administrative and operational VLANs on an interface click Details GVRP Settings Adjacent VLAN aware devices can exchange VLAN information with each other by using the Generic VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP GVRP is based on the Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GARP and propagates VLAN information throughout a bridged network Since GVRP requires support for tagging the port must be configured in Trunk or General mode When a port joins a VLAN by using GVRP it is added to the VLAN as a dynamic member unless this was expressly forbidden in the Port VLAN Membership page If the VLAN does not exist it is dynamically created when Dynamic VLAN creation is enabled for this port in the GVRP Settings page GVRP must be activated globally as well as on each port When it is activated it transmits and receives GARP Packet Data Units GPDUs VLANs that are defined but not active are not propagated To propag
77. The interface is in Delay state for a predefined Delay Time If no reachability confirmation is received the state changes to Probe Probe Neighbor is no longer known to be reachable and Unicast Neighbor Solicitation probes are being sent to verify the reachability Router Specifies whether the neighbor is a router Yes or No STEP 2 To add a neighbor to the table click Add STEP 3 Enter values for the following fields Interface The neighboring IPv6 interface to be added IPv6 Address Enter the IPv6 network address assigned to the interface The address must be a valid IPv6 address MAC Address Enter the MAC address mapped to the specified IPv6 address STEP 4 Click Apply The Running Configuration file is updated STEP 5 To change the type of an IP address from Dynamic to Static select the address click Edit and use the Edit IPv6 Neighbors page 310 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration IPv6 Management and Interfaces 1 7 STEP 1 IPv6 Prefix List When First Hop Security is configured it is possible to define rules for filtering based on IPv6 prefixes These lists can be defined in the IPv6 Prefix List page Prefix lists are configured with permit or deny keywords to either permit or deny a prefix based on a matching condition An implicit deny is applied to traffic that does not match any prefix list entry
78. This configures the values to be returned for every relevant DHCP option 6 Add an IP interface in the range of one of the configured DHCP pools in the Network Pools page The device answers DHCP queries from this IP interface For example if the pool s range is 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 254 add an IP address in this range if you want directly connected clients to receive IP address from the configured pool Do this in the IP Configuration gt IPv4 Interface page 7 View the allocated IP addresses using the Address Binding page IP addresses can be deleted in this page Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 293 17 IP Configuration DHCP Server STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 DHCP v4 Server To configure the device as a DHCPV4 server Click IP Configuration gt IPv4 Management and Interfaces gt DHCP Server gt Properties to display the Properties page Select Enable to configure the device as a DHCP server Click Apply The device immediately begins functioning as a DHCP server However it does not assign IP addresses to clients until a pool is created Network Pool When the device is serving as a DHCP server one or more pools of IP addresses must be defined from which the device will allocate IP addresses to clients Each network pool contains a range of addresses that belong to a specific subnetwork These addresses are allocated
79. VLAN Management VLANs Configuring Default VLAN Settings Creating VLANs Configuring VLAN Interface Settings Defining VLAN Membership Voice VLAN Chapter 14 Spanning Tree STP Flavors Configuring STP Status and Global Settings Defining Spanning Tree Interface Settings Configuring Rapid Spanning Tree Settings Chapter 15 Managing MAC Address Tables Configuring Static MAC Addresses Managing Dynamic MAC Addresses Chapter 16 Multicast Multicast Forwarding 153 154 154 156 161 174 174 177 178 181 181 184 185 186 187 190 204 204 205 207 209 212 213 214 216 216 Cisco Small Business 300 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Contents Defining Multicast Properties 219 Adding MAC Group Address 220 Adding IP Multicast Group Addresses 222 Configuring IGMP Snooping 224 MLD Snooping 226 Querying IGMP MLD IP Multicast Group 228 Defining Multicast Router Ports 229 Defining Forward All Multicast 230 Defining Unregistered Multicast Settings 231 Chapter 17 IP Configuration 234 Overview 234 IPv4 Management and Interfaces 236 Domain Name 250 Chapter 18 Security 256 Defining Users 257 Configuring RADIUS 260 264 Management Access Method 264 Management Access Authentication 269 Secure Sensitive Data Management 270 SSL Server 270 SSH Client 272 Configuring TCP UDP Services 273 Defining Storm Control 274 Configuring Port Security 275 802 1X 278 Denial of Service Prevention 278 Cisco S
80. VLAN is taken from the tag MAC Based VLAN If a MAC based VLAN has been defined the VLAN is taken from the source MAC to VLAN mapping of the ingress interface 206 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version VLAN Management VLAN Groups 13 PVID VLAN is taken from the port default VLAN ID MAC based Groups MAC based VLAN classification enable packets to be classified according to their source MAC address You can then define MAC to VLAN mapping per interface You can define several MAC based VLAN groups which each group containing different MAC addresses These MAC based groups can be assigned to specific ports LAGs MAC based VLAN groups cannot contain overlapping ranges of MAC addresses on the same port The following table describes the availability of MAC based VLAN groups in various SKUs Table 1 MAC Based VLAN Group Availability SKU System Mode MAC based VLAN Groups Supported Sx300 Layer 2 Yes Layer 3 No Sx500 Layer 2 Yes Zr Layer 3 No SG500X Native Yes Basic Hybrid Layer 2 Yes Basic Hybrid Layer 3 No SG500XG Same as Sx500 Yes Workflow To define a MAC based VLAN group 1 Assign a MAC address to a VLAN group ID using the MAC Based Groups page 2 For each required interface Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 207
81. Version Smartport Built in Smartport Macros 11 server server macro description server macro keywords native_vlan max_hosts macro key description Snative_vlan The untag VLAN which will be configured on the port Smax_hosts The maximum number of allowed devices on the port Default Values are Snative_vlan Default VLAN Smax_hosts 10 the port type cannot be detected automatically the default mode is trunk smartport switchport trunk native vlan Snative_vlan port security max max_hosts port security mode max addresses port security discard trap 60 smartport storm control broadcast level 10 smartport storm control broadcast enable spanning tree portfast no_server no_server macro description No server no smartport switchport trunk native vlan smartport switchport trunk allowed vlan remove all no port security no port security mode no port security max no smartport storm control broadcast enable no smartport storm control broadcast level spanning tree portfast auto Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 179 17 Smartport Built in Smartport Macros host host macro description host macro keywords Snative_vlan max_hosts macro key description Snative_vlan The untag VLAN which will be configured on the port Smax_hosts The maximum n
82. a DHCP server click Add STEP 4 Enter the IP address of the DHCP server and click Apply The settings are written STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP to the Running Configuration file Interface Settings In Layer 2 DHCP Relay and Snooping can only be enabled on VLANs with IP addresses In Layer 3 DHCP Relay and Snooping can be enabled on any interface with an IP address and on VLANs with or without an IP address To enable DHCP Snooping Relay on specific interfaces Click IP Configuration gt IPv4 Management and Interfaces gt DHCP Snooping Relay gt Interface Settings To enable DHCP Relay or DHCP Snooping on an interface click ADD Select the interface and the features to be enabled DHCP Relay or DHCP Snooping Click Apply The settings are written to the Running Configuration file DHCP Snooping Trusted Interfaces Packets from untrusted ports LAGs are checked against the DHCP Snooping Binding database see the DHCP Snooping Binding Database page By default interfaces are trusted To designate an interface as untrusted Click IP Configuration gt IPv4 Management and Interfaces gt DHCP Snooping Relay gt DHCP Snooping Trusted Interfaces 2 Select the interface and click Edit 3 Select Trusted Interface Yes or No 4 Click Apply to save the settings to the Running Configuration file 290 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administ
83. a TFTP server in the DHCP Options page When a client DHCP packet is received containing option 66 the TFTP server is returned as the value of option 66 298 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration DHCP Server 17 To configure one or more DHCP options STEP 1 Click IP Configuration gt IPv4 Management and Interfaces gt DHCP Server gt DHCP Options The previously configured DHCP options are displayed STEP 2 Toconfigure an option that has not been configured yet and enter the field DHCP Server Pool Name Select one of the pool of network addresses defined in the Network Pools page STEP 3 Click Add and enter the fields Code Enter the DHCP option code Type The radio buttons for this field change according to the type of the DHCP option s parameter Select one of the following codes and enter the value for the DHCP options parameter Hex Select if you want to enter the hex value of the parameter for the DHCP option A hex value can be provided in place of any other type of value For instance you can provide a hex value of an IP address instead of the IP address itself No validation is made of the hex value therefore if you enter a HEX value which represents an illegal value no error is provided and the client might not be able to handle the DHCP packet from the server P Select if you want to enter an
84. a database table of IPv6 neighbors connected to a device is created from information sources such as Neighbor Discovery Protocol NDP snooping This database or binding table is used by various IPv6 guard features to prevent spoofing and redirect attacks Use the Neighbor Binding Settings page to enable the Neighbor Binding feature on a specified group of VLANs and to set the global configuration values for this feature If required a policy can be added or the system defined default Neighbor Binding policies can be configured in this page To configure Neighbor Binding on ports or LAGs STEP 1 Click Security gt First Hop Security gt Neighbor Binding Settings STEP 2 Enter the following global configuration fields Neighbor Binding VLAN List Enter one or more VLANs on which Neighbor Binding is enabled Manual Neighbor Binding Select to indicate that entries can be added to the Neighbor Binding table manually Neighbor Binding Lifetime Enter the length of time that addresses remain in the Neighbor Bindings table Neighbor Binding Logging This field indicates whether to enable validation of a bound IPv6 address against the Neighbor Prefix table and logging of Binding table main events Neighbor Binding Entry Limits Specify the maximum number of Neighbor Binding entries per type of interface or address Entries Per VLAN Specifies the neighbor binding limit per number of VLANs Entries Per Int
85. a port LAG STEP 1 Click Security gt ARP Inspection gt Interface Settings The ports LAGs and their ARP trusted untrusted status are displayed STEP 2 To seta port LAG as untrusted select the port LAG and click Edit 374 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security ARP Inspection 18 STEP 3 Select Trusted or Untrusted and click Apply to save the settings to the Running STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP Configuration file Defining ARP Inspection Access Control To add entries to the ARP Inspection table Click Security gt ARP Inspection gt ARP Access Control To add an entry click Add Enter the fields ARP Access Control Name Enter a user created name MAC Address MAC address of packet P Address IP address of packet Click Apply The settings are defined and the Running Configuration file is updated Defining ARP Inspection Access Control Rules To add more rules to a previously created ARP Access Control group Click Security gt ARP Inspection gt ARP Access Control Rules The currently defined access rules are displayed To add more rules to a group click Add Select a Access Control Group and enter the fields MAC Address MAC address of packet P Address IP address of packet Click Apply The settings are defined and the Running Configuration file is updated
86. address auto configuration from a DHCPV6 server Number of DAD Attempts Enter the number of consecutive neighbor solicitation messages that are sent while Duplicate Address Detection DAD is performed on the interface s Unicast IPv6 addresses DAD verifies the uniqueness of a new Unicast IPv6 address before it is assigned New addresses remain in a tentative state during DAD verification Entering 0 in this field disables duplicate address detection processing on the specified interface Entering 1 in this field indicates a single transmission without follow up transmissions Send ICMPv6 Messages Enable generating unreachable destination messages STEP 6 Click Apply to enable IPv6 processing on the selected interface Regular IPv6 interfaces have the following addresses automatically configured Link local address using EUI 64 format interface ID based on a device s MAC address All node link local Multicast addresses FFO2 1 Solicited Node Multicast address format FFO2 1 FFXX XXXX STEP 7 Click IPv6 Address Table to manually assign IPv6 addresses to the interface if required This page is described in the Defining IPv6 Addresses section Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 303 17 IP Configuration IPv6 Management and Interfaces STEP 8 Press the Restart button to initiate refresh of the stateless information received from the DHCPV6
87. aggregated Aggregation Status Indicates whether the interface is aggregated Aggregation Port ID Advertised aggregated interface ID 802 3 Energy Efficient Ethernet EEE If device supports EEE Local Tx Indicates the time in micro seconds that the transmitting link partner waits before it starts transmitting data after leaving Low Power Idle LPI mode Local Rx Indicates the time in micro seconds that the receiving link partner requests that the transmitting link partner waits before transmission of data following Low Power Idle LPI mode Remote Tx Echo Indicates the local link partner s reflection of the remote link partner s Tx value Remote Rx Echo Indicates the local link partner s reflection of the remote link partner s Rx value MED Details Capabilities Supported MED capabilities supported on the port 106 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration Discovery Configuring LLDP 8 Current Capabilities MED capabilities enabled on the port Device Class LLDP MED endpoint device class The possible device classes are Endpoint Class 1 I ndicates a generic endpoint class offering basic LLDP services Endpoint Class 2 ndicates a media endpoint class offering media streaming capabilities as well as all Class 1 features Endpoint Class 3 ndicates a communications de
88. also replaces the original DSCP values in the packets with the new DSCP values NOTE The frame is mapped to an egress queue using the new rewritten value and not by the original DSCP value 503 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Quality of Service 29 QoS Basic Mode STEP 4 If Override Ingress DSCP was enabled click DSCP Override Table to reconfigure DSCP DSCP In displays the DSCP value of the incoming packet that needs to be re marked to an alternative value STEP 5 Select the DSCP Out value to indicate the outgoing value is mapped STEP 6 Click Apply The Running Configuration file is updated with the new DSCP values Interface QoS Settings The Interface Settings page enables configuring QoS on each port of the device as follows QoS State Disabled on an Interface All inbound traffic on the port is mapped to the best effort queue and no classification prioritization takes place QoS State of the Port is Enabled Port prioritize traffic on ingress is based on the system wide configured trusted mode which is either CoS 802 1p trusted mode or DSCP trusted mode To enter QoS settings per interface STEP 1 Click Quality of Service gt QoS Basic Mode gt Interface Settings STEP 2 Select Port or LAG to display the list of ports or LAGs QoS State displays whether QoS is enabled on the interface STEP 3 Select an interface and click Edit STEP 4 Select
89. an SNMP message However privacy cannot be enabled without authentication Timeliness Protects against message delay or playback attacks The SNMP agent compares the incoming message time stamp to the message arrival time Key Management Defines key generation key updates and key use The device supports SNMP notification filters based on Object Ds OID OIDs are used by the system to manage device features SNMP Workflow NOTE For security reasons SNMP is disabled by default Before you can manage the device via SNMP you must turn on SNMP on the Security gt TCP UDP Services page Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 522 26 SNMP SNMP Versions and Workflow STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 STEP 6 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 The following is the recommended series of actions for configuring SNMP If you decide to use SNMPv1 or v2 Navigate to the SNMP gt Communities page and click Add The community can be associated with access rights and a view in Basic mode or with a group in Advanced mode There are two ways to define access rights of a community Basic mode The access rights of a community can configure with Read Only Read Write or SNMP Admin In addition you can restrict the access to the community to only certain MIB objects by selecting a view defined in the Views page Advanced Mod
90. are additional rules used to select the active or standby ports in a dynamic LACP Any link operating at a different speed from the highest speed active member or operating at half duplex is made standby All the active ports in a dynamic LAG operate at the same baud rate Ifthe port LACP priority of the link is lower than that of the currently active link members and the number of active members is already at the maximum number the link is made inactive and placed in standby mode LACP With No Link Partner In order for LACP to create a LAG the ports on both link ends should be configured for LACP meaning that the ports send LACP PDUs and handle received PDUs Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 135 Port Management Link Aggregation However there are cases when one link partner is temporarily not configured for LACP One example for such case is when the link partner is on a device which is in the process of receiving its configuration using the auto config protocol This device s ports are not yet configured to LACP If the LAG link cannot come up the device cannot ever become configured A similar case occurs with dual NIC network boot computers e g PXE which receive their LAG configuration only after they bootup When several LACP configured ports are configured and the link comes up in one or more ports but there are no LACP responses from the
91. assigned where the frame is sent in the CoS 802 1p to Queue page or the DSCP to Queue page depending on whether the trust mode is CoS 802 1p or DSCP respectively Advanced Mode Per flow Quality of Service QoS In advanced mode a per flow QoS consists of a class map and or a policer Aclass map defines the kind of traffic in a flow and contains one or more ACLs Packets that match the ACLs belong to the flow Apolicer applies the configured QoS to a flow The QoS configuration of a flow may consist of egress queue the DSCP or CoS 802 1p value and actions on out of profile excess traffic Disable Mode lIn this mode all traffic is mapped to a single best effort queue so that no type of traffic is prioritized over another Only a single mode can be active at a time When the system is configured to work in QoS Advanced mode settings for QoS Basic mode are not active and vice versa When the mode is changed the following occurs When changing from QoS Advanced mode to any other mode policy profile definitions and class maps are deleted ACLs bonded directly to interfaces remain bonded When changing from QoS Basic mode to Advanced mode the QoS Trust mode configuration in Basic mode is not retained 491 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Quality of Service QoS Features and Components 2 5 STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP
92. be used by hackers to attack the device in a SYN attack which consumes TCP resources buffers and CPU power Since the CPU is protected using SCT TCP traffic to the CPU is limited However if one or more ports are attacked with a high rate of SYN packets the CPU receives only the attacker packets thus creating Denial of Service When using the SYN protection feature the CPU counts the SYN packets ingressing from each network port to the CPU per second If the number is higher than the specific user defined threshold a deny SYN with MAC to me rule is applied on the port This rule is unbound from the port every user defined interval SYN Protection Period To configure SYN protection STEP 1 Click Security gt Denial of Service Prevention gt SYN Protection STEP 2 Enter the parameters Block SYN FIN Packets Select to enable the feature All TCP packets with both SYN and FIN flags are dropped on all ports SYN Protection Mode Select between three modes Disable The feature is disabled on a specific interface Report Generates a SYSLOG message The status of the port is changed to Attacked when the threshold is passed Block and Report When a TCP SYN attack is identified TCP SYN packets destined for the system are dropped and the status of the portis changed to Blocked SYN Protection Threshold Number of SYN packets per second before SYN packets will be blocked deny SYN with MAC to me rule will
93. be viewed on the STP Interface Settings page _Mode Displays the current interface Spanning Tree mode If the link partner is using MSTP or RSTP the displayed port mode is RSTP If the link partner is using STP the displayed port mode is STP Type Displays the MST type of the port Boundary A Boundary port attaches MST bridges to a LAN in a remote region If the port is a boundary port it also indicates whether the device on the other side of the link is working in RSTP or STP mode Internal The port is an internal port Designated Bridge ID Displays the ID number of the bridge that connects the link or shared LAN to the root Designated Port ID Displays the Port ID number on the designated bridge that connects the link or the shared LAN to the root Designated Cost Displays the cost of the port participating in the STP topology Ports with a lower cost are less likely to be blocked if STP detects loops Remain Hops Displays the hops remaining to the next destination Forward Transitions Displays the number of times the port has changed from the Forwarding state to the Blocking state STEP 6 Click Apply The Running Configuration file is updated 244 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Spanning Tree 1 4 Defining MSTP Interface Settings Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Admin
94. both DHCP Snooping and DHCP Relay are globally enabled then if DHCP Snooping is enabled on the client s VLAN DHCP Snooping rules contained in the DHCP Snooping Binding database are applied and the DHCP Snooping Binding database is updated in the client s and DHCP server s VLAN for packets that are relayed DHCP Default Configuration The following describes DHCP Snooping and DHCP Relay default options DHCP Default Options Option Default State DHCP Snooping Enabled Option 82 Insertion Not enabled Option 82 Passthrough Not enabled Verify MAC Address Enabled Backup DHCP Snooping Not enabled Binding Database DHCP Relay Disabled Configuring DHCP Work Flow To configure DHCP Relay and DHCP Snooping 288 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration IPv4 Management and Interfaces 1 7 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 1 Enable DHCP Snooping and or DHCP Relay in the IP Configuration gt DHCP gt Properties page or in the Security gt DHCP Snooping gt Properties page Define the interfaces on which DHCP Snooping is enabled in the IP Configuration gt DHCP gt Interface Settings page Configure interfaces as trusted or untrusted in the IP Configuration gt DHCP gt DHCP Snooping Interface page Optional Add entries to the DHCP Snooping Binding database in the IP Configuration gt DHCP gt DH
95. capable node must be able to Send and receive Multicast packets Register the Multicast addresses being listened to by the node with local routers so that local and remote routers can route the Multicast packet to the nodes Typical Multicast Setup While Multicast routers route Multicast packets between IP subnets Multicast capable Layer 2 switches forward Multicast packets to registered nodes within a LAN or VLAN A typical setup involves a router that forwards the Multicast streams between private and or public IP networks a device with Internet Group Membership Protocol IGMP snooping capabilities or Multicast Listener Discovery MLD snooping and a Multicast client that wants to receive a Multicast stream In this setup the router sends IGMP queries periodically MLD for IP v6 is derived from the IGMP v2 for IPv4 Even though the description in this section is mostly for IGMP it also describes coverage of MLD where implied These queries reach the device which in turn floods the queries to the VLAN and also learns the port where there is a Multicast router Mrouter When a host receives the IGMP query message it responds with an IGMP Join message saying that the host wants to receive a specific Multicast stream and optionally froma specific source The device with the IGMP snooping analyzes the Join messages and learns that the Multicast stream the host has requested must be forwarded to this specific port It then
96. client application such as PuTTY using the IP address of the device and the user name of the user Workflow3 To import an RSA or DSA key from device A to device B perform the following steps 1 On device A select an RSA or DSA key in the SSH Server Authentication page 2 Click Details and copy the public key of the select key type to Notepad or other text editor application 3 Log on to device B and open the SSH Server Authentication page Select either the RSA or DSA key click Edit and paste in the key from device A 469 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security SSH Server 2 3 SSH Server Configuration Pages SSH Server Configuration Pages This section describes the pages used to configure the SSH Server feature SSH User Authentication Use the SSH User Authentication page to enable SSH user authentication by public key and or password and when using authentication by public key to add an SSH client user that will be used to create an SSH session in an external SSH application like PUTTY Before you can add a user you must generate an RSA or DSA key for the user in the external SSH key generation client application such as PuTTY Automatic Login If you use the SSH User Authentication page to create an SSH username for a user who is already configured in the local user database You can prevent additional authentication by configuri
97. conditions Terms and Conditions Contents Enter the text of the message to be displayed as terms and conditions STEP 10 Click Apply and the settings are saved to the Running Configuration file STEP 11 Edit5 The following fields are displayed Copyright Select to enable displaying copyright text Copyright Text Enter the copyright text STEP 12 Click Apply and the settings are saved to the Running Configuration file STEP 13 Click Edit Success Page Figure 5 The following page is displayed m Internet Access You are granted permission for internet access You can access your websRes now or click Nere to continue oa lt Edit 370571 Boch Prevew STEP 14 Click the Edit button on the right side of the page 406 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security 802 1X Authentication 1 Defining Time Ranges STEP 15 Enter the Success Message which is the text that will be displayed if the end user successfully logs in STEP 16 Click Apply and the settings are saved to the Running Configuration file To preview the login or success message click Preview To set one of the languages as the default language click Set Default Display Language Defining Time Ranges See lt 300 500 gt Time Range for an explanation of this feature Authentication Method and Port Mode Support The following table shows which combinations of authenticat
98. control block the device rejects the source file and the copy fails If there is no SSD control block in the source configuration file the SSD configuration in the Startup Configuration file is reset to default If there is a passphrase in the SSD control block of the source configuration file the device will reject the source file and the copy fails if there is encrypted sensitive data in the file not encrypted by the key generated from the passphrase in the SSD control block 448 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Configuration Files Security Secure Sensitive Data Management 2 1 If there is an SSD control block in the source configuration file and the file fails the SSD integrity check and or file integrity check the device rejects the source file and fails the copy If there is no passphrase in the SSD control block of the source configuration file all the encrypted sensitive data in the file must be encrypted by either the key generated from the local passphrase or the key generated from the default passphrase but not both Otherwise the source file is rejected and the copy fails The device configures the passphrase passphrase control and file integrity if any from the SSD Control Block in the source configuration file to the Startup Configuration file It configures the Startup Configuration file with the passphrase that is used to genera
99. control settings a wrong port type a typo or an incorrect command within the user defined macro or an invalid parameter setting Parameters are checked for neither type nor boundary prior to the attempt to apply the macro therefore an incorrect or invalid input to a parameter value will almost assuredly cause failure when applying the macro Configuring Smartport Using The Web based Interface The Smartport feature is configured in the Smartport gt Properties Smartport Type Settings and Interface Settings pages For Voice VLAN configuration see Voice VLAN For LLDP CDP configuration see the Configuring LLDP and Configuring CDP sections respectively Smartport Properties To configure the Smartport feature globally STEP 1 Click Smartport gt Properties STEP 2 Enter the parameters Administrative Auto Smartport Select to globally enable or disable Auto Smartport The following options are available Disable Select to disable Auto Smartport on the device Enable Select to enable Auto Smartport on the device 170 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Smartport 1 1 Configuring Smartport Using The Web based Interface Enable by Auto Voice VLAN This enables Auto Smartport but puts it in operation only when Auto Voice VLAN is also enabled and in operation Enable by Auto Voice VLAN is the default Operational Auto Smartport D
100. enables and displays the configuration of the ports and or LAGs that are to receive Multicast streams from a specific VLAN This feature requires that Bridge Multicast filtering in the Properties page be enabled If it is disabled then all Multicast traffic is flooded to ports in the device You can statically manually configure a port to Forward All if the devices connecting to the port do not support IGMP and or MLD Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 265 16 Multicast Defining Unregistered Multicast Settings NOTE STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 IGMP or MLD messages are not forwarded to ports defined as Forward All The configuration affects only the ports that are members of the selected VLAN To define Forward All Multicast Click Multicast gt Forward All Define the following VLAN ID equals to The VLAN ID the ports LAGs are to be displayed Interface Type equals to Define whether to display ports or LAGs Click Go The status of all ports LAGs are displayed Select the port LAG that is to be defined as Forward All by using the following methods Static The port receives all Multicast streams Forbidden Ports cannot receive any Multicast streams even if IGMP MLD snooping designated the port to join a Multicast group None tThe port is not currently a Forward All port Click Apply The Running Conf
101. exceeds the class limit the port power is turned off PoE priority example Given A 48 port device is supplying a total of 375 watts Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 191 Port Management PoE Configuring PoE Settings The administrator configures all ports to allocate up to 30 watts This results in 48 times 30 ports equaling 1440 watts which is too much The device cannot provide enough power to each port so it provides power according to the priority The administrator sets the priority for each port allocating how much power it can be given These priorities are entered in the PoE Settings page See Device Models for a description of the device models that support PoE and the maximum power that can be allocated to PoE ports To configure PoE port settings STEP 1 Click Port Management gt PoE gt Settings The list of fields below is for Port Limit Power Mode The fields are slightly different if the Power Mode is Class Limit STEP 2 Selecta port and click Edit The list of fields below is for Port Limit Power Mode The fields are slightly different if the Power Mode is Class Limit STEP 3 Enter the value for the following field Interface Select the port to configure PoE Administrative Status Enable or disable PoE on the port Time Range Select to enabled PoE on the port Time Range Name If Time Range has been enabled
102. forwards the IGMP Join to the Mrouter only Similarly when the Mrouter receives an IGMP Join message it learns the interface from which it received the Join messages that wants to receive a specific Multicast stream The Mrouter forwards the requested Multicast stream to the interface In a Layer 2 Multicast service a Layer 2 switch receives a single frame addressed to a specific Multicast address It creates copies of the frame to be transmitted on each relevant port When the device is IGMP MLD snooping enabled and receives a frame for a Multicast stream it forwards the Multicast frame to all the ports that have registered to receive the Multicast stream using IGMP Join messages Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 251 16 Multicast Multicast Forwarding The device can forward Multicast streams based on one of the following options Multicast MAC Group Address IP Multicast Group Address G A combination of the source IP address S and the destination IP Multicast Group Address G of the Multicast packet One of these options can be configured per VLAN The system maintains lists of Multicast groups for each VLAN and this manages the Multicast information that each port should receive The Multicast groups and their receiving ports can be configured statically or learned dynamically using IGMP or Multicast Listener Discovery MLD protocols snoopi
103. gt Discovery LLDP gt LLDP MED Network Policy This page contains previously created network policies Select Auto for LLDP MED Network Policy for Voice Application if the device is to automatically generate and advertise a network policy for voice application based on the voice VLAN maintained by the device NOTE When this box is checked you may not manually configure a voice network policy Click Apply to add this setting to the Running Configuration file To define a new policy click Add Enter the values Network Policy Number Select the number of the policy to be created Application Select the type of application type of traffic for which the network policy is being defined VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID to which the traffic must be sent Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 101 Administration Discovery Configuring LLDP STEP 6 NOTE STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 VLAN Tag Select whether the traffic is Tagged or Untagged User Priority Select the traffic priority applied to traffic defined by this network policy This is the CoS value DSCP Value Select the DSCP value to associate with application data sent by neighbors This informs them how they must mark the application traffic they send to the device Click Apply The network policy is defined NOTE You must manually configure the interfaces to include
104. if the SSH User Authentication by Public Key feature was selected See Automatic Login The following fields are displayed for the configured users SSH User Name wUser name of user Key Type Whether this is an RSA or DSA key Fingerprint Fingerprint generated from the public keys STEP 3 Click Add to add anew user and enter the fields SSH User Name Enter a user name Key Type Select either RSA or DSA Public Key Copy the public key generated by an external SSH client application like PuTTY into this text box SSH Server Authentication A public and private RSA and DSA key are automatically generated when the device is booted from factory defaults Each key is also automatically created when the appropriate user configured key is deleted by the user To regenerate an RSA or DSA key or to copy in an RSA DSA key generated on another device STEP 1 Click Security gt SSH Server gt SSH Server Authentication The following fields are displayed for each key Key Type RSA or DSA Key Source Auto Generated or User Defined Fingerprint Fingerprint generated from the key STEP 2 Select either an RSA or DSA key STEP 3 Youcan perform any of the following actions Generate Generates a key of the selected type 471 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security SSH Server 2 3 SSH Server Configuration Pages Edit En
105. is a network protocol that enables data to be exchanged ona secure channel between an SSH client in this case the device and an SSH server SSH client helps the user manage a network composed of one or more switches in which various system files are stored on a central SSH server When configuration files are transferred over a network Secure Copy SCP which is an application that utilizes the SSH protocol ensures that sensitive data such as username password cannot be intercepted Secure Copy SCP is used to securely transfer firmware boot image configuration files language files and log files from a central SCP server to a device With respect to SSH the SCP running on the device is an SSH client application and the SCP server is a SSH server application Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 457 Security SSH Client 22 Protection Methods When files are downloaded via TFTP or HTTP the data transfer is unsecured When files are downloaded via SCP the information is downloaded from the SCP server to the device via a secure channel The creation of this secure channel is preceded by authentication which ensures that the user is permitted to perform the operation Authentication information must be entered by the user both on the device and on the SSH server although this guide does not describe server operations The following illustrates a typical
106. is accessed to acquire the TFTP SCP server name address and configuration file name path DHCP v4 options 66 150 and 67 DHCPV6 options 59 and 60 If a server and configuration file options were not supplied by the DHCP server then For DHCPv 4 The user defined backup configuration file name is used For DHCPv 6 The process is halted If the DHCP server did not send these options and the backup TFTP SCP server address parameter is empty then For DHCPv4 SCP The Auto Configuration process is halted TFTP The device sends TFTP Request messages to a limited Broadcast address for IPv4 or ALL NODES address for IP v6 on its IP interfaces and continues the process of Auto Configuration with the first answering TFTP server For DHCPv 6 The Auto Configuration process is halted If the configuration filename was supplied by the DHCP server DHCP v4 option 67 DHCP v 6 option 60 then the copy protocol SCP TFTP is selected as described in Auto Configuration Download Protocol TFTP or SCP When downloading using SCP the device accepts any specified SCP SSH server without authentication if either of the following is true The SSH server authentication process is disabled Note that by default the SSH server authentication is disabled in order to allow downloading configuration file for devices with factory default configuration for example out of box devices The SSH Server is configured in the SS
107. is in Unrestricted passphrase control mode the device includes the passphrase in the file As a result the user can auto configure the target devices including devices that are out of the box or in factory default with the configuration file without manually pre configuring the target devices with the passphrase This is zero touch because the target devices learn the passphrase directly from the configuration file Devices that are out of the box or in factory default states use the default anonymous user to access the SCP server Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 451 Security Secure Sensitive Data Management SSD Management Channels SSD Management Channels Devices can be managed over management channels such as telnet SSH and web SSD categories the channels into the following types based on their security and or protocols secured insecure secure XML SNMP and insecure XML SNMP The following describes whether SSD considers each management channel to be secure or insecure If it is insecure the table indicates the parallel secure channel Management Channel Console Telnet SSH GUI HTTP GUI HTTPS XML HTTP XML HTTPS SNMP v1 v2 v3 without privacy SNMPv3 with privacy TFTP SCP Secure Copy HTTP based file transfer HTTPS based file transfer SSD Management Channel Type Secure Insecure Secure Insecure Secure Insecure X
108. is not enabled on the port If an authorized host is assigned a VLAN by a RADIUS server all its tagged and untagged traffic not belonging to the unauthenticated VLANs is bridged via the VLAN if the VLAN is not assigned all its traffic is bridged based on the static VLAN membership port configuration Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 385 Security 802 1X Authentication Authenticator Overview The Sx300 in Layer 3 router mode supports the multi sessions mode without guest VLAN and RADIUS VLAN assignment Multiple Authentication Methods If more than one authentication method is enabled on the switch the following hierarchy of authentication methods is applied 802 1x Authentication Highest WEB Based Authentication MAC Based Authentication Lowest Multiple methods can run at the same time When one method finishes successfully the client becomes authorized the methods with lower priority are stopped and the methods with higher priority continue When one of authentication methods running simultaneously fails the other methods continue When an authentication method finishes successfully for a client authenticated by an authentication method with a lower priority the attributes of the new authentication method are applied When the new method fails the client is left authorized with the old method 802 1x Based Authentication The 802 1x
109. is offering the service Local Port Local TCP port through which the device is offering the service Remote IP Address IP address of the remote device that is requesting the service Remote Port TCP port of the remote device that is requesting the service State Status of the service The UDP Services table displays the following information Service Name Access method through which the device is offering the UDP service Type IP protocol the service uses 352 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security Defining Storm Control 18 Local IP Address Local IP address through which the device is offering the service Local Port Local UDP port through which the device is offering the service Application Instance The service instance of the UDP service For example when two senders send data to the same destination STEP 3 Click Apply The services are written to the Running Configuration file Defining Storm Control STEP 1 When Broadcast Multicast or Unknown Unicast frames are received they are duplicated and a copy is sent to all possible egress ports This means that in practice they are sent to all ports belonging to the relevant VLAN In this way one ingress frame is turned into many creating the potential for a traffic storm Storm protection enables you to limit the number of frames entering
110. link partner for those ports the first port that had link up is added to the LACP LAG and becomes active the other ports become non candidates In this way the neighbor device can for example get its IP Address using DHCP and get its configuration using auto configuration Setting LACP Parameter Settings Use the LACP page to configure the candidate ports for the LAG and to configure the LACP parameters per port With all factors equal when the LAG is configured with more candidate ports than the maximum number of active ports allowed 8 the device selects ports as active from the dynamic LAG on the device that has the highest priority NOTE TheLACP setting is irrelevant on ports that are not members of a dynamic LAG To define the LACP settings STEP 1 Click Port Management gt Link Aggregation gt LACP STEP 2 Enter the LACP System Priority See LACP Priority and Rules STEP 3 Selecta port and click Edit STEP 4 Enter the values for the following fields Port Select the port number to which timeout and priority values are assigned LACP Port Priority Enter the LACP priority value for the port See Setting LACP Parameter Settings LACP Timeout Time interval between the sending and receiving of consecutive LACP PDUs Select the periodic transmissions of LACP PDUs which occur at either a Long or Short transmission speed depending upon the expressed LACP timeout preference 136 Cisco Small Busine
111. maps of ACLs which define the traffic flows in the policy One or more aggregates that applies the QoS to the traffic flows in the policy After a policy has been added class maps can be added by using the Policy Table page Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 512 25 Quality of Service QoS Advanced Mode STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 NOTE STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 To add a QoS policy Click Quality of Service gt QoS Advanced Mode gt Policy Table This page displays the list of defined policies Click Policy Class Map Table to display the Policy Class Maps page or Click Add to open the Add Policy Table page Enter the name of the new policy in the New Policy Name field Click Apply The QoS policy profile is added and the Running Configuration file is updated Policy Class Maps One or more class maps can be added to a policy A class map defines the type of packets that are considered to belong to the same traffic flow You cannot configure a policer to a class map when the device is operating in Layer 3 mode The device supports policers only in Layer 2 mode To add aclass map to a policy Click Quality of Service gt QoS Advanced Mode gt Policy Class Maps Select a policy in the Filter and click Go All class maps in that policy are displayed To add a new class map click Add Enter the paramet
112. network configuration in which the SCP feature might be used Typical Network Configuration Server holds Username Password or J Username Public and Performs Secure Copy eae Private Key Pair Name IP Address Switch holds amp Username Password IP Address a or Username Public Key Activates Secure Copy Management System 345165 Protection Methods When data is transferred from an SSH server to a device client the SSH server uses various methods for client authentication These are described below Passwords To use the password method first ensure that a username password has been established on the SSH server This is not done through the device s management system although after a username has been established on the server the server password can be changed through the device s management system Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 458 22 Security SSH Client Protection Methods The username password must then be created on the device When data is transferred from the server to the device the username password supplied by the device must match the username password on the server Data can be encrypted using a one time symmetric key negotiated during the session Each device being managed must have its own username password although the same username password can be used for multiple switches The password method is
113. of the MAC address that are reserved for Ouls Description User assigned OUI description Click Restore OUI Defaults to delete all of the user created OUls and leave only the default OUls in the table To delete all the OUls select the top checkbox All the OUls are selected and can be deleted by clicking Delete If you then click Restore the system recovers the known OUls To add a new OUI click Add Enter the values for the following fields Telephony OUI Enter a new OUI Description Enter an OUI name 222 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version VLAN Management 1 3 Voice VLAN STEP 6 Click Apply The OUI is added to the Telephony OUI Table Adding Interfaces to Voice VLAN on Basis of OUIs The QoS attributes can be assigned per port to the voice packets in one of the following modes All Quality of Service QoS values configured to the Voice VLAN are applied to all of the incoming frames that are received on the interface and are classified to the Voice VLAN Telephony Source MAC Address SRC The QoS values configured for the Voice VLAN are applied to any incoming frame that is classified to the Voice VLAN and contains an OUI in the source MAC address that matches a configured telephony OUI Use the Telephony OUI Interface page to add an interface to the voice VLAN on the basis of the OUI identifier and to configure the O
114. on a single page Viewing 802 1X EAP Statistics The 802 1x EAP page displays detailed information regarding the EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol frames that were sent or received To configure the 802 1X feature see the 802 1X Properties page To view the EAP Statistics and or set the refresh rate STEP 1 Click Status and Statistics gt 802 1x EAP STEP 2 Select the Interface that is polled for statistics STEP 3 Select the time period Refresh Rate that passes before the EAP statistics are refreshed The values are displayed for the selected interface EAPOL Frames Received Valid EAPOL frames received on the port EAPOL Frames Transmitted Valid EAPOL frames transmitted by the port EAPOL Start Frames Received EAPOL Start frames received on the port EAPOL Logoff Frames Received EAPOL Logoff frames received on the port EAP Response ID Frames Received EAP Resp ID frames received on the port EAP Response Frames Received EAP Response frames received by the port other than Resp ID frames Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 17 Status and Statistics Viewing TCAM Utilization EAP Request ID Frames Transmitted EAP Req ID frames transmitted by the port EAP Request Frames Transmitted EAP Request frames transmitted by the port Invalid EAPOL Frames Received Unrecognized EAPOL frames received on this por
115. on this screen can be either No Authentication or Authentication Only or Authentication and Privacy The options are No Authentication I ndicates the packet is neither authenticated nor encrypted Authentication ndicates the packet is authenticated but not encrypted Privacy lIndicates the packet is both authenticated and encrypted Notification Filter Select to enable filtering the type of SNMP notifications sent to the management station The filters are created in the Notification Filter page Filter Name Select the SNMP filter that defines the information contained in traps defined in the Notification Filter page STEP 4 Click Apply The SNMP Notification Recipient settings are written to the Running Configuration file 539 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 26 SNMP Notification Filters SNMP Notification Filters The Notification Filter page enables configuring SNMP notification filters and Object IDs OIDs that are checked After creating a notification filter it is possible to attach it to a notification recipient in the Notification Recipients SNMPv1 2 page and Notification Recipients SNMPv3 page The notification filter enables filtering the type of SNMP notifications that are sent to the management station based on the OID of the notification to be sent To define a notification filter STEP 1 Click SNMP gt N
116. order for RIP MD5 authentication to work This also helps features that associate with time for example Time Based ACL Port 802 1 port authentication that are supported on some devices Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 75 Administration Time Settings Configuring System Time Manual Settings Set the date and time manually The local time is used when there is no alternate source of time such as an SNTP server Date Enter the system date Local Time Enter the system time Time Zone Settings The local time is used via the DHCP server or Time Zone offset Get Time Zone from DHCP Select to enable dynamic configuration of the time zone and the DST from the DHCP server Whether one or both of these parameters can be configured depends on the information found in the DHCP packet If this option is enabled you must also enable DHCP client on the device NOTE The DHCP Client supports Option 100 providing dynamic time zone setting Time Zone from DHCP Displays the acronym of the time zone configured from the DHCP server This acronym appears in the Actual Time field Time Zone Offset Select the difference in hours between Greenwich Mean Time GMT and the local time For example the Time Zone Offset for Paris is GMT 1 while the Time Zone Offset for New York is GMT 5 Time Zone Acronym Enter a user defined name that represent
117. packet s IP address was not found and DHCP Snooping is enabled for the packet s VLAN search the DHCP Snooping Binding database for the packet s lt VLAN IP address gt pair If the lt VLAN IP address gt pair was found and the MAC address and the interface in the database match the packet s MAC address and ingress interface the packet is valid f the packet s IP address was not found in the ARP access control rules or in the DHCP Snooping Binding database the packet is invalid and is dropped A SYSLOG message is generated Ifa packet is valid it is forwarded and the ARP cache is updated If the ARP Packet Validation option is selected Properties page the following additional validation checks are performed Source MAC Compares the packet s source MAC address in the Ethernet header against the sender s MAC address in the ARP request This check is performed on both ARP requests and responses Destination MAC Compares the packet s destination MAC address in the Ethernet header against the destination interface s MAC address This check is performed for ARP responses IP Addresses Compares the ARP body for invalid and unexpected IP addresses Addresses include 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 and all IP Multicast addresses Packets with invalid ARP Inspection bindings are logged and dropped Up to 1024 entries can be defined in the ARP Access Control table 372 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 5
118. parameters The built in macros have up to three parameters Editing these parameters for the Smartport types applied by Auto Smartport from the Smartport Type Settings page configures the default values for these parameters These defaults are used by Auto Smartport Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 171 17 Smartport Configuring Smartport Using The Web based Interface NOTE STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 Changes to Auto Smartport types cause the new settings to be applied to interfaces which have already been assigned that type by Auto Smartport In this case binding an invalid macro or setting an invalid default parameter value causes all ports of this Smartport type to become unknown Click Smartport gt Smartport Type Settings To view the Smartport macro associated with a Smartport type select a Smartport type and click View Macro Source To modify the parameters of a macro or assign a user defined macro select a Smartport type and click Edit Enter the fields Port Type Select a Smartport type Macro Name Displays the name of the Smartport macro currently associated with the Smartport type Macro Type Select whether the pair of macro and anti macro associated with this Smartport type is built in or user defined User Defined Macro lIf desired select the user defined macro that is to be associated with
119. perform the following tasks Statically apply a specific Smartport type to an interface with interface specific values for the macro parameters Enable Auto Smartport on an interface Diagnose a Smartport macro that failed upon application and caused the Smartport type to become Unknown Reapply a Smartport macro after it fails for one of the following types of interfaces switch router and AP It is expected that the necessary corrections have been made prior to clicking Reapply See the workflow area in Common Smartport Tasks section for troubleshooting tips Reapply a Smartport macro to an interface In some circumstances you may want to reapply a Smartport macro so that the configuration at an interface is up to date For instance reapplying a switch Smartport macro at a device interface makes the interface a member of the VLANs created since the last macro application You have to be familiar with the current configurations on the device and the definition of the macro to determine if a reapplication has any impact on the interface Reset unknown interfaces This sets the mode of Unknown interfaces to Default To apply a Smartport macro STEP 1 Click Smartport gt Interface Settings Reapply the associated Smartport macro in the following ways Select a group of Smartport types switches routers or APs and click Reapply Smartport Macro The macros are applied to all selected interface types Select an interface th
120. phone SIP 495 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Quality of Service Configuring QoS General 29 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 802 1p Queue Notes Values 4 queues 1 0 7 7 being 4 4 being the the highest highest priority 4 3 Video 5 4 Voice Cisco IP phone default 6 4 Interwork Control VS phone RTP 7 4 Network Control By changing the CoS 802 1p to Queue mapping CoS 802 1p to Queue and the Queue schedule method and bandwidth allocation Queue page it is possible to achieve the desired quality of service in a network The CoS 802 1p to Queue mapping is applicable only if one of the following exists The device is in QoS Basic mode and CoS 802 1p trusted mode The device is in QoS Advanced mode and the packets belong to flows that are CoS 802 1p trusted Queue 1 has the lowest priority queue 4 or 8 has the highest priority To map CoS values to egress queues Click Quality of Service gt General gt CoS 802 1p to Queue Enter the parameters 802 1p Displays the 802 1p priority tag values to be assigned to an egress queue where 0 is the lowest and 7 is the highest priority Output Queue Select the egress queue to which the 802 1p priority is mapped Either four or eight egress queues are supported where Queue 4 or Queue 8 is the highest priority egress queue and Queue 1 is th
121. ports or all LAGs Port LAG Displays the port or LAG ID Unregistered Multicast Displays the forwarding status of the selected interface The possible values are Forwarding Enables forwarding of unregistered Multicast frames to the selected interface Filtering Enables filtering rejecting of unregistered Multicast frames to the selected interface STEP 3 Click Apply The settings are saved and the Running Configuration file is updated Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 267 Multicast Defining Unregistered Multicast Settings 268 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration IP interface addresses can be configured manually by the user or automatically configured by a DHCP server This section provides information for defining the device IP addresses either manually or by making the device a DHCP client This section covers the following topics Overview IPv4 Management and Interfaces DHCP Server lt 300 500 gt IPv6 Management and Interfaces Domain Name Overview Some features are only available in Layer 2 or Layer 3 system mode as described below In Layer 2 system mode the device operates as a Layer 2 VLAN aware device and has no routing capabilities In Layer 3 system mode the device has IP routing capabilities as well as Lay
122. ports or more have two packet processors To define the VLAN ingress rate limit STEP 1 Click Quality of Service gt General gt VLAN Ingress Rate Limit This page displays the VLAN Ingress Rate Limit Table STEP 2 Click Add STEP 3 Enter the parameters VLAN ID Select a VLAN Committed Information Rate CIR Enter the average maximum amount of data that can be accepted into the VLAN in Kilobytes per second 501 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Quality of Service QoS Basic Mode 25 Committed Burst Size CBS Enter the maximum burst size of data for the egress interface in bytes of data This amount can be sent even if it temporarily increases the bandwidth beyond the allowed limit Cannot be entered for LAGs STEP 4 Click Apply The VLAN rate limit is added and the Running Configuration file is updated TCP Congestion Avoidance The TCP Congestion Avoidance page enables activating a TCP congestion avoidance algorithm The algorithm breaks up or avoids TCP global synchronization in a congested node where the congestion is due to various sources sending packets with the same byte count To configure TCP congestion avoidance STEP 1 Click Quality of Service gt General gt TCP Congestion Avoidance STEP 2 Click Enable to enable TCP congestion avoidance and click Apply QoS Basic Mode In QOS Basic mode a specific d
123. protocol If authentication is successful the user is informed The user now has an authenticated session The session remains open while it is being used If it is not used for a specific time interval the session is closed This time interval is configured by the system administrator and is called Quiet Time When the session is timed out the username password is discarded and the guest must re enter them to open a new session See Table 1 Port Modes and Authentication Methods 388 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security 802 1X Authentication 1 Authenticator Overview After authentication is completed the switch forwards all traffic arriving from the client on the port as shown in the figure below Figure 3 WEB Based Authentication pann a RADIUS Protocol a ae EAP Protocol Client Authenticaticator Authentication Server 370577 Web based authentication cannot be configured on a port that has the guest VLAN or RADIUS Assigned VLAN feature enabled Web based authentication supports the following pages Login page Login Success page There is a predefined embedded set of these pages These pages can be modified in the Security gt 802 1X MAC Web Authentication gt Web Authentication Customization page You can preview each of the customized pages The configuration is saved into the Running Configuration file The fol
124. rules are executed in order of their priority within the access profile top to bottom Rules are composed of filters that include the following elements Access Methods Methods for accessing and managing the device Telnet Secure Telnet SSH Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP Secure HTTP HTTPS Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP All of the above Action Permit or deny access to an interface or source address Interface Which ports LAGs or VLANs are permitted to access or are denied access to the web based configuration utility 342 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security 1 8 Management Access Method Source IP Address IP addresses or subnets Access to management methods might differ among user groups For example one user group might be able to access the device module only by using an HTTPS session while another user group might be able to access the device module by using both HTTPS and Telnet sessions Active Access Profile The Access Profiles page displays the access profiles that are defined and enables selecting one access profile to be the active one When a user attempts to access the device through an access method the device looks to see if the active access profile explicitly permits management access to the device through this method If no match is found access is denied When an attempt to access t
125. server DHCPv6 Client Details The DHCPv6 Client Details button displays information received on the interface from a DHCPV6 server It is active when the interface selected is defined as a DHCPV6 stateless client When the button is pressed it displays the following fields for the information that was received from the DHCP server DHCP v6 Operational Mode This displays Enabled if the following conditions are fulfilled The interface is Up IPv6 is enabled on it DHCPv 6 stateless client is enabled on it Stateless Service lIs the client defined as stateless receives configuration information from a DHCP server or not DHCPv6 Server Address Address of DHCPV6 server DHCPv6 Server DUID Unique identifier of the DHCPv6 server DHCPv6 Server Preference Priority of this DHCPv6 server Information Minimum Refresh Time See above Information Refresh Time See above Received Information Refresh Time Refresh time received from DHCP v6 server Remaining Information Refresh Time Remaining time until next refresh DNS Servers List of DNS servers received from the DHCPV6 server DNS Domain Search List List of domains received from the DHCP v6 server SNTP Servers List of SNTP servers received from the DHCPV6 server POSIX Timezone String Timezone received from the DHCPV6 server Configuration Server Server containing configuration file received from the DHCPV6 server 304 Cisco Small Bus
126. services and to which supplicant ports are connected The following authentication modes on ports are supported these modes are set in Security gt 802 1X MAC Web Authentication gt Host and Authentication Single host Supports port based authentication with a single client per port Multi host Supports port based authentication with a multiple clients per port Multi sessions Supports client based authentication with a multiple clients per port 382 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security 802 1X Authentication 1 Authenticator Overview See Port Host Modes for more information The following authentication methods are supported 802 1x based Supported in all authentication modes MAC based Supported in all authentication modes WEB based Supported only in multi sessions modes In 802 1x based authentication the authenticator extracts the EAP messages from the 802 1x messages EAPOL frames and passes them to the authentication server using the RADIUS protocol With MAC based or web based authentication the authenticator itself executes the EAP client part of the software Authentication Server An authentication server performs the actual authentication of the client The authentication server for the device is a RADIUS authentication server with EAP extensions Authenticator Overview Port Administrative Authen
127. statistics and or set the refresh rate Click Status and Statistics gt GVRP Enter the parameters Interface Select the specific interface for which GVRP statistics are to be displayed Refresh Rate Select the time period that passes before the GVRP statistics page is refreshed The Attribute Counter block displays the counters for various types of packets per interface Join Empty Number of GVRP Join Empty packets received transmitted Empty Number of GVRP empty packets received transmitted Leave Empty Number of GVRP Leave Empty packets received transmitted Join In Number of GVRP Join In packets received transmitted Leave In Number of GVRP Leave In packets received transmitted Leave All Number of GVRP Leave All packets received transmitted The GVRP Error Statistics section displays the GVRP error counters Invalid Protocol D Invalid protocol ID errors Invalid Attribute Type lInvalid attribute ID errors 16 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Status and Statistics 2 Viewing 8021X EAP Statistics Invalid Attribute Value Invalid attribute value errors Invalid Attribute Length Invalid attribute length errors Invalid Event Invalid events To clear statistics counters Click Clear Interface Counters to clear the selected counters Click View All Interfaces Statistics to see all ports
128. that is shown Port ID Identifier of port Port Description Information about the port including manufacturer product name and hardware software version System Name Name of system that is published System Description Description of the network entity in alpha numeric format This includes the system name and versions of the hardware operating system and networking software supported by the device The value equals the sysDescr object Supported System Capabilities Primary functions of the device The capabilities are indicated by two octets Bits O through 7 indicate Other Repeater Bridge WLAN AP Router Telephone DOCSIS cable device and station respectively Bits 8 through 15 are reserved Enabled System Capabilities Primary enabled function s of the device Management Address Table Address Subtype Managed address subtype for example MAC or IP v4 Address Managed address Interface Subtype Port subtype Interface Number Port number MAC PHY Details Auto Negotiation Supported Port speed auto negotiation support status The possible values are True and False Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 109 Administration Discovery Configuring LLDP Auto Negotiation Enabled Port speed auto negotiation active status The possible values are True and False Auto Negotiation Advertised Capabilities Port speed
129. the Port or LAG interface STEP 5 Click to enable or disable QoS State for this interface STEP 6 Click Apply The Running Configuration file is updated Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 504 25 Quality of Service QoS Advanced Mode QoS Advanced Mode Frames that match an ACL and were permitted entrance are implicitly labeled with the name of the ACL that permitted their entrance Advanced mode QoS actions can then be applied to these flows In QoS advanced mode the device uses policies to support per flow QoS A policy and its components have the following characteristics and relationships A policy contains one or more class maps A class map defines a flow with one or more associating ACLs Packets that match only ACL rules ACE in a class map with Permit forward action are considered belonging to the same flow and are subjected to the same quality of services Thus a policy contains one or more flows each with a user defined QoS The QoS of a class map flow is enforced by the associating policer There are two type of policers single policer and aggregate policer Each policer is configured with a QoS specification A single policer applies the QoS toa single class map and thus to a single flow based on the policer QoS specification An aggregate policer applies the QoS to one or more class maps and thus one or more flows An aggregate policer c
130. the data stored on the local device These username and password pairs are defined in the User Accounts page NOTE The Local or None authentication method must always be selected last All authentication methods selected after Local or None are ignored STEP 4 Click Apply The selected authentication methods are associated with the access method Secure Sensitive Data Management See Security Secure Sensitive Data Management 348 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security SSL Server 18 SSL Server STEP 1 This section describes the Secure Socket Layer SSL feature SSL Overview The Secure Socket Layer SSL feature is used to open an HTTPS session to the device An HTTPS session may be opened with the default certificate that exists on the device Some browsers generate warnings when using a default certificate since this certificate is not signed by a Certification Authority CA It is best practice to have a certificate signed by a trusted CA To open an HTTPS session with a user created certificate perform the following actions 1 Generate a certificate 2 Request that the certificate be certified by a CA 3 Import the signed certificate into the device Default Settings and Configuration By default the device contains a certificate that can be modified HTTPS is enabled by default SSL Server Authentication Setting
131. the default method on the device Public Private Keys To use the public private key method create a username and public key on the SSH server The public key is generated on the device as described below and then copied to the server The actions of creating a username on the server and copying the public key to the server are not described in this guide RSA and DSA default key pairs are generated for the device when it is booted One of these keys is used to encrypt the data being downloaded from the SSH server The RSA key is used by default If the user deletes one or both of these keys they are regenerated The public private keys are encrypted and stored in the device memory The keys are part of the device configuration file and the private key can be displayed to the user in encrypted or plaintext form Since the private key cannot be copied directly to the private key of another device an import method exists that enables copying private keys from device to device described in Import Keys Import Keys In the key method individual public private keys must be created for each individual device and these private keys cannot be copied directly from one device to another because of security considerations If there are multiple switches in the network the process of creating public private keys for all the switches might be time consuming because each public private key must be created and then loaded onto the SSH serv
132. the device globally however the scope of a Smartport macro is limited to the interface on which it is applied The macro source may be found by running the show parser macro name mMacro_name command in privileged exec mode of the CLI or by clicking the View Macro Source button on the Smartport Type Settings page A macro and the corresponding anti macro are paired together in association with each Smartport type The macro applies the configuration and the anti macro removes it 160 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Smartport Smartport Macros 11 There are two types of Smartport macros Built ln These are macros provided by the system One macro applies the configuration profile and the other removes it The macro names of the built in Smartport macros and the Smartport type they are associated with as follows macro name for example printer no_macro name for example no_printer User Defined These are macros written by the users See the CLI Reference Guide for more information about these To associate a user defined macro to a Smartport type its anti macro must be defined as well smartport type name for example my_printer no_smartport type name for example no_my_printer Smartport macros are bound to Smartport types in the Edit Smartport Type Setting page See Built in Smartport Macros for a listing of the built in Sma
133. this event occurs log trap or log and trap Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 19 Status and Statistics Managing RMON STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 Viewing RMON Statistics The Statistics page displays detailed information regarding packet sizes and information regarding physical layer errors The information displayed is according to the RMON standard An oversized packet is defined as an Ethernet frame with the following criteria Packet length is greater than MRU byte size Collision event has not been detected Late collision event has not been detected Received Rx error event has not been detected Packet has a valid CRC To view RMON statistics and or set the refresh rate Click Status and Statistics gt RMON gt Statistics Select the Interface for which Ethernet statistics are to be displayed Select the Refresh Rate the time period that passes before the interface statistics are refreshed The statistics are displayed for the selected interface Bytes Received Number of octets received including bad packets and FCS octets but excluding framing bits Drop Events Number of packets dropped Packets Received Number of good packets received including Multicast and Broadcast packets Broadcast Packets Received Number of good Broadcast packets received This number does not include Multicast packets
134. to shut down any port whenever there is even a chance that the link is undetermined Dependencies On Other Features UDLD and Layer 1 When UDLD is enabled on a port UDLD actively runs on that port while the port is up When the port is down UDLD goes into UDLD shutdown state In this state UDLD removes all learned neighbors When the port is changed from down to up UDLD resumes actively running 150 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Port Management Unidirectional Link Detection 1 O Default Settings and Configuration UDLD and Layer 2 Protocols UDLD runs on a port independently from other Layer 2 protocols running on the same port such as STP or LACP For example UDLD assigns the port a status regardless of the STP status of the port or regardless of whether the port belongs to a LAG or not Default Settings and Configuration The following defaults exist for this feature UDLD is disabled by default on all ports of the device Default message time is 15 seconds Default expiration time is 45 seconds 3 times the message time Default port UDLD state Fiber interfaces are in the global UDLD state Non fiber interfaces are in the disable state Before You Start No preliminary tasks are required Common UDLD Tasks This section describes some common tasks to setup UDLD Workflow To globally enable UDLD on fiber ports perform
135. to the active image You can reboot the device by using the process described in the Management Interface lt print only gt section To select the active image Click Administration gt File Management gt Active Image The page displays the following Active Image Displays the image file that is currently active on the device Active Image Version Number Displays the firmware version of the active image Active Image After Reboot Displays the image that is active after reboot Active Image Version Number After Reboot Displays the firmware version of the active image as it be after reboot Select the image from the Active Image After Reboot menu to identify the firmware image that is used as the active image after the device is rebooted The Active Image Version Number After Reboot displays the firmware version of the active image that is used after the device is rebooted Click Apply The active image selection is updated 42 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration File Management 4 Download Backup Configuration Log Download Backup Configuration Log The Download Backup Configuration Log page enables Backing up configuration files or logs from the device to an external device Restoring configuration files from an external device to the device When restoring a configuration file to the Running Configuration t
136. type of the IPv6 address to add Link Local An IPv6 address that uniquely identifies hosts on a single network link A link local address has a prefix of FE80O is not routable and can be used for communication only on the local network Only one link local address is supported If a link local address exists on the interface this entry replaces the address in the configuration Global An IPv6 address that is a global Unicast IPV6 type that is visible and reachable from other networks IPv6 Address lIn Layer 2 the device supports a singlelPv6 interface In addition to the default link local and Multicast addresses the device also automatically adds global addresses to the interface based on the router advertisements it receives The device supports a maximum of 128 addresses at the interface Each address must be a valid IPv6 address that is specified in hexadecimal format by using 16 bit values separated by colons You cannot configure an IPv6 addresses directly on an ISATAP tunnel interface Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 307 17 IP Configuration IPv6 Management and Interfaces Prefix Length The length of the Global IPv6 prefix is a value from 0 128 indicating the number of the high order contiguous bits of the address comprise the prefix the network portion of the address EUI 64 Select to use the EUI 64 parameter to identify the int
137. via SCP over SSH option in the Upgrade Backup Firmware Language page The password can be entered in this page directly or the password entered in the SSH User Authentication page can be used Download backup the configuration file using SCP by selecting the via SCP over SSH option in the Download Backup Configuration Log page The password can be entered in this page directly or the password entered in the SSH User Authentication page can be used Set up a uSername password on the SSH server or modify the password on the SSH server This activity depends on the server and is not described here Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 462 22 Security SSH Client Common Tasks STEP 4 Ifthe public private key method is being used perform the following steps STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP a Select whether to use an RSA or DSA key create a username and then generate the public private keys b View the generated key by clicking the Details button and transfer the username and public key to the SSH server This action depends on the server and is not described in this guide c Upgrade backup the firmware or language file using SCP by selecting the via SCP over SSH option in the Upgrade Backup Firmware Language page d Download backup the configuration file using SCP by selecting the via SCP ove
138. written as 0 0 0 255 Destination IP Address Select Any if all destination address are acceptable or User defined to enter a destination address or range of destination addresses Destination IP Address Value Enter the IP address to which the destination IP address is to be matched Destination IP Wildcard Mask Enter the mask to define a range of IP addresses Source Port Select one of the following Any Match to all source ports Single Enter a single TCP UDP source port to which packets are matched This field is active only if 800 6 TCP or 800 17 UDP is selected in the Select from List drop down menu Range Select a range of TCP UDP source ports to which the packet is matched There are eight different port ranges that can be configured shared between source and destination ports TCP and UDP protocols each have eight port ranges Destination Port Select one of the available values that are the same as the Source Port field described above NOTE You must specify the IP protocol for the ACE before you can enter the source and or destination port TCP Flags Select one or more TCP flags with which to filter packets Filtered packets are either forwarded or dropped Filtering packets by TCP flags increases packet control which increases network security Type of Service The service type of the IP packet Any Any service type Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Admini
139. 0 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 261 Multicast MLD Snooping In an approach similar to IGMP snooping MLD frames are snooped as they are forwarded by the device from stations to an upstream Multicast router and vice versa This facility enables a device to conclude the following On which ports stations interested in joining a specific Multicast group are located On which ports Multicast routers sending Multicast frames are located This knowledge is used to exclude irrelevant ports ports on which no stations have registered to receive a specific Multicast group from the forwarding set of an incoming Multicast frame If you enable MLD snooping in addition to the manually configured Multicast groups the result is a union of the Multicast groups and port memberships derived from the manual setup and the dynamic discovery by MLD snooping Only static definitions are preserved when the system is rebooted To enable MLD Snooping and configure it on a VLAN STEP 1 Click Multicast gt MLD Snooping STEP 2 Enable or disable MLD Snooping Status When MLD Snooping is globally enabled the device monitoring network traffic can determine which hosts have requested to receive Multicast traffic The device performs MLD Snooping only if both MLD snooping and Bridge Multicast filtering are enabled STEP 3 Select a VLAN and click Edit STEP 4 Enter the parameters VLAN ID Select the
140. 0 0 32 as a Source Address Addresses in this block refer to source hosts on this network 127 0 0 0 8 Used as the Internet host loopback address 192 0 2 0 24 Used as the TEST NET in documentation and example codes 224 0 0 0 4 As a Source IP Address Used in IPv4 Multicast address assignments and was formerly known as Class D Address Space 240 0 0 0 4 Except 255 255 255 255 32 as a Destination Address Reserved address range and was formerly known as Class E Address Space You can also add new Martian Addresses for DoS prevention Packets that have a Martian addresses are discarded To define Martian addresses STEP 1 Click Security gt Denial of Service Prevention gt Martian Addresses STEP 2 Select Reserved Martian Addresses and click Apply to include the reserved Martian Addresses in the System Level Prevention list 362 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security 1 8 Denial of Service Prevention STEP 3 To add a Martian address click Add STEP 4 Enter the parameters IP Version lIndicates the supported IP version Currently support is only offered for IPv4 IP Address Enter an IP addresses to reject The possible values are From Reserved List Select a well known IP address from the reserved list New IP Address Enter an IP address _Mask Enter the mask of the IP address to define a range of I
141. 0 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration Discovery 8 Configuring LLDP STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 Setting LLDP MED Network Policy An LLDP MED network policy is a related set of configuration settings for a specific real time application such as voice or video A network policy if configured can be included in the outgoing LLDP packets to the attached LLDP media endpoint device The media endpoint device must send its traffic as specified in the network policy it receives For example a policy can be created for VoIP traffic that instructs VoIP phone to Send voice traffic on VLAN 10 as tagged packet and with 802 1p priority 5 Send voice traffic with DSCP 46 Network policies are associated with ports by using the LLDP MED Port Settings page An administrator can manually configure one or more network policies and the interfaces where the policies are to be sent It is the administrator s responsibility to manually create the VLANs and their port memberships according to the network policies and their associated interfaces In addition an administrator can instruct the device to automatically generate and advertise a network policy for voice application based on the voice VLAN maintained by the device Refer the Auto Voice VLAN section for details on how the device maintains its voice VLAN To define an LLDP MED network policy Click Administration
142. 0 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 246 Managing MAC Address Tables 1 5 Configuring Static MAC Addresses Configuring Static MAC Addresses Static MAC addresses are assigned to a specific physical interface and VLAN on the device If that address is detected on another interface it is ignored and is not written to the address table To define a static address STEP 1 Click MAC Address Tables gt Static Addresses The Static Addresses page contains the currently defined static addresses STEP 2 Click Add STEP 3 Enter the parameters VLAN ID Select the VLAN ID for the port MAC Address Enter the interface MAC address Interface Select an interface port or LAG for the entry Status Select how the entry is treated The options are Permanent The system never removes this MAC address If the static MAC address is saved in the Startup Configuration it is retained after rebooting Delete on reset tThe static MAC address is deleted when the device is reset Delete on timeout The MAC address is deleted when aging occurs Secure The MAC address is secure when the interface is in classic locked mode see Configuring Port Security STEP 4 Click Apply A new entry appears in the table Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 247 19 Managing MAC Address Tables Managing Dynamic M
143. 00 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security 1 8 ARP Inspection Interaction Between ARP Inspection and DHCP Snooping If DHCP Snooping is enabled ARP Inspection uses the DHCP Snooping Binding database in addition to the ARP access control rules If DHCP Snooping is not enabled only the ARP access control rules are used ARP Defaults The following table describes the ARP defaults Option Default State Dynamic ARP Inspection Not enabled ARP Packet Validation Not enabled ARP Inspection Enabled on Not enabled VLAN Log Buffer Interval SYSLOG message generation for dropped packets is enabled at 5 seconds interval ARP Inspection Work Flow To configure ARP Inspection STEP 1 Enable ARP Inspection and configure various options in the Security gt ARP Inspection gt Properties page STEP 2 Configure interfaces as ARP trusted or untrusted in the Security gt ARP Inspection gt Interface Setting page STEP 3 Add rules inthe Security gt ARP Inspection gt ARP Access Control and ARP Access Control Rules pages STEP 4 Define the VLANs on which ARP Inspection is enabled and the Access Control Rules for each VLAN in the Security gt ARP Inspection gt VLAN Settings page Defining ARP Inspection Properties To configure ARP Inspection Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 373 Securit
144. 00 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 81 Administration Time Settings Configuring System Time Authentication Key Enter the key used for authentication up to eight characters The SNTP server must send this key for the device to synchronize to it Trusted Key Select to enable the device to receive synchronization information only from a SNTP server by using this authentication key STEP 6 Click Apply The SNTP Authentication parameters are written to the Running Configuration file Time Range Time ranges can be defined and associated with the following types of commands so that they are applied only during that time range ACLs 8021X Port Authentication Port Stat Time Based PoE There are two types of time ranges Absolute This type of time range begins on a specific date or immediately and ends on a specific date or extends infinitely It is created in the Time Range pages A recurring element can be added to it Recurring This type of time range contains a time range element that is added to an absolute range and begins and ends on a recurring basis It is defined in the Recurring Range pages If a time range includes both absolute and recurring ranges the process associated with it is activated only if both absolute start time and the recurring time range have been reached The process is deactivated when either of the time ranges is reached The device sup
145. 3 3 4 3 3 2 1 1 DSCP 62 54 46 38 30 22 14 6 Queue 3 3 4 3 3 2 1 1 DSCP 61 53 45 37 29 21 13 5 Queue 3 3 4 3 3 2 1 1 DSCP 60 52 44 36 28 20 12 4 Queue 3 3 4 3 3 2 1 1 DSCP 59 51 43 35 27 19 11 3 Queue 3 3 4 3 3 2 1 1 DSCP 58 50 42 34 26 18 10 2 Queue 3 3 4 3 3 2 1 1 DSCP 57 49 41 33 25 17 9 1 Queue 3 3 4 3 3 2 1 1 DSCP 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 0 Queue 3 3 4 3 3 2 1 1 To map DSCP to queues STEP 1 Click Quality of Service gt General gt DSCP to Queue The DSCP to Queue page contains Ingress DSCP It displays the DSCP value in the incoming packet and its associated class STEP 2 Select the Output Queue traffic forwarding queue to which the DSCP value is mapped STEP 3 Click Apply The Running Configuration file is updated Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 498 Quality of Service Configuring QoS General Configuring Bandwidth The Bandwidth page enables users to define two values Ingress Rate Limit and Egress Shaping Rate which determine how much traffic the system can receive and send The ingress rate limit is the number of bits per second that can be received from the ingress interface Excess bandwidth above this limit is discarded The following values are entered for egress shaping Committed Information Rate CIR sets the average maximum amount of data allowed to be sent on the egress interfa
146. 500 devices in Layer 3 system mode They are always supported on SG500X devices You can measure the rate of traffic that matches a pre defined set of rules and to enforce limits such as limiting the rate of file transfer traffic that is allowed ona port This can be done by using the ACLs in the class map s to match the desired traffic and by using a policer to apply the QoS on the matching traffic A policer is configured with a QoS specification There are two kinds of policers Single Regular Policer A single policer applies the QoS to a single class map and to a single flow based on the policer s QoS specification When a class map using single policer is bound to multiple ports each port has its own instance of single policer each applying the QoS on the class map flow at ports that are otherwise independent of each other A single policer is created in the Policy Table page Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 510 25 Quality of Service QoS Advanced Mode NOTE STEP 1 STEP 2 Aggregate Policer An aggregate policer applies the QoS to one or more class maps and one or more flows An aggregation policer can support class maps from different policies An aggregate policer applies QoS to all its flow s in aggregation regardless of policies and ports An aggregate policer is created in the Aggregate Policer page An aggregate police
147. 6 source interface to be used in messages for communication with the RADIUS server NOTE If the Auto option is selected the system takes the source IP address from the IP address defined on the outgoing interface STEP 4 Click Apply The RADIUS default settings for the device are updated in the Running Configuration file To add a RADIUS server click Add STEP 5 Enter the values in the fields for each RADIUS server To use the default values entered in the RADIUS page select Use Default Server Definition Select whether to specify the RADIUS server by IP address or name IP Version Select the version of the IP address of the RADIUS server IPv6 Address Type Displays that IPv6 address type is Global IPv6 Address Type Select the IPv6 address type if IPv6 is used The options are Link Local The IPv6 address uniquely identifies hosts on a single network link A link local address has a prefix of FE80 is not routable and can be used for communication only on the local network Only one link local address is supported If a link local address exists on the interface this entry replaces the address in the configuration 340 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security Configuring RADIUS 18 Global The IPv6 address is a global Unicast IPV6 type that is visible and reachable from other networks Link Local Interface Select th
148. 8P 8 FE ports plus 2 GE ports 9 6 1 82 08 2 SF300 24 24 FE ports plus 4 GE special purpose ports 9 6 1 82 24 1 2 uplinks and 2 combo ports SF300 24P 24 FE ports plus 4 GE special purpose ports 9 6 1 82 24 2 2 uplinks and 2 combo ports SF300 48 48 FE ports plus 4 GE special purpose ports 9 6 1 82 48 1 2 uplinks and 2 combo ports SF300 48P 48 FE ports plus 4 GE special purpose ports 9 6 1 82 48 2 2 uplinks and 2 combo ports SG300 52P 52 Port Gigabit POE Managed Switch 9 6 1 83 52 2 SG300 52MP 52 Port Gigabit POE Managed Switch 9 6 1 83 52 3 SG300 10SFP 10 Port Gigabit Managed SFP Switch 9 6 1 83 10 5 ESW2 350G 52 Port Gigabit Managed Switch 9 6 1 86 52 1 52 ESW2 350G 52 Port Gigabit Managed Switch 9 6 1 86 52 6 52DC SF300 24MP 24 Port 10 100 PoE Managed Switch 9 6 1 82 24 3 SG300 28MP 28 Port Gigabit POE Managed Switch 9 6 1 83 28 3 SF302 08P 8 FE ports plus 2 GE ports 9 6 1 82 08 2 SF302 08PP 8 Port 10 100 PoE Managed Switch 9 6 1 82 08 2 SF302 O8MPP_ 8 Port 10 100 PoE Managed Switch 9 6 1 82 08 3 SG300 10PP 8 Port 10 100 PoE Managed Switch 9 6 1 83 10 2 SF300 24PP 8 Port 10 100 PoE Managed Switch 9 6 1 82 24 1 SG300 28PP 10 Port Gigabit PoE Managed Switch 9 6 1 83 28 2 SF300 24PP 24 Port 10 100 PoE Managed Switch 9 6 1 82 24 1 SG300 28PP 28 Port Gigabit POE Managed Switch 9 6 1 83 28 2 SF300 48PP 48 Port 10 100 PoE Managed Switch 9 6 1 82 48 2
149. A prefix list entry consists of an IP address and a bit mask The IP address can be for a classful network a subnet or a single host route The bit mask is a number from 1 to 32 Prefix lists are configured to filter traffic based on a match of an exact prefix length or a match within a range when the ge and le keywords are used The Greater Than and Lower Than parameters are used to specify a range of prefix lengths and provide more flexible configuration than using only the network length argument A prefix list is processed using an exact match when neither the Greater Than nor Lower Than parameter is specified If only the Greater Than parameter is specified the range is the value entered for Greater Than to a full 32 bit length If only Lower Than is specified the range is from the value entered for the network length argument to the Lower Than If both the Greater Than and Lower Than arguments are entered the range is between the values used for Greater Than and Greater Than To create a prefix list In Layer 3 Click IP Configuration gt IPv6 Management Interfaces gt IPv6 Prefix List or In Layer 2 Click Administration gt IPv6 Management Interfaces gt IPv6 Prefix List STEP 2 Click Add STEP 3 Enter the following fields List Name Select one of the following options Use Existing List Select a previously defined list to add a prefix to it Create New List Enter a name to create a new list Ci
150. AC Addresses Managing Dynamic MAC Addresses STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP The Dynamic Address Table bridging table contains the MAC addresses acquired by monitoring the source addresses of frames entering the device To prevent this table from overflowing and to make room for new MAC addresses an address is deleted if no corresponding traffic is received for a certain period This period of time is the aging interval Configuring Dynamic MAC Address Aging Time To configure the aging interval for dynamic addresses 1 Click MAC Address Tables gt Dynamic Address Settings 2 Enter Aging Time The aging time is a value between the user configured value and twice that value minus 1 For example if you entered 300 seconds the aging time is between 300 and 599 seconds 3 Click Apply The aging time is updated Querying Dynamic Addresses To query dynamic addresses 1 Click MAC Address Tables gt Dynamic Addresses 2 Inthe Filter block you can enter the following query criteria VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID for which the table is queried MAC Address Enter the MAC address for which the table is queried Interface Select the interface for which the table is queried The query can search for specific unit slot ports or LAGs 3 Enter the Dynamic Address Table Sort Key field by which the table is sorted The address table can be sorted by VLAN ID MAC address or interface 4 Click
151. AN Select the Multicast TV VLAN which is mapped to the CPE VLAN STEP 4 Click Apply CPE VLAN Mapping is modified and written to the Running Configuration file CPE Port Multicast VLAN Membership The ports associated with the Multicast VLANs must be configured as customer ports see Configuring VLAN Interface Settings Use the Port Multicast VLAN Membership page to map these ports to Multicast TV VLANs as described in Port Multicast VLAN Membership Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 229 VLAN Management Customer Port Multicast TV VLAN 230 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Spanning Tree This section describes the Spanning Tree Protocol STP IEEE802 1D and IEEE802 1Q and covers the following topics STP Flavors STP Flavors Configuring STP Status and Global Settings Defining Spanning Tree Interface Settings Configuring Rapid Spanning Tree Settings Multiple Spanning Tree Defining MSTP Properties Mapping VLANs to a MSTP Instance Defining MSTP Instance Settings Defining MSTP Interface Settings STP protects a Layer 2 Broadcast domain from Broadcast storms by selectively setting links to standby mode to prevent loops In standby mode these links temporarily stop transferring user data After the topology changes so that the data transfer is made possible the links are auto
152. Administration File Management Auto Configuration via DHCP IP Version Select whether an IPv4 or an IPv6 address is used IPv6 Address Type Select the IPv6 address type if IPv6 is used The options are Link Local The IPv6 address uniquely identifies hosts on a single network link A link local address has a prefix of FE80 is not routable and can be used for communication only on the local network Only one link local address is supported If a link local address exists on the interface this entry replaces the address in the configuration Global The IPv6 address is a global Unicast IPV6 type that is visible and reachable from other networks Link Local Interface Select the link local interface if IPv6 is used from the list Backup Server IP Address Name Enter the IP address or the name of the server to be used if no server IP address was specified in the DHCP message Backup Configuration File Name Enter the path and file name of the file to be used if no configuration file name was specified in the DHCP message STEP 4 Click Apply The parameters are copied to the Running Configuration file 56 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration File Management Auto Configuration via DHCP Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 57 Administr
153. Apply The trusted server definition is stored in the Running Configuration file Changing the User Password on the SSH Server To change the password on the SSH server STEP 1 Click Security gt SSH Client gt Change User Password on SSH Server STEP 2 Enter the following fields Server Definition Define the SSH server by selecting either By IP Address or By Name Enter the server name or IP address of the server in the Server IP Address Name field IP Version lf you selected to specify the SSH server by IP address select whether that IP address is an IPv4 or IPv6 address IP Address Type lf the SSH server IP address is an IPv6 address select the IPv6 address type The options are Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 466 22 Security SSH Client SSH Client Configuration Through the GUI Link Local The IPv6 address uniquely identifies hosts on a single network link A link local address has a prefix of FE80 is not routable and can be used for communication only on the local network Only one link local address is supported If a link local address exists on the interface this entry replaces the address in the configuration Global The IPv6 address is a global Unicast IPV6 type that is visible and reachable from other networks Link Local Interface Select the link local interface from the list of interfaces Server
154. Available only in Layer 2 switch mode Enter the maximum number of login attempts allowed on the interface Select either Infinite for no limit or User Defined to set a limit Max WBA Silence Period Available only in Layer 2 switch mode Enter the maximum length of the silent period allowed on the interface Select either Infinite for no limit or User Defined to set a limit Max Hosts Enter the maximum number of authorized hosts allowed on the interface Select either Infinite for no limit or User Defined to set a limit NOTE Set this value to 1 to simulate single host mode for web based authentication in multi sessions mode Quiet Period Enter the number of seconds that the device remains in the quiet state following a failed authentication exchange Resending EAP Enter the number of seconds that the device waits for a response to an Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP request identity frame from the supplicant client before resending the request Max EAP Requests Enter the maximum number of EAP requests that can be sent If a response is not received after the defined period supplicant timeout the authentication process is restarted Supplicant Timeout Enter the number of seconds that lapses before EAP requests are resent to the supplicant Server Timeout Enter the number of seconds that lapses before the device resends a request to the authentication server STEP 4 Click Apply The port setting
155. C group address Forwarding based on the MAC group address can result in an IP Multicast stream being forwarded to ports that have no receiver for the stream IP Group Address Based on the destination IP address of the IP packet G Source Specific IP Group Address Based on both the destination IP address and the source IP address of the IP packet S G By selecting the forwarding mode you can define the method used by hardware to identify Multicast flow by one of the following options MAC Group Address IP Group Address or Source Specific IP Group Address S G is supported by IGMPv3 and MLDv2 while IGMPv1 2 and MLDv1 support only G which is just the group ID The device supports a maximum of 256 static and dynamic Multicast group addresses To enable Multicast filtering and select the forwarding method STEP 1 Click Multicast gt Properties STEP 2 Enter the parameters Bridge Multicast Filtering Status Select to enable filtering VLAN ID Select the VLAN ID to set its forwarding method Forwarding Method for IPv6 Set one of the following forwarding methods for IPv6 addresses MAC Group Address IP Group Address or Source Specific IP Group Address Forwarding Method for IPv4 Set one of the following forwarding methods for IPv4 addresses MAC Group Address IP Group Address or Source Specific IP Group Address 254 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch A
156. CIR in Kbits per second Kbps CIR is the average maximum amount of data that can be sent Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 500 Quality of Service Configuring QoS General Committed Burst Size CBS Enter the maximum burst size CBS in bytes CBS is the maximum burst of data allowed to be sent even if a burst exceeds CIR STEP 6 Click Apply The bandwidth settings are written to the Running Configuration file VLAN Ingress Rate Limit NOTE The VLAN Rate Limit feature is not available when the device is in Layer 3 mode Rate limiting per VLAN performed in the VLAN Ingress Rate Limit page enables traffic limiting on VLANs When VLAN ingress rate limiting is configured it limits aggregate traffic from all the ports on the device The following constraints apply to rate limiting per VLAN t has lower precedence than any other traffic policing defined in the system For example if a packet is subject to QoS rate limits but is also subject to VLAN rate limiting and the rate limits conflict the QoS rate limits take precedence itis applied at the device level and within the device at the packet processor level If there is more than one packet processor on the device the configured VLAN rate limit value is applied to each of the packet processors independently Devices with up to 24 ports have a single packet processor while devices of 48
157. CL Deny Select to enable error recovery mechanism for the ACL deny error disable state STP BPDU Guard Select to enable the error recovery mechanism for thee STP BPDU guard error disable state UDLD Select to enable error recovery mechanism for the UDLD shutdown state STEP 3 Click Apply to update the global setting To manually reactivate a port STEP 1 Click Port Management gt Error Recovery Settings The list of inactivated interfaces along with their Suspension Reason is displayed STEP 2 Select the interface to be reactivated STEP 3 Click Reactivate Link Aggregation This section describes how to configure LAGs It covers the following topics Link Aggregation Overview Static and Dynamic LAG Workflow Defining LAG Management Configuring LAG Settings Configuring LACP Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 129 Port Management Link Aggregation Link Aggregation Overview Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP is part of the IEEE specification 802 3az that enables you to bundle several physical ports together to form a single logical channel LAG LAGs multiply the bandwidth increase port flexibility and provide link redundancy between two devices Two types of LAGs are supported Static A LAG is static if the LACP is disabled on it The group of ports assigned to a static LAG are always active members After a LAG is
158. CP Snooping Binding Database page DHCP Snooping Relay This section describes how the DHCP Relay and Snooping features are implemented via the Web based interface Properties To configure DHCP Relay DHCP Snooping and Option 82 Click IP Configuration gt IPv4 Management and Interfaces gt DHCP Snooping Relay gt Properties or Security gt DHCP Snooping Enter the following fields Option 82 Select Option 82 to insert Option 82 information into packets DHCP Relay Select to enable DHCP Relay DHCP Snooping Status Select to enable DHCP Snooping If DHCP Snooping is enabled the following options can be enabled Option 82 Passthrough Select to leave foreign Option 82 information when forwarding packets Verify MAC Address Select to verify that the source MAC address of the Layer 2 header matches the client hardware address as appears in the DHCP Header part of the payload on DHCP untrusted ports Backup Database Select to back up the DHCP Snooping Binding database on the device s flash memory Backup Database Update nterva Enter how often the DHCP Snooping Binding database is to be backed up if Backup Database is selected Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 289 17 IP Configuration IPv4 Management and Interfaces STEP 2 Click Apply The settings are written to the Running Configuration file STEP 3 Todefine
159. CP values to be used by the LLDP MED as a voice network policy Root Switch MAC Address The MAC address of the Auto Voice VLAN root device that discovers or is configured with the voice VLAN from which the voice VLAN is learned Switch MAC Address Base MAC address of the device If the device s Switch MAC address is the Root Switch MAC Address the device is the Auto Voice VLAN root device Voice VLAN ID Change Time Last time that voice VLAN was updated STEP 2 Click Restart Auto Voice VLAN to reset the voice VLAN to the default voice VLAN and restart Auto Voice VLAN discovery on all the Auto Voice VLAN enabled switches in the LAN The Voice VLAN Local Table displays voice VLAN configured on the device as well as any voice VLAN configuration advertised by directly connected neighbor devices It contains the following fields Interface Displays the interface on which voice VLAN configuration was received or configured If N A appears the configuration was done on the device itself If an interface appears a voice configuration was received from a neighbor Source MAC Address MAC address of a UC from which the voice configuration was received Source Type Type of UC from which voice configuration was received The following options are available Default Default voice VLAN configuration on the device 220 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Ve
160. Click Apply to save the configuration to the Running Configuration file Viewing IP v6 Route Tables The IPv6 Forwarding Table contains the various routes that have been configured One of these routes is a default route IPv6 address 0 that uses the default router selected from the IPv6 Default Router List to send packets to destination devices that are not in the same IPv6 subnet as the device In addition to the default route 312 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration 1 7 IPv6 Management and Interfaces the table also contains dynamic routes that are ICMP redirect routes received from IPv6 routers by using ICMP redirect messages This could happen when the default router the device uses is not the router for traffic to which the IPv6 subnets that the device wants to communicate To view IPv6 routes To view IPv6 routing entries in Layer 2 system mode STEP 1 Click Administration gt Management Interface gt IPv6 Routes or To view IPv6 routing entries in Layer 3 system mode Click IP Configuration gt IPv6 Management and Interfaces gt IPv6 Routes This page displays the following fields IPv6 Address The IPv6 subnet address Prefix Length IP route prefix length for the destination IPv6 subnet address It is preceded by a forward slash Interface lInterface used to forward the packet Next Hop Address where the
161. Configuring Global Settings The Global Settings page contains information for enabling Trust on the device Packets entering a QoS domain are classified at the edge of the QoS domain To define the Trust configuration STEP 1 Click Quality of Service gt QoS Advanced Mode gt Global Settings STEP 2 Select the Trust Mode while the device is in Advanced mode If a packet CoS level and DSCP tag are mapped to separate queues the Trust mode determines the queue to which the packet is assigned CoS 802 1p traffic is mapped to queues based on the VPT field in the VLAN tag or based on the per port default CoS 802 1p value if there is no VLAN tag on the incoming packet the actual mapping of the VPT to queue can be configured in the mapping CoS 802 1p to Queue page DSCP AIll IP traffic is mapped to queues based on the DSCP field in the IP header The actual mapping of the DSCP to queue can be configured in the DSCP to Queue page If traffic is not IP traffic it is mapped to the best effort queue CoS 802 1p DSCP Select to use Trust CoS mode for non IP traffic and Trust DSCP for IP traffic STEP 3 Select the default Advanced mode QoS trust mode either trusted or untrusted for interfaces in the Default Mode Status field This provides basic QoS functionality on Advanced QoS so that you can trust CoS DSCP on Advanced QoS by default without having to create a policy In QoS Advanced Mode when the Default Mode Status is
162. DP LLDP packets they receives If the CDP LLDP incapable devices perform VLAN aware flooding then CDP LLDP capable devices can hear each other only if they are in the same VLAN A CDP LLDP capable device may receive advertisement from more than one device if the CDP LLDP incapable devices flood the CDP LLDP packets Configuring LLDP This section describes how to configure LLDP It covers the following topics LLDP Overview Setting LLDP Properties Editing LLDP Port Settings LLDP MED Network Policy Configuring LLDP MED Port Settings Displaying LLDP Port Status Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 95 Administration Discovery Configuring LLDP Displaying LLDP Local Information Displaying LLDP Neighbors Information Accessing LLDP Statistics LLDP Overloading LLDP Overview LLDP is a protocol that enables network managers to troubleshoot and enhance network management in multi vendor environments LLDP standardizes methods for network devices to advertise themselves to other systems and to store discovered information LLDP enables a device to advertise its identification configuration and capabilities to neighboring devices that then store the data in a Management Information Base MIB The network management system models the topology of the network by querying these MIB databases LLDP is a link layer protocol By default the device
163. FTP For example if the file extension specified is xyz files with the xyz extension are downloaded using SCP and files with the other extensions are downloaded using TFTP TFTP Only The download is done through TFTP regardless of the file extension of the configuration file name SCP Only tThe download is done through SCP over SSH regardless of the file extension of the configuration file name SSH Client Authentication Parameters By default remote SSH server authentication is disabled so that the device accepts any remote SSH server out of the box You can enable remote SSH server authentication to only allow connections from servers found in the trusted server list SSH Client Authentication parameters are required to access the SSH server by the client which is the device The default SSH Client authentication parameters are SSH Authentication method by username password SSH username anonymous SSH password anonymous The SSH Client authentication parameters can also be used when downloading a file for manual download a download that is not performed through the DHCP Auto Configuration feature Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration File Management 4 Auto Configuration via DHCP Auto Configuration Process When the Auto Configuration process is triggered the following sequence of events occurs The DHCP server
164. For example the IPv6 Multicast address FF00 1 122 3344 is mapped to Layer 2 Multicast 33 33 11 22 33 44 Defining Multicast Properties The Properties page enables you to configure the Bridge Multicast filtering status By default all Multicast frames are flooded to all ports of the VLAN To selectively forward only to relevant ports and filter drop the Multicast on the rest of the ports enable Bridge Multicast filtering status in the Properties page If filtering is enabled Multicast frames are forwarded to a subset of the ports in the relevant VLAN as defined in the Multicast Forwarding Data Base Multicast filtering is enforced on all traffic By default such traffic is flooded to all relevant ports but you can limit forwarding to a smaller subset Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 253 16 Multicast Defining Multicast Properties A common way of representing Multicast membership is the S G notation where S is the single source sending a Multicast stream of data and G is the IPv4 or IPv6 group address If a Multicast client can receive Multicast traffic from any source of a specific Multicast group this is saved as G The following are ways of forwarding Multicast frames MAC Group Address Based on the destination MAC address in the Ethernet frame NOTE As mentioned before one or more IP Multicast group addresses can be mapped to a MA
165. Go The Dynamic MAC Address Table is queried and the results are displayed To delete all of the dynamic MAC addresses click Clear Table 248 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Managing MAC Address Tables 1 5 Defining Reserved MAC Addresses Defining Reserved MAC Addresses When the device receives a frame with a Destination MAC address that belongs to a reserved range per the IEEE standard the frame can be discarded or bridged The entry in the Reserved MAC Address Table can either specify the reserved MAC address or the reserved MAC address and a frame type To add an entry for a reserved MAC address STEP 1 Click MAC Address Tables gt Reserved MAC Addresses The Reserved MAC Addresses page opens STEP 2 Click Add STEP 3 Enter the values for the following fields MAC Address Select the MAC address to be reserved Frame Type Select a frame type based on the following criteria Ethernet V2 Applies to Ethernet V2 packets with the specific MAC address LLC Applies to Logical Link Control LLC packets with the specific MAC address LLC SNAP Applies to Logical Link Control Sub Network Access Protocol LLC SNAP packets with the specific MAC address Al Applies to all packets with the specific MAC address Action Select one of the following actions to be taken upon receiving a packet that matches the selected crite
166. H Trusted Servers list If the SSH server authentication process is enabled and the SSH server is not found in the SSH Trusted Servers list the Auto Configuration process is halted Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 53 Administration File Management Auto Configuration via DHCP f the information is available the TFTP SCP server is accessed to download the file from it The download process is done only if the new configuration filename is different from the current configuration filename even if the current configuration file is empty A SYSLOG message is generated acknowledging that the Auto Configuration process is completed Configuring DHCP Auto Configuration Workflow To configure DHCP Auto Configuration 1 Configure the DHCPv4 and or DHCPV6 servers to send the required options this process is not described in this guide 2 Configure Auto Configuration parameters 3 Define the device as a DHCPV4 client in the Defining an IPv4 Interface lt 300 500 gt in Layer 2 System Mode or Defining IPv4 Interface in Layer 3 System Mode lt 300 500 gt pages and or define the device as a DHCPV6 client in the IPv6 Interface page Web Configuration The DHCP Auto Configuration page is used to perform the following actions when the information is not provided ina DHCP message Enable the DHCP auto configuration feature Specify the download
167. HCP Snooping Packet Handling Packet Type Arriving from Arriving from Trusted Ingress Untrusted Ingress Interface Interface DHCPDISCOVER Forward to trusted Forwarded to trusted interfaces interfaces only only DHCPOFFER Filter Forward the packet according to DHCP information If the destination address is unknown the packet is filtered DHCPREQUEST Forward to trusted Forward to trusted interfaces interfaces only only DHCPACK Filter Same as DHCPOFFER and an entry is added to the DHCP Snooping Binding database DHCPNAK Filter Same as DHCPOFFER Remove entry if exists DHCPDECLINE Check if there is Forward to trusted interfaces only information in the database If the information exists and does not match the interface on which the message was received the packet is filtered Otherwise the packet is forwarded to trusted interfaces only and the entry is removed from database Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 287 IP Configuration IPv4 Management and Interfaces Packet Type Arriving from Arriving from Trusted Ingress Untrusted Ingress Interface Interface DHCPRELEASE Same as Same as DHCPDECLINE DHCPDECLINE DHCPINFORM Forward to trusted Forward to trusted interfaces interfaces only only DHCPLEASEQUE Filtered Forward RY DHCP Snooping Along With DHCP Relay If
168. HTTPS that uses the facilities provided by the browser FTP that requires a TFTP server Secure Copy Protocol SCP that requires an SCP server If anew language file was loaded onto the device the new language can be selected from the drop down menu It is not necessary to reboot the device There are two firmware images stored on the device One of the images is identified as the active image and other image is identified as the inactive image When you upgrade the firmware the new image always replaces the image identified as the inactive image Even after uploading new firmware on the device the device continues to boot by using the active image the old version until you change the status of the new image to be the active image by using the procedure in the Active Image lt 300 500 gt section Then boot the device 38 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration File Management 4 Upgrade Backup Firmware Language STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 Upgrade Backing Firmware or Language File To upgrade or backup a software image or language file Click Administration gt File Management gt Upgrade Backup Firmware Language Click the Transfer Method Proceed as follows If you selected TFTP go to STEP 3 If you selected via HTTP HTTPS go to STEP 4 If you selected via SCP go to STEP 5 If you selected via TFTP enter the parameters as des
169. IP Address Name Enter either the IP address of the SSH server or its name depending on what was selected in Server Definition Username tThis must match the username on the server Old Password tThis must match the password on the server New Password Enter the new password and confirm it in the Confirm Password field STEP 3 Click Apply The password on the SSH server is modified 467 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security SSH Server This section describes how to establish an SSH session on the device It covers the following topics Overview Common Tasks SSH Server Configuration Pages Overview The SSH Server feature enables users to create an SSH session to the device This is similar to establishing a telnet session except that the session is secured Public and private keys are automatically generated on the device These can be modified by the user The SSH session is opened using a special SSH client application such as PuTTY SSH Server can operate in the following modes By Internally generated RSA DSA Keys Default Setting An RSA and a DSA key are generated Users log on the SSH Server application and are automatically authenticated to open a session on the device when they supply the IP address of the device Public Key Mode Users are defined on the device Their RSA DSA keys are generated in an extern
170. IP address can be renewed any time after it is assigned by a DHCP server Note that depending on your DHCP server configuration the device might receive a new IP address after the renewal that requires setting the web based configuration utility to the new IP address Auto Configuration via DHCP Displays status of Auto Configuration feature You can configure this from Administration gt File Management gt DHCP Auto Configuration STEP 3 Click Apply The IPv4 interface settings are written to the Running Configuration file Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 273 IP Configuration IPv4 Management and Interfaces Defining IPv4 Interface in Layer 3 System Mode The IPv4 Interface page is used when the device is in Layer 3 system mode This mode enables configuring multiple IP addresses for device management and provides routing services The IP address can be configured on a port a LAG VLAN or loopback interface Operating in Layer 3 mode the device routes traffic between the directly attached IP subnets configured on the device The device continues to bridge traffic between devices in the same VLAN Additional IPv4 routes for routing to non directly attached subnets can be configured in the IPv4 Static Routes page NOTE The device software consumes one VLAN ID VID for every IP address configured on a port or LAG The device takes the first VID that i
171. IPv4 IP Multicast Group Address equals to Define the IP address of the Multicast group to be displayed This is only relevant when the Forwarding mode is S G Source IP Address equals to Define the source IP address of the sending device If mode is S G enter the sender S This together with the IP Group Address is the Multicast group ID S G to be displayed If mode is G enter an to indicate that the Multicast group is only defined by destination Click Go The results are displayed in the lower block When Bonjour and IGMP are enabled on the device in Layer 2 system mode the IP Multicast address of Bonjour appears Click Go The results are displayed in the lower block Click Add to add a static IP Multicast Group Address Enter the parameters VLAN ID Defines the VLAN ID of the group to be added IP Version Select the IP address type IP Multicast Group Address Define the IP address of the new Multicast group Source Specific Indicates that the entry contains a specific source and adds the address in the IP Source Address field If not the entry is added as a G entry an IP group address from any IP source Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 257 16 Multicast Configuring IGMP Snooping Source IP Address Defines the source address to be included STEP 6 Click Apply The IP Multicast group is added and
172. IPv4 routing Non IP Rules In Use Number of TCAM entries used for non IP rules Maximum Number of available TCAM entries that can be used for non IP rules Health See Health Managing RMON RMON Remote Networking Monitoring is an SNMP specification that enables an SNMP agent in the device to proactively monitor traffic statistics over a given period and send traps to an SNMP manager The local SNMP agent compares actual real time counters against predefined thresholds and generates alarms without the need for polling by a central SNMP management platform This is an effective mechanism for proactive management provided that you have the correct thresholds set relative to your network s base line RMON decreases the traffic between the manager and the device because the SNMP manager does not have to poll the device frequently for information and enables the manager to get timely status reports because the device reports events as they occur With this feature you can perform the following actions View the current statistics Since the counter values were cleared You can also collect the values of these counters over a period of time and then view the table of collected data where each collected set is a single line of the History tab Define interesting changes in counter values such as reached a certain number of late collisions defines the alarm and then specify what action to perform when
173. If Port is selected the options are Rx Only Port mirroring on incoming packets Tx Only Port mirroring on outgoing packets Tx and Rx Port mirroring on both incoming and outgoing packets STEP 4 Click Apply Port mirroring is added to the Running Configuration Viewing CPU Utilization and Secure Core Technology This section describes the Secure Core Technology SCT and how to view CPU usage The device handles the following types of traffic in addition to end user traffic Management traffic Protocol traffic Snooping traffic 90 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration Diagnostics 7 Viewing CPU Utilization and Secure Core Technology STEP 1 STEP 2 Excessive traffic burdens the CPU and might prevent normal device operation The device uses the Secure Core Technology SCT feature to ensure that the device receives and processes management and protocol traffic no matter how much total traffic is received SCT is enabled by default on the device and cannot be disabled There are no interactions with other features To display CPU utilization Click Administration gt Diagnostics gt CPU Utilization The CPU Utilization page appears The CPU Input Rate field displays the rate of input frames to the CPU per second The window contains a graph of the CPU utilization The Y axis is percentage of usage and the X
174. LDP publishing option for the port The values are Tx Only Publishes but does not discover Rx Only Discovers but does not publish Tx amp Rx Publishes and discovers Disable Indicates that LLDP is disabled on the port Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration Discovery Configuring LLDP 8 SNMP Notification Select Enable to send notifications to SNMP notification recipients for example an SNMP managing system when there is a topology change The time interval between notifications is entered in the Topology Change SNMP Notification Interval field in the LLDP Properties page Define SNMP Notification Recipients by using the SNMP gt Notification Recipient v1 2 and or SNMP gt Notification Recipient v3 page Available Optional TLVs Select the information to be published by the device by moving the TLV to the Selected Optional TLVs list The available TLVs contain the following information Port Description Information about the port including manufacturer product name and hardware software version System Name System s assigned name in alpha numeric format The value equals the sysName object System Description Description of the network entity in alpha numeric format This includes the system s name and versions of the hardware operating system and networking software supported by the
175. List The following fields are displayed for each DNS server configured on the device Domain Name Name of domain that can be used on the device Source Source of the server s IP address static or DHCPv4 or DHCP v6 for this domain Interface Interface of the server s IP address for this domain Preference This is the order in which the domains are used from low to high This effectively determines the order in which unqualified names are completed during DNS queries Host Mapping Host name IP address mappings are stored in the Host Mapping Table DNS cache This cache can contain the following type of entries Static Entries These are mapping pairs that were manually added to the cache There can be up to 64 static entries Dynamic Entries These are mapping pairs that were either added by the system as a result of being used by the user or and an entry for each IP address configured on the device by DHCP There can be 256 dynamic entries Name resolution always begins by checking static entries continues by checking the dynamic entries and ends by sending requests to the external DNS server Eight IP addresses are supported per DNS server per host name 318 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration 1 7 Domain Name To add a host name and its IP address STEP 1 Click IP Configuration gt Doma
176. MAC Multicast page but two entries on this page To query for a IP Multicast group STEP 1 Click Multicast gt IGMP MLD IP Multicast Group STEP 2 Set the type of snooping group for which to search IGMP or MLD STEP 3 Enter some or all of following query filter criteria Group Address equals to Defines the Multicast group MAC address or IP address to query Source Address equals to Defines the sender address to query VLAN ID equals to Defines the VLAN ID to query STEP 4 Click Go The following fields are displayed for each Multicast group VLAN The VLAN ID Group Address The Multicast group MAC address or IP address Source Address The sender address for all of the specified group ports Included Ports The list of destination ports for the Multicast stream Excluded Ports The list of ports not included in the group Compatibility Mode The oldest IGMP MLD version of registration from the hosts the device receives on the IP group address Defining Multicast Router Ports A Multicast router Mrouter port is a port that connects to a Multicast router The device includes the Multicast router port s numbers when it forwards the Multicast streams and IGMP MLD registration messages This is required so that the Multicast routers can in turn forward the Multicast streams and propagate the registration messages to other subnets 264 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Manage
177. ML SNMP Secure XML SNMP Insecure XML SNMP Secure XML SNMP level 15 users Insecure Secure Insecure Secure Menu CLI and Password Recovery Parallel Secured Management Channel SSH GUI HTTPS XML HTTPS Secure XML SNMP SCP HTTPS based file transfer The Menu CLI interface is only allowed to users if their read permissions are Both or Plaintext Only Other users are rejected Sensitive data in the Menu CLI is always displayed as plaintext Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security Secure Sensitive Data Management 2 1 Configuring SSD Password recovery is currently activated from the boot menu and allows the user to log on to the terminal without authentication If SSD is supported this option is only permitted if the local passphrase is identical to the default passphrase If a device is configured with a user defined passphrase the user is unable to activate password recovery Configuring SSD The SSD feature is configured in the following pages SSD properties are set in the Properties page SSD rules are defined in the SSD Rules page SSD Properties Only users with SSD read permission of Plaintext only or Both are allowed to set SSD properties To configure global SSD properties STEP 1 Click Security gt Secure Sensitive Data Management gt Properties The following field appears Current Local P
178. Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration Traceroute Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 79 Administration Traceroute 80 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration Traceroute Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 81 Administration Traceroute 82 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration Traceroute Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 83 Administration Time Settings NOTE Synchronized system clocks provide a frame of reference between all devices on the network Network time synchronization is critical because every aspect of managing securing planning and debugging a network involves determining when events occur Without synchronized clocks accurately correlating log files between devices when tracking security breaches or network usage is impossible Synchronized time also reduces confusion in shared file systems as it is important for the modification times to be consistent regardless of the machine on which the file systems reside For these reasons it is important that the time configured on
179. Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 387 19 Security 802 1X Authentication Authenticator Overview WEB Based Authentication WEB based authentication is used to authenticate end users who request access to a network through a switch It enables clients directly connected to the switch to be authenticated using a captive portal mechanism before the client is given access to the network Web based authentication is client based authentication and is supported in the multi sessions mode in both Layer 2 and Layer 3 This method of authentication is enabled per port and when a port is enabled each host must authenticate itself in order to access the network So on an enabled port you can have authenticated and unauthenticated hosts When web based authentication is enabled on a port the switch drops all traffic coming onto the port from unauthorized clients except for ARP DHCP DNS and NETBIOS packets These packets are allowed to be forwarded by the switch so that even unauthorized clients can get an IP address and be able to resolve the host or domain names All HTTP HTTPS over IPv4 packets from unauthorized clients are trapped to the CPU on the switch When an end user requests access to the network if Web based authentication is enabled on the port a login page is displayed before the requested page is displayed The user must enter his username password which is authenticated by a RADIUS server using the EAP
180. Management and Interfaces DHCP Relay DHCP Relay VLAN with IP Address VLAN without IP Address Option 82 Packetissent Packetissent Relay Relay insertion without with the discards disabled Option 82 original Option 82 1 If reply Option 82 originates in Bridge device Packet is sent packet is sent without without Option 82 Option 82 2 If reply does not originate in device packet is discarded Bridge Packet is sent with the original Option 82 Option 82 Packetis sent Relay Relay Relay insertion without Packetissent discards Packet is sent enabled Option 82 without Option 82 without Option 82 f Option 82 Bridge Bridge Packetis sent Bridge Packet is sent without Packet is sent with the Option 82 with the Option 82 Option 82 284 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration IPv4 Management and Interfaces 17 The following describes how DHCP reply packets are handled when both DHCP Snooping and DHCP Relay are enabled DHCP Relay VLAN with IP Address DHCP Relay VLAN without IP Address Packet Packet Packet Packet arrives with arrives arrives with arrives Option 82 without Option 82 without Option 82 Option 82 Option Packet is Packet is Relay Relay 82 sent without sent withthe discards a Insertion Option 82 original Option 82 1 I
181. N when the default configuration does not apply Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version VLAN Management Voice VLAN 13 STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP Workflow1 To configure Auto Voice VLAN Open the VLAN Management gt Voice VLAN gt Properties page Select the Voice VLAN ID It cannot be set to VLAN ID 1 this step is not required for dynamic Voice VLAN Set Dynamic Voice VLAN to Enable Auto Voice VLAN Select the Auto Voice VLAN Activation method NOTE If the device is currently in Telephony OUI mode you must disable it before you can configure Auto Voice Vlan Click Apply Configure Smartports as described in the Common Smartport Tasks section Configure LLDP CDP as described in the Configuring LLDP and Configuring CDP sections respectively Enable the Smartport feature on the relevant ports using the Smartport gt Interface Settings page NOTE Step 7 and Step 8 are optional as they are enabled by default Workflow2 To configure the Telephony OUI Method Open the VLAN Management gt Voice VLAN gt Properties page Set Dynamic Voice VLAN to Enable Telephony OUI NOTE If the device is currently in Auto Voice VLAN mode you must disable it before you can enable Telephony OUI Configure Telephony OUI in the Telephony OUI page Configure Telephony OUI VLAN membership for ports i
182. P 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 Select an interface and select the reception transmission options Click Apply to save the settings to the Running Configuration file Defining SNTP Authentication SNTP clients can authenticate responses by using HMAC MD5 An SNTP server is associated with a key which is used as input together with the response itself to the MD5 function the result of the MD5 is also included in the response packet The SNTP Authentication page enables configuration of the authentication keys that are used when communicating with an SNTP server that requires authentication The authentication key is created on the SNTP server in a separate process that depends on the type of SNTP server you are using Consult with the SNTP server system administrator for more information Workflow Enable authentication in the SNTP Authentication page Create a key in the SNTP Authentication page Associate this key with an SNTP server in the SNTP Unicast page To enable SNTP authentication and define keys Click Administration gt Time Settings gt SNTP Authentication Select SNTP Authentication to support authentication of an SNTP session between the device and an SNTP server Click Apply to update the device Click Add Enter the following parameters Authentication Key ID Enter the number used to identify this SNTP authentication key internally Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 5
183. P 2 Click Add STEP 3 Enter values for the following fields Destination IP Prefix Enter the destination IP address prefix Mask Select and enter information for one of the following Network Mask The IP route prefix for the destination IP Prefix Length The IP route prefix for the destination IP Route Type Select the route type Reject Rejects the route and stops routing to the destination network via all gateways This ensures that if a frame arrives with the destination IP of this route it is dropped Remote l ndicates that the route is a remote path Next Hop Router IP Address Enter the next hop IP address or IP alias on the route NOTE You cannot configure a static route through a directly connected IP subnet where the device gets its IP address from a DHCP server Metric Enter the administrative distance to the next hop The range is 1 255 STEP 4 Click Apply The IP Static route is saved to the Running Configuration file ARP The device maintains an ARP Address Resolution Protocol table for all known devices that reside in the IP subnets directly connected to it A directly connected IP subnet is the subnet to which an IP v4 interface of the device is connected When the device is required to send route a packet to a local device it searches the ARP table to obtain the MAC address of the device The ARP table contains both static and dynamic addresses Static addresses are manually configured
184. P Phone 0x80 ip_phone Remotely Managed Device 0x100 Ignore CAST Phone Port 0x200 Ignore Two Port MAC Relay 0x400 Ignore LLDP Capabilities Mapping to Smartport Type Capability Name LLDP Bit Smartport Type Other 1 Ignore Repeater IETF RFC 2108 2 Ignore MAC Bridge IEEE Std 802 1D 3 Switch WLAN Access Point IEEE Std 802 11 4 Wireless Access MIB Point Router IETF RFC 1812 5 Router Telephone IETF RFC 4293 6 ip_phone DOCSIS cable device IETF RFC 4639 7 Ignore and IETF RFC 4546 Station Only IETF RFC 4293 8 Host C VLAN Component of a VLAN Bridge 9 Switch IEEE Std 802 1Q S VLAN Component of a VLAN Bridge 10 Switch IEEE Std 802 1Q Two port MAC Relay TPMR IEEE Std 11 Ignore 802 1Q Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 165 17 Smartport Auto Smartport NOTE LLDP Capabilities Mapping to Smartport Type Continued Capability Name LLDP Bit Smartport Type Reserved 12 16 Ignore If only the IP Phone and Host bits are set then the Smartport type is ip_phone_desktop Multiple Devices Attached to the Port The device derives the Smartport type of a connected device via the capabilities the device advertises in its CDP and or LLDP packets If multiple devices are connected to the device through one interface Auto Smartport considers each capability advertisement it receives through that interface in order to assign the corr
185. P addresses to reject The values are Network Mask Network mask in dotted decimal format Prefix Length Enter the prefix of the IP address to define the range of IP addresses for which Denial of Service prevention is enabled STEP 5 Click Apply The Martian addresses are written to the Running Configuration file SYN Filtering The SYN Filtering page enables filtering TCP packets that contain a SYN flag and are destined for one or more ports To define a SYN filter STEP 1 Click Security gt Denial of Service Prevention gt SYN Filtering STEP 2 Click Add STEP 3 Enter the parameters Interface Select the interface on which the filter is defined IPv4 Address Enter the IP address for which the filter is defined or select All Addresses Network Mask Enter the network mask for which the filter is enabled in IP address format TCP Port Select the destination TCP port being filtered Known Ports Select a port from the list Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 363 Security Denial of Service Prevention User Defined Enter a port number All Ports Select to indicate that all ports are filtered STEP 4 Click Apply The SYN filter is defined and the Running Configuration file is updated SYN Rate Protection The SYN Rate Protection page enables limiting the number of SYN packets received on the in
186. P local port status advertised on a port STEP 1 Click Administration gt Discovery LLDP gt LLDP Local Information STEP 2 Onthe bottom of the page click LLDP Port Status Table 104 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration Discovery 8 Configuring LLDP Click LLDP Local Information Details to see the details of the LLDP and LLDP MED TLVs sent to the neighbor Click LLDP Neighbor Information Details to see the details of the LLDP and LLDP MED TLVs received from the neighbor STEP 3 Select the desired port from the Port list This page displays the following fields Global Chassis ID Subtype Type of chassis ID For example the MAC address Chassis ID Identifier of chassis Where the chassis ID subtype is a MAC address the MAC address of the device appears System Name Name of device System Description Description of the device in alpha numeric format Supported System Capabilities Primary functions of the device such as Bridge WLAN AP or Router Enabled System Capabilities Primary enabled function s of the device Port ID Subtype Type of the port identifier that is shown Port ID Identifier of port Port Description Information about the port including manufacturer product name and hardware software version Management Address Displays the table of addresses of the local LLDP agent O
187. Pv3 page enable configuring the destination to which SNMP notifications are sent and the types of SNMP notifications that are sent to each destination traps or informs The Add Edit pop ups enable configuring the attributes of the notifications An SNMP notification is a message sent from the device to the SNMP management station indicating that a certain event has occurred such as a link up down 535 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version SNMP Notification Recipients 26 It is also possible to filter certain notifications This can be done by creating a filter in the Notification Filter page and attaching it to an SNMP notification recipient The notification filter enables filtering the type of SNMP notifications that are sent to the management station based on the OID of the notification that is about to be sent Defining SNMPv1 2 Notification Recipients To define a recipient in SNMPv1 2 STEP 1 Click SNMP gt Notification Recipients SNMP v1 2 This page displays recipients for SNMP v1 2 STEP 2 Enter the following fields Informs IP v4 Source Interface Select the source interface whose IPv4 address will be used as the source IPv4 address in inform messages for communication with IPv4 SNMP servers Traps IPv4 Source Interface Select the source interface whose IPv6 address will be used as the source IPv6 address in trap messages for commu
188. Pv6 is used The options are Link Local The IPv6 address uniquely identifies hosts on a single network link A link local address has a prefix of FE80 is not routable and can be used for communication only on the local network Only one link local address is supported If a link local address exists on the interface this entry replaces the address in the configuration Global The IPv6 address is a global Unicast IPV6 type that is visible and reachable from other networks Link Local Interface Select the link local interface if IPv6 Address Type Link Local is selected from the list Server IP Address Name Enter the IP address or name of the TACACS server 336 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security Configuring TACACS 18 Priority Enter the order in which this TACACS server is used Zero is the highest priority TACACS server and is the first server used If it cannot establish a session with the high priority server the device tries the next highest priority server Source IP Address For SG500X devices and other devices in Layer 3 system mode Select to use either the default device source address or one of the available device IP addresses for communication with the TACACS server Key String Enter the default key string used for authenticating and encrypting between the device and the TACACS server This key must mat
189. STEP STEP STEP When disabling QoS the shaper and queue setting WRR SP bandwidth setting are reset to default values All other user configurations remain intact QoS Workflow To configure general QoS parameters perform the following Choose the QoS mode Basic Advanced or Disabled as described in the QoS Modes section for the system by using the QoS Properties page The following steps in the workflow assume that you have chosen to enable QoS Assign each interface a default CoS priority by using the QoS Properties page Assign the schedule method Strict Priority or WRR and bandwidth allocation for WRR to the egress queues by using the Queue page Designate an egress queue to each IP DSCP TC value with the DSCP to Queue page If the device is in DSCP trusted mode incoming packets are put into the egress queues based on the their DSCP TC value Designate an egress queue to each CoS 802 1p priority If the device is in CoS 802 1 trusted mode all incoming packets are put into the designated egress queues according to the CoS 802 1p priority in the packets This is done by using the CoS 802 1p to Queue page If required for Layer 3 traffic only assign a queue to each DSCP TC value by using the DSCP to Queue page Enter bandwidth and rate limits in the following pages a Set egress shaping per queue by using the Egress Shaping Per Queue page b Setingress rate limit and egress shaping rate per port
190. Service gt QoS Advanced Mode gt Aggregate Policer This page displays the existing aggregate policers Click Add Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Quality of Service 2 5 QoS Advanced Mode STEP 3 Enter the parameters Aggregate Policer Name Enter the name of the Aggregate Policer Ingress Committed Information Rate CIR Enter the maximum bandwidth allowed in bits per second See the description of this in the Bandwidth page Ingress Committed Burst Size CBS Enter the maximum burst size even if it goes beyond the CIR in bytes See the description of this in the Bandwidth page Exceed Action Select the action to be performed on incoming packets that exceed the CIR Possible values are Forward Packets exceeding the defined CIR value are forwarded Drop Packets exceeding the defined CIR value are dropped Out of Profile DSCP The DSCP values of packets exceeding the defined CIR value are remapped to a value based on the Out Of Profile DSCP Mapping Table STEP 4 Click Apply The Running Configuration file is updated Configuring a Policy The Policy Table Map page displays the list of advanced QoS polices defined in the system The page also allows you to create and delete polices Only those policies that are bound to an interface are active see Policy Binding page Each policy consists of One or more class
191. Settings page Select Restore Defaults to restore the factory CoS default setting for this interface STEP 4 Click Apply The Running Configuration file is updated To set QoS on an interface select it and click Edit STEP 1 Enter the parameters Interface Select the port or LAG Default CoS Select the default CoS Class of Service value to be assigned for incoming packets that do not have a VLAN tag 493 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Quality of Service 2 5 Configuring QoS General STEP 2 Click Apply The interface default CoS value is saved to Running Configuration file Configuring QoS Queues The device supports 4 for each interface Queue number four is the highest priority queue Queue number one is the lowest priority queue There are two ways of determining how traffic in queues is handled Strict Priority and Weighted Round Robin WRR Strict Priority Egress traffic from the highest priority queue is transmitted first Traffic from the lower queues is processed only after the highest queue has been transmitted thus providing the highest level of priority of traffic to the highest numbered queue Weighted Round Robin WRR In WRR mode the number of packets sent from the queue is proportional to the weight of the queue the higher the weight the more frames are sent For example if there are a maximum of f
192. Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 333 Security Configuring TACACS The following information is sent to the TACACS server by the device when a user logs in or out Table 2 Argument Description In Start In Stop Message Message task_id A unique accounting session Yes Yes identifier user Username that is entered for Yes Yes login authentication rem addr P address of the user Yes Yes elapsed time Indicates how long the user was No Yes logged in reason Reports why the session was No Yes terminated Defaults The following defaults are relevant to this feature No default TACACS server is defined by default If you configure a TACACS server the accounting feature is disabled by default Interactions With Other Features You cannot enable accounting on both a RADIUS and TACACS server Workflow To use a TACACS server do the following STEP 1 Open an account for a user on the TACACS server STEP 2 Configure that server along with the other parameters in the TACACS and Add TACACS Server pages 334 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security 1 8 Configuring TACACS STEP 3 Select TACACS in the Management Access Authentication page so that when a user logs onto the device authentication is performed on the TACACS server instead of
193. Spanning Tree gt MSTP Interface Settings STEP 2 Enter the parameters Instance equals To Select the MSTP instance to be configured Interface Type equals to Select whether to display the list of ports or LAGs STEP 3 Click Go The MSTP parameters for the interfaces on the instance are displayed STEP 4 Select an interface and click Edit 242 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Spanning Tree Defining MSTP Interface Settings 14 STEP 5 Enter the parameters Instance ID Select the MST instance to be configured Interface Select the interface for which the MSTI settings are to be defined Interface Priority Set the port priority for the specified interface and MST instance Path Cost Enter the port contribution to the root path cost in the User Defined textbox or select Use Default to use the default value Port State Displays the MSTP status of the specific port ona specific MST instance The parameters are defined as Disabled STP is currently disabled Blocking The port on this instance is currently blocked and cannot forward traffic with the exception of BPDU data or learn MAC addresses Listening The port on this instance is in Listening mode The port cannot forward traffic and cannot learn MAC addresses Learning The port on this instance is in Learning mode The port cannot forward traffic but i
194. Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 301 17 IP Configuration IPv6 Management and Interfaces STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 DHCPv6 Client Settings Unique Identifier DUID Format This is the identifier of the DHCP client that is used by the DHCP server to locate the client It can be in one of the following formats Link Layer Default If you select this option the MAC address of the device is used Enterprise Number lf you select this option enter the following fields Enterprise Number The vendors registered Private Enterprise number as maintained by IANA Identifier The vendor defined hex string up to 64 hex characters If the number of the character is not even a zero is added at the right Each 2 hex characters can be separated by a period or colon DHCPv 6 Unique Identifier DUID Displays the identifier selected IPv6 Interface An IPv6 interface can be configured on a port LAG VLAN loopback interface or tunnel A tunnel interface is configured with an IPv6 address based on the settings defined in the IPv6 Tunnel page To define an IP v6 interface In Layer 2 system mode click Administration gt Management Interface gt IPv6 Interfaces In Layer 3 system mode click IP Configuration gt IPv6 Management and Interfaces gt IPv6 Interfaces Click Add to add a new interface on which interface IPv6 is enabled Enter the fields IPv6 Interface
195. TEP 1 Click SNMP gt Notification Recipients SNMPv3 This page displays recipients for SNMPv3 Informs IP v4 Source Interface Select the source interface whose IPv4 address will be used as the source IPv4 address in inform messages for communication with IPv4 SNMP servers Traps IPv4 Source Interface Select the source interface whose IPv6 address will be used as the source IPv6 address in trap messages for communication with IPv6 SNMP servers Informs IP v6 Source Interface Select the source interface whose IPv4 address will be used as the source IPv4 address in inform messages for communication with IPv4 SNMP servers Traps IPv6 Source Interface Select the source interface whose IPv6 address will be used as the source IPv6 address in trap messages for communication with IPv6 SNMP servers STEP 2 Click Add STEP 3 Enter the parameters Server Definition Select whether to specify the remote log server by IP address or name IP Version Select either IPv4 or IPv6 IPv6 Address Type Select the IPv6 address type if IPv6 is used The options are Link Local The IPv6 address uniquely identifies hosts on a single network link A link local address has a prefix of FE80 is not routable and can be used for communication only on the local network Only one link local address is supported If a link local address exists on the interface this entry replaces the address in the configuration Global The IPv6 addre
196. TP pages applies if the system STP mode is MSTP Up to seven MST instances predefined from 1 7 can be defined on 300 Series switches in addition to instance zero 240 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Spanning Tree 1 4 Defining MSTP Instance Settings For those VLANs that are not explicitly mapped to one of the MST instances the device automatically maps them to the CIST Core and Internal Spanning Tree instance The CIST instance is MST instance 0 To map VLANs to MST Instances STEP 1 Click Spanning Tree gt VLAN to MSTP Instance The VLAN to MSTP Instance page contains the following fields MST Instance ID AII MST instances are displayed VLANs AIll VLANs belonging to the MST instance are displayed STEP 2 Toadda VLAN to an MSTP instance select the MST instance and click Edit STEP 3 Enter the parameters MST Instance ID Select the MST instance VLANs Define the VLANs being mapped to this MST instance Action Define whether to Add map the VLAN to the MST instance or Remove it STEP 4 Click Apply The MSTP VLAN mappings are defined and the Running Configuration file is updated Defining MSTP Instance Settings The MSTP Instance Settings page enables you to configure and view parameters per MST instance This is the per instance equivalent to the Configuring STP Status and Global Settings To enter MSTP instance s
197. The options are Enable Enables Fast Link immediately Auto Enables Fast Link a few seconds after the interface becomes active This allows STP to resolve loops before enabling Fast Link Disable Disables Fast Link NOTE It is recommended to set the value to Auto so that the device sets the port to fast link mode if a host is connected to it or sets it as a regular STP port if connected to another device This helps avoid loops 234 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Spanning Tree 1 4 Defining Spanning Tree Interface Settings Root Guard Enables or disables Root Guard on the device The Root Guard option provides a way to enforce the root bridge placement in the network Root Guard ensures that the port on which this feature is enabled is the designated port Normally all root bridge ports are designated ports unless two or more ports of the root bridge are connected If the bridge receives superior BPDUs on a Root Guard enabled port Root Guard moves this port to a root inconsistent STP state This root inconsistent state is effectively equal to a listening state No traffic is forwarded across this port In this way Root Guard enforces the position of the root bridge BPDU Guard Enables or disables the Bridge Protocol Data Unit BPDU Guard feature on the port The BPDU Guard enables you to enforce the STP domain borders and keep the
198. U Protection Mechanism Enabled indicates that SCT is enabled STEP 2 Click Details beside CPU Utilization to go to the CPU Utilization page and view CPU resource utilization information STEP 3 Click Edit beside TCP SYN Protection to go to the SYN Protection page and enable this feature STEP 4 Select DoS Prevention to enable the feature Disable Disable the feature System Level Prevention Enable that part of the feature that prevents attacks from Stacheldraht Distribution Invasor Trojan and Back Orifice Trojan STEP 5 If System Level Prevention or System Level and Interface Level Prevention is selected enable one or more of the following DoS Prevention options S tacheldraht Distribution Discards TCP packets with source TCP port equal to 16660 Invasor Trojan Discards TCP packets with destination TCP port equal to 2140 and source TCP port equal to 1024 Back Orifice Trojan Discards UDP packets with destination UDP port equal to 31337 and source UDP port equal to 1024 STEP 6 Click Apply The Denial of Service prevention Security Suite settings are written to the Running Configuration file f Interface Level Prevention is selected click the appropriate Edit button to configure the desired prevention 360 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security 1 8 Denial of Service Prevention SYN Protection The network ports might
199. UI QoS mode of voice VLAN To configure Telephony OUI on an interface STEP 1 Click VLAN Management gt Voice VLAN gt Telephony OUI Interface The Telephony OUI Interface page contains voice VLAN OUI parameters for all interfaces STEP 2 To configure an interface to be a candidate port of the telephony OUI based voice VLAN click Edit STEP 3 Enter the values for the following fields Interface Select an interface Telephony OUI VLAN Membership lf enabled the interface is a candidate port of the telephony OUI based voice VLAN When packets that match one of the configured telephony OUI are received the port is added to the voice VLAN Telephone OUI QoS Mode Select one of the following options All QoS attributes are applied on all packets that are classified to the Voice VLAN Telephony Source MAC Address QoS attributes are applied only on packets from IP phones Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 223 VLAN Management Access Port Multicast TV VLAN STEP 4 Click Apply The OUI is added Access Port Multicast TV VLAN Multicast TV VLANs enable Multicast transmissions to subscribers who are not on the same data VLAN Layer 2 isolated without replicating the Multicast transmission frames for each subscriber VLAN Subscribers who are not on the same data VLAN Layer 2 isolated and are connected to the device with differen
200. User Authentication Use this page to select an SSH user authentication method set a username and password on the device if the password method is selected or generate an RSA or DSA key if the public private key method is selected To select an authentication method and set the username password keys STEP 1 Click Security gt SSH Client gt SSH User Authentication STEP 2 Select an SSH User Authentication Method This is the global method defined for the secure copy SCP Select one of the options By Password fThis is the default setting If this is selected enter a password or retain the default one ByRSA Public Key If this is selected create an RSA public and Private key in the SSH User Key Table block By DSA Public Key If this is selected create a DSA public private key in the SSH User Key Table block STEP 3 Enter the Username no matter what method was selected or user the default username This must match the username defined on the SSH server STEP 4 If the By Password method was selected enter a password Encrypted or Plaintext or leave the default encrypted password STEP 5 Perform one of the following actions Apply tThe selected authentication methods are associated with the access method Restore Default Credentials The default username and password anonymous are restored Display Sensitive Data As Plaintext Sensitive data for the current page appears as plaintext
201. VLAN ID MLD Snooping Status Enable or disable MLD snooping on the VLAN The device monitors network traffic to determine which hosts have asked to be sent Multicast traffic The device performs MLD snooping only when MLD snooping and Bridge Multicast filtering are both enabled Operational MLD Snooping Status Displays the current status of MLD Snooping for the selected VLAN MRouter Ports Auto Learn Enable or disable Auto Learn for the Multicast router Query Robustness Enter the Robustness Variable value to be used if the device cannot read this value from messages sent by the elected querier 262 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Multicast 1 6 Querying IGMP MLD IP Multicast Group Operational Query Robustness Displays the robustness variable sent by the elected querier Query Interval Enter the Query Interval value to be used by the device if the device cannot derive the value from the messages sent by the elected querier Operational Query Interval tThe time interval in seconds between General Queries received from the elected querier Query Max Response Interval Enter Query Max Response delay to be used if the device cannot read the Max Response Time value from General Queries sent by the elected querier Operational Query Max Response Interval Displays the delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted in
202. VLAN is enabled Ports can be manually added to the voice VLAN by using basic VLAN configuration described in the Configuring VLAN Interface Setting section or by manually applying voice related Smartport macro to the ports Alternatively they can be added dynamically if the device is in Telephony OUI mode or has Auto Smartports enabled Dynamic Voice VLAN Modes The device supports two dynamic voice VLAN modes Telephony OUI Organization Unique Identifier mode and Auto Voice VLAN mode The two modes affect how voice VLAN and or voice VLAN port memberships are configured The two modes are mutually exclusive to each other Telephony OUI In Telephony OUI mode the voice VLAN must be a manually configured VLAN and cannot be the default VLAN When the device is in Telephony OUI mode and a port is manually configured as a candidate to join the voice VLAN the device dynamically adds the port to the voice VLAN if it receives a packet with a source MAC address matching to one of the configured telephony OUls An OUI is the first three bytes of an Ethernet MAC address For more information about Telephony OUI see Configuring Telephony OUI 212 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version VLAN Management 1 3 Voice VLAN Auto Voice VLAN In Auto Voice VLAN mode the voice VLAN can be either the default voice VLAN manually configured or learned from external devices s
203. VLAN to Port page the port is marked with an upper case P When the port is authenticated it receives membership in the VLAN in which it was configured To assign a port to one or more VLANs STEP 1 Click VLAN Management gt Port VLAN Membership STEP 2 Select interface type Port or LAG and click Go The following fields are displayed for all interfaces of the selected type Interface Port LAG ID Mode Interface VLAN mode that was selected in the Interface Settings page Administrative VLANs Drop down list that displays all VLANs of which the interface might be a member Operational VLANs Drop down list that displays all VLANs of which the interface is currently a member LAG If interface selected is Port displays the LAG in which it is a member STEP 3 Selecta port and click the Join VLAN button STEP 4 Enter the values for the following fields Interface Select a Port or LAG Mode Displays the port VLAN mode that was selected in the Interface Settings page Select VLAN To associate a port with a VLAN s move the VLAN ID s from the left list to the right list by using the arrow buttons The default VLAN might appear in the right list if it is tagged but it cannot be selected Tagging Select one of the following tagging PVID options 204 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version VLAN Management GVRP Settings 13
204. Vs to be advertised can be selected in the LLDP MED Interface Settings page To define the CDP interface settings Click Administration gt Discovery CDP gt Interface Settings This page contains the following CDP information for each interface CDP Status CDP publishing option for the port Reporting Conflicts with CDP Neighbors Displays the status of the reporting options that are enabled disabled in the Edit page Voice VLAN Native VLAN Duplex No of Neighbors Number of neighbors detected The bottom of the page has four buttons Copy Settings Select to copy a configuration from one port to another Edit Fields explained in Step 2 below CDP Local Information Details Takes you to the Administration gt Discovery CDP gt CDP Local Information page CDP Neighbor Information Details Takes you to the Administration gt Discovery CDP gt CDP Neighbor Information page STEP 2 Selecta port and click Edit Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration Discovery Configuring CDP This page provides the following fields Interface Select the interface to be defined CDP Status Select to enable disable the CDP publishing option for the port NOTE The next three fields are operational when the device has been set up to send traps to the management station Syslog Voice VLAN Mismatch Select to ena
205. a from a file SSD Control Block When a device creates a text based configuration file from its Startup or Running Configuration file it inserts an SSD control block into the file if a user requests the file is to include sensitive data The SSD control block which is protected from tampering contains SSD rules and SSD properties of the device creating the file A SSD control block starts and ends with ssd control start and ssd control end respectively Startup Configuration File The device currently supports copying from the Running Backup Mirror and Remote Configuration files to a Startup Configuration file The configurations in the Startup Configuration are effective and become the Running Configuration after reboot A user can retrieve the sensitive data encrypted or in plaintext from a startup configuration file subject to the SSD read permission and the current SSD read mode of the management session Read access of sensitive data in the startup configuration in any forms is excluded if the passphrase in the Startup Configuration file and the local passphrase are different SSD adds the following rules when copying the Backup Mirror and Remote Configuration files to the Startup Configuration file After a device is reset to factory default all of its configurations including the SSD rules and properties are reset to default Ifa source configuration file contains encrypted sensitive data but is missing an SSD
206. a port is shut down by UDLD it is automatically reactivated when the automatic recovery interval expires Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 149 10 Port Management Unidirectional Link Detection Usage Guidelines Usage Guidelines UDLD again begins running on the port If the link is still unidirectional UDLD shuts it down again after the UDLD expiration time expires for instance Manually You can reactivate a port in the Port Management gt Error Recovery Settings page Cisco does not recommend enabling UDLD on ports that are connected to devices on which UDLD is not supported or disabled Sending UDLD packets ona port connected to a device that does not support UDLD simply causes more traffic on the port without providing benefits In addition take the following into consideration when configuring UDLD Set the message time according to how urgent it is to shut down ports with a unidirectional link The lower the message time the more UDLD packets are sent and analyzed but the sooner the port is shut down if the link is unidirectional If you want UDLD to be enabled on a copper port you must enable it per port When you globally enable UDLD it is only enabled on fiber ports Set the UDLD mode to normal when you do not want to shut down ports unless it is known for sure that the link is unidirectional Set the UDLD mode to aggressive when you want
207. able displays the following fields Interface The IPv4 Interface of the directly connected IP subnet where the IP device resides IP Address The IP address of the IP device MAC Address The MAC address of the IP device Status Whether the entry was manually entered or dynamically learned STEP 4 Click Add STEP 5 Enter the parameters IP Version tThe IP address format supported by the host Only IP v4 is supported VLAN In Layer 2 displays the management VLAN ID Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 277 IP Configuration IPv4 Management and Interfaces For devices in Layer 2 mode there is only one directly connected IP subnet which is always in the management VLAN All the static and dynamic addresses in the ARP Table reside in the management VLAN Interface For devices in Layer 3 system mode an IPv4 interface can be configured on a port LAG or VLAN Select the desired interface from the list of configured IPv4 interfaces on the device IP Address Enter the IP address of the local device MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the local device STEP 6 Click Apply The ARP entry is saved to the Running Configuration file ARP Proxy The Proxy ARP technique is used by the device on a given IP subnet to answer ARP queries for a network address that is not on that network NOTE The ARP proxy feature is only available w
208. ables you to copy ina key from another device Delete Enables you to delete a key Details Enables you to view the generated key The Details window also enables you to click Display Sensitive Data as Plaintext If this is clicked the keys are displayed as plaintext and not in encrypted form If the key is already being displayed as plaintext you can click Display Sensitive Data as Encrypted to display the text in encrypted form STEP 4 If new keys were copied in from another click Apply The key s are stored in the Running Configuration file Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 472 Security SSH Server SSH Server Configuration Pages 473 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Access Control The Access Control List ACL feature is part of the security mechanism ACL definitions serve as one of the mechanisms to define traffic flows that are givena specific Quality of Service QoS For more information see Quality of Service ACLs enable network managers to define patterns filter and actions for ingress traffic Packets entering the device on a port or LAG with an active ACL are either admitted or denied entry This section contains the following topics Access Control Lists Defining MAC based ACLs IPv4 based ACLs IPv6 Based ACLs Defining ACL Binding Access C
209. ace a second language as described in Upgrade Backup Firmware Language section View the firmware image currently in use or select the image to be used in the next reboot as described in the Active Image lt 300 500 gt section Save configuration files on the device to a location on another device as described in the Download Backup Configuration Log section Clear the Startup Configuration or Backup Configuration file types as described in the Configuration Files Properties section Copy one configuration file type to another configuration file type as described in the Copy Save Configuration section Enable automatically uploading a configuration file from a DHCP server to the device as described in the Auto Configuration via DHCP section Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 37 Administration File Management Upgrade Backup Firmware Language This section covers the following topics Upgrade Backup Firmware Language Active Image lt 300 500 gt Download Backup Configuration Log Configuration Files Properties Copy Save Configuration Auto Configuration via DHCP Upgrade Backup Firmware Language The Upgrade Backup Firmware Language process can be used to Upgrade or backup the firmware image Upgrade or backup the boot code Import or upgrade a second language file The following methods for transferring files are supported HTTP
210. ackets are handled when DHCP Snooping is not enabled and DHCP Relay is enabled DHCP Relay DHCP Relay VLAN with IP Address VLAN without IP Address Packet arrives Packetarrives Packetarrives Packet arrives without Option with Option without with Option 82 82 Option 82 82 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 281 17 IP Configuration IPv4 Management and Interfaces DHCP Relay VLAN with IP Address DHCP Relay VLAN without IP Address Option 82 Packet is sent Packet is sent Relay Relay Insertion without Option with the inserts Option discards the Disabled 82 original 82 packet Option 82 i Bridge no Bridge Option 82 is Packet is sent inserted with the original Option 82 Option 82 Relay issent Packetissent Relay is sent Relay Insertion with Option 82 with the with Option discards the Enabled original 82 packet Bridge mno Option 82 f Option 82 is Bridge no Bridge sent Option 82 is Packet is sent sent with the original Option 82 The following describes how DHCP request packets are handled when both DHCP Snooping and DHCP Relay are enabled DHCP Relay VLAN with IP Address DHCP Relay VLAN without IP Address Packet arrives Packet Packet arrives Packet arrives without Option arrives with without with Option 82 Option 82 Option
211. active topology predictable The devices behind the ports that have BPDU Guard enabled cannot influence the STP topology At the reception of BPDUs the BPDU guard operation disables the port that has BPDU configured In this case a BPDU message is received and an appropriate SNMP trap is generated BPDU Handling Select how BPDU packets are managed when STP is disabled on the port or the device BPDUs are used to transmit spanning tree information Use Global Settings Select to use the settings defined in the STP Status and Global Settings page Filtering Filters BPDU packets when Spanning Tree is disabled on an interface Flooding Floods BPDU packets when Spanning Tree is disabled on an interface Path Cost Set the port contribution to the root path cost or use the default cost generated by the system Priority Set the priority value of the port The priority value influences the port choice when a bridge has two ports connected in a loop The priority is a value from O to 240 set in increments of 16 Port State Displays the current STP state of a port Disabled STP is currently disabled on the port The port forwards traffic while learning MAC addresses Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 235 Spanning Tree Configuring Rapid Spanning Tree Settings Blocking The port is currently blocked and cannot forward traffic wi
212. aging are disabled 354 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security Configuring Port Security 18 NOTE STEP 1 When a frame from a new MAC address is detected on a port where it is not authorized the port is classically locked and there is anew MAC address or the port is dynamically locked and the maximum number of allowed addresses has been exceeded the protection mechanism is invoked and one of the following actions can take place Frame is discarded Frame is forwarded Portis shut down When the secure MAC address is seen on another port the frame is forwarded but the MAC address is not learned on that port In addition to one of these actions you can also generate traps and limit their frequency and number to avoid overloading the devices To use 802 1X on a port it must be in multiple host or multi session modes Port security on a port cannot be set if the port is in single mode see the 802 1x Host and Session Authentication page To configure port security Click Security gt Port Security STEP 2 Select an interface to be modified and click Edit STEP 3 Enter the parameters Interface Select the interface name Interface Status Select to lock the port Learning Mode Select the type of port locking To configure this field the Interface Status must be unlocked The Learning Mode field is enabled only
213. ahali CISCO 345138 ADMINISTRATION GUIDE Cisco Small Business 300 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Release 1 3 5 Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 Getting Started Starting the Web based Configuration Utility Quick Start Device Configuration Interface Naming Conventions Window Navigation Chapter 2 Status and Statistics System Summary Viewing Ethernet Interfaces Viewing Etherlike Statistics Viewing 802 1X EAP Statistics Health Managing RMON View Log Chapter 3 Administration System Log Setting System Log Settings Setting Remote Logging Settings Viewing Memory Logs Chapter 4 Administration File Management System Files Upgrade Backup Firmware Language Download Backup Configuration Log Configuration Files Properties Copy Save Configuration Auto Configuration via DHCP as N oa A 11 11 11 13 14 15 15 23 24 24 26 28 30 30 33 37 42 43 44 Cisco Small Business 300 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Contents Chapter 5 Administration Device Models System Settings Management Interface User Accounts Defining Idle Session Timeout Time Settings System Log File Management Rebooting the Device Health Diagnostics Discovery Bonjour Discovery LLDP Discovery CDP Ping Chapter 6 Administration Time Settings System Time Options SNTP Modes Configuring System Time Chapter 7 Administration Diagnostics Testing Copper Ports Dis
214. al SSH server application such as PuTTY The public keys are entered in the device The users can then open an SSH session on the device through the external SSH server application Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 468 23 Security SSH Server Common Tasks Common Tasks STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP This section describes some common tasks performed using the SSH Server feature Workflow1 To logon to the device over SSH using the device s automatically created default key perform the following 1 Enable SSH server in the TCP UDP Services page and verify that SSH user authentication by public key is disabled in the SSH User Authentication page 2 Log onto an external SSH client application such as PuTTY using the IP address of the device it is not necessary to use a username or key that is known to the device Workflow2 To create an SSH user and logon to the device over SSH using this user perform the following steps 1 Generate an RSA or DSA key on an external SSH client application such as PuTTY 2 Enable SSH user authentication by public key or password in the SSH User Authentication page 3 Enable Automatic Login if required see Automatic Login below 4 Add auser in the SSH User Authentication page and copy in the public key generated externally 5 Log onto an external SSH
215. al Version Security 1 8 Management Access Authentication Interface Enter the interface number Applies to Source IP Address Select the type of source IP address to which the access profile applies The Source IP Address field is valid for a subnetwork Select one of the following values All Applies to all types of IP addresses User Defined Applies to only those types of IP addresses defined in the fields IP Version Select the supported IP version of the source address IPv6 or IPv4 IP Address Enter the source IP address Mask Select the format for the subnet mask for the source IP address and enter a value in one of the field Network Mask Select the subnet to which the source IP address belongs and enter the subnet mask in dotted decimal format Prefix Length Select the Prefix Length and enter the number of bits that comprise the source IP address prefix STEP 5 Click Apply and the rule is added to the access profile Management Access Authentication You can assign authentication methods to the various management access methods such as SSH console Telnet HTTP and HTTPS The authentication can be performed locally or ona TACACS or RADIUS server For the RADIUS server to grant access to the web based configuration utility the RADIUS server must return cisco avpair shell priv Ivl 15 User authentication occurs in the order that the authentication methods are s
216. al Version 29 Administration System Log Setting System Log Settings The event severity levels are listed from the highest severity to the lowest severity as follows Emergency System is not usable Alert Action is needed Critical System is in a critical condition Error System is in error condition Warning System warning has occurred Notice System is functioning properly but a system notice has occurred Informational Device information Debug Detailed information about an event You can select different severity levels for RAM and Flash logs These logs are displayed in the RAM Memory page and Flash Memory page respectively Selecting a severity level to be stored in a log causes all of the higher severity events to be automatically stored in the log Lower severity events are not stored in the log For example if Warning is selected all severity levels that are Warning and higher are stored in the log Emergency Alert Critical Error and Warning No events with severity level below Warning are stored Notice Informational and Debug To set global log parameters STEP 1 Click Administration gt System Log gt Log Settings STEP 2 Enter the parameters Logging Select to enable message logging Syslog Aggregator Select to enable the aggregation of SYSLOG messages and traps If enabled identical and contiguous SYSLOG messages and traps are aggregated over the specified Max A
217. ality of Service Configuring QoS General Queue Displays the queue number Scheduling Method Select one of the following options Strict Priority Traffic scheduling for the selected queue and all higher queues is based strictly on the queue priority WRR Traffic scheduling for the selected queue is based on WRR The period time is divided between the WRR queues that are not empty meaning they have descriptors to egress This happens only if strict priority queues are empty WRR Weight lf WRR is selected enter the WRR weight assigned to the queue of WRR Bandwidth Displays the amount of bandwidth assigned to the queue These values represent the percent of the WRR weight STEP 3 Click Apply The queues are configured and the Running Configuration file is updated Mapping CoS 802 1p to a Queue The CoS 802 1p to Queue page maps 802 1p priorities to egress queues The CoS 802 1p to Queue Table determines the egress queues of the incoming packets based on the 802 1p priority in their VLAN Tags For incoming untagged packets the 802 1p priority is the default CoS 802 1p priority assigned to the ingress ports The following table describes the default mapping when there are 4 queues 802 1p Queue Notes Values 4 queues 1 0 7 7 being 4 4 being the the highest highest priority 0 1 Background 1 1 Best Effort 2 2 Excellent Effort 3 3 Critical Application LVS
218. all of the devices on the network is accurate The device supports Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP and when enabled the device dynamically synchronizes the device time with time from an SNTP server The device operates only as an SNTP client and cannot provide time services to other devices This section describes the options for configuring the system time time zone and Daylight Savings Time DST It covers the following topics System Time Options SNTP Modes Configuring System Time Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 72 Administration Time Settings System Time Options System Time Options System time can be set manually by the user dynamically from an SNTP server or synchronized from the PC running the GUI If an SNTP server is chosen the manual time settings are overwritten when communications with the server are established As part of the boot process the device always configures the time time zone and DST These parameters are obtained from the PC running the GUI SNTP values set manually or if all else fails from the factory defaults Time The following methods are available for setting the system time on the device Manual You must manually sets the time From PC Time can be received from the PC by using browser information The configuration of time from the computer is saved to the Running Configuration file You
219. an be Link Local Global or Multicast All_DHCP_Relay_Agents_and_Servers DHCPv6 Server IP Address Enter the address of the DHCPV6 server to which packets are forwarded Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 315 17 IP Configuration Domain Name IPv6 Interface Enter the interface on which packets are transmitted when the address type of the DHCPv6 server is Link Local or Multicast STEP 3 Click Apply The Running Configuration file is updated Domain Name The Domain Name System DNS translates domain names into IP addresses for the purpose of locating and addressing hosts As a DNS client the device resolves domain names to IP addresses through the use of one or more configured DNS servers DNS Settings Use the DNS Settings page to enable the DNS feature configure the DNS servers and set the default domain used by the device STEP 1 Click IP Configuration gt Domain Name gt DNS Settings STEP 2 Enter the parameters DNS Select to designate the device as a DNS client which can resolve DNS names into IP addresses through one or more configured DNS servers Polling Retries Enter the number of times to send a DNS query to a DNS server until the device decides that the DNS server does not exist Polling Timeout Enter the number of seconds that the device will wait for a response to a DNS query Polling Interval Enter how ofte
220. an support class maps from different policies Per flow QoS are applied to flows by binding the policies to the desired ports A policy and its class maps can be bound to one or more ports but each port is bound with at most one policy Notes Single policer and aggregation policer are available when the device is in Layer 2 mode An ACL can be configured to one or more class maps regardless of policies A class map can belong to only one policy When a class map using single policer is bound to multiple ports each port has its own instance of single policer each applying the QoS on the class map flow at a port independent of each other An aggregate policer applies the QoS to all its flow s in aggregation regardless of policies and ports 505 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Quality of Service 2 5 QoS Advanced Mode Advanced QoS settings consist of three parts Definitions of the rules to match All frames matching a single group of rules are considered to be a flow Definition of the actions to be applied to frames in each flow that match the rules Binding the combinations of rules and action to one or more interfaces Workflow to Configure Advanced QoS Mode To configure Advanced QoS mode perform the following 1 Select Advanced mode for the system by using the QoS Properties page Select the Trust Mode using the Global Settings
221. and do not age out The device creates dynamic addresses from the ARP packets it receives Dynamic addresses age out after a configured time 276 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration 1 7 IPv4 Management and Interfaces NOTE InLayer 2 mode the IP MAC address mapping in ARP Table is used by the device to forward traffic originated by the device In Layer 3 mode the mapping information is used for Layer 3 routing as well as to forward generated traffic To define the ARP tables STEP 1 Click IP Configuration gt IPv4 Management and Interfaces gt ARP STEP 2 Enter the parameters ARP Entry Age Out Enter the number of seconds that dynamic addresses can remain in the ARP table A dynamic address ages out after the time it is in the table exceeds the ARP Entry Age Out time When a dynamic address ages out it is deleted from the table and only returns when it is relearned Clear ARP Table Entries Select the type of ARP entries to be cleared from the system Al Deletes all of the static and dynamic addresses immediately Dynamic Deletes all of the dynamic addresses immediately Static Deletes all of the static addresses immediately Normal Age Out Deletes dynamic addresses based on the configured ARP Entry Age Out time STEP 3 Click Apply The ARP global settings are written to the Running Configuration file The ARP t
222. and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 397 Security 802 1X Authentication 8021X Configuration Through the GUI STEP 1 Click Security gt 802 1X MAC Web Authentication gt Port Authentication This page displays authentication settings for all ports STEP 2 Selecta port and click Edit STEP 3 Enter the parameters Interface Select a port Current Port Control Displays the current port authorization state If the state is Authorized the port is either authenticated or the Administrative Port Control is Force Authorized Conversely if the state is Unauthorized then the portis either not authenticated or the Administrative Port Control is Force Unauthorized Administrative Port Control Select the Administrative Port Authorization state The options are Force Unauthorized Denies the interface access by moving the interface into the unauthorized state The device does not provide authentication services to the client through the interface Auto Enables port based authentication and authorization on the device The interface moves between an authorized or unauthorized state based on the authentication exchange between the device and the client Force Authorized Authorizes the interface without authentication RADIUS VLAN Assignment Select to enable Dynamic VLAN assignment on the selected port Disable Feature is not enabled Reject lf the RADIUS server au
223. and time of the host s IP address or Infinite is such was the lease duration defined Type The manner in which the IP address was assigned to the client The possible options are Static The hardware address of the host was mapped to an IP address Dynamic tThe IP address obtained dynamically from the device is owned by the client for a specified period of time The IP address is revoked at the end of this period at which time the client must request another IP address State The possible options are Allocated IP address has been allocated When a static host is configured its state is allocated Declined IP address was offered but not accepted therefore it is not allocated Expired tThe lease of the IP address has expired Pre Allocated An entry will be in pre allocated state from the time between the offer and the time that the DHCP ACK is sent from the client Then it becomes allocated 300 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration 1 7 IPv6 Management and Interfaces IPv6 Management and Interfaces The Internet Protocol version 6 IPv6 is a network layer protocol for packet switched internetworks IPv6 was designed to replace IPv4 the predominantly deployed Internet protocol IPv6 introduces greater flexibility in assigning IP addresses because the address size increases from 32 bit to 128 bit addresses
224. and time that the Time Range ends To add a recurring time range click Recurring Range Recurring Time Range A recurring time element can be added to an absolute time range This limits the operation to certain time periods within the absolute range To add a recurring time range element to an absolute time range Click Administration gt Time Settings gt Recurring Range The existing recurring time ranges are displayed filtered per a specific absolute time range Select the absolute time range to which to add the recurring range Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 83 Administration Time Settings Configuring System Time STEP 3 To add anew recurring time range click Add STEP 4 Enter the following fields Recurring Starting Time Enter the date and time that the Time Range begins on a recurring basis Recurring Ending Time Enter the date and time that the Time Range ends ona recurring basis 84 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration Diagnostics This section contains information for configuring port mirroring running cable tests and viewing device operational information It covers the following topics Testing Copper Ports Displaying Optical Module Status Configuring Port and VLAN Mirroring Viewing CPU Utilization and Secure Core Te
225. assphrase Type Displays whether the default passphrase or a user defined passphrase is currently being used STEP 2 Enter the following Persistent Settings fields Configuration File Passphrase Control Select an option as described in Configuration File Passphrase Control Configuration File Integrity Control Select to enable this feature See Configuration File Integrity Control STEP 3 Selecta Read mode for the current session see Elements of an SSD Rule To change the local passphrase STEP 1 Click Change Local Passphrase and enter a new Local Passphrase Default Use the devices default passphrase Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 453 21 Security Secure Sensitive Data Management Configuring SSD User Defined Plaintext Enter a new passphrase Confirm Passphrase Confirm the new passphrase SSD Rules Only users with SSD read permission of Plaintext only or Both are allowed to set SSD rules To configure SSD rules STEP 1 Click Security gt Secure Sensitive Data Management gt SSD Rules The currently defined rules are displayed STEP 2 To add anew rule click Add Enter the following fields User This defines the user s to which the rule applies Select one of the following options Specific User Select and enter the specific user name to which this rule applies this user does not necessar
226. at comprise the address prefix Address Pool Start Enter the first IP address in the range of the network pool Address Pool End Enter the last IP address in the range of the network pool Lease Duration Enter the amount of time a DHCP client can use an IP address from this pool You can configure a lease duration of up to 49 710 days or an infinite duration Infinite The duration of the lease is unlimited Days tThe duration of the lease in number of days The range is O to 497 10 days Hours The number of hours in the lease A days value must be supplied before an hours value can be added Minutes The number of minutes in the lease A days value and an hours value must be added before a minutes value can be added Default Router IP Address Option 3 Enter the default router for the DHCP client Domain Name Server IP Address Option 6 Select one of the devices DNS servers if already configured or select Other and enter the IP address of the DNS server available to the DHCP client Domain Name Option 15 Enter the domain name for a DHCP client NetBIOS WINS Server Option 44 Enter the NetBIOS WINS name server available to a DHCP client NetBIOS Node Type Option 46 Select how to resolve the NetBIOS name Valid node types are Hybrid A hybrid combination of b node and p node is used When configured to use h node a computer always tries p node first and uses b node only if p nod
227. at is UP and click Reapply to reapply the last macro that was applied to the interface Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 173 Smartport Configuring Smartport Using The Web based Interface The Reapply action also adds the interface to all newly created VLANs STEP 2 Smartport Diagnostic If a Smartport macro fails the Smartport Type of the interface is Unknown Select an interface which is of unknown type and click Show Diagnostic This displays the command at which application of the macro failed See the workflow area in Common Smartport Tasks section for troubleshooting tips Proceed to reapply the macro after correcting the problem STEP 3 Resetting all Unknown interfaces to Default type Select the Port Type equals to checkbox Select Unknownand click Go Click Reset All Unknown Smartports Then reapply the macro as described above This performs a reset on all interfaces with type Unknown meaning that all interfaces are returned to the Default type After correcting the error in the macro or on the current interface configuration or both a new macro may be applied NOTE Resetting the interface of unknown type does not reset the configuration performed by the macro that failed This clean up must be done manually To assign a Smartport type to an interface or activate Auto Smartport on the interface STEP 1 Select an interface and click Edit
228. ate the VLAN it must be up on at least one port By default GVRP is disabled globally and on ports Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 205 13 VLAN Management VLAN Groups VLAN Groups STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 STEP 6 STEP 7 Defining GVRP Settings To define GVRP settings for an interface Click VLAN Management gt GVRP Settings Select GVRP Global Status to enable GVRP globally Click Apply to set the global GVRP status Select an interface type Port or LAG and click Go to display all interfaces of that type To define GVRP settings for a port select it and click Edit Enter the values for the following fields Interface Select the interface Port or LAG to be edited GVRP State Select to enable GVRP on this interface Dynamic VLAN Creation Select to enable Dynamic VLAN Creation on this interface GVRP Registration Select to enable VLAN Registration using GVRP on this interface Click Apply GVRP settings are modified and written to the Running Configuration file VLAN groups are used for load balancing of traffic on a Layer 2 network Packets are assigned a VLAN according to various classifications that have been configured such as VLAN groups If several classifications schemes are defined packets are assigned to a VLAN in the following order TAG If the packet is tagged the
229. ation This section describes how to view system information and configure various options on the device It covers the following topics Device Models System Settings Console Settings Autobaud Rate Support Management Interface User Accounts Defining Idle Session Timeout Time Settings System Log File Management Routing Resources lt 300 500 gt Health Diagnostics Discovery Bonjour Discovery LLDP Discovery CDP Ping Traceroute Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 57 o Administration Device Models Device Models Model Name NOTE All models can be fully managed through the web based switch configuration utility In Layer 2 system mode the device forwards packets as a VLAN aware bridge In Layer 3 system mode the device performs both IPv4 routing and VLAN aware bridging When the device operates in Layer 3 system mode the VLAN Rate Limit and QoS policers are not operational Other QoS Advanced mode features are operational GE is used for Gigabit Ethernet 10 100 1000 ports The following port conventions are used FE is used for Fast Ethernet 10 100 ports The following table describes the various models the number and type of ports on them and their PoE information Product ID PID Description of Ports on Device Power Dedicated to PoE No of Ports that Support PoE
230. ault VLAN ID is removed from the device To be used it must be recreated Adds the ports as untagged VLAN members of the new default VLAN To change the default VLAN STEP 1 Click VLAN Management gt Default VLAN Settings STEP 2 Enter the value for the following field Current Default VLAN ID Displays the current default VLAN ID Default VLAN ID After Reboot Enter a new VLAN ID to replace the default VLAN ID after reboot STEP 3 Click Apply STEP 4 Click Save in the upper right corner of the window and save the Running Configuration to the Startup Configuration The Default VLAN ID After Reset becomes the Current Default VLAN ID after you reboot the device Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 199 13 VLAN Management Creating VLANs Creating VLANs STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 You can create a VLAN but this has no effect until the VLAN is attached to at least one port either manually or dynamically Ports must always belong to one or more VLANs The 300 Series device supports up to 4K VLANs including the default VLAN Each VLAN must be configured with a unique VID VLAN ID with a value from 1to 4094 The device reserves VID 4095 as the Discard VLAN All packets classified to the Discard VLAN are discarded at ingress and are not forwarded to a port To create a VLAN Click VLAN Management gt VLAN Settings
231. auto negotiation capabilities for example 1OOOBASE T half duplex mode 100BASE TX full duplex mode Operational MAU Type Medium Attachment Unit MAU type The MAU performs physical layer functions including digital data conversion from the Ethernet interfaces collision detection and bit injection into the network for example 100BASE TX full duplex mode 802 3 Power via MDI MDI Power Support Port Class Advertised power support port class PSE MDI Power Support Indicates if MDI power is supported on the port PSE MDI Power State Indicates if MDI power is enabled on the port PSE Power Pair Control Ability Indicates if power pair control is supported on the port PSE Power Pair Power pair control type supported on the port PSE Power Class Advertised power class of the port 802 3 Details 802 3 Maximum Frame Size Advertised maximum frame size that is supported on the port 802 3 Link Aggregation Aggregation Capability lIndicates if the port can be aggregated Aggregation Status Indicates if the port is currently aggregated Aggregation Port ID Advertised aggregated port ID 802 3 Energy Efficient Ethernet EEE Remote Tx Indicates the time in micro seconds that the transmitting link partner waits before it starts transmitting data after leaving Low Power Idle LPI mode 110 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Inter
232. axis is the sample number Select the Refresh Rate time period in seconds that passes before the statistics are refreshed A new sample is created for each time period Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 91 Administration Discovery Bonjour This section provides information for configuring Discovery It covers the following topics Bonjour LLDP and CDP Configuring LLDP Configuring CDP As a Bonjour client the device periodically broadcasts Bonjour Discovery protocol packets to directly connected IP subnet s advertising its existence and the services that it provides for example HTTP HTTPs and Telnet Use the Security gt TCP UDP Services page to enable or disable the device services The device can be discovered by a network management system or other third party applications By default Bonjour is enabled on the Management VLAN The Bonjour console automatically detects the device and displays it Bonjour in Layer 2 System Mode When the device is in Layer 2 system mode Bonjour Discovery is enabled globally it cannot be enabled on a per port or per VLAN basis The device advertises all of the services that have been turned on by the administrator based on the configuration on the Services page When Bonjour Discovery and IGMP are both enabled the IP Multicast address of Bonjour appears on the Adding IP Multicast Group Address page
233. based authenticator relays transparent EAP messages between 802 1x supplicants and authentication servers The EAP messages between supplicants and the authenticator are encapsulated into the 802 1x messages and the EAP messages between the authenticator and authentication servers are encapsulated into the RADIUS messages 386 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security 802 1X Authentication 1 Authenticator Overview This is described in the following Figure1 802 1x Based Authentication 802 1x RADIUS Protocol Protocol Authenticaticator z EAP Protocol Client Authentication Server 370575 MAC Based Authentication MAC based authentication is an alternative to 802 1X authentication that allows network access to devices such as printers and IP phones that do not have the 802 1X supplicant capability MAC based authentication uses the MAC address of the connecting device to grant or deny network access In this case the switch supports EAP MD5 functionality with the username and password equal to the client MAC address as shown below Figure 2 MAC Based Authentication RADIUS Protocol User Data SES aaa EAP Protocol Client Authenticaticator Username MAC address Authentication Password MAC address Server 5 The method does not have any specific configuration Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series
234. be applied on the port SYN Protection Period Time in seconds before unblocking the SYN packets the deny SYN with MAC to me rule is unbound from the port STEP 3 Click Apply SYN protection is defined and the Running Configuration file is updated The SYN Protection Interface Table displays the following fields for every port or LAG as requested by the user Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 361 Security Denial of Service Prevention Current Status lInterface status The possible values are Normal No attack was identified on this interface Blocked traffic is not forwarded on this interface Attacked Attack was identified on this interface Last Attack Date of last SYN FIN attack identified by the system and the system action Reported or Blocked and Reported Martian Addresses The Martian Addresses page enables entering IP addresses that indicate an attack if they are seen on the network Packets from these addresses are discarded The device supports a set of reserved Martian addresses that are illegal from the point of view of the IP protocol The supported reserved Martian addresses are Addresses defined to be illegal in the Martian Addresses page Addresses that are illegal from the point of view of the protocol such as loopback addresses including addresses within the following ranges 0 0 0 0 8 Except 0 0
235. bed in the Common Smartport Tasks section Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 157 Smartport What is a Smartport What is a Smartport A Smartport is an interface to which a built in or user defined macro may be applied These macros are designed to provide a means of quickly configuring the device to support the communication requirements and utilize the features of various types of network devices The network access and QoS requirements vary if the interface is connected to an IP phone a printer or a router and or Access Point AP Smartport Types Smartport types refers to the types of devices attached or to be attached to Smartports The device supports the following Smartport types Printer Desktop Guest Server Host IP Camera IP phone IP Phone Desktop Switch Router Wireless Access Point Smartport types are named so that they describe the type of device connected to an interface Each Smartport type is associated with two Smartport macros One macro called the macro serves to apply the desired configuration The other called the anti macro serves to undo all configuration performed by the macro when that interface happens to become a different Smartport type You can apply a Smartport macro by the following methods The associated Smartport type 158 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500
236. ble on the device 280 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration IPv4 Management and Interfaces 17 DHCP Insertion Add Option 82 information to packets that do not have foreign Option 82 information DHCP Passthrough Forward or reject DHCP packets that contain Option 82 information from untrusted ports On trusted ports DHCP packets containing Option 82 information are always forwarded The following table shows the packet flow through the DHCP Relay DHCP Snooping and Option 82 modules The following cases are possible DHCP client and DHCP server are connected to the same VLAN In this case a regular bridging passes the DHCP messages between DHOP client and DHCP server DHCP client and DHCP server are connected to different VLANs In the case only DHCP Relay can and does broadcast DHCP messages between DHCP client and DHCP server Unicast DHCP messages are passed by regular routers and therefore if DHCP Relay is enabled on a VLAN without an IP address or if the device is not a router Layer 2 device then an external router is needed DHCP Relay and only DHCP Relay relays DHCP messages to a DHCP server Interactions Between DHCP v4 Snooping DHCP v4 Relay and Option 82 The following tables describe how the device behaves with various combinations of DHCP Snooping DHCP Relay and Option 82 The following describes how DHCP request p
237. ble the option of sending a SYSLOG message when a voice VLAN mismatch is detected This means that the voice VLAN information in the incoming frame does not match what the local device is advertising Syslog Native VLAN Mismatch Select to enable the option of sending a SYSLOG message when a native VLAN mismatch is detected This means that the native VLAN information in the incoming frame does not match what the local device is advertising Syslog Duplex Mismatch Select to enable the option of sending a SYSLOG message when duplex information mismatch is detected This means that the duplex information in the incoming frame does not match what the local device is advertising STEP 3 Enter the relevant information and click Apply The port settings are written to the Running Configuration Displaying CDP Local Information To view information that is advertised by the CDP protocol about the local device STEP 1 Click Administration gt Discovery CDP gt CDP Local Information STEP 2 Selecta local port and the following fields are displayed Interface Number of the local port CDP State Displays whether CDP is enabled or not Device ID TLV Device ID Type tType of the device ID advertised in the device ID TLV Device ID Device ID advertised in the device ID TLV Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 119 Administration Discovery Configuri
238. break into systems using automated tools that exploit flaws in programs that listen for connections from remote hosts This scenario primarily concerns the device when it serves as a server on the web Back OrifaceTrojan This is a variation of a trojan that uses Back Oriface software to implant the trojan Defense Against DoS Attacks The Denial of Service DoS Prevention feature assists the system administrator in resisting such attacks in the following ways Enable TCP SYN protection If this feature is enabled reports are issued when a SYN packet attack is identified and the attacked port can be temporarily shut down A SYN attack is identified if the number of SYN packets per second exceeds a user configured threshold Block SYN FIN packets Block packets that contain reserved Martian addresses Martian Addresses page 358 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security Denial of Service Prevention 18 NOTE Prevent TCP connections from a specific interface SYN Filtering page and rate limit the packets SYN Rate Protection page Configure the blocking of certain ICMP packets ICMP Filtering page Discard fragmented IP packets from a specific interface IP Fragments Filtering page Deny attacks from Stacheldraht Distribution Invasor Trojan and Back Orifice Trojan Security Suite Settings page Dependencies Between Feat
239. by using the Bandwidth page Configure the selected mode by performing one of the following a Configure Basic mode as described in Workflow to Configure Basic QoS Mode b Configure Advanced mode as described in Workflow to Configure Advanced QoS Mode Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 492 Quality of Service Configuring QoS General Configuring QoS General The QoS Properties Page contains fields for setting the QoS mode for the system Basic Advanced or Disabled as described in the QoS Modes section In addition the default CoS priority for each interface can be defined Setting QoS Properties To select the QoS mode STEP 1 Click Quality of Service gt General gt QoS Properties STEP 2 Set the QoS mode The following options are available Disable Q0OS is disabled on the device Basic Q0S is enabled on the device in Basic mode Advanced QoS is enabled on the device in Advanced mode STEP 3 Select Port LAG and click GO to display modify all ports LAGs on the device and their CoS information The following fields are displayed for all ports LAGs Interface Type of interface Default CoS Default VPT value for incoming packets that do not have a VLAN Tag The default CoS is 0 The default is only relevant for untagged frames and only if the system is in Basic mode and Trust CoS is selected in the Global
240. cal address exists on the interface this entry replaces the address in the configuration Global The IPv6 address is a global Unicast IPV6 type that is visible and reachable from other networks Link Local Interface Select the link local interface from the list TFTP Server IP Address Name Enter the IP address or domain name of the TFTP server Source File Type Enter the source configuration file type Only valid file types are displayed The file types are described in the Files and File Types section Sensitive Data Select how sensitive data should be included in the backup file The following options are available Exclude Do not include sensitive data in the backup Encrypted lInclude sensitive data in the backup in its encrypted form Plaintext lInclude sensitive data in the backup in its plaintext form NOTE The available sensitive data options are determined by the current user SSD rules For details refer to Secure Sensitive Data Management gt SSD Rules page Destination File Name Enter the destination file name File names cannot contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name must not be a period and the file name must be between 1 and 160 characters Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 _ Click Apply The file is upgraded or backed up Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 45 A
241. cal network The Bonjour Discovery Interface Control Table shows interfaces with IP addresses that are associated with the Bonjour feature Any Bonjour advertisement can only be broadcasted to interfaces listed in this table See the Bonjour Discovery Interface Control Table on the Administration gt Discovery Bonjour page If the available services are changed those changes are advertised deregistering services that are turned off and registering services that are turned on If an IP address is changed that change is advertised If Bonjour is disabled the device does not send Bonjour Discovery advertisements and it does not listen for Bonjour Discovery advertisements sent by other devices To configure Bonjour when the device is in Layer 3 system mode STEP 1 Click Administration gt Discovery Bonjour STEP 2 Select Enable to enable Bonjour discovery globally Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 93 Administration Discovery LLDP and CDP STEP 3 Click Apply to update the Running Configuration file STEP 4 To enable Bonjour on an interface click Add STEP 5 Select the interface and click Apply NOTE Click Delete to disable Bonjour on an interface this performs the delete operation without any additional operation such as Apply LLDP and CDP LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol and CDP Cisco Discovery Protocol are link layer protocols for
242. cally every fourth Friday in October at 5 00 am The parameters are Day Day of the week on which DST ends every year Week Week within the month from which DST ends every year Month Month of the year in which DST ends every year Time The time at which DST ends every year STEP 3 Click Apply The system time values are written to the Running Configuration file Adding a Unicast SNTP Server Up to 16 Unicast SNTP servers can be configured NOTE To specify a Unicast SNTP server by name you must first configure DNS server s on the device see DNS Settings In order to add a Unicast SNTP server check the box to enable SNTP Client Unicast To add a Unicast SNTP server STEP 1 Click Administration gt Time Settings gt SNTP Unicast STEP 2 Enter the following fields SNTP Client Unicast Select to enable the device to use SNTP predefined Unicast clients with Unicast SNTP servers Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 77 Administration Time Settings Configuring System Time IPv4 Source Interface Select the IPv4 interface whose IPv4 address will be used as the source IPv4 address in messages used for communication with the SNTP server IPv6 Source Interface Select the IPv6 interface whose IPv6 address will be used as the source IPv6 address in messages used for communication with the SNTP server NOTE If the Auto option is se
243. cally not the best choice for larger networks because its preference for b node Broadcasts increases network traffic Peer to Peer Point to point communications with a NetBIOS name server are used to register and resolve computer names to IP addresses Broadcast IP Broadcast messages are used to register and resolve NetBIOS names to IP addresses SNTP Server IP Address Option 4 Select one of the device s SNTP servers if already configured or select Other and enter the IP address of the time server for the DHCP client File Server IP Address siaddr Enter the IP address of the TFTP SCP server from which the configuration file is downloaded File Server Host Name Ssname Enter the name of the TFTP SCP server Configuration File Name file Enter the name of the file that is used as a configuration file DHCP Options When the device is acting as a DHCP server the DHCP options can be configured using the HEX option A description of these options can be found in RFC2 131 The configuration of these options determines the reply that is sent to DHCP clients whose packets include a request using option 55 for the configured DHCP options The options that are configured specifically on the DHCP Server gt Network Pools and the DHCP Server gt Static Hosts pages Option 3 6 15 44 46 66 67 cannot be configured using the DHCP Options page Example The DHCP option 66 is configured with the name of
244. ccess profile you might be disconnected from the web based configuration utility STEP 3 Click OK to select the active access profile or click Cancel to discontinue the action STEP 4 Click Add to open the Add Access Profile page The page allows you to configure a new profile and one rule STEP 5 Enter the Access Profile Name This name can contain up to 32 characters STEP 6 Enter the parameters Rule Priority Enter the rule priority When the packet is matched to a rule user groups are either granted or denied access to the device The rule priority is essential to matching packets to rules as packets are matched on a first match basis One is the highest priority Management Method Select the management method for which the rule is defined The options are All Assigns all management methods to the rule Te lnet Users requesting access to the device that meets the Telnet access profile criteria are permitted or denied access Secure Telnet SSH Users requesting access to the device that meets the SSH access profile criteria are permitted or denied access HTTP Users requesting access to the device that meets the HTTP access profile criteria are permitted or denied Secure HTTP HTTPS Users requesting access to the device that meets the HTTPS access profile criteria are permitted or denied SNMP Users requesting access to the device that meets the SNMP access profile criteria are permitted or
245. ce measured in bits per second Committed Burst Size CBS is the burst of data that is allowed to be sent even though it is above the CIR This is defined in number of bytes of data To enter bandwidth limitation STEP 1 Click Quality of Service gt General gt Bandwidth The Bandwidth page displays bandwidth information for each interface The column is the ingress rate limit for the port divided by the total port bandwidth STEP 2 Select an interface and click Edit STEP 3 Select the Port or LAG interface STEP 4 Enter the fields for the selected interface Ingress Rate Limit Select to enable the ingress rate limit which is defined in the field below Ingress Rate Limit Enter the maximum amount of bandwidth allowed on the interface NOTE The two Ingress Rate Limit fields do not appear when the interface type is LAG Ingress Committed Burst Size CBS Enter the maximum burst size of data for the ingress interface in bytes of data This amount can be sent even if it temporarily increases the bandwidth beyond the allowed limit This field is only available if the interface is a port Egress Shaping Rate Select to enable egress shaping on the interface 499 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Quality of Service 2 5 Configuring QoS General Committed Information Rate CIR Enter the maximum bandwidth for the egress int
246. cedence value NOTE ACLs are also used as the building elements of flow definitions for per flow QoS handling see QoS Advanced Mode The IPv4 Based ACL page enables adding ACLs to the system The rules are defined in the IPv4 Based ACE page IPv6 ACLs are defined in the IPv6 Based ACL page Defining an IPv4 based ACL To define an IPv4 based ACL STEP 1 Click Access Control gt IPv4 Based ACL This page contains all currently defined IPv4 based ACLs STEP 2 Click Add STEP 3 Enter the name of the new ACL in the ACL Name field The names are case sensitive STEP 4 Click Apply The IPv4 based ACL is saved to the Running Configuration file 479 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Access Control IPv4 based ACLs 24 NOTE STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Adding Rules ACEs to an IPv4 Based ACL Each IPv4 based rule consumes one TCAM rule Note that the TCAM allocation is performed in couples such that for the first ACE 2 TCAM rules are allocated and the second TCAM rule is allocated to the next ACE and so forth To add rules ACEs to an IPv4 based ACL Click Access Control gt IPv4 Based ACE Select an ACL and click Go All currently defined IP ACEs for the selected ACL are displayed Click Add Enter the parameters ACL Name Displays the name of the ACL Priority Enter the priority ACEs with higher priority are pr
247. ceived by its neighbor and traffic from the neighbor is received by the local device Undetermined The state of the link between the port and its connected port cannot be determined either because no UDLD message was received or the UDLD message did not contain the local device ID in it Disabled UDLD has been disabled on this port Shutdown The port has been shut down because its link with the connected device is unidirectional or undetermined in aggressive mode Neighbor Expiration Time Sec Displays the time that must pass before determining the port UDLD status This is three times the Message Time Neighbor Message Time Sec Displays the time between UDLD messages Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 155 Smartport This document describes the Smartports feature It contains the following topics Overview What is a Smartport Smartport Types Smartport Macros Macro Failure and the Reset Operation How the Smartport Feature Works Auto Smartport Error Handling Default Configuration Relationships with Other Features and Backwards Compatibility Common Smartport Tasks Configuring Smartport Using The Web based Interface Built in Smartport Macros Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 156 Smartport 1 1 Overview Overview The Smartport feature provides a conven
248. cess sensitive data in any form Middle Encrypted Only Users are permitted to access sensitive data as encrypted only 440 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version SSD Rules Security Secure Sensitive Data Management 2 1 Higher Plaintext Only Users are permitted to access sensitive data in plaintext only Users will also have read and write permission to SSD parameters as well Highest Both Users have both encrypted and plaintext permissions and are permitted to access sensitive data as encrypted and in plaintext Users will also have read and write permission to SSD parameters as well Each management channel allows specific read permissions The following summarizes these Management Channel Read Permission Options Allowed Secure Both Encrypted Only Insecure Both Encrypted Only Secure XML SNMP Exclude Plaintext Only Insecure XML SNMP Exclude Plaintext Only Default Read Mode All default read modes are subjected to the read permission of the rule The following options exist but some might be rejected depending on the read permission If the user defined read permission for a user is Exclude for example and the default read mode is Encrypted the user defined read permission prevails Exclude Do not allow reading sensitive data Encrypted Sensitive data is presented in encrypted form Plaintext
249. ch the key configured on the TACACS server A key string is used to encrypt communications by using MD5 You can select the default key on the device or the key can be entered in Encrypted or Plaintext form If you do not have an encrypted key string from another device enter the key string in plaintext mode and click Apply The encrypted key string is generated and displayed If you enter a key this overrides the default key string if one has been defined for the device on the main page Timeout for Reply Enter the amount of time that passes before the connection between the device and the TACACS server times out Select Use Default to use the default value displayed on the page IP Port Enter the port number through which the TACACS session occurs Single Connection Select to enable receiving all information in a single connection If the TACACS server does not support this the device reverts to multiple connections STEP 7 To display sensitive data in plaintext form in the configuration file click Display Sensitive Data As Plaintext STEP 8 Click Apply The TACACS server is added to the Running Configuration file of the device Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 337 Security Configuring RADIUS Configuring RADIUS Remote Authorization Dial In User Service RADIUS servers provide a centralized 802 1X or MAC based network access con
250. ched to a port it transmits CDP or LLDP packets that advertise its capabilities After reception of these CDP and or LLDP packets the device derives the appropriate Smartport type for phone and applies the corresponding Smartport macro to the interface where the IP phone attaches Unless Persistent Auto Smartport is enabled on an interface the Smartport type and resulting configuration applied by Auto Smartport is removed if the attaching device s ages out links down reboots or conflicting capabilities are received Aging out times are determined by the absence of CDP and or LLDP advertisements from the device for a specified time period Using CDP LLDP Information to Identify Smartport Types The device detects the type of device attached to the port based on the CDP LLDP capabilities This mapping is shown in the following tables CDP Capabilities Mapping to Smartport Type Capability Name CDP Bit Smartport Type Router 0x01 Router TB Bridge 0x02 Wireless Access Point 164 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Smartport Auto Smartport 11 CDP Capabilities Mapping to Smartport Type Continued Capability Name CDP Bit Smartport Type SR Bridge 0x04 Ignore Switch 0x08 Switch Host 0x10 Host IGMP conditional filtering 0x20 Ignore Repeater 0x40 Ignore Vol
251. chnology Testing Copper Ports The Copper Test page displays the results of integrated cable tests performed on copper cables by the Virtual Cable Tester VCT VCT performs two types of tests Time Domain Reflectometry TDR technology tests the quality and characteristics of a copper cable attached to a port Cables of up to 140 meters long can be tested These results are displayed in the Test Results block of the Copper Test page DSP based tests are performed on active GE links to measure cable length These results are displayed in the Advanced Information block of the Copper Test page Preconditions to Running the Copper Port Test Before running the test do the following Mandatory Disable Short Reach mode see the Port Management gt Green Ethernet gt Properties page Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 85 Administration Diagnostics Testing Copper Ports Aas CAUTION STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Optional Disable EEE see the Port Management gt Green Ethernet gt Properties page Use a CAT5 data cable when testing cables using VCT Accuracy of the test results can have an error range of 10 for Advanced Testing and 2 for basic testing When a port is tested it is set to the Down state and communications are interrupted After the test the port returns to the Up state It is not recommended that you ru
252. ckets arriving ona locked port The options are Discard Discards packets from any unlearned source Forward Forwards packets from an unknown source without learning the MAC address Shutdown Discards packets from any unlearned source and shuts down the port The port remains shut down until reactivated or until the device is rebooted Trap Select to enable traps when a packet is received on a locked port This is relevant for lock violations For Classic Lock this is any new address received For Limited Dynamic Lock this is any new address that exceeds the number of allowed addresses Trap Frequency Enter minimum time in seconds that elapses between traps STEP 4 Click Apply Port security is modified and the Running Configuration file is updated See the Security 802 1X Authentication chapter for information about 802 1X authentication This includes MAC based and web based authentication 356 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security 1 Denial of Service Prevention Denial of Service Prevention A Denial of Service DoS attack is a hacker attempt to make a device unavailable to its users DoS attacks saturate the device with external communication requests so that it cannot respond to legitimate traffic These attacks usually lead to a device CPU overload Secure Core Technology SCT One method of resisting DoS at
253. complexity requirements are enforced by default and may be configured as necessary Password complexity requirements are configured on the Password Strength page reached through the Security drop down menu Additionally password aging time may be configured on this page To define password complexity rules STEP 1 Click Security gt Password Strength STEP 2 Enter the following aging parameters for passwords Password Aging If selected the user is prompted to change the password when the Password Aging Time expires Password Aging Time Enter the number of days that can elapse before the user is prompted to change the password NOTE Password aging also applies to zero length passwords no password STEP 3 Select Password Complexity Settings to enable complexity rules for passwords If password complexity is enabled new passwords must conform to the following default settings Have a minimum length of eight characters Contain characters from at least three character classes uppercase letters lowercase letters numbers and special characters available on a standard keyboard Are different from the current password Contain no character that is repeated more than three times consecutively Do not repeat or reverse the users name or any variant reached by changing the case of the characters Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 331 Security Conf
254. covery CDP gt CDP Neighbor Information This page contains the following fields for the link partner neighbor Device ID Neighbors device ID Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 121 Administration Discovery Configuring CDP System Name Neighbors system name Local Interface Number of the local port to which the neighbor is connected Advertisement Version CDP protocol version Time to Live sec Time interval in seconds after which the information for this neighbor is deleted Capabilities Capabilities advertised by neighbor Platform lInformation from Platform TLV of neighbor Neighbor Interface Outgoing interface of the neighbor STEP 2 Selecta device and click Details This page contains the following fields about the neighbor Device ID ldentifier of the neighboring device ID System Name Name of the neighboring device ID Local Interface Interface number of port through which frame arrived Advertisement Version Version of CDP Time to Live Time interval in seconds after which the information for this neighbor is deleted Capabilities Primary functions of the device The capabilities are indicated by two octets Bits O through 7 indicate Other Repeater Bridge WLAN AP Router Telephone DOCSIS cable device and station respectively Bits 8 through 15 are reserved Platform ldentifier of the neig
255. cribed in this step Otherwise skip to STEP 4 Select one of the following Save Actions Upgrade Specifies that the file type on the device is to be replaced witha new version of that file type located on a TFTP server Backup Specifies that a copy of the file type is to be saved to a file on another device Enter the following fields File Type Select the destination file type Only valid file types are shown The file types are described in the Files and File Types section TFTP Server Definition Select whether to specify the TFTP server by IP address or domain name IP Version Select whether an IPv4 or an IPv6 address is used IPv6 Address Type Select the IPv6 address type if IPv6 is used The options are Link Local The IPv6 address uniquely identifies hosts on a single network link A link local address has a prefix of FE80 is not routable and can be used for communication only on the local network Only one link local address is supported If a link local address exists on the interface this entry replaces the address in the configuration Global The IPv6 address is a global Unicast IPV6 type that is visible and reachable from other networks Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 39 Administration File Management Upgrade Backup Firmware Language Link Local Interface Select the link local interface if IPv6 is used f
256. ct to enable verification of the DHCP server s and relay s IPv6 address in received DHCP reply messages within a DHCP v6 Guard policy Inherited Value is inherited from either the VLAN or system default no verification No Verification Disables verification of the DHCP server s and relay s IPv6 address Match List IPv6 prefix list to be matched Minimal Preference See above Maximal Preference See above STEP 5 If required click either Attach Policy to VLAN or Attach Policy to Interface Neighbor Discovery Inspection Settings Use the ND Inspection Settings page to enable the ND Inspection feature on a specified group of VLANs and to set the global configuration values for this feature If required a policy can be added or the system defined default ND Inspection policies can be configured in this page Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 429 Security IPV6 First Hop Security Configuring First Hop Security through Web GUI To configure ND Inspection on ports or LAGs STEP 1 Click Security gt First Hop Security gt ND Inspection Settings STEP 2 Enter the following global configuration fields ND Inspection VLAN List Enter one or more VLANs on which ND Inspection is enabled Drop Unsecure Select to enable dropping messages with no CGA or RSA Signature option within an IPv6 ND Inspection policy Minimal Securi
257. cted automatically Static Select one of the available speeds Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 63 Administration 5 Management Interface Management Interface See IPv4 Management and Interfaces User Accounts See Defining Users Defining Idle Session Timeout The dle Session Timeout configures the time intervals that the management sessions can remain idle before they timeout and you must log in again to reestablish one of the following sessions HTTP Session Timeout HTTPS Session Timeout Console Session Timeout Telnet Session Timeout SSH Session Timeout To set the idle session timeout for various types of sessions STEP 1 Click Administration gt Idle Session Timeout STEP 2 Select the timeout for the each session from the corresponding list The default timeout value is 10 minutes STEP 3 Click Apply to set the configuration settings on the device Time Settings See Administration Time Settings 64 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration 5 System Log System Log See Administration System Log File Management See Administration File Management Rebooting the Device Some configuration changes such as enabling jumbo frame support require the system to be rebooted before they take effect However rebooting the d
258. cted neighbors to advertise themselves and their capabilities to each other Unlike LLDP CDP is a Cisco proprietary protocol CDP Configuration Workflow The followings is sample workflow in configuring CDP on the device You can also find additional CDP configuration guidelines in the LLDP CDP section Enter the CDP global parameters using the CDP Properties page Configure CDP per interface using the Interface Setting page If Auto Smartport is to detect the capabilities of CDP devices enable CDP in the Smartport Properties page See Identifying Smartport Type for a description of how CDP is used to identify devices for the Smartport feature To enter CDP general parameters Click Administration gt Discovery CDP gt Properties Enter the parameters CDP Status Select to enable CDP on the device CDP Frames Handling If CDP is not enabled select the action to be taken if a packet that matches the selected criteria is received Bridging Forward the packet based on the VLAN Filtering Delete the packet Flooding VLAN unaware flooding that forwards incoming CDP packets to all the ports excluding the ingress ports CDP Voice VLAN Advertisement Select to enable the device to advertise the voice VLAN in CDP on all of the ports that are CDP enabled and are member of the voice VLAN The voice VLAN is configured in the Voice VLAN Properties page CDP Mandatory TLVs Validation lf selected incoming
259. d The following topics are covered System Files Upgrade Backup Firmware Language Active Image lt 300 500 gt Download Backup Configuration Log Configuration Files Properties Copy Save Configuration Auto Configuration via DHCP System Files System files are files that contain configuration information firmware images or boot code Various actions can be performed with these files such as selecting the firmware file from which the device boots copying various types of configuration files internally on the device or copying files to or from an external device such as an external server The possible methods of file transfer are Internal copy HTTP HTTPS that uses the facilities that the browser provides TFTF SCP client requiring a TFTP SCP server Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 35 Administration File Management System Files Configuration files on the device are defined by their type and contain the settings and parameter values for the device When a configuration is referenced on the device it is referenced by its configuration file type such as Startup Configuration or Running Configuration as opposed to a file name that can be modified by the user Content can be copied from one configuration file type to another but the names of the file types cannot be changed by the user Other files on the device inc
260. d ARP responses with bindings for a host with an IP address of IA or IB and a MAC address of MC Hosts with poisoned ARP caches use the MAC address MC as the destination MAC address for traffic intended for IA or IB which enables Host C intercepts that traffic Because Host C knows the true MAC addresses associated with IA and IB it can forward the intercepted traffic to those hosts by using the correct MAC address as the destination Host C has inserted itself into the traffic stream from Host A to Host B the classic man in the middle attack How ARP Prevents Cache Poisoning The ARP inspection feature relates to interfaces as either trusted or untrusted see Security gt ARP Inspection gt Interface Setting page Interfaces are classified by the user as follows Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 371 Security ARP Inspection Trusted Packets are not inspected Untrusted Packets are inspected as described above ARP inspection is performed only on untrusted interfaces ARP packets that are received on the trusted interface are simply forwarded Upon packet arrival on untrusted interfaces the following logic is implemented Search the ARP access control rules for the packet s IP MAC addresses If the IP address is found and the MAC address in the list matches the packet s MAC address then the packet is valid otherwise it is not If the
261. d Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Multicast 1 6 Defining Forward All Multicast To statically configure or see dynamically detected ports connected to the Multicast router STEP 1 Click Multicast gt Multicast Router Port STEP 2 Enter some or all of following query filter criteria VLAN ID equals to Select the VLAN ID for the router ports that are described IP Version equals to Select the IP version that the Multicast router supports Interface Type equals to Select whether to display ports or LAGs STEP 3 Click Go The interfaces matching the query criteria are displayed STEP 4 For each port or LAG select its association type The options are as follows tatic The port is statically configured as a Multicast router port Dynamic Display only The port is dynamically configured as a Multicast router port by a MLD IGMP query To enable the dynamic learning of Multicast router ports go to the Multicast gt IGMP Snooping page and the Multicast gt MLD Snooping page Forbidden This port is not to be configured as a Multicast router port even if IGMP or MLD queries are received on this port If Forbidden is enabled on a port Mrouter is not learned on this port i e MRouter Ports Auto Learn is not enabled on this port None The port is not currently a Multicast router port STEP 5 Click Apply to update the device Defining Forward All Multicast The Forward All page
262. d configure the potential member ports to the desired LAGs by using the LAG Management page By default all LAGs are empty Configure the Ethernet parameters such as speed and auto negotiation for the LAGs by using the LAG Settings page Configure the LACP parameters for the ports that are members or candidates of a dynamic LAG by using the LACP page Configure Green Ethernet and 802 3 Energy Efficient Ethernet by using the Properties page Configure Green Ethernet energy mode and 802 3 Energy Efficient Ethernet per port by using the Port Settings page Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 124 Port Management 9 Setting Port Configuration 7 If PoE is supported and enabled for the device configure the device as described in Port Management PoE Setting Port Configuration Ports can be configured in the following pages Port Settings The Port Settings page displays the global and per port setting of all the ports This page enables you to select and configure the desired ports from the Edit Port Settings page To configure port settings STEP 1 Click Port Management gt Port Settings STEP 2 Select Jumbo Frames to support packets of up to 10 Kb in size If Jumbo Frames is not enabled default the system supports packet size up to 2 000 bytes For jumbo frames to take effect the device must be rebooted after the feature is enabled STEP 3 Click
263. d footer background color The selected color is shown in the Text field Header and Footer Text Color Enter the ASCII code of the header and footer text color The selected color is shown in the Text field Hyperlink Color Enter the ASCII code of the hyperlink color The selected color is shown in the Text field Current Logo Image Select one of the following options 404 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security 802 1X Authentication 1 8021X Configuration Through the GUI None No logo 1 Default Use the default logo Other Select to enter a customized logo If the Other logo option is selected the following options are available Logo Image Filename Enter the logo file name or Browse to the image Application Text Enter text to accompany the logo Window Title Text Enter a title for the Login page STEP 4 Click Apply and the settings are saved to the Running Configuration file STEP 5 Click Edit2 The following fields are displayed Invalid User Credentials Enter the text of the message to be displayed when the end user enters an invalid username or password Service Not Available Enter the text of the message to be displayed when the authentication service is not available STEP 6 Click Apply and the settings are saved to the Running Configuration file STEP 7 Click Edit3 The following fields are displayed
264. d indicates fault and Green indicates status OK _Channel Cable channel indicating whether the wires are straight or cross over Polarity lIndicates if automatic polarity detection and correction has been activated for the wire pair Pair Skew Difference in delay between wire pairs NOTE TDR tests cannot be performed when the port speed is 10Mbit Sec Displaying Optical Module Status The Optical Module Status page displays the operating conditions reported by the SFP Small Form factor Pluggable transceiver Some information might not be available for SFPs that do not support the digital diagnostic monitoring standard SFF 8472 MSA compatible SFPs The following FE SFP 100Mbps transceivers are supported MFEBX1 100BASE BX 20U SFP transceiver for single mode fiber 1310 nm wavelength supports up to 20 km MFEFX1 100OBASE FX SFP transceiver for multimode fiber 1310 nm wavelength supports up to 2 km MFELX1 100BASE LX SFP transceiver for single mode fiber 1310 nm wavelength supports up to 10 km The following GE SFP 1000Mbps transceivers are supported MGBBX1 1000BASE BX 20U SFP transceiver for single mode fiber 1310 nm wavelength supports up to 40 km Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 87 Administration Diagnostics Displaying Optical Module Status MGBLH1 1000BASE LH SFP transceiver for single mode fibe
265. d legal messages passes to the IPv6 Source Guard feature Trapped DHCPv6 messages are passed to the DHCP v6 Guard feature DHCP v6 Guard validates these messages drops illegal message and legal messages passes to the IPv6 Source Guard feature Trapped data messages are passed to the IPv6 Source Guard feature IPv6 Source Guard validates received messages trapped data messages NDP messages from ND Inspection and DHCPv6 messages from DHCPv6 Guard using the Neighbor Binding Table drops illegal messages and passes legal messages to forwarding Neighbor Binding Integrity learns neighbors from the received messages NDP and DHCPv6 messages and stores them in the Neighbor Binding table Additionally static entries can be added manually After learning the addresses the NBI feature passes the frames for forwarding Trapped RS CPS NS and NA messages are also passed to the ND Inspection feature ND Inspection validates these messages drops illegal messages and passes legal messages to the IPv6 Source Guard feature Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 413 Security IPV6 First Hop Security First Hop Security Overview IPv6 First Hop Security Perimeter IPv6 First Hop Security switches can form a perimeter separating untrusted area from trusted area All switches inside the perimeter support IPv6 First Hop Security and hosts and routers inside this perimeter are t
266. ddress list to be matched RA Prefix List RA prefix list to be matched Minimal Hop Limit ls minimum RA hop limit verification enabled Maximal Hop Limit ls maximum RA hop limit verification enabled Minimal Router Preference ls minimum router preference verification enabled Maximal Router Preference ls maximum router preference verification enabled ND Inspection Status ND Inspection State on Current VLAN ls ND Inspection enabled on the current VLAN 434 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security IPV6 First Hop Security 2 O Configuring First Hop Security through Web GUI Device Role ND Inspection device role Drop Unsecure Are unsecure messages dropped Minimal Security Level lf unsecure messages are not dropped what is the minimum security level for packets to be forwarded Validate Source MAC I s source MAC address verification enabled DHCP Guard Status DHCPv6 Guard State on Current VLAN ls DHCP v6 Guard enabled on the current VLAN Device Role DHCP device role Match Reply Prefixes ls DHCP reply prefixes verification enabled Match Server Address ls DHCP server addresses verification enabled Minimal Preference ls verification of the minimal preference enabled Maximal Preference ls verification of the maximum preference enabled Neighbor Binding Status Neighbor Binding State o
267. de Internal Version 534 26 SNMP Defining Trap Settings Defining Trap Settings STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 The Trap Settings page enables configuring whether SNMP notifications are sent from the device and for which cases The recipients of the SNMP notifications can be configured in the Notification Recipients SNMPv1 2 page or the Notification Recipients SNMPv3 page To define trap settings Click SNMP gt Trap Settings Select Enable for SNMP Notifications to specify that the device can send SNMP notifications Select Enable for Authentication Notifications to enable SNMP authentication failure notification Click Apply The SNMP Trap settings are written to the Running Configuration file Notification Recipients Trap messages are generated to report system events as defined in RFC 1215 The system can generate traps defined in the MIB that it supports Trap receivers aka Notification Recipients are network nodes where the trap messages are sent by the device A list of notification recipients are defined as the targets of trap messages A trap receiver entry contains the IP address of the node and the SNMP credentials corresponding to the version that is included in the trap message When an event arises that requires a trap message to be sent it is sent to every node listed in the Notification Recipient Table The Notification Recipients SNMPv1 2 page and the Notification Recipients SNM
268. de max addresses port security discard trap 60 smartport storm control broadcast level 10 smartport storm control include multicast smartport storm control broadcast enable spanning tree portfast no_desktop no_desktop macro description No Desktop no smartport switchport trunk native vlan smartport switchport trunk allowed vlan remove all no port security no port security mode no port security max no smartport storm control broadcast enable no smartport storm control broadcast level no smartport storm control include multicast 176 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Smartport Built in Smartport Macros 11 spanning tree portfast auto printer printer macro description printer macro keywords Snative_vlan macro key description S native_vlan The untag VLAN which will be configured on the port Default Values are Snative_vlan Default VLAN the port type cannot be detected automatically switchport mode access switchport access vlan Snative_vlan Single host port security max 1 port security mode max addresses port security discard trap 60 smartport storm control broadcast level 10 smartport storm control include multicast smartport storm control broadcast enable spanning tree portfast no_printer no_printer macro description No printer n
269. de the globally configured rules The globally configured rules override system defaults Common Tasks First Hop Security Common Work Flow STEP 1 Inthe FHS Settings page enter the list of VLANs on which this feature is enabled STEP 2 In this same page set the Global Packet Drop Logging feature 422 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Common Tasks Security IPV6 First Hop Security 2 O STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 1 STEP 2 If required either configure a user defined policy or add rules to the default policies for the feature Attach the policy to a VLAN port or LAG using either the Policy Attachment VLAN or Policy Attachment Port pages Router Advertisement Guard Work Flow In the RA Guard Settings page enter the list of VLANs on which this feature is enabled In this same page set the global configuration values that are used if no values are set in a policy If required either configure a user defined policy or add rules to the default policies for the feature Attach the policy to a VLAN port or LAG using either the Policy Attachment VLAN or Policy Attachment Port pages DHCP v6 Guard Work Flow In the DHCP v6 Guard Settings page enter the list of VLANs on which this feature is enabled In this same page set the global configuration value
270. denied Action Select the action attached to the rule The options are Permit Permits access to the device if the user matches the settings in the profile Deny Denies access to the device if the user matches the settings in the profile Applies to Interface Select the interface attached to the rule The options are 344 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security Management Access Method 1 8 All Applies to all ports VLANs and LAGs User Defined Applies to selected interface Interface Enter the interface number if User Defined was selected Applies to Source IP Address Select the type of source IP address to which the access profile applies The Source IP Address field is valid for a subnetwork Select one of the following values All Applies to all types of IP addresses User Defined Applies to only those types of IP addresses defined in the fields IP Address Enter the source IP address Mask Select the format for the subnet mask for the source IP address and enter a value in one of the fields Network Mask Select the subnet to which the source IP address belongs and enter the subnet mask in dotted decimal format Prefix Length Select the Prefix Length and enter the number of bits that comprise the source IP address prefix STEP 7 Click Apply The access profile is written to the Runn
271. denied access to the device The rule priority is essential to matching packets to rules as packets are matched on a first fit basis Management Method Select the management method for which the rule is defined The options are All Assigns all management methods to the rule Telnet Users requesting access to the device that meets the Telnet access profile criteria are permitted or denied access Secure Telnet SSH Users requesting access to the device that meets the Telnet access profile criteria are permitted or denied access HTTP Assigns HTTP access to the rule Users requesting access to the device that meets the HTTP access profile criteria are permitted or denied Secure HTTP HTTPS Users requesting access to the device that meets the HTTPS access profile criteria are permitted or denied SNMP Uusers requesting access to the device that meets the SNMP access profile criteria are permitted or denied Action Select Permit to permit the users that attempt to access the device by using the configured access method from the interface and IP source defined in this rule Or select Deny to deny access Applies to Interface Select the interface attached to the rule The options are All Applies to all ports VLANs and LAGs User Defined Applies only to the port VLAN or LAG selected 346 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Intern
272. device The value equals the sysDescr object System Capabilities Primary functions of the device and whether or not these functions are enabled in the device The capabilities are indicated by two octets Bits O through 7 indicate Other Repeater Bridge WLAN AP Router Telephone DOCSIS cable device and station respectively Bits 8 through 15 are reserved 802 3 MAC PHY Duplex and bit rate capability and the current duplex and bit rate settings of the sending device It also indicates whether the current settings are due to auto negotiation or manual configuration 802 3 Link Aggregation Whether the link associated with the port on which the LLDP PDU is transmitted can be aggregated It also indicates whether the link is currently aggregated and if so provides the aggregated port identifier 802 3 Maximum Frame Maximum frame size capability of the MAC PHY implementation The following fields relate to the Management Address Advertisement Mode Select one of the following ways to advertise the IP management address of the device Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 99 Administration Discovery Configuring LLDP Auto Advertise Specifies that the software would automatically choose a management address to advertise from all the IP addresses of the product In case of multiple IP addresses the software chooses the l
273. directly connected LLDP and CDP capable neighbors to advertise themselves and their capabilities to each other By default the device sends an LLDP CDP advertisement periodically to all its interfaces and terminates and processes incoming LLDP and CDP packets as required by the protocols In LLDP and CDP advertisements are encoded as TLV Type Length Value in the packet The following CDP LLDP configuration notes apply CDP LLDP can be globally enabled or disabled and enabled disabled per port The CDP LLDP capability of a port is relevant only if CDP LLDP is globally enabled If CDP LLDP is globally enabled the device filters out incoming CDP LLDP packets from ports that are CDP LLDP disabled If CDP LLDP is globally disabled the device can be configured to discard VLAN aware flooding or VLAN unaware flooding of all incoming CDP LLDP packets VLAN aware flooding floods an incoming CDP LLDP packet to the VLAN where the packet is received excluding the ingress port VLAN unaware flooding floods an incoming CDP LLDP packet to all the ports excluding the ingress port The default is to discard CDP LLDP packets when CDP LLDP is globally disabled You can configure the discard flooding of incoming CDP and LLDP packets from the CDP Properties page and the LLDP Properties page respectively Auto Smartport requires CDP and or LLDP to be enabled Auto Smartport automatically configures an interface based on the CDP LLDP advertisemen
274. dit Port Setting page b Select Auto Negotiation field to ensure that it is Enabled STEP 2 Ensure that 802 3 Energy Efficient Ethernet EEE is globally enabled in the Port Management gt Green Ethernet gt Properties page it is enabled by default This page also displays how much energy has been saved STEP 3 Ensure that 802 3az EEE is enabled on a port by opening the Green Ethernet gt Port Settings page a Select a port open the Edit Port Setting page b Check the 802 3 Energy Efficient Ethernet EEE mode on the port it is enabled by default c Select whether to enable or disable advertisement of 802 3az EEE capabilities through LLDP in 802 3 Energy Efficient Ethernet EEE LLDP it is enabled by default Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 141 Port Management Configuring Green Ethernet STEP 4 Tosee 802 3 EEE related information on the local device open the Administration gt Discovery LLDP gt LLDP Local Information page and view the information in the 802 3 Energy Efficient Ethernet EEE block STEP 5 Todisplay 802 3az EEE information on the remote device open the Administration gt Discovery LLDP gt LLDP Neighbor Information pages and view the information in the 802 3 Energy Efficient Ethernet EEE block Setting Global Green Ethernet Properties The Properties page displays and enables configuration of the Green Ethernet mode fo
275. ditional users that are permitted to access to the device read only or read write or changing the passwords of existing users After adding a level 15 user as described below the default user is removed from the system Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 329 Security Defining Users NOTE Itis not permitted to delete all users If all users are selected the Delete button is disabled To add a new user STEP 1 Click Administration gt User Accounts This page displays the users defined in the system and their user privilege level STEP 2 Select Password Recovery Service to enable this feature When this is enabled an end user with physical access to the console port of the device can enter the boot menu and trigger the password recovery process When the boot system process ends you are allowed to login to the device without password authentication Entering the device is allowed only via the console and only when the console is connected to the device with physical access When password recovery mechanism is disabled accessing the boot menu is still allowed and you can trigger the password recovery process The difference is that in this case all configuration and user files are removed during the system boot process and a suitable log message is generated to the terminal STEP 3 Click Add to add a new user or click Edit to modify a user STEP 4 E
276. dministration File Management Download Backup Configuration Log STEP 4 If you selected via HTTP HTTPS enter the parameters as described in this step Select the Save Action If Save Action is Download replacing the file on the device with a new version from another device do the following Otherwise go to the next procedure in this step a Source File Name Click Browse to select a file or enter the path and source file name to be used in the transfer b Destination File Type Select the configuration file type Only valid file types are displayed The file types are described in the Files and File Types section c Click Apply The file is transferred from the other device to the device If Save Action is Backup copying a file to another device do the following a Source File Type Select the configuration file type Only valid file types are displayed The file types are described in the Files and File Types section b Sensitive Data Select how sensitive data should be included in the backup file The following options are available Exclude Do not include sensitive data in the backup Encrypted lInclude sensitive data in the backup in its encrypted form Plaintext lInclude sensitive data in the backup in its plaintext form NOTE The available sensitive data options are determined by the current user SSD rules For details refer to Secure Sensitive Data Management gt SSD Rules page c Click
277. dministration gt System Log gt Remote Log Servers STEP 2 Enter the following fields IPv4 Source Interface Select the source interface whose IPv4 address will be used as the source IPv4 address of SYSLOG messages sent to SYSLOG servers IPv6 Source Interface Select the source interface whose IPv6 address will be used as the source IPv6 address of SYSLOG messages sent to SYSLOG servers Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 31 Administration System Log Setting Remote Logging Settings NOTE If the Auto option is selected the system takes the source IP address from the IP address defined on the outgoing interface STEP 3 Click Add STEP 4 Enter the parameters Server Definition Select whether to identify the remote log server by IP address or name IP Version Select the supported IP format IPv6 Address Type Select the IPv6 address type if IPv6 is used The options are Link Local The IPv6 address uniquely identifies hosts on a single network link A link local address has a prefix of FE80 is not routable and can be used for communication only on the local network Only one link local address is supported If a link local address exists on the interface this entry replaces the address in the configuration Global The IPv6 address is a global Unicast IPV6 type that is visible and reachable from other networks Link Local Int
278. dministration Guide Internal Version Multicast Adding MAC Group Address 1 6 STEP 3 Click Apply The Running Configuration file is updated Adding MAC Group Address STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 The device supports forwarding incoming Multicast traffic based on the Multicast group information This information is derived from the IGMP MLD packets received or as the result of manual configuration and it is stored in the Multicast Forwarding Database MFDB When a frame is received from a VLAN that is configured to forward Multicast streams based on MAC group addresses and its destination address is a Layer 2 Multicast address the frame is forwarded to all ports that are members of the MAC group address The MAC Group Address page has the following functions Query and view information from the MFDB relating to a specific VLAN ID or a specific MAC address group This data is acquired either dynamically through IGMP MLD snooping or statically by manual entry Add or delete static entries to the MFDB that provide static forwarding information based on MAC destination addresses Display a list of all ports LAGs that are a member of each VLAN ID and MAC address group and enter whether traffic is forwarded to it or not For viewing the forwarding information when the mode is P Address Group or IP and Source Group use the IP Multicast Group Address page To define and view MAC Multicast groups Click Multica
279. dpoints reside in the same voice VLAN The voice VLAN of UC3xx UC5xx defaults to VLAN 100 Third party IP PBX hosted Cisco SBTG CP 79xx SPA5xx phones and SPA8800 endpoints support this deployment model In this model the VLAN used by the phones is determined by the network configuration There may or may not be separate voice and data VLANs The phones and VoIP endpoints register with an on premise IP PBX Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 211 13 VLAN Management Voice VLAN IP Centrex ITSP hosted Cisco CP 79xx SPA5xx phones and SPA8800 endpoints support this deployment model For this model the VLAN used by the phones is determined by the network configuration There may or may not be separate voice and data VLANs The phones and VoIP endpoints register with an off premise SIP proxy in the cloud From a VLAN perspective the above models operate in both VLAN aware and VLAN unaware environments In the VLAN aware environment the voice VLAN is one of the many VLANs configured in an installation The VLAN unaware scenario is equivalent to a VLAN aware environment with only one VLAN The device always operates as a VLAN aware switch The device supports a single voice VLAN By default the voice VLAN is VLAN 1 The voice VLAN is defaulted to VLAN 1 A different voice VLAN can be manually configured It can also be dynamically learned when Auto Voice
280. dress is a global Unicast IPV6 type that is visible and reachable from other networks Link Local Interface Select the link local interface if IPv6 Address Type Link Local is selected from the list Server IP Address Name Enter the IP address or domain name of the log server Engine ID Enter the Engine ID STEP 5 Click Apply The Running Configuration file is updated Configuring SNMP Views A view is a user defined label for a collection of MIB subtrees Each subtree ID is defined by the Object ID OID of the root of the relevant subtrees Either well known names can be used to specify the root of the desired subtree or an OID can be entered see Model OIDs 527 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version conf 26 Configuring SNMP Views Each subtree is either included or excluded in the view being defined The Views page enables creating and editing SNMP views The default views Default DefaultSuper cannot be changed Views can be attached to groups in the Groups page or to a community which employs basic access mode through the Communities page To define SNMP views STEP 1 Click SNMP gt Views STEP 2 Click Add to define new views STEP 3 Enter the parameters View Name Enter a view name between 0 30 characters Object ID Subtree Select the node in the MIB tree that is included or excluded in the selected SNMP view The o
281. ds are identical Operational Auto Negotiation Displays the auto negotiation setting Administrative Speed Select the LAG speed Operational LAG Speed Displays the current speed at which the LAG is operating Administrative Advertisement Select the capabilities to be advertised by the LAG The options are Max Capability All LAG speeds and both duplex modes are available 10 Full The LAG advertises a 10 Mbps speed and the mode is full duplex 100 Full The LAG advertises a 100 Mbps speed and the mode is full duplex 1000 Full The LAG advertises a 1000 Mbps speed and the mode is full duplex Operational Advertisement Displays the Administrative Advertisement status The LAG advertises its capabilities to its neighbor LAG to start the negotiation process The possible values are those specified in the Administrative Advertisement field Administrative Flow Control Set Flow Control to either Enable or Disable or enable the Auto Negotiation of Flow Control on the LAG Operational Flow Control Displays the current Flow Control setting Protected LAG Select to make the LAG a protected port for Layer 2 isolation See the Port Configuration description in Setting Basic Port Configuration for details regarding protected ports and LAGs STEP 4 Click Apply The Running Configuration file is updated 134 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide
282. e Dynamic Only Clear all dynamic entries in the table All Dynamic amp Static Clear all dynamic and static entries in the table Click Add to add a new entry to the table Enter the following fields VLAN ID VLAN ID of the entry IPv6 Address Source IPv6 address of the entry Interface Name Port on which packet is received MAC Address Neighbor MAC address of the packet Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 433 20 Security IPV6 First Hop Security Configuring First Hop Security through Web GUI FHS Status To display the global configuration for the FHS features STEP 1 Click Security gt First Hop Security gt FHS Status STEP 2 Selecta port LAG or VLAN for which the FHS state is reported STEP 3 The following fields are displayed for the selected interface FHS Status FHS State on Current VLAN ls FHS enabled on the current VLAN Packet Drop Logging ls this feature enabled for the current interface at the level of global configuration or in a policy attached to the interface RA Guard Status RA Guard State on Current VLAN Is RA Guard enabled on the current VLAN Device Role RA device role Managed Configuration Flag ls verification of the managed configuration flag enabled Other Configuration Flag ls verification of the other configuration flag enabled RA Address List RA a
283. e tThe access rights of a community are defined by a group defined in the Groups page You can configure the group with a specific security model The access rights of a group are Read Write and Notify Choose whether to restrict the SNMP management station to one address or allow SNMP management from all addresses If you choose to restrict SNMP management to one address then input the address of your SNMP Management PC in the IP Address field Input the unique community string in the Community String field Optionally enable traps by using the Trap Settings page Optionally define a notification filter s by using the Notification Filter page Configure the notification recipients on the Notification Recipients SNMPv1 2 page If you decide to use SNMPv3 Define the SNMP engine by using the Engine ID page Either create a unique Engine ID or use the default Engine ID Applying an Engine ID configuration clears the SNMP database Optionally define SNMP view s by using the Views page This limits the range of OIDs available to a community or group Define groups by using the Groups page Define users by using the SNMP Users page where they can be associated witha group If the SNMP Engine ID is not set then users may not be created 523 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version A 26 Model OIDs STEP 5 Optionally enable or disable traps by using t
284. e After you log in the application returns to the initial page The initial page displayed depends on the Do not show this page on startup option in the Getting Started page If you did not select this option the initial page is the Getting Started page If you did select this option the initial page is the System Summary page Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Getting Started Quick Start Device Configuration Quick Start Device Configuration To simplify device configuration through quick navigation the Getting Started page provides links to the most commonly used pages Category Link Name on the Page Linked Page Change Management Applications and Services TCP UDP Services page Change Device IP Address IPv4 Interface page Create VLAN Create VLAN page Configure Port Settings Port Setting page Device Status System Summary System Summary page Port Statistics Interface page RMON Statistics Statistics page View Log RAM Memory page Quick Access Change Device Password User Accounts page Upgrade Device Software Upgrade Backup Firmware Language page Backup Device Configuration Download Backup Configuration Log page Create MAC Based ACL MAC Based ACL page Create IP Based ACL IPv4 Based ACL page Configure QoS QoS Properties page Conf
285. e actions in the LAG Management page 2 Configure various aspects of the LAG such as speed and flow control by using the LAG Settings page Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 131 Port Management Link Aggregation To configure a dynamic LAG perform the following actions 1 Enable LACP onthe LAG Assign up to 16 candidates ports to the dynamic LAG by selecting and moving the ports from the Port List to the LAG Members List by using the LAG Management page 2 Configure various aspects of the LAG such as speed and flow control by using the LAG Settings page 3 Set the LACP priority and timeout of the ports in the LAG by using the LACP page Defining LAG Management The LAG Management page displays the global and per LAG settings The page also enables you to configure the global setting and to select and edit the desired LAG on the Edit LAG Membership page To select the load balancing algorithm of the LAG STEP 1 Click Port Management gt Link Aggregation gt LAG Management STEP 2 Select one of the following Load Balance Algorithms MAC Address Perform load balancing by source and destination MAC addresses on all packets _IP MAC Address Perform load balancing by the source and destination IP addresses on IP packets and by the source and destination MAC addresses on non IP packets STEP 3 Click Apply The Load Balance Algorithm is
286. e 373 QoS Features and Components 374 Configuring QoS General 375 Managing QoS Statistics 384 Chapter 26 SNMP 387 SNMP Versions and Workflow 387 Model OIDs 390 SNMP Engine ID 391 Configuring SNMP Views 393 Creating SNMP Groups 394 Cisco Small Business 300 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide 7 Contents Managing SNMP Users 396 Defining SNMP Communities 398 Defining Trap Settings 400 Notification Recipients 400 SNMP Notification Filters 405 Cisco Small Business 300 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide 8 Contents Cisco Small Business 300 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide 9 Getting Started This section provides an introduction to the web based configuration utility and covers the following topics Starting the Web based Configuration Utility Quick Start Device Configuration Interface Naming Conventions Window Navigation Starting the Web based Configuration Utility This section describes how to navigate the web based switch configuration utility If you are using a pop up blocker make sure it is disabled Browser Restrictions If you are using IPv6 interfaces on your management station use the IPv6 global address and not the IPv6 link local address to access the device from your browser Launching the Configuration Utility To open the web based configuration utility STEP 1 Opena Web browser STEP 2 Enter the IP address of the device you are configuri
287. e IPv4 address will be used as the source IPv4 address for communication messages If the Host Definition field was By Name all IPv4 and IPv6 addresses will be displayed in this drop down field If the Host Definition field was By IP Address only the existing IP addresses of the type specified in the IP Version field will be displayed NOTE If the Auto option is selected the system computes the source address based on the destination address Destination IPv6 Address Type Select Link Local or Global as the type of IPv6 address to enter Link Local The IPv6 address uniquely identifies hosts on a single network link A link local address has a prefix of FE80 is not routable and can be used for communication only on the local network Only one link local address is supported If a link local address exists on the interface this entry replaces the address in the configuration Global The IPv6 address is a global Unicast IPV6 type that is visible and reachable from other networks Link Local Interface lf the IPv6 address type is Link Local select from where it is received Host IP Address Name Enter the host address or name TTL Enter the maximum number of hops that Traceroute permits This is used to prevent a case where the sent frame gets into an endless loop The Traceroute command terminates when the destination is reached or when this value is reached To use the default value 30 select Use Default
288. e LLDP in the Smartport Properties page 6 Display overloading information by using the LLDP Overloading page Setting LLDP Properties The LLDP Properties page enables entering LLDP general parameters such as enabling disabling the feature globally and setting timers To enter LLDP properties STEP 1 Click Administration gt Discovery LLDP gt Properties STEP 2 Enter the parameters LLDP Status Select to enable LLDP on the device enabled by default LLDP Frames Handling If LLDP is not enabled select the action to be taken if a packet that matches the selected criteria is received Filtering Delete the packet Flooding Forward the packet to all VLAN members TLV Advertise Interval Enter the rate in seconds at which LLDP advertisement updates are sent or use the default Topology Change SNMP Notification Interval Enter the minimum time interval between SNMP notifications Hold Multiplier Enter the amount of time that LLDP packets are held before the packets are discarded measured in multiples of the TLV Advertise Interval For example if the TLV Advertise Interval is 30 seconds and the Hold Multiplier is 4 then the LLDP packets are discarded after 120 seconds Reinitializing Delay Enter the time interval in seconds that passes between disabling and reinitializing LLDP following an LLDP enable disable cycle Transmit Delay Enter the amount of time in seconds that passes between successi
289. e been changed they can be restored Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 443 Security Secure Sensitive Data Management SSD Properties SSD Default Read Mode Session Override The system contains sensitive data in a session as either encrypted or plaintext based on the read permission and the default read mode of the user The default read mode can be temporarily overridden as long it does not conflict with the SSD read permission of the session This change is effective immediately in the current session until one of the following occurs User changes it again Session is terminated The read permission of the SSD rule that is applied to the session user is changed and is no longer compatible with the current read mode of the session In this case the session read mode returns to the default read mode of the SSD rule SSD Properties SSD properties are a set of parameters that in conjunction with the SSD rules define and control the SSD environment of a device The SSD environment consists of these properties Controlling how the sensitive data is encrypted Controlling the strength of security on configuration files Controlling how the sensitive data is viewed within the current session Passphrase A passphrase is the basis of the security mechanism in the SSD feature and is used to generate the key for the encryption and decrypti
290. e containing the following parameters is sent Port number Smartport type The line number of the failed CLI command in the macro When a Smartport macro fails on an interface the status of the interface is set to Unknown The reason for the failure can be displayed in the Interface Settings page Show Diagnostics popup After the source of the problem is determined and the existing configuration or Smartport macro is corrected you must perform a reset operation to reset the interface before it can be reapplied with a Smartport type in the Interface Settings pages See the workflow area in Common Smartport Tasks section for troubleshooting tips How the Smartport Feature Works You can apply a Smartport macro to an interface by the macro name or by the Smartport type associated with the macro Applying a Smartport macro by macro name can be done only through the CLI you should refer to the CLI guide for details Because support is provided for Smartport types which correspond to devices that do not allow themselves to be discovered via CDP and or LLDP these Smartport types must be statically assigned to the desired interfaces This can be done by navigating to the Smartport Interface Settings page selecting the radio button of the desired interface and clicking Edit Then select the Smartport type you want to assign and adjust the parameters as necessary before clicking Apply 162 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Seri
291. e data and are protected under SSD All configuration of SSD is performed through the SSD pages that are only available to users with the correct permissions see SSD Rules SSD rules define the read permissions and default read mode given to a user session on a management channel An SSD rule is uniquely identified by its user and SSD management channel Different SSD rules might exist for the same user but for different channels and conversely different rules might exist for the same channel but for different users Read permissions determine how sensitive data can be viewed in only encrypted form in only plaintext form in both encrypted or plaintext or no permission to view sensitive data The SSD rules themselves are protected as sensitive data A device can support a total of 32 SSD rules A device grants a user the SSD read permission of the SSD rule that best matches the user identity credential and the type of management channel from which the user is will access the sensitive data A device comes with a set of default SSD rules An administrator can add delete and change SSD rules as desired Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 439 21 Security Secure Sensitive Data Management SSD Rules NOTE A device may not support all the channels defined by SSD Elements of an SSD Rule An SSD rule includes the following elements User type T
292. e device is configured with a static IP address it issues DHCP v4 requests until a response is received from the DHCP server Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 269 IP Configuration Overview If the IP address on the device is changed the device issues gratuitous ARP packets to the corresponding VLAN to check IP address collisions This rule also applies when the device reverts to the default IP address The system status LED changes to solid green when a new unique IP address is received from the DHCP server If a static IP address has been set the system status LED also changes to solid green The LED flashes when the device is acquiring an IP address and is currently using the factory default IP address 192 168 1 254 The same rules apply when a client must renew the lease prior to its expiration date through a DHCPREQUEST message With factory default settings when no statically defined or DHCP acquired IP address is available the default IP address is used When the other IP addresses become available the addresses are automatically used The default IP address is always on the management VLAN Layer 3 IP Addressing In Layer 3 system mode the device can have multiple IP addresses Each IP address can be assigned to specified ports LAGs or VLANs These IP addresses are configured in the IPv4 Interface and IPv6 Interfaces pages in Layer 3 sy
293. e fails This is the default Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 295 17 IP Configuration DHCP Server STEP 1 STEP 2 Mixed A combination of b node and p node communications is used to register and resolve NetBIOS names M node first uses b node then if necessary p node M node is typically not the best choice for larger networks because its preference for b node Broadcasts increases network traffic Peer to Peer Point to point communications with a NetBIOS name server are used to register and resolve computer names to IP addresses Broadcast IP Broadcast messages are used to register and resolve NetBIOS names to IP addresses SNTP Server IP Address Option 4 Select one of the device s SNTP servers if already configured or select Other and enter the IP address of the time server for the DHCP client File Server IP Address siaddr Enter the IP address of the TFTP SCP server from which the configuration file is downloaded File Server Host Name Sname Enter the name of the TFTP SCP server Configuration File Name file Enter the name of the file that is used as a configuration file Excluded Addresses By default the DHCP server assumes that all pool addresses in a pool may be assigned to clients A single IP address or a range of IP addresses can be excluded The excluded addresses are excluded from all DHCP p
294. e following options None Privacy password is not encrypted DES Privacy password is encrypted according to the Data Encryption Standard DES Privacy Password 16 bytes are required DES encryption key if the DES privacy method was selected This field must be exactly 32 hexadecimal characters The Encrypted or Plaintext mode can be selected STEP 4 Click Apply to save the settings Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 532 26 SNMP Defining SNMP Communities Defining SNMP Communities STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 Access rights in SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 are managed by defining communities in the Communities page The community name is a type of shared password between the SNMP management station and the device It is used to authenticate the SNMP management station Communities are only defined in SNMPv1 and v2 because SNMPv3 works with users instead of communities The users belong to groups that have access rights assigned to them The Communities page associates communities with access rights either directly Basic mode or through groups Advanced mode Basic mode The access rights of a community can configure with Read Only Read Write or SNMP Admin In addition you can restrict the access to the community to only certain MIB objects by selecting a view defined in the SNMP Views page Advanced Mode tThe access rights of a c
295. e following when connecting switches capable of supplying PoE The PoE models of the Sx200 Sx300 and SF500 series switches are PSE Power Sourcing Equipment that are capable of supplying DC power to attaching PD Powered Devices These devices include VoIP phones IP cameras and wireless access points The PoE switches can detect and supply power to pre standard legacy PoE Powered Devices Due to the support of legacy PoE it is possible that a PoE device acting as a PSE may mistakenly detect and supply power to an attaching PSE including other PoE switches as a legacy PD Even though Sx200 300 500 PoE switches are PSE and as such should be powered by AC they could be powered up as a legacy PD by another PSE due to false detection When this happens the PoE device may not operate properly and Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 189 Port Management PoE Configuring PoE Properties may not be able to properly supply power to its attaching PDs To prevent false detection you should disable PoE on the ports on the PoE switches that are used to connect to PSEs You should also first power up a PSE device before connecting it to a PoE device When a device is being falsely detected as a PD you should disconnect the device from the PoE port and power recycle the device with AC power before reconnecting its PoE ports Configuring PoE Properties The PoE Proper
296. e is added STEP 2 Click the Add Button The Add Protocol Based Group page appears STEP 3 Enter the following fields Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 209 13 VLAN Management VLAN Groups Encapsulation Protocol Packet type The following options are available Ethernet V2 If this is selected select the Ethernet Type LLC SNAP rfc1042 lf this is selected enter the Protocol Value LLC If this is selected select the DSAP SSAP Values Ethernet Type Select the Ethernet type for Ethernet V2 encapsulation This is the two octet field in the Ethernet frame used to indicate which protocol is encapsulated in the payload of the Ethernet packet for the VLAN group Protocol Value Enter the protocol for LLC SNAP rfc 1042 encapsulation DSAP SSAP Enter these values for LLC encapsulation Group ID Enter a protocol group ID STEP 4 Click Apply The Protocol Group is added and written to the Running Configuration file Protocol Based Groups to VLAN Mapping To map a protocol group to a port the port must be in General mode and not have DVA configured on it see Configuring VLAN Interface Settings Several groups can be bound to a single port with each port being associated to its own VLAN It is possible to map several groups to a single VLAN as well To map the protocol port to a VLAN STEP 1 Click VLAN Management gt VLAN
297. e link local interface if IPv6 Address Type Link Local is selected from the list Server IP Address Name Enter the RADIUS server by IP address or name Priority Enter the priority of the server The priority determines the order the device attempts to contact the servers to authenticate a user The device starts with the highest priority RADIUS server first Zero is the highest priority Key String Enter the key string used for authenticating and encrypting communication between the device and the RADIUS server This key must match the key configured on the RADIUS server It can be entered in Encrypted or Plaintext format If Use Default is selected the device attempts to authenticate to the RADIUS server by using the default Key String Timeout for Reply Enter the number of seconds the device waits for an answer from the RADIUS server before retrying the query or switching to the next server if the maximum number of retries were made If Use Default is selected the device uses the default timeout value Authentication Port Enter the UDP port number of the RADIUS server port for authentication requests Accounting Port Enter the UDP port number of the RADIUS server port for accounting requests Retries Enter the number of requests that are sent to the RADIUS server before a failure is considered to have occurred If Use Default is selected the device uses the default value for the number of retries Dead Time Ente
298. e lowest priority For each 802 1p priority select the Output Queue to which it is mapped Click Apply 80 1 1p priority values to queues are mapped and the Running Configuration file is updated Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 496 25 Quality of Service Configuring QoS General Mapping DSCP to Queue The DSCP IP Differentiated Services Code Point to Queue page maps DSCP values to egress queues The DSCP to Queue Table determines the egress queues of the incoming IP packets based on their DSCP values The original VPT VLAN Priority Tag of the packet is unchanged By simply changing the DSCP to Queue mapping and the Queue schedule method and bandwidth allocation it is possible to achieve the desired quality of services in a network The DSCP to Queue mapping is applicable to IP packets if The device is in QoS Basic mode and DSOP is the trusted mode or The device is in QoS Advanced mode and the packets belongs to flows that is DSCP trusted Non IP packets are always classified to the best effort queue 497 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Quality of Service Configuring QoS General 25 The following tables describe the default DSCP to queue mapping for a 4 queue system DSCP 63 55 47 39 31 23 15 7 Queue
299. e must be less than the Maximal Preference value Maximal Preference This field indicates whether the DHCP v6 Guard policy will check the maximum advertised preference value of the packet received This value must be greater than the Minimal Preference value No Verification Disables verification of the lower boundary of the hop count limit User Defined Verifies that the advertised preference value is less than or equal to this value STEP 3 If required click Add to create a DHCPV6 policy STEP 4 Enter the following fields Policy Name Enter a user defined policy name 428 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security IPV6 First Hop Security 2 O Configuring First Hop Security through Web GUI Device Role Select either Server or Client to specify the role of the device attached to the port for DHCP v6 Guard Inherited Role of device is inherited from either the VLAN or system default client Client Role of device is client Host Role of device is host Match Reply Prefixes Select to enable verification of the advertised prefixes in received DHCP reply messages within a DHCPv6 Guard policy Inherited Value is inherited from either the VLAN or system default no verification No Verification Advertised prefixes are not verified Match List IPv6 prefix list to be matched Match Server Address Sele
300. e packet received Minimal Hop Limit Verifies that the hop count limit is greater than or equal to this value No Verification Disables verification of the lower boundary of the hop count limit Maximal Hop Limit This field indicates whether the RA Guard policy will check the maximum hop limit of the packet received Maximal Hop Limit Verifies that the hop count limit is less than or equal to this value The value of the high boundary must be equal or greater than the value of the low boundary No Verification Disables verification of the high boundary of the hop count limit Managed Configuration Flag This field specifies verification of the advertised Managed Address Configuration flag within an IPv6 RA Guard policy No Verification Disables verification of the advertised Managed Address Configuration flag On Enables verification of the advertised Managed Address Configuration flag Off The value of the flag must be O 426 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security IPV6 First Hop Security 2 O Configuring First Hop Security through Web GUI Other Configuration Flag tThis field specifies verification of the advertised Other Configuration flag within an IPv6 RA Guard policy No Verification Disables verification of the advertised Other Configuration flag On Enables verification of the advertised Managed
301. e previous one When the expiration time expires the device does the following with the information received If the neighbor message contains the local device ID The link status of the port is set to bidirectional If the neighbor message does not contain the local device ID The link status of the port is set to unidirectional and the port is shut down lf UDLD messages are not received from a neighboring device during the expiration time frame the link status of the port is sent to undetermined and the following occurs Device is in normal UDLD mode A notification is issued Device is in aggressive UDLD mode The port is shut down While the interface is in the bidirectional or the undetermined state the device periodically sends a message each message time seconds The above steps are performed over and over A port that was shut down can be reactivated manually in the Port Management gt Error Recovery Settings page For more information see Reactivating a Shutdown Port 148 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Port Management Unidirectional Link Detection 1 O UDLD Operation If an interface is down and UDLD is enabled the device removes all neighbor information and sends at least one ULDL message to the neighbors informing them that the port is down When the port is brought up the UDLD state is changed to detection UDLD Not S
302. e since the last time the file was saved Save the Running Configuration to the Startup Configuration before logging off to preserve any changes you made during this session A flashing red X icon to the left of the Save application link indicates that Running Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Getting Started Starting the Web based Configuration Utility Configuration changes have not yet been saved to the Startup Configuration file The flashing can be disabled by clicking on the Disable Save Icon Blinking button on the Copy Save Configuration page When the device auto discovers a device such as an IP phone see What is a Smartport and it configures the port appropriately for the device These configuration commands are written to the Running Configuration file This causes the Save icon to begin blinking when the you log on even though you did not make any configuration changes When you click Save the Copy Save Configuration page appears Save the Running Configuration file by copying it to the Startup Configuration file After this save the red X icon and the Save application link are no longer displayed To logout click Logout in the top right corner of any page The system logs out of the device When a timeout occurs or you intentionally log out of the system a message appears and the Login page appears with a message indicating the logged out stat
303. e the default router resides Type tThe default router configuration that includes the following options 308 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration 1 7 IPv6 Management and Interfaces Static The default router was manually added to this table through the Add button Dynamic The default router was dynamically configured STEP 2 Click Add to add a static default router STEP 3 Enter the following fields Link Local Interface Displays the outgoing Link Local interface Default Router IPv6 Address tThe IP address of the default router STEP 4 Click Apply The default router is saved to the Running Configuration file Defining IPv6 Neighbors Information The IPv6 Neighbors page enables configuring and viewing the list of IPv6 neighbors on the IPv6 interface The IPv6 Neighbor Table also known as IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Cache displays the MAC addresses of the IPv6 neighbors that are in the same IPv6 subnet as the device This is the IPv6 equivalent of the IPv4 ARP Table When the device needs to communicate with its neighbors the device uses the IPv6 Neighbor Table to determine the MAC addresses based on their IPv6 addresses This page displays the neighbors that were automatically detected or manually configured entries Each entry displays to which interface the neighbor is connected the neighbor s IPv6 and MAC addresses the
304. eceived through a VLAN or ISATAP Recipient IP Address Name Enter the IP address or server name of where the traps are sent UDP Port Enter the UDP port used for notifications on the recipient device Notification Type Select whether to send Traps or Informs If both are required two recipients must be created Timeout Enter the number of seconds the device waits before re sending informs Retries Enter the number of times that the device resends an inform request Community String Select from the pull down the community string of the trap manager Community String names are generated from those listed in the Community page Notification Version Select the trap SNMP version Either SNMPv1 or SNMPv2 may be used as the version of traps with only a single version enabled at a time Notification Filter Select to enable filtering the type of SNMP notifications sent to the management station The filters are created in the Notification Filter page Filter Name Select the SNMP filter that defines the information contained in traps defined in the Notification Filter page STEP 5 Click Apply The SNMP Notification Recipient settings are written to the Running Configuration file 537 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version SNMP Notification Recipients 26 Defining SNMPv3 Notification Recipients To define a recipient in SNMPvs S
305. ecifies the number of days a certification is valid STEP 5 Click Generate Certificate Request This creates a key that must be entered on the Certification Authority CA To import a certificate STEP 1 Click Security gt SSL Server gt SSL Server Authentication Settings STEP 2 Click Import Certificate STEP 3 Enter the following fields Certificate ID Select the active certificate Certificate Copy in the received certificate Import RSA KEY Pair Select to enable copying in the new RSA key pair Public Key Copy in the RSA public key 350 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security 1 8 SSH Server Private Key Encrypted Select and copy in the RSA private key in encrypted form Private Key Plaintext Select and copy in the RSA private key in plain text form STEP 4 Click Display Sensitive Data as Encrypted to display this key as encrypted When this button is clicked the private keys are written to the configuration file in encrypted form when Apply is clicked STEP 5 Click Apply to apply the changes to the Running Configuration The Details button displays the certificate and RSA key pair This is used to copy the certificate and RSA key pair to another device using copy paste When you click Display Sensitive Data as Encrypted the private keys are displayed in encrypted form SSH Server See Security SSH Serve
306. ect Smartport type The assignment is based on the following algorithm Ifall devices on an interface advertise the same capability there is no conflict the matching Smartport type is applied to the interface f one of the devices is a switch the Switch Smartport type is used f one of the devices is an AP the Wireless Access Point Smartport type is used f one of the devices is an IP phone and another device is a host the ip_phone_desktop Smartport type is used f one of the devices is an IP phone desktop and the other is an IP phone or host the ip_phone_desktop Smartport type is used Inall other cases the default Smartport type is used For more information about LLDP CDP refer to the Configuring LLDP and Configuring CDP sections respectively Persistent Auto Smartport Interface If the Persistent status of an interface is enabled its Smartport type and the configuration that is already applied dynamically by Auto Smartport remains on the interface even after the attaching device ages out the interface goes down and the device is rebooted assuming the configuration was saved The Smartport type and the configuration of the interface are not changed unless Auto Smartport detects an attaching device with a different Smartport type If the 166 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Smartport 1 1 Error Handling Persistent status o
307. ect the way that each interface is associated with the Multicast group S tatic Attaches the interface to the Multicast group as a static member Dynamic lIndicates that the interface was added to the Multicast group as a result of IGMP MLD snooping Forbidden Specifies that this port is not allowed to join this group on this VLAN None Specifies that the port is not currently a member of this Multicast group on this VLAN STEP 10 Click Apply and the Running Configuration file is updated NOTE Entries that were created in the IP Multicast Group Address page cannot be deleted in this page even if they are selected 256 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Multicast Adding IP Multicast Group Addresses 1 6 Adding IP Multicast Group Addresses STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 The IP Multicast Group Address page is similar to the MAC Group Address page except that Multicast groups are identified by IP addresses The IP Multicast Group Address page enables querying and adding IP Multicast groups To define and view IP Multicast groups Click Multicast gt IP Multicast Group Address The page contains all of the IP Multicast group addresses learned by snooping Enter the parameters required for filtering VLAN ID equals to Define the VLAN ID of the group to be displayed IP Version equals to Select IPv 6 or
308. ected Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 195 13 VLAN Management VLANs VLAN Description Each VLAN is configured with a unique VID VLAN ID with a value from 1 to 4094 A port on a device in a bridged network is a member of a VLAN if it can send data to and receive data from the VLAN A port is an untagged member of a VLAN if all packets destined for that port into the VLAN have no VLAN tag A port is a tagged member of a VLAN if all packets destined for that port into the VLAN have a VLAN tag A port can be amember of one untagged VLAN and can be a member of several tagged VLANs A port in VLAN Access mode can be part of only one VLAN If it is in General or Trunk mode the port can be part of one or more VLANs VLANs address security and scalability issues Traffic from a VLAN stays within the VLAN and terminates at devices in the VLAN It also eases network configuration by logically connecting devices without physically relocating those devices If a frame is VLAN tagged a four byte VLAN tag is added to each Ethernet frame The tag contains a VLAN ID between 1 and 4094 and a VLAN Priority Tag VPT between 0 and 7 See Quality of Service for details about VPT When a frame enters a VLAN aware device it is classified as belonging to a VLAN based on the four byte VLAN tag in the frame If there is no VLAN tag in the frame or the frame is priority tagged
309. ectional or undetermined in aggressive mode Number of Neighbors Number of connected devices detected To modify the UDLD state for a specific port select it and click Edit Modify the value of the UDLD state If you select Default the port receives the value of the Fiber Port UDLD Default State in the Global UDLD Settings page Click Apply to save the settings to the Running Configuration file UDLD Neighbors To view all devices connected to the local device Click Port Management gt UDLD gt UDLD Neighbors The following fields are displayed for all UDLD enabled ports Interface Name Name of the local UDLD enabled port Neighbor Information Device ID ID of the remote device Device MAC MAC address of the remote device Device Name Name of the remote device Port D Name of the remote port 154 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Port Management Unidirectional Link Detection 1 O Configuring UDLD State State of the link between the local and neighboring device on the local port The following values are possible Detection The latest UDLD state of the port is in the process of being determined Expiration time has not yet expired since the last determination if there was one or since UDLD began running on the port so that the state is not yet determined Bidirectional Traffic sent by the local device is re
310. ed as the source IPv4 address for communication with the destination If the Host Definition field was By Name all IPv4 and IPv6 addresses will be displayed in this drop down field If the Host Definition field was By IP Address only the existing IP addresses of the type specified in the IP Version field will be displayed NOTE If the Auto option is selected the system computes the source address based on the destination address Destination IPv6 Address Type Select Link Local or Global as the type of IPv6 address to enter as the destination IP address 70 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration Traceroute o Link Local The IPv6 address uniquely identifies hosts on a single network link A link local address has a prefix of FE80 is not routable and can be used for communication only on the local network Only one link local address is supported If a link local address exists on the interface this entry replaces the address in the configuration Global The IPv6 address is a global Unicast IPV6 type that is visible and reachable from other networks Link Local Interface lf the IPv6 address type is Link Local select from where it is received Destination IP Address Name Address or host name of the device to be pinged Whether this is an IP address or host name depends on the Host Definition Ping Interval Length of time the syst
311. el 10 smartport storm control include multicast smartport storm control broadcast enable spanning tree portfast no_ip_phone_desktop no_ip_phone_desktop macro description no ip_phone_desktop macro keywords S voice_vlan macro key description Svoice_vlan The voice VLAN ID Default Values are Svoice_vlan 1 smartport switchport trunk allowed vlan remove voice_vlan no smartport switchport trunk native vlan smartport switchport trunk allowed vlan remove all no port security no port security mode no port security max Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 183 Smartport Built in Smartport Macros no smartport storm control broadcast enable no smartport storm control broadcast level no smartport storm control include multicast spanning tree portfast auto switch switch macro description switch macro keywords Snative_vlan S voice_vlan macro key description Snative_vlan The untag VLAN which will be configured on the port Svoice_vlan The voice VLAN ID Default Values are Snative_vlan Default VLAN Svoice_vlan 1 the default mode is trunk smartport switchport trunk allowed vlan add all smartport switchport trunk native vlan Snative_vlan spanning tree link type point to point no_switch no_switch macro description No switch macro keywords S voice_vlan
312. el Discovery for 802 3az EEE Availability of 802 3az EEE Default Configuration Interactions Between Features 802 3az EEE Configuration Workflow 802 3az EEE Overview 802 3az EEE is designed to save power when there is no traffic on the link In Green Ethernet power is reduced when the port is down With 802 3az EEE power is reduced when the port is up but there is no traffic on it 802 3az EEE is only supported on devices with GE ports When using 802 3az EEE systems on both sides of the link can disable portions of their functionality and save power during periods of no traffic 802 3az EEE supports IEEE 802 3 MAC operation at 100 Mbps and 1000 Mbps Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 139 Port Management Configuring Green Ethernet LLDP is used to select the optimal set of parameters for both devices If LLDP is not supported by the link partner or is disabled 802 3az EEE still be operational but it might not be in the optimal operational mode The 802 3az EEE feature is implemented using a port mode called Low Power Idle LPI mode When there is no traffic and this feature is enabled on the port the port is placed in the LPI mode which reduces power consumption dramatically Both sides of a connection device port and connecting device must support 802 3az EEE for it to work When traffic is absent both sides send signals indicati
313. elected If the first authentication method is not available the next selected method is used For example if the selected authentication methods are RADIUS and Local and all configured RADIUS servers are queried in priority order and do not reply the user is authenticated locally Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 347 Security Secure Sensitive Data Management If an authentication method fails or the user has insufficient privilege level the user is denied access to the device In other words if authentication fails at an authentication method the device stops the authentication attempt it does not continue and does not attempt to use the next authentication method To define authentication methods for an access method STEP 1 Click Security gt Management Access Authentication STEP 2 Select an access method from the Application list STEP 3 Use the arrows to move the authentication method between the Optional Methods column and the Selected Methods column The first method selected is the first method that is used RADIUS UuUser is authenticated on a RADIUS server You must have configured one or more RADIUS servers TACACS User authenticated on the TACACS server You must have configured one or more TACACS servers _None User is allowed to access the device without authentication Local Username and password are checked against
314. em waits between ping packets Ping is repeated the number of times configured in the Number of Pings field whether the ping succeeds or not Choose to use the default interval or specify your own value Number of Pings The number of times the ping operation is performed Choose to use the default or specify your own value Status Displays whether the ping succeeded or failed STEP 3 Click Activate Ping to ping the host The ping status appears and another message is added to the list of messages indicating the result of the ping operation STEP 4 View the results of ping in the Ping Counters and Status section of the page Traceroute Traceroute discovers the IP routes along which packets were forwarded by sending an IP packet to the target host and back to the device The Traceroute page shows each hop between the device and a target host and the round trip time to each such hop STEP 1 Click Administration gt Traceroute STEP 2 Configure Traceroute by entering information into the following fields Host Definition Select whether hosts are identified by their IP address or name Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 71 Administration Traceroute IP Version lf the host is identified by its IP address select either IPv4 or IPv6 to indicate that it will be entered in the selected format Source IP Select the source interface whos
315. entry type static or dynamic and the state of the neighbor To define IPv6 neighbors STEP 1 In Layer 2 system mode click Administration gt Management Interface gt IPv6 Neighbors In Layer 3 system mode click IP Configuration gt IPv6 Management and Interfaces gt IPv6 Neighbors You can select a Clear Table option to clear some or all of IPv6 addresses in the IPv6 Neighbors Table Static Only Deletes the static IPv6 address entries Dynamic Only Deletes the dynamic IPv6 address entries Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 309 17 IP Configuration IPv6 Management and Interfaces All Dynamic amp Static Deletes the static and dynamic address entries IPv6 address entries The following fields are displayed for the neighboring interfaces Interface Neighboring IPv6 interface type IPv6 Address IPv6 address of a neighbor MAC Address MAC address mapped to the specified IPv6 address Type Neighbor discovery cache information entry type static or dynamic State Specifies the IPv6 neighbor status The values are Incomplete Address resolution is working The neighbor has not yet responded keachable Neighbor is known to be reachable Stale Previously known neighbor is unreachable No action is taken to verify its reachability until traffic must be sent Delay Previously known neighbor is unreachable
316. er To facilitate this process an additional feature enables secure transfer of the encrypted private key to all switches in the system 459 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security SSH Client 22 SSH Server Authentication When a private key is created on a device it is also possible to create an associated passphrase This passphrase is used to encrypt the private key and to import it into the remaining switches In this way all the switches can use the same public private key SSH Server Authentication A device as an SSH client only communicates with a trusted SSH server When SSH server authentication is disabled the default setting any SSH server is considered trusted When SSH server authentication is enabled the user must add an entry for the trusted servers to the Trusted SSH Servers Table This table stores the following information per each SSH Trusted server for a maximum of 16 servers and contains the following information Server IP address host name Server public key fingerprint When SSH server authentication is enabled the SSH client running on the device authenticates the SSH server using the following authentication process The device calculates the fingerprint of the received SSH server s public key The device searches the SSH Trusted Servers table for the SSH server s IP address host name One of the following ca
317. er 2 system mode capabilities In this system mode a Layer 3 port still retains much of the Layer 2 functionality such as Spanning Tree Protocol and VLAN membership In Layer 3 system mode the device does not support MAC based VLAN Dynamic VLAN Assignment VLAN Rate Limit SYN Rate DoS Protection and Advanced QoS Policers Configuring the device to work in either mode is performed in the Administration gt System Settings page Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 268 IP Configuration 1 7 Overview NOTE Switching from one system mode layer to another on Sx500 devices requires a mandatory reboot and the startup configuration of the device is then deleted Layer 2 IP Addressing In Layer 2 system mode the device has up to one IPv4 address and up to two IPv6 interfaces either native interface or Tunnel in the management VLAN This IP address and the default gateway can be configured manually or by DHCP The static IP address and default gateway for Layer 2 system mode are configured on the IPv4 Interface and IPv6 Interfaces pages In Layer 2 system mode the device uses the default gateway if configured to communicate with devices that are not in the same IP subnet with the device By default VLAN 1 is the management VLAN but this can be modified When operating in Layer 2 system mode the device can only be reached at the configured IP address throu
318. er Ethernet can be used in any enterprise network that deploys relatively low powered devices connected to the Ethernet LAN such as IP phones Wireless access points IP gateways Audio and video remote monitoring devices PoE Operation PoE implements in the following stages Detection Sends special pulses on the copper cable When a PoE device is located at the other end that device responds to these pulses Classification Negotiation between the Power Sourcing Equipment PSE and the Powered Device PD commences after the Detection stage During negotiation the PD specifies its class which is the amount of maximum power that the PD consumes Power Consumption After the classification stage completes the PSE provides power to the PD If the PD supports PoE but without classification it is assumed to be class O the maximum If a PD tries to consume more power than permitted by the standard the PSE stops supplying power to the port PoE supports two modes Port Limit The maximum power the device agrees to supply is limited to the value the system administrator configures regardless of the Classification result Class Power Limit The maximum power the device agrees to supply is determined by the results of the Classification stage This means that it is set as per the Client s request PoE Configuration Considerations There are two factors to consider in the PoE feature The amount
319. er Type Set how to identify the specific static host Client Identifier Enter a unique identification of the client specified in hexadecimal notation such as 016608 19681 172 or MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the client Client Name Enter the name of the static host using a standard set of ASCII characters The client name must not include the domain name Default Router IP Address Option 3 Enter the default router for the static host Domain Name Server IP Address Option 6 Select one of the devices DNS servers if already configured or select Other and enter the IP address of the DNS server available to the DHCP client Domain Name Option 15 Enter the domain name for the static host NetBIOS WINS Server Option 44 Enter the NetBIOS WINS name server available to the static host NetBIOS Node Type Option 46 Select how to resolve the NetBIOS name Valid node types are Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 297 IP Configuration DHCP Server Hybrid A hybrid combination of b node and p node is used When configured to use h node a computer always tries p node first and uses b node only if p node fails This is the default Mixed A combination of b node and p node communications is used to register and resolve NetBIOS names M node first uses b node then if necessary p node M node is typi
320. er of samples per request Therefore this field represents the sample number actually granted to the request that is equal or less than the requested value Click Add Enter the parameters New History Entry Displays the number of the new History table entry Source Interface Select the type of interface from which the history samples are to be taken Max No of Samples to Keep Enter the number of samples to store Sampling Interval Enter the time in seconds that samples are collected from the ports The field range is 1 3600 Owner Enter the RMON station or user that requested the RMON information Click Apply The entry is added to the History Control Table page and the Running Configuration file is updated Click History Table to view the actual statistics Viewing the RMON History Table The History Table page displays interface specific statistical network samplings The samples were configured in the History Control table described above To view RMON history statistics Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Status and Statistics Managing RMON STEP 1 Click Status and Statistics gt RMON gt History STEP 2 Click History Table STEP 3 From the History Entry No list select the entry number of the sample to display The fields are displayed for the selected sample Owner History table entry owner Sample No S
321. eral STP instances so that it is possible to detect and mitigate loops separately in each instance By associating instances to VLANs each instance is associated with the Layer 2 domain on which it performs loop detection and mitigation This enables a port to be stopped in one instance such as traffic from VLAN A that is causing a loop while traffic can remain active in another domain where no loop was seen such as on VLAN B Configuring STP Status and Global Settings STEP 1 STEP 2 The STP Status and Global Settings page contains parameters for enabling STP RSTP or MSTP Use the STP Interface Settings page RSTP Interface Settings page and MSTP Properties page to configure each mode respectively To set the STP status and global settings Click Spanning Tree gt STP Status amp Global Settings Enter the parameters Global Settings Spanning Tree State Enable or disable STP on the device STP Operation Mode Select an STP mode 232 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Spanning Tree Configuring STP Status and Global Settings 1 4 BPDU Handling Select how Bridge Protocol Data Unit BPDU packets are managed when STP is disabled on the port or the device BPDUs are used to transmit spanning tree information Filtering Filters BPDU packets when Spanning Tree is disabled on an interface Flooding Floods BPDU packets when S
322. erface Egress Committed Burst Size CBS Enter the maximum burst size of data for the egress interface in bytes of data This amount can be sent even if it temporarily increases the bandwidth beyond the allowed limit STEP 5 Click Apply The bandwidth settings are written to the Running Configuration file Configuring Egress Shaping per Queue In addition to limiting transmission rate per port which is done in the Bandwidth page the device can limit the transmission rate of selected egressing frames ona per queue per port basis Egress rate limiting is performed by shaping the output load The device limits all frames except for management frames Any frames that are not limited are ignored in the rate calculations meaning that their size is not included in the limit total Per queue Egress rate shaping can be disabled To define egress shaping per queue STEP 1 Click Quality of Service gt General gt Egress Shaping per Queue The Egress Shaping Per Queue page displays the rate limit and burst size for each queue STEP 2 Select an interface type Port or LAG and click Go STEP 3 Selecta Port LAG and click Edit This page enables shaping the egress for up to eight queues on each interface STEP 4 Select the Interface STEP 5 For each queue that is required enter the following fields Enable Shaping Select to enable egress shaping on this queue Committed Information Rate CIR Enter the maximum rate
323. erface Specifies the neighbor binding limit per interface Entries Per MAC Address Specifies the neighbor binding limit per MAC address STEP 3 If required click Add to create a Neighbor Binding policy Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 431 Security IPV6 First Hop Security Configuring First Hop Security through Web GUI STEP 4 Enter the following fields Policy Name Enter a user defined policy name Device Role Select either Server or Client to specify the role of the device attached to the port for the Neighbor Binding policy Inherited Role of device is inherited from either the VLAN or system default client Client Role of device is client Host Role of device is host Neighbor Binding Logging See above Neighbor Binding Entry Limits See above STEP 5 If required click either Attach Policy to VLAN or Attach Policy to Interface Policy Attachment VLAN To attach a policy to one or more VLANs STEP 1 Click Security gt First Hop Security gt Policy Attachment VLAN The list of policies that are already attached are displayed along with their Policy Type Policy Name and VLAN List STEP 2 To attach a policy to a VLAN click Add and enter the following fields Policy Type Select the policy type to attach to the interface Policy Name Select the name of the policy to attach to the interface
324. erface Select the link local interface if IPv6 Address Type Link Local is selected from the list Log Server IP Address Name Enter the IP address or domain name of the log server UDP Port Enter the UDP port to which the log messages are sent Facility Select a facility value from which system logs are sent to the remote server Only one facility value can be assigned to a server If a second facility code is assigned the first facility value is overridden Description Enter a server description Minimum Severity Select the minimum level of system log messages to be sent to the server STEP 5 Click Apply The Add Remote Log Server page closes the SYSLOG server is added and the Running Configuration file is updated Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration System Log 3 Viewing Memory Logs Viewing Memory Logs The device can write to the following logs Login RAM cleared during reboot Login Flash memory cleared only upon user command You can configure the messages that are written to each log by severity anda message can go to more than one log including logs that reside on external SYSLOG servers RAM Memory The RAM Memory page displays all messages that were saved in the RAM cache in chronological order Entries are stored in the RAM log according to the configuration in the Log Settings page To view log e
325. erface ID portion of the Global IPv6 address by using the EUI 64 format based ona device MAC address STEP 5 Click Apply The Running Configuration file is updated STEP 1 IPv6 Default Router List The IPv6 Default Router List page enables configuring and viewing the default IPv6 router addresses This list contains the routers that are candidates to become the device default router for non local traffic it may be empty The device randomly selects a router from the list The device supports one static IPv6 default router Dynamic default routers are routers that have sent router advertisements to the device IPv6 interface When adding or deleting IP addresses the following events occur When removing an IP interface all the default router IP addresses are removed Dynamic IP addresses cannot be removed An alert message appears after an attempt is made to insert more thana single user defined address An alert message appears when attempting to insert a non link local type address meaning fe80 To define a default router In Layer 2 system mode click Administration gt Management Interface gt IPv6 Default Router List In Layer 3 system mode click IP Configuration gt IPv6 Management and Interfaces gt IPv6 Default Router List This page displays the following fields for each default router Default Router IPv6 Address Link local IP address of the default router Interface Outgoing IPv6 interface wher
326. ernal Version 367 18 Security IP Source Guard STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP 2 Configuring IP Source Guard Work Flow To configure IP Source Guard Enable DHCP Snooping in the IP Configuration gt DHCP gt Properties page or in the Security gt DHCP Snooping gt Properties page Define the VLANs on which DHCP Snooping is enabled in the IP Configuration gt DHCP gt Interface Settings page Configure interfaces as trusted or untrusted in the IP Configuration gt DHCP gt DHCP Snooping Interface page Enable IP Source Guard in the Security gt IP Source Guard gt Properties page Enable IP Source Guard on the untrusted interfaces as required in the Security gt IP Source Guard gt Interface Settings page View entries to the Binding database in the Security gt IP Source Guard gt Binding Database page Enabling IP Source Guard To enable IP Source Guard globally Click Security gt IP Source Guard gt Properties Select Enable to enable IP Source Guard globally Configuring IP Source Guard on Interfaces If IP Source Guard is enabled on an untrusted port LAG DHCP packets allowed by DHCP Snooping are transmitted If source IP address filtering is enabled packet transmission is permitted as follows IPv4 traffic Only IPv4 traffic with a source IP address that is associated with the specific port is permitted Non IPv4 traffic All non IPv4
327. ers Policy Name Displays the policy to which the class map is being added Class Map Name Select an existing class map to be associated with the policy Class maps are created in the Class Mapping page Action Type Select the action regarding the ingress CoS 802 1p and or DSCP value of all the matching packets Use default trust mode gnore the ingress CoS 802 1p and or DSCP value The matching packets are sent as best effort 513 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Quality of Service 2 5 QoS Advanced Mode Always Trust lf this option is selected the device trusts the CoS 802 1p and DSCP of the matching packet If a packet is an IP packet the device puts the packet in the egress queue based on its DSCP value and the DSCP to Queue Table Otherwise the egress queue of the packet is based on the packet s CoS 802 1p value and the CoS 802 1p to Queue Table Set lf this option is selected use the value entered in the New Value box to determine the egress queue of the matching packets as follows If the new value 0 7 is a CoS 802 1p priority use the priority value and the CoS 802 1p to Queue Table to determine the egress queue of all the matching packets If the new value 0 63 is a DSCP use the new DSCP and the DSCP to Queue Table to determine the egress queue of the matching IP packets Otherwise use the new value 1 8 as
328. es Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Smartport Auto Smartport 11 There are two ways to apply a Smartport macro by Smartport type to an interface Static Smartport You manually assign a Smartport type to an interface The corresponding Smartport macro is applied to the interface You can manually assign a Smartport type to an interface from the Smartport Interface Settings Page Auto Smartport When a device is detected from an interface the Smartport macro if any that corresponds to the Smartport type of the attaching device is automatically applied Auto Smartport is enabled by default globally and at the interface level In both cases the associated anti macro is run when the Smartport type is removed from the interface and the anti macro runs in exactly the same manner removing all of the interface configuration Auto Smartport In order for Auto Smartport to automatically assign Smartport types to interfaces the Auto Smartport feature must be enabled globally and on the relevant interfaces which Auto Smartport should be allowed to configure By default Auto Smartport is enabled and allowed to configure all interfaces The Smartport type assigned to each interface is determined by the CDP and LLDP packets received on the each interface respectively If multiple devices are attached to an interface a configuration profile that is appropriate for all of the devices is applied to the interface if
329. et should never exist Therefore these packets might signify an attack on the device and should be blocked Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 357 Security Denial of Service Prevention Martian Addresses Martian addresses are illegal from the point of view of the IP protocol See Martian Addresses for more details ICMP Attack Sending malformed ICMP packets or overwhelming number of ICMP packets to the victim that might lead to a system crash P Fragmentation Mangled IP fragments with overlapping over sized payloads are sent to the device This can crash various operating systems due to a bug in their TCP IP fragmentation re assembly code Windows 3 1x Windows 95 and Windows NT operating systems as well as versions of Linux prior to versions 2 0 32 and 2 1 63 are vulnerable to this attack Stacheldraht Distribution The attacker uses a client program to connect to handlers which are compromised systems that issue commands to zombie agents which in turn facilitate the DoS attack Agents are compromised via the handlers by the attacker Using automated routines to exploit vulnerabilities in programs that accept remote connections running on the targeted remote hosts Each handler can control up to a thousand agents Invasor Trojan A trojan enables the attacker to download a zombie agent or the trojan may contain one Attackers can also
330. ettings STEP 1 Click Spanning Tree gt MSTP Instance Settings STEP 2 Enter the parameters Instance ID Select an MST instance to be displayed and defined Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 241 14 Spanning Tree Defining MSTP Interface Settings Included VLAN Displays the VLANs mapped to the selected instance The default mapping is that all VLANs are mapped to the common and internal spanning tree CIST instance 0 Bridge Priority Set the priority of this bridge for the selected MST instance Designated Root Bridge ID Displays the priority and MAC address of the Root Bridge for the MST instance Root Port Displays the root port of the selected instance Root Path Cost Displays the root path cost of the selected instance Bridge ID Displays the bridge priority and the MAC address of this device for the selected instance Remaining Hops Displays the number of hops remaining to the next destination STEP 3 Click Apply The MST Instance configuration is defined and the Running Configuration file is updated Defining MSTP Interface Settings The MSTP Interface Settings page enables you to configure the port MSTP settings for every MST instance and to view information that has currently been learned by the protocol such as the designated bridge per MST instance To configure the ports in an MST instance STEP 1 Click
331. etwork Only one link local address is supported If a link local address exists on the interface this entry replaces the address in the configuration Global The IPv6 address is a global Unicast IPv6 type that is visible and reachable from other networks Link Local Interface Select the link local interface from the list SCP Server IP Address Name Enter the IP address or domain name of the SCP server For Upgrade Source File Name Enter the name of the source file For Backup Destination File Name Enter the name of the backup file STEP 6 Click Apply If the files passwords and server addresses are correct one of the following may happen If SSH server authentication is enabled in the SSH Server Authentication page and the SCP server is trusted the operation succeeds If the SCP server is not trusted the operation fails and an error is displayed Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 41 Administration File Management Active Image Active Image STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 If SSH server authentication is not enabled the operation succeeds for any SCP server There are two firmware images stored on the device One of the images is identified as the active image and other image is identified as the inactive image The device boots from the image you set as the active image You can change the image identified as the inactive image
332. evice deletes the Running Configuration so it is critical that the Running Configuration is saved to the Startup Configuration before the device is rebooted Clicking Apply does not save the configuration to the Startup Configuration For more information on files and file types see the System Files section You can back up the configuration by using Administration gt File Management gt Copy Save Configuration or clicking Save at the top of the window You can also upload the configuration from a remote device See the Download Backup Configuration Log section There are cases when you might prefer to set the time of the reboot for some time in the future This could happen for example in one of the following cases You are performing actions on a remote device and these actions might create loss of connectivity to the remote device Pre scheduling a reboot restores the working configuration and enables restoring the connectivity to the remote device If these actions are successful the delayed reboot can be cancelled Reloading the device cause loss of connectivity in the network thus by using delayed reboot you can schedule the reboot to a time that is more convenient for the users e g late night To reboot the device STEP 1 Click Administration gt Reboot STEP 2 Click one of the Reboot buttons to reboot the device Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Ver
333. evices PC telephone and so on and one network port that is connected to the access device The box forwards the packets from the network port to the subscriber s devices based on the VLAN tag of the packet Each VLAN is mapped to one of the MUX access ports Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 227 13 VLAN Management Customer Port Multicast TV VLAN Packets from subscribers to the service provider network are forwarded as VLAN tagged frames in order to distinguish between the service types which mean that for each service type there is a unique VLAN ID in the CPE box All packets from the subscriber to the service provider network are encapsulated by the access device with the subscriber s VLAN configured as customer VLAN Outer tag or S VID except for IGMP snooping messages from the TV receivers which are associated with the Multicast TV VLAN VOD information that is also sent from the TV receivers are sent like any other type of traffic Packets from the service provider network that received on the network port to the subscriber are sent on the service provider network as double tag packets while the outer tag Service Tag or S Tag represent one of the two type of VLAN as following Subscriber s VLAN Includes Internet and IP Phones Multicast TV VLAN The inner VLAN C Tag is the tag that determines the destination in the subscriber s netwo
334. f an interface is disabled the interface reverts to the default Smartport type when the attaching device to it ages out the interface goes down or the device is rebooted Enabling Persistent status on an interface eliminates the device detection delay that otherwise occurs NOTE The persistence of the Smartport types applied to the interfaces are effective between reboots only if the running configuration with the Smartport type applied at the interfaces is saved to the startup configuration file Error Handling When a smart port macro fails to apply to an interface you can examine the point of the failure in the Interface Settings page and reset the port and reapply the macro after the error is corrected from the Interface Settings and Interface Settings Edit pages Default Configuration Smartport is always available By default Auto Smartport is enabled by Auto Voice VLAN relies on both CDP and LLDP to detect attaching device s Smartport type and detects Smartport type IP phone IP phone Desktop Switch and Wireless Access Point See Voice VLAN for a description of the voice factory defaults Relationships with Other Features and Backwards Compatibility Auto Smartport is enabled by default and may be disabled Telephony OUI cannot function concurrently with Auto Smartport and Auto Voice VLAN Auto Smartport must be disabled before enabling Telephony OUI NOTE When upgrading from a firmware version that does not support Aut
335. f frames containing 128 255 bytes that were received Frames of 256 to 511 Bytes Number of frames containing 256 511 bytes that were received Frames of 512 to 1023 Bytes Number of frames containing 512 1023 bytes that were received Frames of 1024 Bytes or More Number of frames containing 1024 2000 bytes and Jumbo Frames that were received To clear statistics counters Click Clear Interface Counters to clear the selected interfaces counters Click View All Interfaces Statistics to see all ports on a single page Configuring RMON History The RMON feature enables monitoring statistics per interface Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 21 Status and Statistics Managing RMON STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 The History Control Table page defines the sampling frequency amount of samples to store and the port from where to gather the data After the data is sampled and stored it appears in the History Table page that can be viewed by clicking History Table To enter RMON control information Click Status and Statistics gt RMON gt History The fields displayed on this page are defined in the Add RMON History page below The only field is that is on this page and not defined in the Add page is Current Number of Samples RMON is allowed by standard to not grant all requested samples but rather to limit the numb
336. f reply orginatgs Disabled Option 82 athe davies Bridge packet is sent Packet is without Option 82 sent without Option 82 2 lf reply does not originate on the device discards the packet Bridge Packet is sent with the original Option 82 Option Packet is Packet is Relay Packet is sent 82 sent without sent without discards without Option 82 Insertion Option 82 Option 82 Option 82 Enabled f Bridge Packet is sent without Option 82 DHCP Snooping Binding Database DHCP Snooping builds a database known as the DHCP Snooping Binding database derived from information taken from DHCP packets entering the device through trusted ports The DHCP Snooping Binding database contains the following data input port input VLAN MAC address of the client and IP address of the client if it exists Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 285 17 IP Configuration IPv4 Management and Interfaces STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 The DHCP Snooping Binding database is also used by IP Source Guard and Dynamic ARP Inspection features to determine legitimate packet sources DHCP Trusted Ports Ports can be either DHCP trusted or untrusted By default all ports are untrusted To create a port as trusted use the DHCP Snooping Interface Settings page Packets from these ports are automatically forwarded Packets from trusted ports are used to c
337. f service and optionally remark the 802 1p of the voice streams by specifying the desired CoS 802 1p values and using the remarking option under Telephony OUI Voice VLAN Constraints The following constraints exist Only one Voice VLAN is supported AVLAN that is defined as a Voice VLAN cannot be removed In addition the following constraints are applicable for Telephony OUI The Voice VLAN cannot be VLAN1 the default VLAN The Voice VLAN cannot be Smartport enabled The Voice VLAN cannot support DVA Dynamic VLAN assignment The Voice VLAN cannot be the Guest VLAN if the voice VLAN mode is OUI If the voice VLAN mode is Auto then the Voice VLAN can be the Guest VLAN The Voice VLAN QoS decision has priority over any other QoS decision except for the Policy ACL QoS decision Anew VLAN ID can be configured for the Voice VLAN only if the current Voice VLAN does not have candidate ports The interface VLAN of a candidate port must be in General or Trunk mode The Voice VLAN QoS is applied to candidate ports that have joined the Voice VLAN and to static ports The voice flow is accepted if the MAC address can be learned by the Forwarding Database FDB If there is no free space in FDB no action occurs Voice VLAN Workflows The device default configuration on Auto Voice VLAN Auto Smartports CDP and LLDP cover most common voice deployment scenarios This section describes how to deploy voice VLA
338. faces can be bound to the same ACL by grouping them into a policy map and binding that policy map to the interface After an ACL is bound to an interface it cannot be edited modified or deleted until it is removed from all the ports to which it is bound or in use It is possible to bind an interface port LAG or VLAN to a policy or to an ACL but they cannot be bound to both a policy and an ACL To bind an ACL to a port or LAG Click Access Control gt ACL Binding Port Select an interface type Ports LAGs Port or LAG Click Go For each type of interface selected all interfaces of that type are displayed with a list of their current ACLs Interface lIdentifier of interface MAC ACL ACLs of type MAC that are bound to the interface if any IPv4 ACL ACLs of type IPv4 that are bound to the interface if any IPv6 ACL ACLs of type IPv6 that are bound to the interface if any To unbind all ACLs from an interface select the interface and click Clear STEP 4 Select an interface and click Edit STEP 5 Select one of the following Select MAC Based ACL Select a MAC based ACL to be bound to the interface Select IPv4 Based ACL Select an IPv4 based ACL to be bound to the interface Select IPv6 Based ACL Select an IPv6 based ACL to be bound to the interface 487 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Access Contro
339. fie hellman Encryption Algorithms aesl28 cbc des cbc arcfour aesi92 cbc aes256 cbc Message Authentication Code Algorithms hmac shai hmac md5 NOTE Compression algorithms are not supported 461 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security SSH Client Before You Begin 22 Before You Begin Common Tasks STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 The following actions must be performed before using the SCP feature When using the password authentication method a username password must be set up on the SSH server When using public private keys authentication method the public key must be stored on the SSH server This section describes some common tasks performed using the SSH client All pages referenced are pages found under the SSH Client branch of the menu tree Workflow1 To configure SSH client and transfer data to from an SSH server perform the following steps Decide which method is to be used password or public private key Use the SSH User Authentication page If the password method was selected perform the following steps a Create a global password in the SSH User Authentication page or create a temporary one in the Upgrade Backup Firmware Language or Backup Configuration Log pages when you actually activate the secure data transfer Upgrade the firmware boot image or language file using SCP by selecting the
340. figuration IPv4 Management and Interfaces An untrusted port is a port that is not allowed to assign DHCP addresses By default all ports are considered untrusted until you declare them trusted in the DHCP Snooping Interface Settings page DHCP v4 Relay DHCP Relay relays DHCP packets to the DHCP server DHCPV4 in Layer 2 and Layer 3 In Layer 2 system mode the device relays DHCP messages received from VLANs on which DHCP Relay has been enabled In Layer 3 system mode the device can also relay DHCP messages received from VLANs that do not have IP addresses Whenever DHCP Relay is enabled ona VLAN without an IP address Option 82 is inserted automatically This insertion is in the specific VLAN and does not influence the global administration state of Option 82 insertion Transparent DHCP Relay For Transparent DHCP Relay where an external DHCP relay agent is being used do the following Enable DHCP Snooping Enable Option 82 insertion Disable DHCP Relay For regular DHCP Relay Enable DHCP Relay No need to enable Option 82 insertion Option 82 Option 82 DHCP Relay Agent Information Option passes port and agent information to a central DHCP server indicating where an assigned IP address physically connects to the network The main goal of option 82 is to help to the DHCP server select the best IP subnet network pool from which to obtain an IP address The following Option 82 options are availa
341. figuration file and the backup configuration file The mirror configuration file is not deleted when restoring to factory defaults Clear Startup Configuration File Check to clear the startup configuration on the device for the next time it boots up NOTE Clearing the Startup Configuration File and Rebooting is not the same as Rebooting to Factory Defaults Rebooting to Factory Defaults is more intrusive Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration Routing Resources Routing Resources Use the Router Resources page to display TCAM allocation and modify total TCAM size TCAM entries are divided into the following groups IP Entries TCAM entries reserved for IP static routes IP addresses on the device and IP hosts Each type generates the following number of TCAM entries IPv4 static routes One entry per route IP Addresses Two entries per IP address IP Hosts One entry per host Non IP Entries TCAM entries reserved for other applications such as ACL rules CoS policers and VLAN rate limits To view and modify router resources STEP 1 Click Administration gt Router Resources The following fields are displayed Neighbors Count is the number of neighbors recorded on the device and TCAM Entries is the total number of TCAM entries being used for neighbors Interfaces Count is the number of IP addresses on interfaces on
342. figured on the same interface with policy based VLANs Multi Sessions Mode in Layer 3 The mode does not support the guest VLAN RADIUS VLAN Assignment or Dynamic VLAN Assignment An authorized client can be assigned a VLAN by the RADIUS server if this option is enabled in the Port Authentication page This is called either Dynamic VLAN Assignment DVA or RADIUS Assigned VLAN In this guide the term RADIUS Assigned VLAN is used When a portis in multi session mode and RADIUS Assigned VLAN is enabled the device automatically adds the port as an untagged member of the VLAN that is assigned by the RADIUS server during the authentication process The device classifies untagged packets to the assigned VLAN if the packets originated from the devices or ports that are authenticated and authorized See Table 3 Guest VLAN Support and RADIUS VLAN Assignment Support and The following table describes how authenticated and non authenticated traffic is handled in various situations for further information about how the different modes behave when RADIUS Assigned VLAN is enabled on the device In multi session mode RADIUS VLAN assignment is only supported when the device is in Layer 2 system mode Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 391 1 9 Security 802 1X Authentication Authenticator Overview For a device to be authenticated and authorized at a port which is DVA e
343. fine both a local and remote user Local vUser is connected to the local device Remote IP Address vUser is connected to a different SNMP entity besides the local device If the remote Engine ID is defined remote devices receive inform messages but cannot make requests for 531 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version cn 26 Managing SNMP Users information Enter the remote engine ID Group Name Select the SNMP group to which the SNMP user belongs SNMP groups are defined in the Add Group page NOTE Users who belong to groups which have been deleted remain but they are inactive Authentication Method Select the Authentication method that varies according to the Group Name assigned If the group does not require authentication then the user cannot configure any authentication The options are None No user authentication is used MD5 Password A password that is used for generating a key by the MD5 authentication method SHA Password A password that is used for generating a key by the SHA Secure Hash Algorithm authentication method Authentication Password lf authentication is accomplished by either a MD5 or a SHA password enter the local user password in either Encrypted or Plaintext Local user passwords are compared to the local database and can contain up to 32 ASCII characters Privacy Method Select one of th
344. fined vUse the IP address of the interface in the Interface field in the address TLV Interface IF User Defined was selected for Source Interface select the interface Syslog Voice VLAN Mismatch Check to send a SYSLOG message when a voice VLAN mismatch is detected This means that the voice VLAN information in the incoming frame does not match what the local device is advertising Syslog Native VLAN Mismatch Check to send a SYSLOG message when a native VLAN mismatch is detected This means that the native VLAN information in the incoming frame does not match what the local device is advertising Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 117 Administration Discovery Configuring CDP Syslog Duplex Mismatch Check to send a SYSLOG message when duplex information is mismatched This means that the duplex information in the incoming frame does not match what the local device is advertising STEP 3 Click Apply The LLDP properties are defined STEP 1 Editing CDP Interface Settings The Interface Settings page enables administrators to enable disable CDP per port Notifications can also be triggered when there are conflicts with CDP neighbors The conflict can be Voice VLAN data Native VLAN or Duplex By setting these properties it is possible to select the types of information to be provided to devices that support the LLDP protocol The LLDP MED TL
345. for the interface The values are Enabled Fast Link is enabled Disabled Fast Link is disabled Auto Fast Link mode is enabled a few seconds after the interface becomes active Port Status Displays the RSTP status on the specific port Disabled STP is currently disabled on the port Blocking The port is currently blocked and it cannot forward traffic or learn MAC addresses Listening The port is in Listening mode The port cannot forward traffic and cannot learn MAC addresses Learning The port is in Learning mode The port cannot forward traffic however it can learn new MAC addresses Forwarding tThe port is in Forwarding mode The port can forward traffic and learn new MAC addresses STEP 7 Click Apply The Running Configuration file is updated 238 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Spanning Tree 1 4 Multiple Spanning Tree Multiple Spanning Tree Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP is used to separate the STP port state between various domains on different VLANs For example while port A is blocked in one STP instance due to a loop on VLAN A the same port can be placed in the Forwarding State in another STP instance The MSTP Properties page enables you to define the global MSTP settings To configure MSTP 1 Set the STP Operation Mode to MSTP as described in the Configuring STP Status and Global Settings page
346. free space to create a new entry the new entry overrides the entry with the highest creation time Establishing Binding of Neighbors An IPv6 First Hop Security switch can discover and record binding information by using the following methods NBI NDP Method Learning IPv6 addresses from the snooped Neighbor Discovery Protocol messages _NBI Manual Method By manual configuration An IPv6 address is bound to a link layer property of the host s network attachment This property called a binding anchor consists of the interface identifier iflndex through which the host is connected to and the host s MAC address IPv6 First Hop Security switch establishes binding only on perimeterical interfaces see IPv6 First Hop Security Perimeter Binding information is saved in the Neighbor Binding table Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 417 20 Security IPV6 First Hop Security Neighbor Binding Integrity NBI NDP method The NBI NDP method used is based on the FCFS SAVI method specified in RFC6620 with the following differences Unlike FCFS SAVI which supports only binding for link local IPv6 addresses NBI NDP additionally supports binding global IPv6 addresses as well NBI NDP supports IPv6 address binding only for IPv6 addresses learnt from NDP messages Source address validation for data message is provided by IPv6 Source Address Guard
347. from other networks Link Local Interface Select the link local interface if IPv6 Address Type Link Local is selected from the list SNTP Server IP Address Enter the SNTP server IP address The format depends on which address type was selected SNTP Server Select the name of the SNTP server from alist of well known NTP servers If other is chosen enter name of SNTP server in the adjacent field Poll Interval Select to enable polling of the SNTP server for system time information All NTP servers that are registered for polling are polled and the clock is selected from the server with the lowest stratum level distance from the reference clock that is reachable The server with the lowest stratum is considered to be the primary server The server with the next lowest stratum Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 79 Administration Time Settings Configuring System Time is a secondary server and so forth If the primary server is down the device polls all servers with the polling setting enabled and selects a new primary server with the lowest stratum Authentication Select the check box to enable authentication Authentication Key ID If authentication is enabled select the value of the key ID Create the authentication keys using the SNTP Authentication page STEP 6 Click Apply The STNP server is added and you are returned to the main
348. from the local device is not received by the neighbor The purpose of UDLD is to detect ports on which the neighbor does not receive traffic from the local device unidirectional link and to shut down those ports Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 146 UDLD Operation Port Management Unidirectional Link Detection 1 O All connected devices must support UDLD for the protocol to successfully detect unidirectional links If only the local device supports UDLD it is not possible for the device to detect the status of the link In this case the status of the link is set to undetermined The user can configure whether ports in the undetermined state are shut down or merely trigger notifications UDLD Operation UDLD States and Modes Under the UDLD protocol ports are assigned the following states Detection System is attempting to determine whether the link is bidirectional or unidirectional This is a temporary state Bidirectional traffic sent by a local device is known to be received by its neighbor and traffic from the neighbor is received by the local device Shutdown The link is unidirectional Traffic sent by a local device is received by its neighbor but traffic from the neighbor is not received by the local device Undetermined The system cannot determine the state of the port because of one of the following is occurring The neighbor doe
349. g counters are displayed Nominal Power The total amount of power the device can supply to all the connected PDs Consumed Power Amount of power currently being consumed by the PoE ports Available Power Nominal power minus the amount of consumed power STEP 3 Click Apply to save the PoE properties Configuring PoE Settings The PoE Settings page displays system PoE information for enabling PoE on the interfaces and monitoring the current power usage and maximum power limit per port NOTE PoE canbe configured on the device for a specific period This feature enables you to define per port the days in the week and the hours that PoE is enabled When the time range is not active PoE is disabled To use this feature a time range must first be defined in the lt 300 500 gt Time Range page Click Port Management gt PoE gt Settings This page limits the power per port in two ways depending on the Power Mode Port Limit Power is limited to a specified wattage For these settings to be active the system must be in PoE Port Limit mode That mode is configured in the PoE Properties page When the power consumed on the port exceeds the port limit the port power is turned off Class Limit Power is limited based on the class of the connected PD For these settings to be active the system must be in PoE Class Limit mode That mode is configured in the PoE Properties page When the power consumed on the port
350. g the following fields Enable Select this field to enable the Security Level Security Level Define the security level attached to the group SNMP v1 and SNMPv2 support neither authentication nor privacy If SNMPv3 is selected choose one of the following No Authentication and No Privacy Neither the Authentication nor the Privacy security levels are assigned to the group Authentication and No Privacy Authenticates SNMP messages and ensures the SNMP message origin is authenticated but does not encrypt them Authentication and Privacy Authenticates SNMP messages and encrypts them View Associating a view with the read write and notify access privileges of the group limits the scope of the MIB tree to which the group has read write and notify access View Select a previously defined view for Read Write and Notify Read Management access is read only for the selected view Otherwise a user or a community associated with this group is able to read all MIBs except those that control SNMP itself Write Management access is write for the selected view Otherwise a user or a community associated with this group is able to write all MIBs except those that control SNMP itself Notify Limits the available content of the traps to those included in the selected view Otherwise there is no restriction on the contents of the traps This can only be selected for SNMPv3 STEP 4 Click Apply The SNMP grou
351. ggregation Time and sent in a single message The aggregated messages are sent in the order of their arrival Each message states the number of times it was aggregated Max Aggregation Time Enter the interval of time that SYSLOG messages are aggregated 30 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration System Log Setting Remote Logging Settings 3 Originator Identifier Enables adding an origin identifier to SYSLOG messages The options are None Do not include the origin identifier in SYSLOG messages Hostname lInclude the system hostname in SYSLOG messages IPv4 Address Include the IPv4 address of the sending interface in SYSLOG messages IPv6 Address lInclude the IPv6 address of the sending interface in SYSLOG messages User Defined Enter a description to be included in SYSLOG messages RAM Memory Logging Select the severity levels of the messages to be logged to the RAM Flash Memory Logging Select the severity levels of the messages to be logged to the Flash memory STEP 3 Click Apply The Running Configuration file is updated Setting Remote Logging Settings The Remote Log Servers page enables defining remote SYSLOG servers where log messages are sent using the SYSLOG protocol For each server you can configure the severity of the messages that it receives To define SYSLOG servers STEP 1 Click A
352. gh a VLAN or ISATAP IP Address Enter the SNMP management station IP address Community String Enter the community name used to authenticate the management station to the device Basic Select this mode for a selected community In this mode there is no connection to any group You can only choose the community access level Read Only Read Write or SNMP Admin and optionally further qualify it for a specific view By default it applies to the entire MIB If this is selected enter the following fields Access Mode Select the access rights of the community The options are Read Only Management access is restricted to read only Changes cannot be made to the community Read Write Management access is read write Changes can be made to the device configuration but not to the community SNMP Admin User has access to all device configuration options as well as permissions to modify the community SNMP Admin is equivalent to Read Write for all MIBs except for the SNMP MIBs SNMP Admin is required for access to the SNMP MIBs View Name Select an SNMP view a collection of MIB subtrees to which access is granted Advanced Select this mode for a selected community Group Name Select an SNMP group that determines the access rights STEP 4 Click Apply The SNMP Community is defined and the Running Configuration is updated Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Gui
353. gh its management VLAN The factory default setting of the IPv4 address configuration is DHCPV4 This means that the device acts as a DHCP V4 client and sends out a DHCP v4 request during boot up If the device receives a DHCP V4 response from the DHCPV4 server with an IPv4 address it sends Address Resolution Protocol ARP packets to confirm that the IP address is unique If the ARP response shows that the IPv4 address is in use the device sends a DHCPDECLINE message to the offering DHCP server and sends another DHCPDISCOVER packet that restarts the process If the device does not receive a DHCP v4 response in 60 seconds it continues to send DHCPDISCOVER queries and adopts the default IPv4 address 192 168 1 254 24 IP address collisions occur when the same IP address is used in the same IP subnet by more than one device Address collisions require administrative actions on the DHCP server and or the devices that collide with the device When a VLAN is configured to use dynamic IPv4 addresses the device issues DHCP V4 requests until it is assigned an IPv4 address from a DHCP V4 server In Layer 2 system mode only the management VLAN can be configured with a static or dynamic IP address In Layer 3 system mode all the interface types ports LAGs and or VLANs on the device can be configured with a static or dynamic IP address The IP address assignment rules for the device are as follows When in Layer 2 system mode unless th
354. gress port This can mitigate the effect of a SYN flood against servers by rate limiting the number of new connections opened to handle packets This feature is only available when the device is in Layer 2 system mode To define SYN rate protection STEP 1 Click Security gt Denial of Service Prevention gt SYN Rate Protection This page appears the SYN rate protection currently defined per interface STEP 2 Click Add STEP 3 Enter the parameters Interface Select the interface on which the rate protection is being defined IP Address Enter the IP address for which the SYN rate protection is defined or select All Addresses If you enter the IP address enter either the mask or prefix length Network Mask Select the format for the subnet mask for the source IP address and enter a value in one of the field Mask Select the subnet to which the source IP address belongs and enter the subnet mask in dotted decimal format Prefix Length Select the Prefix Length and enter the number of bits that comprise the source IP address prefix SYN Rate Limit Enter the number of SYN packets that be received 364 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security Denial of Service Prevention 18 STEP 4 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 Click Apply The SYN rate protection is defined and the Running Configura
355. h port When a policy profile is bound to a specific port it is active on that port Only one policy profile can be configured on a single port but a single policy can be bound to more than one port When a policy is bound to a port it filters and applies QoS to ingress traffic that belongs to the flows defined in the policy The policy does not apply to traffic egress to the same port To edit a policy it must first be removed unbound from all those ports to which it is bound It is possible to either bind a port to a policy or to an ACL but both cannot be bound To define policy binding Click Quality of Service gt QoS Advanced Mode gt Policy Binding Select a Policy Name and Interface Type if required Click Go The policy is selected Select the following for the policy interface Binding Select to bind the policy to the interface Permit Any Select to forward packets on the interface if they do not match any policy NOTE Permit Any can be defined only if IP Source Guard is not activated on the interface Click Apply The QoS policy binding is defined and the Running Configuration file is updated Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Quality of Service Managing QoS Statistics 29 Managing QoS Statistics NOTE STEP 1 From these pages you can manage the Single Policer Aggregated Policer and view queues statistics Po
356. hbors platform Neighbor Interface Interface number of the neighbor through which frame arrived Native VLAN Neighbors native VLAN Duplex Whether neighbors interface is half or full duplex Addresses Neighbors addresses Power Drawn Amount of power consumed by neighbor on the interface Version Neighbors software version 122 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration Discovery 8 Configuring CDP NOTE Clicking on the Clear Table button disconnect all connected devices if from CDP STEP 1 and if Auto Smartport is enabled change all port types to default Viewing CDP Statistics The CDP Statistics page displays information regarding Cisco Discovery Protocol CDP frames that were sent or received from a port CDP packets are received from devices attached to the switches interfaces and are used for the Smartport feature See Configuring CDP for more information CDP statistics for a port are only displayed if CDP is enabled globally and on the port This is done in the CDP Properties page and the CDP Interface Settings page To view CDP statistics Click Administration gt Discovery CDP gt CDP Statistics The following fields are displayed for every interface Packets Received Transmitted Version 1 Number of CDP version 1 packets received transmitted Version 2 Number of CDP version 2 packets received trans
357. he An embedded mechanism in the NDP implementation which limits the number of entries allowed in the INCOMPLETE state in the Neighbor Discovery cache provides protection Policies Global Parameters and System Defaults Each feature of FHS can be enabled or disabled individually No feature is enabled by default Features must initially be enabled on specific VLANs When you enable the feature you can also define global configuration values for that feature s rules of verification If you do not define a policy that contain different values for these verification rules the global values are used to apply the feature to packets Policies Policies contain the rules of verification that are performed on input packets They can be attached to VLANs and also to ports and LAGs If the feature is not enabled on a VLAN the policies have no effect Policies can be user defined or default policies see below Default Policies Empty default polices exist for each FHS feature and are by default attached to all VLANs and interfaces The default policies are named vlan_default and port_default for each feature Rules can be added to these default policies You cannot manually attach default policies to interfaces They are attached by default Default policies can never be deleted You can only delete the user added configuration User Defined Policies You can define policies other than the default policies Cisc
358. he Add RADIUS Server page the device uses the values in these fields Retries Enter the number of transmitted requests that are sent to the RADIUS server before a failure is considered to have occurred Timeout for Reply Enter the number of seconds that the device waits for an answer from the RADIUS server before retrying the query or switching to the next server Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 339 Security Configuring RADIUS Dead Time Enter the number of minutes that elapse before a non responsive RADIUS server is bypassed for service requests If the value is 0 the server is not bypassed Key String Enter the default key string used for authenticating and encrypting between the device and the RADIUS server This key must match the key configured on the RADIUS server A key string is used to encrypt communications by using MD5 The key can be entered in Encrypted or Plaintext form If you do not have an encrypted key string from another device enter the key string in plaintext mode and click Apply The encrypted key string is generated and displayed This overrides the default key string if one has been defined Source IPv4 In Layer 3 system mode only Select the device IPv4 source interface to be used in messages for communication with the RADIUS server Source IPv6 In Layer 3 system mode only Select the device IPv
359. he Running Configuration Startup Configuration or Backup Configuration To copy one type of configuration file to another type of configuration file Click Administration gt File Management gt Copy Save Configuration Select the Source File Name to be copied Only valid file types are displayed described in the Files and File Types section Select the Destination File Name to be overwritten by the source file Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 49 Administration File Management Auto Configuration via DHCP If you are backing up a configuration file select one of the following formats for the backup file Exclude Sensitive data is not included in the backup file Encrypted Sensitive data is included in the backup file in encrypted form Plaintext Sensitive data is included in the backup file in plain text NOTE The available sensitive data options are determined by the current user SSD rules For details refer to Secure Sensitive Data Management gt SSD Rules page STEP 4 The Save Icon Blinking field indicates whether an icon blinks when there is unsaved data To disable enable this feature click Disable Enable Save Icon Blinking STEP 5 Click Apply The file is copied Auto Configuration via DHCP DHCP auto configuration enables passing configuration information to hosts on a TCP IP network Based on this protocol
360. he Trap Settings page STEP 6 Optionally define a notification filter s by using the Notification Filter page STEP 7 Define a notification recipient s by using the Notification Recipients SNMPv3 page Supported MIBs For a list of supported MIBs visit the following URL and navigate to the download area listed as Cisco MIBS www cisco com cisco software navigator html Model OIDs The following are the device model Object Ds OIDs Model Name Description Object ID SG300 10 8 GE ports and 2 special purpose combo 9 6 1 83 10 1 ports GE SFP SG300 10MP 8 GE ports and 2 special purpose combo 9 6 1 83 10 3 ports GE SFP SG300 10P 8 GE ports and 2 special purpose combo 9 6 1 83 10 2 ports GE SFP SG300 20 16 GE ports and 4 special purpose ports 2 9 6 1 83 20 1 uplinks and 2 combo ports SG300 28 24 GE ports and 4 special purpose ports 2 9 6 1 83 28 1 uplinks and 2 combo ports SG300 28P 24 GE ports and 4 special purpose ports 2 9 6 1 83 28 2 uplinks and 2 combo ports SG300 52 48 GE ports and 4 special purpose ports 2 9 6 1 83 52 1 uplinks and 2 combo ports SF300 08 8 FE ports 9 6 1 82 08 4 SF302 08 8 FE ports plus 2 GE ports 9 6 1 82 08 1 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 524 2 6 SNMP Model OIDs Model Name Description Object ID SF302 08MP 8 FE ports plus 2 GE ports 9 6 1 82 08 3 SF302 0
361. he default VLAN The member ports must be manually configured as tagged members The member ports must be trunk and or general ports An access port cannot be member of an unauthenticated VLAN The guest VLAN if configured is a static VLAN with the following characteristics it must be manually defined from an existing static VLAN The guest VLAN cannot be used as the Voice VLAN or an unauthenticated VLAN See Table 3 Guest VLAN Support and RADIUS VLAN Assignment Support to see a summary of the modes in which guest VLAN is supported 390 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security 802 1X Authentication 1 Authenticator Overview NOTE Host Modes with Guest VLAN The host modes work with guest VLAN in the following way Single Host and Multi Host Mode Untagged traffic and tagged traffic belonging to the guest VLAN arriving on an unauthorized port are bridged via the guest VLAN All other traffic is discarded The traffic belonging to an unauthenticated VLAN is bridged via the VLAN Multi Sessions Mode in Layer 2 Untagged traffic and tagged traffic which does not belong to the unauthenticated VLANs and that arrives from unauthorized clients are assigned to the guest VLAN using the TCAM rule and are bridged via the guest VLAN The tagged traffic belonging to an unauthenticated VLAN is bridged via the VLAN This mode cannot be con
362. he device If the browser request contains only the language code without a country code for example fr The first embedded language with a matching language code is taken without matching the country code for example fr_CA To log in to the device configuration utility Enter the username password The password can contain up to 64 ASCIl characters Password complexity rules are described in the Setting Password Complexity Rules section of the Configuring Security chapter If you are not using English select the desired language from the Language drop down menu To add a new language to the device or update a current one refer to the Upgrade Backup Firmware Language section If this is the first time that you logged on with the default user ID cisco and the default password cisco or your password has expired the Change Password Page appears See Password Expiration for additional information Choose whether to select Disable Password Complexity Enforcement or not For more information on password complexity see the Setting Password Complexity Rules section Enter the new password and click Apply Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Getting Started Starting the Web based Configuration Utility 1 NOTE AN CAUTION When the login attempt is successful the Getting Started page appears If you entered an incorrect username or password an err
363. he device is in violation of the active access profile the device generates a SYSLOG message to alert the system administrator of the attempt If a console only access profile has been activated the only way to deactivate it is through a direct connection from the management station to the physical console port on the device For more information see Defining Profile Rules Use the Access Profiles page to create an access profile and to add its first rule If the access profile only contains a single rule you are finished To add additional rules to the profile use the Profile Rules page STEP 1 Click Security gt Mgmt Access Method gt Access Profiles This page displays all of the access profiles active and inactive STEP 2 Tochange the active access profile select a profile from the Active Access Profile drop down menu and click Apply This makes the chosen profile the active access profile NOTE A caution message appears if you selected Console Only If you continue you are immediately disconnected from the web based configuration utility and can access the device only through the console port This only applies to device types that offer a console port Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 343 18 Security Management Access Method A caution message displays if you selected any other access profile warning you that depending on the selected a
364. he following features IPv6 First Hop Security Common RA Guard ND Inspection Neighbor Binding Integrity DHCPv6 Guard These components can be enabled or disabled on VLANs There are two empty pre defined policies per each feature with the following names vilan_default and port_default The first one is attached to each VLAN that is not attached to a user defined policy and the second one is connected to each interface and VLAN that is not attached to a user defined policy These policies cannot be attached explicitly by the user See Policies Global Parameters and System Defaults IPv6 First Hop Security Pipe If IPv6 First Hop Security is enabled on a VLAN the switch traps the following messages Router Advertisement RA messages Router Solicitation RS messages Neighbor Advertisement NA messages 412 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security IPV6 First Hop Security 2 O First Hop Security Overview Neighbor Solicitation NS messages ICMPv6 Redirect messages Certification Path Advertisement CPA messages Certification Path Solicitation CPS messages DHCPv6 messages Trapped RA CPA and ICMPv6 Redirect messages are passed to the RA Guard feature RA Guard validates these messages drops illegal message and legal messages passes to the ND Inspection feature ND Inspection validates these messages and drops illegal message an
365. he imported file adds any configuration commands that did not exist in the old file and overwrites any parameter values in the existing configuration commands When restoring a configuration file to the Startup Configuration or a backup configuration file the new file rep aces the previous file When restoring to Startup Configuration the device must be rebooted for the restored Startup Configuration to be used as the Running Configuration You can reboot the device by using the process described in the Management Interface section Configuration File Backwards Compatibility When restoring configuration files from an external device to the device the following compatibility issues might arise Change the System Mode If the System mode is contained in a configuration file that is downloaded to the device and the file s System mode matches the current System mode this information is ignored Otherwise if the System mode is changed the following cases are possible If the configuration file is downloaded onto the device using the Download Backup Configuration Log page the operation is aborted and a message is displayed indicating that the System mode must be changed in the System Settings page If the configuration file is downloaded during an automatic configuration process the Startup Configuration file is deleted and the device reboots automatically in the new System mode The device is configured with an empty configu
366. he traffic class to which they belong See Configuring QoS Queues Other Traffic Class Handling Attribute Applies QoS mechanisms to various classes including bandwidth management QoS Operation The type of header field to be trusted is entered in the Global Settings page For every value of that field an egress queue is assigned indicating through which queue the frame is sent in the CoS 802 1p to Queue page or the DSCP to Queue page depending on whether the trust mode is CoS 802 1p or DSCP respectively Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 490 Quality of Service QoS Features and Components QoS Modes The QoS mode that is selected applies to all interfaces in the system Basic Mode Class of Service CoS All traffic of the same class receives the same treatment which is the single QoS action of determining the egress queue on the egress port based on the indicated QoS value in the incoming frame This can be the VLAN Priority Tag VPT 802 1p value in Layer 2 and the Differentiated Service Code Point DSCP value for IPv4 or Traffic Class TC value for IPv6 in Layer 3 When operating in Basic Mode the device trusts this external assigned QoS value The external assigned QoS value of a packet determines its traffic class and QoS The header field to be trusted is entered in the Global Settings page For every value of that field an egress queue is
367. he user types supported in order of most preference to least preference are as follows If a user matches multiple SSD rules the rule with the most preference User Type will be applied Specific tThe rule applies to a specific user Default User cisco The rule applies to the default user cisco Level 15 The rule applies to users with privilege level 15 All The rule applies to all users User Name lf user type is Specific a user name is required Channel Type of SSD management channel to which the rule is applied The channel types supported are Secure Specifies the rule applies only to secure channels Depending on the device it may support some or all of the following secure channels Console port interface SCP SSH and HTTPS Insecure Specifies that this rule applies only to insecure channels Depending on the device it may support some or all of the following insecure channels Telnet TFTP and HTTP Secure XML SNMP Specifies that this rule applies only to XML over HTTPS or SNMPv3 with privacy A device may or may not support all of the secure XML and SNMP channels Insecure XML SNMP Specifies that this rule applies only to XML over HTTP or SNMPv1 v2 and SNMPv3 without privacy A device may or may not support all of the secure XML and SNMP channels Read Permission The read permissions associate with the rules These can be the following Lowest Exclude Users are not permitted to ac
368. hen the device is in L3 mode The ARP Proxy is aware of the destination of traffic and offers another MAC address in reply Serving as an ARP Proxy for another host effectively directs LAN traffic destination to the host The captured traffic is then typically routed by the Proxy to the intended destination by using another interface or by using a tunnel The process in which an ARP query request for a different IP address for proxy purposes results in the node responding with its own MAC address is sometimes referred to as publishing To enable ARP Proxy on all IP interfaces STEP 1 Click IP Configuration gt IPv4 Management and Interfaces gt ARP Proxy STEP 2 Select ARP Proxy to enable the device to respond to ARP requests for remotely located nodes with the device MAC address STEP 3 Click Apply The ARP proxy is enabled and the Running Configuration file is updated 278 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration IPv4 Management and Interfaces 1 7 STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP UDP Relay IP Helper The UDP Relay IP Helper feature is only available when the device is in Layer 3 system mode Switches do not typically route IP Broadcast packets between IP subnets However if this feature enables the device to relay specific UDP Broadcast packets received from its IPv4 interfaces to specific destination IP addresses To c
369. here are 1 s You need to translate the 1 s to a decimal integer and you write O for each four zeros In this example since 1111 1111 255 the mask would be written as 0 0 0 255 Source MAC Address Select Any if all source address are acceptable or User defined to enter a source address or range of source addresses Source MAC Address Value Enter the MAC address to which the source MAC address is to be matched and its mask if relevant Source MAC Wildcard Mask Enter the mask to define a range of MAC addresses VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID section of the VLAN tag to match 802 1p Select Include to use 802 1p 802 1p Value Enter the 802 1p value to be added to the VPT tag 802 1p Mask Enter the wildcard mask to be applied to the VPT tag Ethertype Enter the frame Ethertype to be matched STEP 5 Click Apply The MAC based ACE is saved to the Running Configuration file Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 478 Access Control IPv4 based ACLs IPv4 based ACLs IPv4 based ACLs are used to check IPv4 packets while other types of frames such as ARPs are not checked The following fields can be matched IP protocol by name for well known protocols or directly by value Source destination ports for TCP UDP traffic Flag values for TCP frames ICMP and IGMP type and code Source destination IP addresses including wildcards DSCP IP pre
370. ic towards the bandwidth threshold Broadcast Only Counts only Broadcast traffic towards the bandwidth threshold STEP 4 Click Apply Storm control is modified and the Running Configuration file is updated Configuring Port Security Network security can be increased by limiting access on a port to users with specific MAC addresses The MAC addresses can be either dynamically learned or statically configured Port security monitors received and learned packets Access to locked ports is limited to users with specific MAC addresses Port Security has four modes Classic Lock All learned MAC addresses on the port are locked and the port does not learn any new MAC addresses The learned addresses are not subject to aging or re learning Limited Dynamic Lock The device learns MAC addresses up to the configured limit of allowed addresses After the limit is reached the device does not learn additional addresses In this mode the addresses are subject to aging and re learning Secure Permanent Keeps the current dynamic MAC addresses associated with the port and learns up to the maximum number of addresses allowed on the port set by Max No of Addresses Allowed Relearning and aging are disabled Secure Delete on Reset Deletes the current dynamic MAC addresses associated with the port after reset New MAC addresses can be learned as Delete On Reset ones up to the maximum addresses allowed on the port Relearning and
371. icast TV VLAN VLAN to which the Multicast packets are assigned STEP 2 Click Add to associate a Multicast group to a VLAN Any VLAN can be selected When a VLAN is selected it becomes a Multicast TV VLAN 226 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version VLAN Management Customer Port Multicast TV VLAN 1 3 STEP 3 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Click Apply Multicast TV VLAN settings are modified and written to the Running Configuration file Port Multicast VLAN Membership To define the Multicast TV VLAN configuration Click VLAN Management gt Access Port Multicast TV VLAN gt Port Multicast VLAN Membership Select a VLAN from the Multicast TV VLAN field The Candidate Access Ports list contains all access ports configured on the device Move the required ports from the Candidate Access Ports field to the Member Access Ports field Click Apply Multicast TV VLAN settings are modified and written to the Running Configuration file Customer Port Multicast TV VLAN A triple play service provisions three broadband services over a single broadband connection High speed Internet access Video Voice The triple play service is provisioned for service provider subscribers while keeping Layer 2 isolation between them Each subscriber has a CPE MUX box The MUX has multiple access ports that are connected to the subscriber s d
372. icy Attachment VLAN or Policy Attachment Port pages Default Settings and Configuration If IPv6 First Hop Security is enabled on a VLAN the switch traps the following messages by default Router Advertisement RA messages Router Solicitation RS messages Neighbor Advertisement NA messages Neighbor Solicitation NS messages ICMPv6 Redirect messages Certification Path Advertisement CPA messages Certification Path Solicitation CPS message DHCPv6 messages The FHS features are disabled by default 424 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security IPV6 First Hop Security 2 O Before You Start Before You Start No preliminary tasks are required Configuring First Hop Security through Web GUI FHS Common Settings Use the FHS Settings page to enable the FHS Common feature on a specified group of VLANs and to set the global configuration value for logging packet dropping If required a policy can be added or the packet drop logging can be added to the system defined default policy To configure First Hop Security Common on ports or LAGs STEP 1 Click Security gt First Hop Security gt FHS Settings STEP 2 Enter the following global configuration fields FHS VLAN List Enter one or more VLANs on which First Hop Security is enabled Packet Dropped Logging Select to create a SYSLOG when a packet is dropped by a
373. idered point to point for RSTP purposes which means that STP works on it at regular speed as opposed to high speed Auto Automatically determines the device status by using RSTP BPDUs Point to Point Operational Status Displays the Point to Point operational status if the Point to Point Administrative Status is set to Auto Role Displays the role of the port that was assigned by STP to provide STP paths The possible roles are Root Lowest cost path to forward packets to the Root Bridge Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 237 14 Spanning Tree Configuring Rapid Spanning Tree Settings Designated The interface through which the bridge is connected to the LAN which provides the lowest cost path from the LAN to the Root Bridge Alternate Provides an alternate path to the Root Bridge from the root interface Backup Provides a backup path to the designated port path toward the Spanning Tree leaves This provides a configuration in which two ports are connected in a loop by a point to point link Backup ports are also used when a LAN has two or more established connections to a shared segment Disabled tThe port is not participating in Spanning Tree _Mode Displays the current Spanning Tree mode Classic STP or RSTP Fast Link Operational Status Displays whether the Fast Link Edge Port is enabled disabled or automatic
374. ient way to save and share common configurations By applying the same Smartport macro to multiple interfaces the interfaces share a common set of configurations A Smartport macro is a script of CLI Command Line Interface commands A Smartport macro can be applied to an interface by the macro name or by the Smartport type associated with the macro Applying a Smartport macro by macro name can be done only through CLI Refer to the CLI guide for details There are two ways to apply a Smartport macro by Smartport type to an interface Static Smartport You manually assign a Smartport type to an interface The result is the corresponding Smartport macro is applied to the interface Auto Smartport Auto Smartport waits for a device to be attached to the interface before applying a configuration When a device is detected from an interface the Smartport macro if assigned that corresponds to the Smartport type of the attaching device is automatically applied The Smartport feature consists of various components and works in conjunction with other features on the device These components and features are described in the following sections Smartport Smartport types and Smartport macros described in this section Voice VLAN and Smartport described in the Voice VLAN section _LLDP CDP for Smartport described in the Configuring LLDP and Configuring CDP sections respectively Additionally typical work flows are descri
375. ighbor Advertisement Displays the capabilities advertised by the neighboring device link partner Back Pressure Select the Back Pressure mode on the port used with Half Duplex mode to slow down the packet reception speed when the device is congested It disables the remote port preventing it from sending packets by jamming the signal Flow Control Enable or disable 802 3x Flow Control or enable the auto negotiation of Flow Control on the port only when in Full Duplex mode MDI MDIX the Media Dependent Interface MDI Media Dependent Interface with Crossover MDIX status on the port The options are MDIX Select to swap the port s transmit and receives pairs Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 127 Port Management Setting Port Configuration MDI Select to connect this device to a station by using a straight through cable Auto Select to configure this device to automatically detect the correct pinouts for the connection to another device Operational MDI MDIX Displays the current MDI MDIX setting Protected Port Select to make this a protected port A protected port is also referred as a Private VLAN Edge PVE The features of a protected port are as follows Protected Ports provide Layer 2 isolation between interfaces Ethernet ports and LAGs that share the same VLAN Packets received from protected
376. iguration 1 7 Domain Name Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 323 IP Configuration Domain Name 324 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration 1 7 Domain Name Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 325 IP Configuration Domain Name 326 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration 1 7 Domain Name Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 327 IP Configuration Domain Name 328 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration 1 7 Domain Name Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 329 IP Configuration Domain Name 330 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration 1 7 Domain Name Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 331 IP Configuration Domain Name 332 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version
377. iguration file is updated Defining Unregistered Multicast Settings Multicast frames are generally forwarded to all ports in the VLAN If IGMP MLD Snooping is enabled the device learns about the existence of Multicast groups and monitors which ports have joined which Multicast group Multicast groups can also be statically configured Multicast groups that were either dynamically learned or statically configured are considered registered The device forwards Multicast frames from a registered Multicast group only to ports that are registered to that Multicast group The Unregistered Multicast page enables handling Multicast frames that belong to groups that are not known to the device unregistered Multicast groups Unregistered Multicast frames are usually forwarded to all ports on the VLAN 266 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Multicast 1 6 Defining Unregistered Multicast Settings You can select a port to receive or filter unregistered Multicast streams The configuration is valid for any VLAN of which it is a member or will be a member This feature ensures that the customer receives only the Multicast groups requested and not others that may be transmitted in the network To define unregistered Multicast settings STEP 1 Click Multicast gt Unregistered Multicast STEP 2 Define the following Interface Type equals to The view as all
378. igure Port Mirroring Port and VLAN Mirroring page There are two hot links on the Getting Started page that take you to Cisco web pages for more information Clicking on the Support link takes you to the device product support page and clicking on the Forums link takes you to the Small Business Support Community page Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Getting Started Interface Naming Conventions Interface Naming Conventions Within the GUI interfaces are denoted by concatenating the following elements Type of interface The following types of interfaces are found on the various types of devices Fast Ethernet 10 100 bits These are displayed as FE Gigabit Ethernet ports 10 100 1000 bits These are displayed as GE LAG Port Channel These are displayed as LAG WVLAN These are displayed as VLAN Tunnel These are displayed as Tunnel Interface Number Port LAG tunnel or VLAN ID 6 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Getting Started Window Navigation Window Navigation This section describes the features of the web based switch configuration utility Application Header The Application Header appears on every page It provides the following application links Application Link Name Description A flashing red X icon dis
379. iguring TACACS Do not repeat or reverse the manufacturers name or any variant reached by changing the case of the characters STEP 4 If the Password Complexity Settings are enabled the following parameters may be configured Minimal Password Length Enter the minimal number of characters required for passwords NOTE A zero length password no password is allowed and can still have password aging assigned to it Allowed Character Repetition Enter the number of times that a character can be repeated Minimal Number of Character Classes Enter the number of character classes which must be present in a password Character classes are lower case 1 upper case 2 digits 3 and symbols or special characters 4 The New Password Must Be Different than the Current One If selected the new password cannot be the same as the current password upon a password change STEP 5 Click Apply The password settings are written to the Running Configuration file NOTE Configuring the username password equivalence and manufacturer password equivalence may be done through the CLI See the CLI Reference Guide for further instruction Configuring TACACS An organization can establish a Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TACACS server to provide centralized security for all of its devices In this way authentication and authorization can be handled on a single server for all devices in the organization
380. iguring Tunnels NOTE To configure a tunnel first configure an IPv6 interface as a tunnel in the IPv6 Interfaces page Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 305 IP Configuration IPv6 Management and Interfaces To configure an IPv6 tunnel STEP 1 In Layer 2 system mode click Administration gt Management Interface gt IPv6 Tunnel In Layer 3 system mode click IP Configuration gt IPv6 Management and Interfaces gt IPv6 Tunnel STEP 2 Enter values for the following fields Tunnel Number Displays the automatic tunnel router domain number Tunnel Type Always ISATAP Source IPv4 Address The IPv4 address of the selected interface on the current device used to form part of the IPv6 address Auto Automatically selects the lowest IPv4 address from among all of its configured IPv4 interfaces on the device This option is equivalent to the Interface option in Layer 3 because in Layer 2 there is only one interface NOTE If the IPv4 address is changed the local address of the tunnel interface is also changed None Disable the tunnel Manua Enter the IPv4 source address to be used The IPv4 address configured must be one of the IPv4 addresses of the devices IPv4 interfaces Interface In Layer 3 Select the IPv4 interface to be used ISATAP Router Name A global string that represents a specific automatic tunnel router do
381. ily have to be defined Default User cisco Indicates that this rule applies to the default user Level 15 Indicates that this rule applies to all users with privilege level 15 All lIndicates that this rule applies to all users Channel This defines the security level of the input channel to which the rule applies Select one of the following options Secure Indicates that this rule applies only to secure channels console SCP SSH and HTTPS not including the SNMP and XML channels Insecure Indicates that this rule applies only to insecure channels Telnet TFTP and HTTP not including the SNMP and XML channels Secure XML SNMP Indicates that this rule applies only to XML over HTTPS and SNMPvs8 with privacy Insecure XML SNMP Indicates that this rule applies only to XML over HTTP or and SNMPv1 v2and SNMPv38 without privacy 454 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security Secure Sensitive Data Management 2 1 Configuring SSD Read Permission The read permissions associated with the rule These can be the following Exclude Lowest read permission Users are not permitted to get sensitive data in any form Plaintext Only Higher read permission than above ones Users are permitted to get sensitive data in plaintext only Encrypted Only Middle read permission Users are permitted to get sensitive data as encrypted o
382. in Name System gt Host Mapping STEP 2 If required select the Clear Table option to clear some or all of the entries in the Host Mapping Table Static Only Deletes the static hosts Dynamic Only Deletes the dynamic hosts All Dynamic amp Static Deletes the static and dynamic hosts The Host Mapping Table displays the following fields Host Name User defined host name or fully qualified name IP Address The host IP address IP Version IP version of the host IP address Type ls this a Dynamic or Static entry to the cache Status Displays the results of attempts to access the host OkK Attempt succeeded Negative Cache Attempt failed do not try again No Response There was no response but system can try again in future TTL If this is a dynamic entry how long will it remain in the cache Remaining TTL If this is a dynamic entry how much longer will it remain in the cache STEP 3 To add a host mapping click Add STEP 4 Enter the parameters IP Version Select Version 6 for IPv6 or Version 4 for IP v4 IPv6 Address Type Select the IPv6 address type if IPv6 is used The options are Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 319 IP Configuration Domain Name Link Local The IPv6 address uniquely identifies hosts on a single network link A link local address has a prefix of FE80
383. in the local database NOTE If more than one TACACS server has been configured the device uses the configured priorities of the available TACACS servers to select the TACACS server to be used by the device Configuring a TACACS Server The TACACS page enables configuring TACACS servers Only users who have privilege level 15 on the TACACS server can administer the device Privilege level 15 is given to a user or group of users on the TACACS server by the following string in the user or group definition service exec priv lvl 15 To configure TACACS server parameters STEP 1 Click Security gt TACACS STEP 2 Enable TACACS Accounting if required See explanation in the Accounting Using a TACACS Server section STEP 3 Enter the following default parameters Key String Enter the default Key String used for communicating with all TACACS servers in Encrypted or Plaintext mode The device can be configured to use this key or to use a key entered for an specific server entered in the Add TACACS Server page If you do not enter a key string in this field the server key entered in the Add TACACS Server page must match the encryption key used by the TACACS server If you enter both a key string here and a key string for an individual TACACS server the key string configured for the individual TACACS server takes precedence Timeout for Reply Enter the amount of time that passes before the co
384. iness 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration 1 7 IPv6 Management and Interfaces Configuration Path Name Path to configuration file on the configuration server received from the DHCPV6 server IPv6 Tunnel Tunnels enable transmission of IPv6 packets over IPv4 networks Each tunnel has a source IPv4 address and a destination IPv4 address The IPv6 packet is encapsulated between these addresses ISATAP Tunnels The type of tunnel that can be configured on the device is called an Intra Site Automatic Tunnel Addressing Protocol ISATAP tunnel which is a point to multi point tunnel The source address is the IPv4 address or one of the IPv4 addresses of the device When configuring an ISATAP tunnel the destination IPv4 address is provided by the router Note the following An IPv6 link local address is assigned to the ISATAP interface The initial IP address is assigned to the interface which is then activated f an ISATAP interface is active the ISATAP router IPv4 address is resolved via DNS by using ISATAP to IPv4 mapping If the ISATAP DNS record is not resolved the ISATAP host name to address mapping is searched for in the host mapping table When the ISATAP router IPv4 address is not resolved via the DNS process the ISATAP IP interface remains active The system does not have a default router for ISATAP traffic until the DNS process is resolved Conf
385. ing Configuration file You can now select this access profile as the active access profile Defining Profile Rules Access profiles can contain up to 128 rules to determine who is permitted to manage and access the device and the access methods that may be used Each rule in an access profile contains an action and criteria one or more parameters to match Each rule has a priority rules with the lowest priority are checked first If the incoming packet matches a rule the action associated with the rule is performed If no matching rule is found within the active access profile the packet is dropped For example you can limit access to the device from all IP addresses except IP addresses that are allocated to the IT management center In this way the device can still be managed and has gained another layer of security To add profile rules to an access profile Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 345 Security Management Access Method STEP 1 Click Security gt Mgmt Access Method gt Profile Rules STEP 2 Select the Filter field and an access profile Click Go The selected access profile appears in the Profile Rule Table STEP 3 Click Add to add a rule STEP 4 Enter the parameters Access Profile Name Select an access profile Rule Priority Enter the rule priority When the packet is matched to a rule user groups are either granted or
386. inistration Guide Internal Version Administration Discovery Configuring CDP 8 Status lf the LLDP MED extended power via MDI packets were sent or if they were overloaded 802 3 TLVs Size Bytes Total LLDP MED 802 3 TLVs packets byte size Status lf the LLDP MED 802 3 TLVs packets were sent or if they were overloaded LLDP Optional TLVs Size Bytes Total LLDP MED optional TLVs packets byte size Status lf the LLDP MED optional TLVs packets were sent or if they were overloaded LLDP MED Inventory Size Bytes Total LLDP MED inventory TLVs packets byte size Status lf the LLDP MED inventory packets were sent or if they were overloaded Total Bytes Total number of bytes of LLDP information in each packet Left to Send Bytes Total number of available bytes left for additional LLDP information in each packet Configuring CDP This section describes how to configure CDP It covers the following topics Setting CDP Properties Editing CDP Interface Settings Displaying CDP Local Information Displaying CDP Neighbors Information Viewing CDP Statistics Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 115 Administration Discovery Configuring CDP STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 1 STEP 2 Setting CDP Properties Similar to LLDP CDP Cisco Discovery Protocol is a link layer protocol for directly conne
387. ink Status SNMP Traps Select to enable generation of SNMP traps that notify of changes to the link status of the port Time Range Select to enable the time range during which the port is in Up state When the time range is not active the port is in shutdown If a time range is configured it is effective only when the port is administratively Up If a time range is not yet defined click Edit to go to the Time Range page Time Range Name Select the profile that specifies the time range Operational Time Range State Displays whether the time range is currently active or inactive Reactivate Suspended Port Select to reactivate a port that has been suspended There are numerous ways that a port can be suspended such as through the locked port security option dot1x single host violation loopback detection STP loopback guard or Access Control List ACL configurations The reactivate operation brings the port up without regard to why the port was suspended Auto Negotiation Select to enable auto negotiation on the port Auto negotiation enables a port to advertise its transmission speed duplex mode and Flow Control abilities to the port link partner Operational Auto Negotiation Displays the current auto negotiation status on the port Administrative Port Speed Configure the speed of the port The port type determines which the available speeds You can designate Administrative Speed only when port aut
388. ion method and port mode are supported Authentication Single host Multi host Multi sessions Method Device in L3 Device in L2 802 1x t t t MAC t t WEB N S N S N S t Legend t The port mode also supports the guest VLAN and RADIUS VLAN assignment N S The authentication method does not support the port mode NOTE Web based authentication requires TCAM support for input traffic classification and can be supported only by the full multi sessions mode You can simulate the single host mode by setting Max Hosts parameter to 1 in the Port Authentication page Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 407 19 Security 802 1X Authentication Authentication Method and Port Mode Support Mode Behavior The following table describes how authenticated and non authenticated traffic is handled in various situations Unauthenticated Traffic Authenticated Traffic With Guest VLAN Without Guest VLAN With Radius VLAN Without Radius VLAN Untagged Tagged Untagged Tagged Untagged Tagged Untagged Tagged Single Frames are Frames Frames are Frames Frames are Frames Frames are Frames host re mapped to are dropped are re mapped to are bridged based are the guest dropped dropped the RADIUS dropped on the static bridged VLAN unless unless assigned unless VLAN based on they
389. ipients SNMP Notification Filters SNMP Versions and Workflow The device functions as SNMP agent and supports SNMPV1 v2 and v3 It also reports system events to trap receivers using the traps defined in the supported MIBs Management Information Base Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 521 sii 26 SNMP Versions and Workflow SNMPv1 and v2 To control access to the system a list of community entries is defined Each community entry consists of a community string and its access privilege The system responds only to SNMP messages specifying the community which has the correct permissions and correct operation SNMP agents maintain a list of variables that are used to manage the device These variables are defined in the Management Information Base MIB NOTE Due to the security vulnerabilities of other versions it is recommended to use SNMPvs SNMPv3 In addition to the functionality provided by SNMPv1 and v2 SNMPv38 applies access control and new trap mechanisms to SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 PDUs SNMPvVs8 also defines a User Security Model USM that includes Authentication Provides data integrity and data origin authentication Privacy Protects against disclosure message content Cipher Block Chaining CBC DES is used for encryption Either authentication alone can be enabled on an SNMP message or both authentication and privacy can be enabled on
390. is a suite of features designed to secure link operations in an IPv6 enabled network It is based on the Neighbor Discovery Protocol and DHCP v6 messages In this feature a Layer 2 switch as shown in Figure 6 filters Neighbor Discovery Protocol messages DHCPv6 messages and user data messages according toa number of different rules Figure 6 First Hop Security Configuration E IPv6 Host End Node s Monitor First Hop Switch IPv6 Router 370572 A separate and independent instance of IPv6 First Hop Security runs on each VLAN on which the feature is enabled Abbreviations Name Description CPA message Certification Path Advertisement message CPS message Certification Path Solicitation message DAD NS message Duplicate Address Detection Neighbor Solicitation message FCFS SAVI First Come First Served Source Address Validation Improvement Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 411 20 Security IPV6 First Hop Security First Hop Security Overview Name Description NA message Neighbor Advertisement message NDP Neighbor Discovery Protocol NS message Neighbor Solicitation message RA message Router Advertisement message RS message Router Solicitation message SAVI Source Address Validation Improvement IPv6 First Hop Security Components IPv6 First Hop Security includes t
391. is generated Delta Subtracts the last sampled value from the current value The difference in the values is compared to the threshold If the threshold was crossed an alarm is generated Rising Threshold Enter the value that triggers the rising threshold alarm Rising Event Select an event to be performed when a rising event is triggered Events are created in the Events page Falling Threshold Enter the value that triggers the falling threshold alarm Falling Event Select an event to be performed when a falling event is triggered Startup Alarm Select the first event from which to start generation of alarms Rising is defined by crossing the threshold from a low value threshold to a higher value threshold Rising Alarm A rising value triggers the rising threshold alarm Falling Alarm A falling value triggers the falling threshold alarm Rising and Falling Both rising and falling values trigger the alarm 26 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Status and Statistics 2 View Log Interval Enter the alarm interval time in seconds Owner Enter the name of the user or network management system that receives the alarm STEP 4 Click Apply The RMON alarm is saved to the Running Configuration file View Log See Viewing Memory Logs Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Inte
392. is not routable and can be used for communication only on the local network Only one link local address is supported If a link local address exists on the interface this entry replaces the address in the configuration Global The IPv6 address is a global Unicast IPV6 type that is visible and reachable from other networks Link Local Interface lf the IPv6 address type is Link Local select the interface through which it is received Host Name Enter a user defined host name or fully qualified name Host names are restricted to the ASCIl letters A through Z case insensitive the digits O through 9 the underscore and the hyphen A period is used to separate labels IP Address es Enter a single address or up to eight associated IP addresses IPv4 or IPv6 You can select the Clear Table option to clear some or all of the entries in the Host Mapping Table Static Only Deletes the static hosts Dynamic Only Deletes the dynamic hosts All Dynamic amp Static Deletes the static and dynamic hosts 320 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration 1 7 Domain Name Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 321 IP Configuration Domain Name 322 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Conf
393. ising itself as an IPv6 host having the given IPv6 address NB Integrity provides protection against such attacks in the following ways If the given IPv6 address is unknown the DAD_NS message is forwarded only on inner interfaces Ifthe given IPv6 address is known the DAD_NS message is forwarded only on the interface where the IPv6 address is bound An NA message is dropped if the target IPv6 address is bound with another interface Protection against DHCPv6 Server Spoofing An IPv6 host can use the DHCPV6 protocol for Stateless Information configuration Statefull address configuration A malicious host could send DHCPV6 reply messages advertising itself as a DHCPV6 server and providing counterfeit stateless information and IPv6 addresses DHCPv6 Guard provides protection against such attacks by configuring the interface role as a client port for all ports to which DHCPV6 servers cannot be connected Protection Against NBD Cache Spoofing An IP v6 router supports the Neighbor Discovery Protocol NDP cache that maps the IPv6 address to the MAC address for the last hop routing 420 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security IPV6 First Hop Security 2 O Policies Global Parameters and System Defaults A malicious host could send IPv6 messages with a different destination IPv6 address for the last hop forwarding causing overflow of the NBD cac
394. isplays the Auto Smartport status Auto Smartport Device Detection Method Select whether incoming CDP LLDP or both types of packets are used to detect the Smartport type of the attaching device s At least one must be checked in order for Auto Smartport to identify devices Operational CDP Status Displays the operational status of CDP Enable CDP if Auto Smartport is to detect the Smartport type based on CDP advertisement Operational LLDP Status Displays the operational status of LLDP Enable LLDP if Auto Smartport is to detect the Smartport type based on LLDP LLDP MED advertisement Auto Smartport Device Detection Select each type of device for which Auto Smartport can assign Smartport types to interfaces If unchecked Auto Smartport does not assign that Smartport type to any interface STEP 3 Click Apply This sets the global Smartport parameters on the device Smartport Type Settings Use the Smartport Type Settings page to edit the Smartport Type settings and view the Macro Source By default each Smartport type is associated with a pair of built in Smartport macros See Smartport Types for further information on macro versus anti macro Alternatively you can associate your own pair of user defined macros with customized configurations to a Smartport type User defined macros can be prepared only through CLI You should refer to the CLI reference guide for details Built in or user defined macros can have
395. istration Guide Internal Version 245 Managing MAC Address Tables This section describe how to add MAC addresses to the system It covers the following topics Configuring Static MAC Addresses Managing Dynamic MAC Addresses Defining Reserved MAC Addresses Types of MAC Addresses There are two types of MAC addresses static and dynamic Depending on their type MAC addresses are either stored in the Static Address table or in the Dynamic Address table along with VLAN and port information Static addresses are configured by the user and therefore they do not expire Anew source MAC address that appears in a frame arriving at the device is added to the Dynamic Address table This MAC address is retained for a configurable period of time If another frame with the same source MAC address does not arrive at the device before that time period expires the MAC entry is aged deleted from the table When a frame arrives at the device the device searches for a corresponding matching destination MAC address entry in the static or dynamic table If a match is found the frame is marked for egress on a the port specified in the table If frames are sent to a MAC address that is not found in the tables they are transmitted broadcasted to all the ports on the relevant VLAN Such frames are referred to as unknown Unicast frames The device supports a maximum of 8K static and dynamic MAC addresses Cisco Small Business 200 30
396. ive Data Management SSL Server Protection from attacks directed at the device CPU is described in the following sections Configuring TCP UDP Services Defining Storm Control Access Control Access control of end users to the network through the device is described in the following sections Management Access Method Management Access Method Configuring TACACS lt 300 500 gt Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 328 Security Defining Users 18 Configuring RADIUS Configuring Port Security 802 1X Defining Time Ranges Protection from other network users is described in the following sections These are attacks that pass through but are not directed at the device Denial of Service Prevention DHCP Snooping SSL Server Defining Storm Control Configuring Port Security IP Source Guard lt 300 500 gt ARP Inspection Access Control First Hop Security Defining Users The default username password is cisco cisco The first time that you log in with the default username and password you are required to enter a new password Password complexity is enabled by default If the password that you choose is not complex enough Password Complexity Settings are enabled in the Password Strength page you are prompted to create another password Setting User Accounts The User Accounts page enables entering ad
397. k Apply The Green Ethernet Properties are written to the Running Configuration file Setting Green Ethernet Properties for Ports The Port Settings page displays the current Green Ethernet and EEE modes per port and enables configuring Green Ethernet on a port using the Edit Port Setting page For the Green Ethernet modes to operate on a port the corresponding modes must be activated globally in the Properties page Note that EEE settings are only displayed for devices that have GE ports EEE works only when ports are set to Auto negotiation The exception is that EEE is still functional even when Auto Negotiation is disabled but the port is at 1GB or higher To define per port Green Ethernet settings STEP 1 Click Port Management gt Green Ethernet gt Port Settings The Port Settings page displays the following Global Parameter Status Describes the enabled features For each port the following fields are described Port The port number Energy Detect State of the port regarding Energy Detect mode Administrative Displays whether Energy Detect mode was enabled Operational Displays whether Energy Detect mode is currently operating Reason lf Energy Detect mode is not operational displays the reason Short Reach State of the port regarding Short Reach mode Administrative Displays whether Short Reach mode was enabled Operational Displays whether Short Reach mode is currently operating
398. ks and 2 combo ports SF300 24P SRW224G4P 24 FE ports plus 4 GE special purpose 180W 24 K9 ports 2 uplinks and 2 combo ports SF300 24PP SF300 24PP 24 Port 10 100 PoE Managed Switch 180W 24 K9 SG300 28PP SG300 28 Port Gigabit POE Managed Switch 180W 24 28PP K9 SF300 48 SRW248G4 48 FE ports plus 4 GE special purpose N A N A K9 ports 2 uplinks and 2 combo ports SF300 48P SRW248G4P 48 FE ports plus 4 GE special purpose 375W 48 K9 ports 2 uplinks and 2 combo ports SF300 48PP SF300 48PP 48 Port 10 100 PoE Managed Switch 375W 48 K9 SG300 52MP SG300 52 Port Gigabit POE Managed Switch 740W 48 52MP K9 SG300 10SFP SG300 10 Port Gigabit Managed SFP Switch N A N A 10SFP K9 SF300 24MP SF300 24M 24 Port 10 100 PoE Managed Switch 375W 24 K9 SG300 28MP SRW2024P 28 Port Gigabit POE Managed Switch 375W 24 K9 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 59 Administration System Settings Model Name Product ID Description of Ports on Device Power No of PID Dedicated Portsthat to PoE Support PoE SF302 08PP 8 Port 10 100 PoE Managed Switch 62W SF302 O08MPP 8 Port 10 100 PoE Managed Switch 124W 8 ESW2 350G 52 ESW2 350G 52 Port Gigabit Managed Switch N A N A 52 K9 ESW2 350G ESW2 350G 52 Port Gigabit Managed Switch N A N A 52DC 52DC K9 System Settings The System Summary page provide
399. l Defining ACL Binding 24 STEP 6 NOTE STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 Default Action Select one of the following options Deny Any lf packet does not match an ACL it is denied dropped Permit Any lf packet does not match an ACL it is permitted forwarded NOTE Default Action can be defined only if IP Source Guard is not activated on the interface Click Apply The ACL binding is modified and the Running Configuration file is updated If no ACL is selected the ACL s that is previously bound to the interface are unbound To bind an ACL to a VLAN Click Access Control gt ACL Binding VLAN Select a VLAN and click Edit If the VLAN you require is not displayed add a new one Select one of the following Select MAC Based ACL Select a MAC based ACL to be bound to the interface Select IPv4 Based ACL Select an IPv4 based ACL to be bound to the interface Select IPv6 Based ACL Select an IPv6 based ACL to be bound to the interface Default Action Select one of the following options Deny Any lf packet does not match an ACL it is denied dropped Permit Any lf packet does not match an ACL it is permitted forwarded NOTE Default Action can be defined only if IP Source Guard is not activated on the interface STEP 4 Click Apply The ACL binding is modified and the Running Configuration file is updated NOTE If no ACL is selected the ACL s that is previously bou
400. l Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Spanning Tree Configuring Rapid Spanning Tree Settings 1 4 STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP To enter RSTP settings Click Spanning Tree gt STP Status and Global Settings Enable RSTP Click Spanning Tree gt RSTP Interface Settings The RSTP Interface Settings page appears Select a port NOTE Activate Protocol Migration is only available after selecting the port that is connected to the bridge partner being tested If a link partner is discovered by using STP click Activate Protocol Migration to run a Protocol Migration test This discovers whether the link partner using STP still exists and if so whether it has migrated to RSTP or MSTP If it still exists as an STP link the device continues to communicate with it by using STP Otherwise if it has been migrated to RSTP or MSTP the device communicates with it using RSTP or MSTP respectively Select an interface and click Edit Enter the parameters Interface Set the interface and specify the port or LAG where RSTP is to be configured Point to Point Administrative Status Define the point to point link status Ports defined as Full Duplex are considered Point to Point port links Enable This portis an RSTP edge port when this feature is enabled and is brought to Forwarding mode quickly usually within 2 seconds Disable The port is not cons
401. l block If a file is integrity protected but a device finds the integrity of the file is not intact the device rejects the file Otherwise the file is accepted for further processing A device checks for the integrity of a text based configuration file when the file is downloaded or copied to the Startup Configuration file 446 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security Secure Sensitive Data Management 2 1 Configuration Files Read Mode Each session has a Read mode This determines how sensitive data appears The Read mode can be either Plaintext in which case sensitive data appears as regular text or Encrypted in which sensitive data appears in its encrypted form Configuration Files A configuration file contains the configuration of a device A device has a Running Configuration file a Startup Configuration file a Mirror Configuration file optionally and a Backup Configuration file A user can manually upload and download a configuration file to and from a remote file server A device can automatically download its Startup Configuration from a remote file server during the auto configuration stage using DHCP Configuration files stored on remote file servers are referred to as remote configuration files A Running Configuration file contains the configuration currently being used by a device The configuration in a Startup Configuration file becomes the
402. le 0020aa00bbcc Web Based Authentication This is only available in Layer 2 switch mode Select to enable web based authentication on the switch Periodic Reauthentication Select to enable port re authentication attempts after the specified Reauthentication Period Reauthentication Period Enter the number of seconds after which the selected port is reauthenticated Reauthenticate Now Select to enable immediate port re authentication Authenticator State Displays the defined port authorization state The options are Initialize n process of coming up Force Authorized Controlled port state is set to Force Authorized forward traffic Force Unauthorized Controlled port state is set to Force Unauthorized discard traffic NOTE If the port is not in Force Authorized or Force Unauthorized it is in Auto Mode and the authenticator displays the state of the authentication in progress After the port is authenticated the state is shown as Authenticated Time Range Enable a limit on the time that the specific port is authorized for use if 802 1x has been enabled Port Based authentication is checked Time Range Name Select the profile that specifies the time range Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 399 19 Security 802 1X Authentication 8021X Configuration Through the GUI Maximum WBA Login Attempts
403. le Types section Sensitive Data Select how sensitive data should be included in the backup file The following options are available Exclude Do not include sensitive data in the backup Encrypted lInclude sensitive data in the backup in its encrypted form Plaintext lInclude sensitive data in the backup in its plaintext form NOTE The available sensitive data options are determined by the current user SSD rules For details refer to Secure Sensitive Data Management gt SSD Rules page Destination File Name Name of file being copied to Click Apply The file is upgraded or backed up Configuration Files Properties STEP 1 STEP 2 The Configuration Files Properties page allows you to see when various system configuration files were created It also enables deleting the Startup Configuration and Backup Configuration files You cannot delete the other configuration file types ITo set whether mirror configuration files will be created clear configuration files and see when configuration files were created Click Administration gt File Management gt Configuration Files Properties This page displays the following fields Configuration File Name Type of system file Creation Time Date and time that file was modified If required disable Auto Mirror Configuration This disables the automatic creation of mirror configuration files When disabling this feature the mirror 48 Cisco
404. le sent by the elected querier Query Interval Enter the interval between the General Queries to be used if this device is the elected querier Operational Query Interval The time interval in seconds between General Queries sent by the elected querier Query Max Response Interval Enter the delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into the periodic General Queries Operational Query Max Response Interval Displays the Query Max Response Interval included in the General Queries sent by the elected querier Last Member Query Counter Enter the number of IGMP Group Specific Queries sent before the device assumes there are no more members for the group if the device is the elected querier Operational Last Member Query Counter Displays the operational value of the Last Member Query Counter Last Member Query Interval Enter the Maximum Response Delay to be used if the device cannot read Max Response Time value from group specific queries sent by the elected querier 260 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Multicast MLD Snooping 16 Operational Last Member Query Interval Displays the Last Member Query Interval sent by the elected querier Immediate Leave Enable Immediate Leave to decrease the time it takes to block a Multicast stream sent to a member port when an IGMP Group Leave message is received on that port
405. lect a Port and click Edit Select to enable or disable Energy Detect mode on the port Select to enable or disable Short Reach mode on the port if there are GE ports on the device Select to enable or disable 802 3 Energy Efficient Ethernet EEE mode on the port if there are GE ports on the device Select to enable or disable 802 3 Energy Efficient Ethernet EEE LLDP mode on the port advertisement of EEE capabilities through LLDP if there are GE ports on the device Click Apply The Green Ethernet port settings are written to the Running Configuration file 144 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Port Management Configuring Green Ethernet Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 145 a Port Management Unidirectional Link Detection This section describes how the Unidirectional Link Detection UDLD feature It covers the following topics UDLD Overview UDLD Operation Usage Guidelines Dependencies On Other Features Default Settings and Configuration Before You Start Common UDLD Tasks Configuring UDLD UDLD Overview UDLD is a Layer 2 protocol that enables devices connected through fiber optic or twisted pair Ethernet cables to detect unidirectional links A unidirectional link occurs whenever traffic from a neighboring device is received by the local device but traffic
406. lect the guest VLAN in the Guest VLAN ID field Configure the Guest VLAN Timeout to be either Immediate or enter a value in the User defined field Click Apply and the Running Configuration file is updated Workflow 6 To configure unauthenticated VLANs Click Security gt 802 1X MAC Web Authentication gt Properties Select a VLAN and click Edit Select a VLAN Optionally uncheck Authentication to make the VLAN an unauthenticated VLAN Click Apply and the Running Configuration file is updated Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 395 19 Security 802 1X Authentication 8021X Configuration Through the GUI 802 1X Configuration Through the GUI Defining 802 1X Properties The 802 1X Properties page is used to globally enable 802 1X and define how ports are authenticated For 802 1X to function it must be activated both globally and individually on each port To define port based authentication STEP 1 Click Security gt 802 1X MAC Web Authentication gt Properties STEP 2 Enter the parameters Port Based Authentication Enable or disable port based authentication If this is disabled 802 1X MAC based and web based authentication is disabled Authentication Method Select the user authentication methods The options are RADIUS None Perform port authentication first by using the RADIUS server If no response is received fro
407. lected the system takes the source IP address from the IP address defined on the outgoing interface This page displays the following information for each Unicast SNTP server SNTP Server SNTP server IP address The preferred server or hostname is chosen according to its stratum level Poll Interval Displays whether polling is enabled or disabled Authentication Key ID Key Identification used to communicate between the SNTP server and device Stratum Level Distance from the reference clock expressed as a numerical value An SNTP server cannot be the primary server stratum level 1 unless polling interval is enabled Status SNTP server status The possible values are Up SNTP server is currently operating normally Down SNTP server is currently not available Unknown SNTP server is currently being searched for by the device In Process Occurs when the SNTP server has not fully trusted its own time server i e when first booting up the SNTP server Last Response Date and time of the last time a response was received from this SNTP server Offset tThe estimated offset of the server s clock relative to the local clock in milliseconds The host determines the value of this offset using the algorithm described in RFC 2030 Delay tThe estimated round trip delay of the server s clock relative to the local clock over the network path between them in milliseconds The host determines the value of thi
408. licer Statistics A Single Policer is bound to a class map from a single policy An Aggregate Policer is bound to one or more class maps from one or more policies Viewing Single Policer Statistics The Single Policer Statistics page indicates the number of in profile and out of profile packets that are received from an interface that meet the conditions defined in the class map of a policy This page is not displayed when the device is in Layer 3 mode To view policer statistics Click Quality of Service gt QoS Statistics gt Single Policer Statistics This page displays the following fields Interface Statistics are displayed for this interface Policy Statistics are displayed for this policy Class Map Statistics are displayed for this class map In Profile Bytes Number of in profile bytes received Out of Profile Bytes Number of out profile bytes received STEP 2 Click Add STEP 3 Enter the parameters Interface Select the interface for which statistics are accumulated Policy Name Select the policy name Class Map Name Select the class name Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 516 25 Quality of Service Managing QoS Statistics STEP 4 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 1 Click Apply An additional request for statistics is created and the Running Configuration file is updated Vie
409. lowing fields Interface Select a Port LAG Interface VLAN Mode Select the interface mode for the VLAN The options are General the interface can support all functions as defined in the IEEE 802 1q specification The interface can be a tagged or untagged member of one or more VLANs Access the interface is an untagged member of a single VLAN A port configured in this mode is Known as an access port Trunk The interface is an untagged member of one VLAN at most and is a tagged member of zero or more VLANs A port configured in this mode is known as a trunk port Customer Selecting this option places the interface in QinQ mode This enables you to use your own VLAN arrangements PVID across the provider network The device is in Q in Q mode when it has one or more customer ports See QinQ Administrative PVID Enter the Port VLAN ID PVID of the VLAN to which incoming untagged and priority tagged frames are classified The possible values are 1 to 4094 Frame Type Select the type of frame that the interface can receive Frames that are not of the configured frame type are discarded at ingress These frame types are only available in General mode Possible values are Admit All The interface accepts all types of frames untagged frames tagged frames and priority tagged frames Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 201 13 VLAN Management
410. lowing table describes which SKUs support web based authentication and in which system modes SKU System Mode WBA Supported x300 Layer 2 Yes Layer 3 No Sx500 Layer 2 Yes Sx500ESW2 550X Layer 3 No Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 389 Security 802 1X Authentication Authenticator Overview SKU System Mode WBA Supported SG500X Native Yes Basic Hybrid Layer 2 Yes Basic Hybrid Layer 3 No SG500XG Same as Sx500 Yes NOTE When web based authentication is not supported guest VLAN and DVA cannot be configured in multi session mode When web based authentication is supported guest VLAN and DVA can be configured in multi session mode Unauthenticated VLANs and the Guest VLAN Unauthenticated VLANs and the guest VLAN provide access to services that do not require the subscribing devices or ports to be 802 1X or MAC Based authenticated and authorized The guest VLAN is the VLAN that is assigned to an unauthorized client You can configure the guest VLAN and one or more VLANs to be unauthenticated in the Security gt 802 1X MAC Web Authentication gt Properties page An unauthenticated VLAN is a VLAN that allows access by both authorized and unauthorized devices or ports An unauthenticated VLAN has the following characteristics it must be a static VLAN and cannot be the guest VLAN or t
411. lude firmware boot code and log files and are referred to as operational files The configuration files are text files and can be edited in a text editor such as Notepad after they are copied to an external device such as a PC Files and File Types The following types of configuration and operational files are found on the device Running Configuration Contains the parameters currently being used by the device to operate This is the only file type that is modified when you change parameter values on the device If the device is rebooted the Running Configuration is lost The Startup Configuration stored in Flash overwrites the Running Configuration stored in RAM To preserve any changes you made to the device you must save the Running Configuration to the Startup Configuration or another file type Startup Configuration The parameter values that were saved by copying another configuration usually the Running Configuration to the Startup Configuration The Startup Configuration is retained in Flash and is preserved when the device is rebooted At this time the Startup Configuration is copied to RAM and identified as the Running Configuration Mirror Configuration A copy of the Startup Configuration created by the device when the following conditions exist The device has been operating continuously for 24 hours No configuration changes have been made to the Running Configuration in the previous 24 h
412. lue Enter the IP address to which the source IP address is to be matched and its mask if relevant Source IP Prefix Length Enter the prefix length of the source IP address Destination IP Address Select Any if all destination address are acceptable or User defined to enter a destination address or a range of destination addresses Destination IP Address Value Enter the IP address to which the destination MAC address is matched and its mask if relevant Destination IP Prefix Length Enter the prefix length of the IP address Source Port Select one of the following Any Match to all source ports Single Enter a single TCP UDP source port to which packets are matched This field is active only if 800 6 TCP or 800 17 UDP is selected in the IP Protocol drop down menu 485 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Access Control IPv6 Based ACLs 24 Range Select a range of TCP UDP source ports to which the packet is matched Destination Port Select one of the available values They are the same as for the Source Port field described above NOTE You must specify the IPv6 protocol for the ACL before you can configure the source and or destination port TCP Flags Select one or more TCP flags with which to filter packets Filtered packets are either forwarded or dropped Filtering packets by TCP flags increases packet control
413. m RADIUS for example if the server is down then no authentication is performed and the session is permitted If the server is available but the user credentials are incorrect access is denied and the session terminated RADIUS Authenticate the user on the RADIUS server If no authentication is performed the session is not permitted None Do not authenticate the user Permit the session Guest VLAN Select to enable the use of a guest VLAN for unauthorized ports If a guest VLAN is enabled all unauthorized ports automatically join the VLAN selected in the Guest VLAN ID field If a port is later authorized it is removed from the guest VLAN Guest VLAN ID Select the guest VLAN from the list of VLANs Guest VLAN Timeout Define a time period After linkup if the software does not detect the 802 1X supplicant or the authentication has failed the port is added to the guest VLAN only after the Guest VLAN timeout period has expired 396 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 8021X Configuration Through the GUI Security 802 1X Authentication 1 STEP 3 NOTE Ifthe port state changes from Authorized to Not Authorized the port is added to the guest VLAN only after the Guest VLAN timeout has expired Traps To enable traps select one of more of the following options 802 1x Authentication Failure Traps Select to generate a trap if
414. main name The name can either be the default name ISATAP or a user defined name ISATAP Solicitation Interval The number of seconds between ISATAP router solicitations messages when there is no active ISATAP router The interval can be the default value or a user defined interval ISATAP Robustness Used to calculate the interval for the DNS or router solicitation queries The larger the number the more frequent the queries NOTE The ISATAP tunnel is not operational if the underlying IP v4 interface is not in operation 306 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration 1 7 IPv6 Management and Interfaces STEP 3 Click Apply The tunnel is saved to the Running Configuration file Defining IPv6 Addresses To assign an IPv6 address to an IPv6 Interface STEP 1 In Layer 2 system mode click Administration gt Management Interface gt IPv6 Addresses In Layer 3 system mode click IP Configuration gt IPv6 Management and Interfaces gt IPv6 Addresses STEP 2 To filter the table select an interface name and click Go The interface appears in the IPv6 Address Table STEP 3 Click Add STEP 4 Enter values for the fields IPv6 Interface Displays the interface on which the IPv6 address is to be defined If an is displayed this means that the IPv6 interface is not enabled but has been configured IPv6 Address Type Select the
415. mall Business 300 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide 5 Contents Chapter 19 Security 802 1X Authentication 282 Overview of 802 1X 282 Authenticator Overview 284 Common Tasks 288 802 1X Configuration Through the GUI 289 Chapter 20 Security First Hop Security 296 First Hop Security Overview 297 Router Advertisement Guard 301 Neighbor Discovery Inspection 301 DHCPv6 Guard 302 Neighbor Binding Integrity 303 Attack Protection 305 Policies Global Parameters and System Defaults 307 Common Tasks 308 Default Settings and Configuration 310 Before You Start 311 Configuring First Hop Security through Web GUI 311 Chapter 21 Security Secure Sensitive Data Management 323 Introduction 323 SSD Rules 324 SSD Properties 329 Configuration Files 332 SSD Management Channels 337 Menu CLI and Password Recovery 337 Configuring SSD 338 Chapter 22 Security SSH Client 341 Secure Copy SCP and SSH 341 Cisco Small Business 300 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide 6 Contents Protection Methods 342 SSH Server Authentication 344 SSH Client Authentication 345 Before You Begin 346 Common Tasks 346 SSH Client Configuration Through the GUI 348 Chapter 23 Security SSH Server 352 Overview 352 Common Tasks 353 SSH Server Configuration Pages 354 Chapter 24 Access Control 358 Access Control Lists 358 Defining MAC based ACLs 360 IPv4 based ACLs 363 IPv6 Based ACLs 367 Defining ACL Binding 371 Chapter 25 Quality of Servic
416. manually created the LACP option cannot be added or removed until the LAG is edited and a member is removed which can be added prior to applying then the LACP button become available for editing Dynamic A LAG is dynamic if LACP is enabled on it The group of ports assigned to dynamic LAG are candidate ports LACP determines which candidate ports are active member ports The non active candidate ports are standby ports ready to replace any failing active member ports Load Balancing Traffic forwarded to a LAG is load balanced across the active member ports thus achieving an effective bandwidth close to the aggregate bandwidth of all the active member ports of the LAG Traffic load balancing over the active member ports of a LAG is managed by a hash based distribution function that distributes Unicast and Multicast traffic based on Layer 2 or Layer 3 packet header information The device supports two modes of load balancing By MAC Addresses Based on the destination and source MAC addresses of all packets By IP and MAC Addresses Based on the destination and source IP addresses for IP packets and destination and source MAC addresses for non IP packets LAG Management In general a LAG is treated by the system as a single logical port In particular the LAG has port attributes similar to a regular port such as state and speed The device supports 32 LAGs with up to 8 ports in a LAG group 130 Cisco Small B
417. maps To define a Class Map Click Quality of Service gt QoS Advanced Mode gt Class Mapping This page displays the already defined class maps Click Add A new class map is added by selecting one or two ACLs and giving the class map a name If a class map has two ACLs you can specify that a frame must match both ACLs or that it must match either one or both of the ACLs selected Enter the parameters 509 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Quality of Service 2 5 QoS Advanced Mode Class Map Name Enter the name of a new class map Match ACL Type tThe criteria that a packet must match in order to be considered to belong to the flow defined in the class map The options are P A packet must match either of the IP based ACLs in the class map MAC A packet must match the MAC based ACL in the class map PanadMAC A packet must match the IP based ACL and the MAC based ACL in the class map PorMAC A packet must match either the IP based ACL or the MAC based ACL in the class map P Select the IPv4 based ACL or the IPv6 based ACL for the class map MAC Select the MAC based ACL for the class map Preferred ACL Select whether packets are first matched to an IP based ACL or a MAC based ACL STEP 4 Click Apply The Running Configuration file is updated QoS Policers NOTE QoS policers are not supported on Sx
418. matically re activated Loops occur when alternate routes exist between hosts Loops in an extended network can cause switches to forward traffic indefinitely resulting in increased traffic load and reduced network efficiency STP provides a tree topology for any arrangement of switches and interconnecting links by creating a unique path between end stations ona network and thereby eliminating loops Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 231 14 Spanning Tree Configuring STP Status and Global Settings The device supports the following Spanning Tree Protocol versions Classic STP Provides a single path between any two end stations avoiding and eliminating loops Rapid STP RSTP Detects network topologies to provide faster convergence of the spanning tree This is most effective when the network topology is naturally tree structured and therefore faster convergence might be possible RSTP is enabled by default Multiple STP MSTP MSTP is based on RSTP It detects Layer 2 loops and attempts to mitigate them by preventing the involved port from transmitting traffic Since loops exist on a per Layer 2 domain basis a situation can occur where there is a loop in VLAN A and no loop in VLAN B If both VLANs are on Port X and STP wants to mitigate the loop it stops traffic on the entire port including VLAN B traffic MSTP solves this problem by enabling sev
419. me Device manufacturer name Model Name Device model name Asset ID Asset ID Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 111 Administration Discovery Configuring LLDP 802 1 VLAN and Protocol PVID Advertised port VLAN ID PPVID Table VID Protocol VLAN ID Supported Supported Port and Protocol VLAN IDs _Enabled Enabled Port and Protocol VLAN IDs VLAN IDs VID Port and Protocol VLAN ID VLAN Names Advertised VLAN names Protocol IDs Protocol ID Table Advertised protocol IDs Location Information Enter the following data structures in hexadecimal as described in section 10 2 4 of the ANSI TIA 1057 standard Civic Civic or street address Coordinates Location map coordinates latitude longitude and altitude ECS ELIN Device s Emergency Call Service ECS Emergency Location Identification Number ELIN Unknown Unknown location information Network Policies Application Type Network policy application type for example Voice VLAN ID VLAN ID for which the network policy is defined VLAN Type VLAN type Tagged or Untagged for which the network policy is defined User Priority Network policy user priority DSCP Network policy DSCP Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration Discovery 8
420. me if the ports are to send and receive untagged packets to and from the VLAN Otherwise traffic might leak from one VLAN to another Frames that are VLAN tagged can pass through other network devices that are VLAN aware or VLAN unaware If a destination end node is VLAN unaware but is to receive traffic from a VLAN then the last VLAN aware device if there is one must send frames of the destination VLAN to the end node untagged 202 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version VLAN Management 1 Defining VLAN Membership Configuring Port to VLAN Use the Port to VLAN page to display and configure the ports within a specific VLAN To map ports or LAGs to a VLAN STEP 1 Click VLAN Management gt Port to VLAN STEP 2 Select a VLAN and the interface type Port or LAG and click Go to display or to change the port characteristic with respect to the VLAN The port mode for each port or LAG appears with its current port mode Access Trunk General or Customer configured from the Interface Settings page Each port or LAG appears with its current registration to the VLAN STEP 3 Change the registration of an interface to the VLAN by selecting the desired option from the following list Forbidden The interface is not allowed to join the VLAN even from GVRP registration When a port is not a member of any other VLAN enabling this option on the port makes the po
421. mit Statistics area displays information about outgoing packets Total Bytes Octets Octets transmitted including bad packets and FCS octets but excluding framing bits Unicast Packets Good Unicast packets transmitted Multicast Packets Good Multicast packets transmitted Broadcast Packets Good Broadcast packets transmitted To clear or view statistics counters Click Clear Interface Counters to clear counters for the interface displayed Click View All Interfaces Statistics to see all ports on a single page 14 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Status and Statistics Viewing Etherlike Statistics Viewing Etherlike Statistics The Etherlike page displays statistics per port according to the Etherlike MIB standard definition The refresh rate of the information can be selected This page provides more detailed information regarding errors in the physical layer Layer 1 which might disrupt traffic To view Etherlike Statistics and or set the refresh rate STEP 1 Click Status and Statistics gt Etherlike STEP 2 Enter the parameters Interface Select the type of interface and specific interface for which Ethernet statistics are to be displayed Refresh Rate Select the amount of time that passes before the Etherlike statistics are refreshed The fields are displayed for the selected interface Frame Check Sequence FCS Errors
422. mitted Total Total number of CDP packets received transmitted The CDP Error Statistics section displays the CDP error counters Illegal Checksum Number of packets received with illegal checksum value Other Errors Number of packets received with errors other than illegal checksums Neighbors Over Maximum Number of times that packet information could not be stored in cache because of lack of room To clear all counters on all interfaces click Clear All Interface Counters To clear all counters on an interface select it and click Clear All Interface Counters Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 123 Administration Discovery Configuring CDP 124 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration Discovery Configuring CDP Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 125 Port Management This section describes port configuration link aggregation and the Green Ethernet feature It covers the following topics Configuring Ports Setting Port Configuration Link Aggregation UDLD Configuring Green Ethernet Configuring Ports To configure ports perform the following actions 1 2 Configure port by using the Port Settings page Enable disable the Link Aggregation Control LAG protocol an
423. must copy the Running Configuration to the Startup Configuration in order to enable the device to use the time from the computer after reboot The time after reboot is set during the first WEB login to the device When you configure this feature for the first time if the time was not already set the device sets the time from the PC This method of setting time works with both HTTP and HTTPS connections SNTP Time can be received from SNTP time servers SNTP ensures accurate network time synchronization of the device up to the millisecond by using an SNTP server for the clock source When specifying an SNTP server if choosing to identify it by hostname three suggestions are given in the GUI time a timefreq bldrdoc gov time b timefreq bldrdoc gov time c timefreq bldrdoc gov After the time has been set by any of the above sources it is not set again by the browser NOTE SNTP is the recommended method for time setting Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 73 Administration Time Settings SNTP Modes Time Zone and Daylight Savings Time DST The Time Zone and DST can be set on the device in the following ways Dynamic configuration of the device through a DHCP server where Dynamic DST when enabled and available always takes precedence over the manual configuration of DST If the server supplying the source parameters fails or dynamic
424. n Administration Discovery 8 Configuring LLDP SNMP Notification Select whether SNMP notification is sent on a per port basis when an end station that supports MED is discovered for example a SNMP managing system when there is a topology change Available Optional TLVs Select the TLVs that can be published by the device by moving them to the Selected Optional TLVs list Available Network Policies Select the LLDP MED policies to be published by LLDP by moving them to the Selected Network Policies list These were created in the LLDP MED Network Policy page To include one or more user defined network polices in the advertisement you must also select Vetwork Policy from the Available Optional TLVs NOTE The following fields must be entered in hexadecimal characters in the exact data format that is defined in the LLDP MED standard ANSI TIA 1057_final_for_publication pdf Location Coordinate Enter the coordinate location to be published by LLDP Location Civic Address Enter the civic address to be published by LLDP Location ECS ELIN Enter the Emergency Call Service ECS ELIN location to be published by LLDP STEP 5 Click Apply The LLDP MED port settings are written to the Running Configuration file Displaying LLDP Port Status The LLDP Port Status Table page contains the LLDP global information for every port STEP 1 To view the LLDP port status click Administration gt Discover
425. n in seconds the device sends DNS query packets after the number of retries has been exhausted Use Default Select to use the default value This value 2 Polling Retries 1 Polling Timeout User Defined Select to enter a user defined value Default Parameters Enter the following default parameters Default Domain Name Enter the DNS domain name used to complete unqualified host names The device appends this to all non fully qualified domain names NFQDNs turning them into FQDNs 316 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration Domain Name 17 NOTE Do not include the initial period that separates an unqualified name from the domain name like cisco com DHCP Domain Search List Click Details to view the list of DNS servers configured on the device STEP 3 Click Apply The Running Configuration file is updated DNS Server Table The following fields are displayed for each DNS server configured DNS Server The IP address of the DNS server Preference Each server has a preference value a lower value means a higher chance of being used Source Source of the server s IP address static or DHCPv4 or DHCPv6 Interface Interface of the server s IP address STEP 4 Up to eight DNS servers can be defined To add a DNS server click Add Enter the parameters IP Version Select Version 6 for IPv6 or Version 4 fo
426. n Current VLAN Ils Neighbor Binding enabled on the current VLAN Device Role Neighbor Binding device role Logging Binding s logging of Neighbor Binding table events enabled Max Entries per VLAN Maximum number of dynamic Neighbor Binding table entries per VLAN allowed Max Entries per Interface Maximum number of Neighbor Binding table entries per interface allowed Max Entries per MAC Address Maximum number of Neighbor Binding table entries per MAC address allowed Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 435 20 Security IPV6 First Hop Security Configuring First Hop Security through Web GUI FHS Statistics To display FHS statistics STEP 1 Click Security gt First Hop Security gt FHS Statistics STEP 2 The following fields are displayed NDP Neighbor Discovery Protocol Messages The number of received and bridged messages are displayed for the following types of messages RA Router Advertisement messages CPA Certification Path Advertisement messages ICMPv6 Internet Control Message IPv6 Protocol messages NS Neighbor Solicitation messages RS Router Solicitation message CPS Certification Path Solicitation messages DHCPv6 Messages The number of received and bridged messages are displayed for the various types of DHCPv6 messages The following fields are displayed in the FHS Dropped Message Table
427. n occur Ifa match is found both for the server s IP address host name and its fingerprint the server is authenticated Ifa matching IP address host name is found but there is no matching fingerprint the search continues If no matching fingerprint is found the search is completed and authentication fails If no matching IP address host name is found the search is completed and authentication fails If the entry for the SSH server is not found in the list of trusted servers the process fails Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 460 Security SSH Client SSH Client Authentication SSH Client Authentication SSH client authentication by password is enabled by default with the username password being anonymous The user must configure the following information for authentication The authentication method to be used The username password or public private key pair In order to support auto configuration of an out of box device device with factory default configuration SSH server authentication is disabled by default Supported Algorithms When the connection between a device as an SSH client and an SSH server is established the client and SSH server exchange data in order to determine the algorithms to use in the SSH transport layer The following algorithms are supported on the client side Key Exchange Algorithm dif
428. n the members in the same same data VLAN data VLAN Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 225 13 VLAN Management Access Port Multicast TV VLAN Regular VLAN Multicast TV VLAN Group registration All Multicast group registration is dynamic Groups must be associated to Multicast VLAN statically but actual registration of station is dynamic Receiver ports VLAN can be used to both send and receive traffic both Multicast and Unicast Multicast VLAN can only be used to receive traffic by the stations on the port only Multicast Security and Receivers of same Receivers of same multicast Isolation multicast stream are on stream are in different the same data VLAN and Access VLANs and isolated can communicate with from each other each other Configuration Workflow Configure TV VLAN with the following steps 1 Define a TV VLAN by associating a Multicast group to a VLAN using the Multicast Group to VLAN page 2 Specify the access ports in each Multicast VLAN using the Port Multicast VLAN Membership page Multicast TV Group to VLAN To define the Multicast TV VLAN configuration STEP 1 Click VLAN Management gt Access Port Multicast TV VLAN gt Multicast Group to VLAN The following fields are displayed Multicast Group IP address of the Multicast group Mult
429. n the Telephony OUI Interface page Configuring Voice VLAN This section describes how to configure voice VLAN It covers the following topics Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 217 VLAN Management Voice VLAN Configuring Voice VLAN Properties Displaying Auto Voice VLAN Settings Configuring Telephony OUI Configuring Voice VLAN Properties Use the Voice VLAN Properties page for the following View how voice VLAN is currently configured Configure the VLAN ID of the Voice VLAN Configure voice VLAN QoS settings Configure the voice VLAN mode Telephony OUI or Auto Voice VLAN Configure how Auto Voice VLAN is triggered To view and configure Voice VLAN properties STEP 1 Click VLAN Management gt Voice VLAN gt Properties The voice VLAN settings configured on the device are displayed in the Voice VLAN Settings Administrative Status block The voice VLAN settings that are actually being applied to the voice VLAN deployment are displayed in the Voice VLAN Settings Operational Status block STEP 2 Enter values for the following fields Voice VLAN ID Enter the VLAN that is to be the Voice VLAN NOTE Changes in the voice VLAN ID CoS 802 1p and or DSCP cause the device to advertise the administrative voice VLAN as a static voice VLAN If the option Auto Voice VLAN Activation triggered by external Voice VLAN is selec
430. n the copper port test on a port you are using to run the web based switch configuration utility because communications with that device are disrupted To test copper cables attached to ports Click Administration gt Diagnostics gt Copper Test Select the port on which to run the test Click Copper Test When the message appears click OK to confirm that the link can go down or Cancel to abort the test The following fields are displayed in the Test Results block Last Update Time of the last test conducted on the port Test Results Cable test results Possible values are OkK Cable passed the test No Cable Cable is not connected to the port Open Cable Cable is connected on only one side Short Cable Short circuit has occurred in the cable Unknown Test Result Error has occurred Distance to Fault Distance from the port to the location on the cable where the fault was discovered Operational Port Status Displays whether port is up or down Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration Diagnostics 7 Displaying Optical Module Status If the port being tested is a Giga port the Advanced Information block contains the following information which is refreshed each time you enter the page Cable Length Provides an estimate for the length Pair Cable wire pair being tested Status Wire pair status Re
431. nabled The RADIUS server must authenticate the device and dynamically assign a VLAN to the device You can set the RADIUS VLAN Assignment field to static in the Port Authentication page This enables the host to be bridged according to static configuration A RADIUS server must support DVA with RADIUS attributes tunnel type 64 VLAN 13 tunnel media type 65 802 6 and tunnel private group id a VLAN ID When the RADIUS Assigned VLAN feature is enabled the host modes behave as follows Single Host and Multi Host Mode Untagged traffic and tagged traffic belonging to the RADIUS assigned VLAN are bridged via this VLAN All other traffic not belonging to unauthenticated VLANs is discarded Full Multi Gessions Mode Untagged traffic and tagged traffic not belonging to the unauthenticated VLANs arriving from the client are assigned to the RADIUS assigned VLAN using TCAM rules and are bridged via the VLAN Multi Sessions Mode in Layer 3 System Mode This mode does not support RADIUS assigned VLAN The following table describes guest VLAN and RADIUS VLAN assignment support depending on authentication method and port mode Authentication Single host Multi host Multi sessions Method Device in L3 Device in L2 802 1x t t N S t MAC t t N S t WEB N S N S N S N S Legend t The port mode supports the guest VLAN and RADIUS VLAN assignment N S The port mode does not s
432. naged Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 542 SNMP SNMP Notification Filters 543 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Cisco and the Cisco logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cisco and or its affiliates in the U S and other countries To view a list of Cisco trademarks go to this URL www cisco com go trademarks Third party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company 1110R 2010 2013 Cisco Systems Inc All rights reserved 78 21341 01
433. nal Version Administration Discovery Configuring LLDP 8 Remote Rx Indicates the time in micro seconds that the receiving link partner requests that the transmitting link partner waits before transmission of data following Low Power Idle LPI mode Local Tx Echo Indicates the local link partner s reflection of the remote link partner s Tx value Local Rx Echo Indicates the local link partner s reflection of the remote link partner s Rx value MED Details Capabilities Supported MED capabilities enabled on the port Current Capabilities MED TLVs advertised by the port Device Class LLDP MED endpoint device class The possible device classes are Endpoint Class 1 Indicates a generic endpoint class offering basic LLDP services Endpoint Class 2 Indicates a media endpoint class offering media streaming capabilities as well as all Class 1 features Endpoint Class 3 Indicates a communications device class offering all Class 1 and Class 2 features plus location 911 Layer 2 switch support and device information management capabilities PoE Device Type Port PoE type for example powered PoE Power Source Port s power source PoE Power Priority Port s power priority PoE Power Value Port s power value Hardware Revision Hardware version Firmware Revision Firmware version Software Revision Software version Serial Number Device serial number Manufacturer Na
434. names to match SSD rules Access by a specific SNMPv3 user can be controlled by configuring an SSD rule with a user name matching the SNMPv3 user name There must always be at least one rule with read permission Plaintext Only or Both because only users with those permissions are able to access the SSD pages Changes in the default read mode and read permissions of a rule will become effective and will be applied to the affected user s and channel of all active management sessions immediately excluding the session making the changes even if the rule is applicable When a rule is changed add delete edit a system will update all the affected CLI GUI sessions NOTE When the SSD rule applied upon the session login is changed from within that session the user must log out and back in to see the change NOTE When doing a file transfer initiated by an XML or SNMP command the underlying protocol used is TFTP Therefore the SSD rule for insecure channel will apply SSD Rules and User Authentication SSD grants SSD permission only to authenticated and authorized users and according to the SSD rules A device depends on its user authentication process to authenticate and authorize management access To protect a device and its data including sensitive data and SSD configurations from unauthorized access it 442 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version SSD Rules Security
435. namic VLANs 258 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Multicast Configuring IGMP Snooping 16 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 When IGMP Snooping is enabled globally or on a VLAN all IGMP packets are forwarded to the CPU The CPU analyzes the incoming packets and determines the following Which ports are asking to join which Multicast groups on what VLAN Which ports are connected to Multicast routers Mrouters that are generating IGMP queries Which ports are receiving PIM DVMRP or IGMP query protocols These are displayed on the IGMP Snooping page Ports asking to join a specific Multicast group issue an IGMP report that specifies which group s the host wants to join This results in the creation of a forwarding entry in the Multicast Forwarding Data Base The IGMP Snooping Querier is used to support a Layer 2 Multicast domain of snooping switches in the absence of a Multicast router For example where Multicast content is provided by a local server but the router if one exists on that network does not support Multicast The speed of IGMP Querier activity must be aligned with the IGMP snooping enabled switches Queries must be sent at a rate that is aligned to the snooping table aging time If queries are sent at a rate lower than the aging time the subscriber cannot receive the Multicast packets This is performed in the IGMP Snooping Edit
436. nd sharing of configuration files containing sensitive data SSD provides users with the flexibility to configure the desired level of protection on their sensitive data from no protection with sensitive data in plaintext minimum protection with encryption based on the default passphrase and better protection with encryption based on user defined passphrase Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 438 Security Secure Sensitive Data Management 2 1 SSD Rules SSD Rules SSD grants read permission to sensitive data only to authenticated and authorized users and according to SSD rules A device authenticates and authorizes management access to users through the user authentication process Whether or not SSD is used it is recommended that the administrator secure the authentication process by using the local authentication database and or secure the communication to the external authentication servers used in the user authentication process In summary SSD protects sensitive data on a device with SSD rules SSD properties and user authentication And SSD rules SSD properties and user authentication configurations of the device are themselves sensitive data protected by SSD SSD Management SSD management includes a collection of configuration parameters that define the handling and security of sensitive data The SSD configuration parameters themselves are sensitiv
437. nd to the VLAN are unbound Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 488 Quality of Service The Quality of Service feature is applied throughout the network to ensure that network traffic is prioritized according to required criteria and the desired traffic receives preferential treatment This section covers the following topics QoS Features and Components Configuring QoS General QoS Basic Mode QoS Advanced Mode Managing QoS Statistics Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 489 Quality of Service QoS Features and Components 29 QoS Features and Components The QoS feature is used to optimize network performance QoS provides the following Classification of incoming traffic to traffic classes based on attributes including Device Configuration Ingress interface Packet content Combination of these attributes QoS includes the following Traffic Classification Classifies each incoming packet as belonging to a specific traffic flow based on the packet contents and or the port The classification is done by ACL Access Control List and only traffic that meets the ACL criteria is subject to CoS or QoS classification Assignment to Hardware Queues Assigns incoming packets to forwarding queues Packets are sent to a particular queue for handling as a function of t
438. ne device port multiple device ports or an entire VLAN to a network monitoring connection on another port on the device This is commonly used for network appliances that require monitoring of network traffic such as an intrusion detection system A network analyzer connected to the monitoring port processes the data packets for diagnosing debugging and performance monitoring Up to eight sources can be mirrored This can be any combination of eight individual ports and or VLANs A packet that is received on a network port assigned to a VLAN that is subject to mirroring is mirrored to the analyzer port even if the packet was eventually trapped or discarded Packets sent by the device are mirrored when Transmit Tx mirroring is activated Mirroring does not guarantee that all traffic from the source port s is received on the analyzer destination port If more data is sent to the analyzer port than it can support some data might be lost VLAN mirroring is not active on a VLAN that was not manually created For example if VLAN 23 was created by GVRP and you manually created VLAN 34 and you create port mirroring that includes VLAN 23 VLAN 34 or both and later on delete VLAN 34 the status in port mirroring is set to Not Ready because the VLAN34 is no longer in the database and VLAN23 was not created manually Only one instance of mirroring is supported system wide The analyzer port or target port for VLAN mirroring or port mirrori
439. ng Interface Select the interface on which the IP fragmentation is being defined IP Address Enter an IP network from which the fragmented IP packets is filtered or select All Addresses to block IP fragmented packets from all addresses If you enter the IP address enter either the mask or prefix length Network Mask Select the format for the subnet mask for the source IP address and enter a value in one of the field Mask Select the subnet to which the source IP address belongs and enter the subnet mask in dotted decimal format Prefix Length Select the Prefix Length and enter the number of bits that comprise the source IP address prefix STEP 4 Click Apply The IP fragmentation is defined and the Running Configuration file is updated DHCP Snooping See DHCP v4 Snooping Relay lt 300 500 gt IP Source Guard IP Source Guard is a security feature that can be used to prevent traffic attacks caused when a host tries to use the IP address of its neighbor When IP Source Guard is enabled the device only transmits client IP traffic to IP addresses contained in the DHCP Snooping Binding database This includes both addresses added by DHCP Snooping and manually added entries If the packet matches an entry in the database the device forwards it If not it is dropped Interactions with Other Features The following points are relevant to IP Source Guard 366 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Se
440. ng Multicast registration is the process of listening and responding to Multicast registration protocols The available protocols are IGMP for IPv4 and MLD for IP v6 When IGMP MLD snooping is enabled in a device ona VLAN it analyzes the IGMP MLD packets it receives from the VLAN connected to the device and Multicast routers in the network When a device learns that a host is using IGMP MLD messages to register to receive a Multicast stream optionally from a specific source the device adds the registration to its Multicast Forwarding Data Base MFDB IGMP MLD snooping can effectively reduce Multicast traffic from streaming bandwidth intensive IP applications A device using IGMP MLD snooping only forwards Multicast traffic to the hosts interested in that traffic This reduction of Multicast traffic reduces the packet processing at the device and also reduces the workload of the end hosts since they do not have to receive and filter all of the Multicast traffic generated in the network The following versions are supported IGMP v1 v2 v3 MLD vi v2 A simple IGMP Snooping Querier An IGMP Querier is required to facilitate the IGMP protocol on a given subnet In general a Multicast router is also an IGMP Querier When there are multiple IGMP Queriers in a subnet the queriers elect a single querier as the primary querier The device can be configured to be an IGMP Querier as a backup querier or in situation where a regular IGMP
441. ng is the same for all the mirrored VLANs or ports To enable mirroring Click Administration gt Diagnostics gt Port and VLAN Mirroring The following fields are displayed Destination Port Port to which traffic is to be copied the analyzer port Source Interface Interface port or VLAN from which traffic is sent to the analyzer port Type tType of monitoring incoming to the port Rx outgoing from the port Tx or both Status Displays one of the following values Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 89 Administration Diagnostics Viewing CPU Utilization and Secure Core Technology Active Both source and destination interfaces are up and forwarding traffic Not Ready Either source or destination or both are down or not forwarding traffic for some reason STEP 2 Click Add to add a port or VLAN to be mirrored STEP 3 Enter the parameters Destination Port Select the analyzer port to where packets are copied A network analyzer such as a PC running Wireshark is connected to this port If a port is identified as an analyzer destination port it remains the analyzer destination port until all entries are removed Source Interface Select the source port or source VLAN from where traffic is to be mirrored Type Select whether incoming outgoing or both types of traffic are mirrored to the analyzer port
442. ng CDP System Name TLV System Name System name of the device Address TLV Address1 3 IP addresses advertised in the device address TLV Port TLV Port D ldentifier of port advertised in the port TLV Capabilities TLV Capabilities Capabilities advertised in the port TLV Version TLV Version Information about the software release on which the device is running Platform TLV Platform ldentifier of platform advertised in the platform TLV Native VLAN TLV Native VLAN The native VLAN identifier advertised in the native VLAN TLV Full Half Duplex TLV Duplex Whether port is half or full duplex advertised in the full half duplex TLV Appliance TLV Appliance ID Type of device attached to port advertised in the appliance TLV Appliance VLAN ID VLAN on the device used by the appliance for instance if the appliance is an IP phone this is the voice VLAN Extended Trust TLV Extended Trust Enabled indicates that the portis trusted meaning that the host server from which the packet is received is trusted to mark the packets itself In this case packets received on such a port are not re marked Disabled indicates that the port is not trusted in which case the following field is relevant 120 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration Discovery 8 Configuring CDP CoS for Un
443. ng in the address bar on the browser and then press Enter Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Getting Started Starting the Web based Configuration Utility NOTE When the device is using the factory default IP address of 192 168 1 254 its power NOTE STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP 2 3 4 5 LED flashes continuously When the device is using a DHCP assigned IP address or an administrator configured static IP address the power LED is on solid Logging In The default username is cisco and the default password is cisco The first time that you log in with the default username and password you are required to enter a new password If you have not previously selected a language for the GUI the language of the Login page is determined by the language s requested by your browser and the languages configured on your device If your browser requests Chinese for example and Chinese has been loaded into your device the Login page is automatically displayed in Chinese If Chinese has not been loaded into your device the Login page appears in English The languages loaded into the device have a language and country code en US en GB and so on For the Login page to be automatically displayed in a particular language based on the browser request both the language and country code of the browser request must match those of the language loaded on t
444. ng that power is about to be reduced When signals from both sides are received the Keep Alive signal indicates that the ports are in LPI status and not in Down status and power is reduced For ports to stay in LPI mode the Keep Alive signal must be received continuously from both sides Advertise Capabilities Negotiation 802 3az EEE support is advertised during the Auto Negotiation stage Auto Negotiation provides a linked device with the capability to detect the abilities modes of operation supported by the device at the other end of the link determine common abilities and configure itself for joint operation Auto Negotiation is performed at the time of link up on command from management or upon detection of a link error During the link establishment process both link partners to exchange their 802 3az EEE capabilities Auto Negotiation functions automatically without user interaction when it is enabled on the device NOTE If Auto Negotiation is not enabled on a port the EEE is disabled The only exception is if the link speed is 1GB then EEE still e enabled even though Auto Negotiation is disabled Link Level Discovery for 802 3az EEE In addition to the capabilities described above 802 3az EEE capabilities and settings are also advertised using frames based on the organizationally specific TLVs defined in Annex G of IEEE Std 802 1AB protocol LLDP LLDP is used to further optimize 802 3az EEE operation after auto negotia
445. ng the Automatic Login feature which works as follows Enabled lf a user is defined in the local database and this user passed SSH Authentication using a public key the authentication by the local database username and password is skipped NOTE The configured authentication method for this specific management method console Telnet SSH and so on must be Local i e not RADIUS or TACACS See Management Access Method for more details Not Enabled After successful authentication by SSH public key even if the username is configured in the local user database the user is authenticated again as per the configured authentication methods configured on the Management Access Authentication page This page is optional You do not have to work with user authentication in SSH To enable authentication and add a user STEP 1 Click Security gt SSH Server gt SSH User Authentication STEP 2 Select the following fields SSH User Authentication by Password Select to perform authentication of the SSH client user using the username password configured in the local database see Defining Users Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 470 Security SSH Server SSH Server Configuration Pages SSH User Authentication by Public Key Select to perform authentication of the SSH client user using the public key Automatic Login This field can be enabled
446. nication with IPv6 SNMP servers Informs IP v6 Source Interface Select the source interface whose IPv4 address will be used as the source IPv4 address in inform messages for communication with IPv4 SNMP servers Traps IPv6 Source Interface Select the source interface whose IPv6 address will be used as the source IPv6 address in trap messages for communication with IPv6 SNMP servers NOTE If the Auto option is selected the system takes the source IP address from the IP address defined on the outgoing interface STEP 3 Click Add STEP 4 Enter the parameters Server Definition Select whether to specify the remote log server by IP address or name IP Version Select either IPv4 or IPv6 IPv6 Address Type Select either Link Local or Global Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 536 26 SNMP Notification Recipients Link Local The IPv6 address uniquely identifies hosts on a single network link A link local address has a prefix of FE80 is not routable and can be used for communication only on the local network Only one link local address is supported If a link local address exists on the interface this entry replaces the address in the configuration Global The IPv6 address is a global Unicast IPV6 type that is visible and reachable from other networks Link Local Interface lf the IPv6 address type is Link Local select whether it is r
447. ning Configuration the passphrase in the command must be entered in plaintext Otherwise the command is rejected Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 449 Security Secure Sensitive Data Management Configuration Files Configuration commands with encrypted sensitive data that are encrypted with the key generated from the local passphrase are configured into the Running Configuration Otherwise the configuration command is in error and is not incorporated into the Running Configuration file Backup and Mirror Configuration File A device periodically generates its Mirror Configuration file from the Startup Configuration file if auto mirror configuration service is enabled A device always generates a Mirror Configuration file with encrypted sensitive data Therefore the File SSD Indicator in a Mirror Configuration file always indicates that the file contains encrypted sensitive data By default auto mirror configuration service is enabled To configure auto mirror configuration to be enabled or disabled click Administration gt File Management gt Configuration File Properties A user can display copy and upload the complete mirror and backup configuration files subject to SSD read permission the current read mode in the session and the file SSD indicator in the source file as follows If there is no file SSD indicator in a mirror or backup configura
448. nly Both Plaintext and Encrypted Highest read permission Users have both encrypted and plaintext permissions and are permitted to get sensitive data as encrypted and in plaintext Default Read Mode All default read modes are subjected to the read permission of the rule The following options exist but some might be rejected depending on the rule s read permission Exclude Do not allow reading the sensitive data Encrypted Sensitive data is presented encrypted Plaintext Sensitive data is presented as plaintext STEP 3 The following actions can be performed Restore to Default Restore a user modified default rule to the default rule Restore All Rules to Default Restore all user modified default rules to the default rule and remove all user defined rules Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 455 Security Secure Sensitive Data Management Configuring SSD 456 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security SSH Client This section describes the device when it functions as an SSH client It covers the following topics Secure Copy SCP and SSH Protection Methods SSH Server Authentication SSH Client Authentication Before You Begin Common Tasks SSH Client Configuration Through the GUI Secure Copy SCP and SSH Secure Shell or SSH
449. nnection between the device and the TACACS server times out If a value is not entered in the Add TACACS Server page for a specific server the value is taken from this field Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 335 Security Configuring TACACS Source IPv4 In Layer 3 system mode only Select the device IPv4 source interface to be used in messages sent for communication with the TACACS server Source IPv6 In Layer 3 system mode only Select the device IPv6 source interface to be used in messages sent for communication with the TACACS server NOTE If the Auto option is selected the system takes the source IP address from the IP address defined on the outgoing interface STEP 4 Click Apply The TACACS default settings are added to the Running Configuration file These are used if the equivalent parameters are not defined in the Add page STEP 5 Toadda TACACS server click Add STEP 6 Enter the parameters Server Definition Select one of the following ways to identify the TACACS server By IP Address lf this is selected enter the IP address of the server in the Server IP Address Name field By Name lf this is selected enter the name of the server in the Server IP Address Name field IP Version Select the supported IP version of the source address IPv6 or IPv4 IPv6 Address Type Select the IPv6 address type if I
450. nsitive data The device currently supports Auto Configuration which is enabled by default When Auto Configuration is enabled on a device and the device receives DHCP options that specify a file server and a boot file the device downloads the boot file remote configuration file into the Startup Configuration file from a file server and then reboots NOTE The file server may be specified by the bootp siaddr and sname fields as well as DHCP option 150 and statically configured on the device The user can safely auto configure target devices with encrypted sensitive data by first creating the configuration file that is to be used in the auto configuration from a device that contains the configurations The device must be configured and instructed to Encrypt the sensitive data in the file Enforce the integrity of the file content Include the secure authentication configuration commands and SSD rules that properly control and secure the access to devices and the sensitive data If the configuration file was generated with a user passphrase and SSD file passphrase control is Restricted the resulting configuration file can be auto configured to the desired target devices However for auto configuration to succeed with a user defined passphrase the target devices must be manually pre configured with the same passphrase as the device that generates the files which is not zero touch If the device creating the configuration file
451. nter the parameters User Name Enter a new username between 0 and 20 characters UTF 8 characters are not permitted Password Enter a password UTF 8 characters are not permitted If the password strength and complexity is defined the user password must comply with the policy configured in the Setting Password Complexity Rules section Confirm Password Enter the password again Password Strength Meter Displays the strength of password The policy for password strength and complexity are configured in the Password Strength page User Level Select the privilege level of the user being added edited Read Only CLI Access 1 User cannot access the GUI and can only access CLI commands that do not change the device configuration Read Limited Write CLI Access 7 User cannot access the GUI and can only access some CLI commands that change the device configuration See the CL Reference Guide for more information 330 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security Defining Users 18 Read Write Management Access 15 User can access the GUI and can configure the device STEP 5 Click Apply The user is added to the Running Configuration file of the device Setting Password Complexity Rules Passwords are used to authenticate users accessing the device Simple passwords are potential security hazards Therefore password
452. ntries click Status and Statistics gt View Log gt RAM Memory The top of the page has a button that allows you to Disable Alert Icon Blinking Click to toggle between disable and enable This page contains the following fields Log Index Log entry number Log Time Time when message was generated Severity Event severity Description Message text describing the event To clear the log messages click Clear Logs The messages are cleared Flash Memory The Flash Memory page displays the messages that were stored in the Flash memory in chronological order The minimum severity for logging is configured in the Log Settings page Flash logs remain when the device is rebooted You can clear the logs manually To view the Flash logs click Status and Statistics gt View Log gt Flash Memory Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 33 Administration System Log Viewing Memory Logs This page contains the following fields Log Index Log entry number Log Time Time when message was generated Severity Event severity Description Message text describing the event To clear the messages click Clear Logs The messages are cleared 34 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration File Management This section describes how system files are manage
453. o Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 421 Security IPV6 First Hop Security Common Tasks When a user defined policy is attached to an interface the default policy for that interface is detached If the user define policy is detached from the interface the default policy is reattached Policies do not take effect until The feature in the policy is enabled on the VLAN containing the interface The policy is attached to the interface VLAN port or LAG When you attach a policy the default policy for that interface is detached When you remove the policy from the interface the default policy is reattached You can only attach 1 policy for a specific feature to a VLAN You can attach multiple policies for a specific feature to an interface if they specify different VLANs Levels of Verification Rules The final set of rules that is applied to an input packet on an interface is built in the following way The rules configured in policies attached to the interface port or LAG on which the packet arrived are added to the set The rules configured in the policy attached to the VLAN are added to the set if they have not been added at the port level The global rules are added to the set if they have not been added at the VLAN or port level Rules defined at the port level override the rules set at the VLAN level Rules defined at the VLAN level overri
454. o Smartport to a firmware level that supports Auto Smartport the Auto Voice VLAN is disabled after the upgrade If Telephony OUI was enabled before the upgrade then Auto Smartport is disabled after the upgrade and Telephony OUI remains enabled Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 167 17 Smartport Common Smartport Tasks Common Smartport Tasks STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP This section describes some common tasks to setup Smartport and Auto Smartport Workflow1 To globally enable Auto Smartport on the device and to configure a port with Auto Smartport perform the following steps To enable the Auto Smartport feature on the device open the Smartport gt Properties page Set Administrative Auto Smartport to Enable or Enable by Voice VLAN Select whether the device is to process CDP and or LLDP advertisements from connected devices Select which type of devices are to be detected in the Auto Smartport Device Detection field Click Apply To enable the Auto Smartport feature on one or more interfaces open the Smartport gt Interface Settings page Select the interface and click Edit Select Auto Smartport in the Smartport Application field Check or uncheck Persistent Status if desired Click Apply Workflow2 To configure an interface as a static Smartport perf
455. o display on the Login page before login Click Preview to view the results Welcome Banner Enter text to display on the Login page after login Click Preview to view the results NOTE When you define a login banner from the web based configuration utility it also activates the banner for the CLI interfaces Console Telnet and SSH STEP 3 Click Apply to save the values in the Running Configuration file Console Settings Autobaud Rate Support The console port speed can be set to one of the following speeds 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 or to Auto Detection Auto Detection enables the device to detect your console speed automatically so that you are not required to set it explicitly When Auto Detection is not enabled the console port speed is automatically set to the last speed that was set manually at 115 200 by default When Auto Detection is enabled but the console baud rate was not yet discovered the system uses speed 115 200 for displaying text for example the boot up information After Auto Detection is enabled in the Console Settings page it can be activated by connecting the console to the device and press the Enter key twice The device detects the baud rate automatically To enable Auto Detection or to manually set the baud rate of the console STEP 1 Click Administration gt Console Settings STEP 2 Select one of the following Auto Detection The console baud rate is dete
456. o effect on any installations without a voice VLAN and on switches that have already been configured You may manually disable and enable Auto Voice VLAN and or Auto Smartport to fit your deployment if needed Auto Voice VLAN Auto Voice VLAN is responsible to maintain the voice VLAN but depends on Auto Smartport to maintain the voice VLAN port memberships Auto Voice VLAN performs the following functions when it is in operation It discovers voice VLAN information in CDP advertisements from directly connected neighbor devices f multiple neighbor switches and or routers such as Cisco Unified Communication UC devices are advertising their voice VLAN the voice VLAN from the device with the lowest MAC address is used NOTE If connecting the device to a Cisco UC device you may need to configure the port on the UC device using the switchport voice vlan command to ensure the UC device advertises its voice VLAN in CDP at the port It synchronizes the voice VLAN related parameters with other Auto Voice VLAN enabled switches using Voice Service Discovery Protocol VSDP The device always configures itself with the voice VLAN from the highest priority source it is aware of The priority is based on the source type and MAC address of the source providing the voice VLAN information Source type priority from high to low are static VLAN configuration CDP advertisement and default configuration based on changed default VLAN 214
457. o negotiation is disabled Operational Port Speed Displays the current port speed that is the result of negotiation 126 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Port Management Q Setting Port Configuration Administrative Duplex Mode Select the port duplex mode This field is configurable only when auto negotiation is disabled and the port speed is setto 10M or 100M At port speed of 1G the mode is always full duplex The possible options are Full The interface supports transmission between the device and the client in both directions simultaneously Half The interface supports transmission between the device and the client in only one direction at a time Operational Duplex Mode Displays the ports current duplex mode Auto Advertisement Select the capabilities advertised by auto negotiation when it is enabled The options are Max Capability All port speeds and duplex mode settings can be accepted 10 Half 10 Mbps speed and Half Duplex mode 10 Full 10 Mbps speed and Full Duplex mode 100 Half 100 Mbps speed and Half Duplex mode 100 Full 100 Mbps speed and Full Duplex mode 1000 Full 1000 Mbps speed and Full Duplex mode Operational Advertisement Displays the capabilities currently published to the ports neighbor The possible options are those specified in the Administrative Advertisement field Ne
458. o switchport access vlan no switchport mode no port security no port security mode no smartport storm control broadcast enable no smartport storm control broadcast level no smartport storm control include multicast spanning tree portfast auto Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 177 Smartport Built in Smartport Macros guest guest macro description guest macro keywords Snative_vlan macro key description S native_vlan The untag VLAN which will be configured on the port Default Values are Snative_vlan Default VLAN the port type cannot be detected automatically switchport mode access switchport access vlan native_vlan Single host port security max 1 port security mode max addresses port security discard trap 60 smartport storm control broadcast level 10 smartport storm control include multicast smartport storm control broadcast enable spanning tree portfast no_guest no_guest macro description No guest no switchport access vlan no switchport mode no port security no port security mode no smartport storm control broadcast enable no smartport storm control broadcast level no smartport storm control include multicast spanning tree portfast auto 178 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal
459. ocessed first Action Select the action assigned to the packet matching the ACE The options are as follows Permit Forward packets that meet the ACE criteria Deny Drop packets that meet the ACE criteria Shutdown Drop packet that meets the ACE criteria and disable the port to which the packet was addressed Ports are reactivated from the Port Management page Time Range Select to enable limiting the use of the ACL to a specific time range Time Range Name lIf Time Range is selected select the time range to be used Time ranges are defined in the lt 300 500 gt Time Range section Protocol Select to create an ACE based ona specific protocol or protocol ID Select Any IPv4 to accept all IP protocols Otherwise select one of the following protocols from the drop down list CMP lInternet Control Message Protocol GMP Internet Group Management Protocol Pin P IP in IP encapsulation 7CP Transmission Control Protocol Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 480 Access Control IPv4 based ACLs EGP Exterior Gateway Protocol GP lInterior Gateway Protocol UDP vUser Datagram Protocol HMP Host Mapping Protocol RDP Reliable Datagram Protocol DPR I nter Domain Policy Routing Protocol PV6 IPV6 over IPv4 tunneling PV6 ROUT Matches packets belonging to the IPv6 over IPv4 route through a ga
460. of power that the PSE can supply The amount of power that the PD is actually attempting to consume 188 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Port Management PoE 1 2 PoE on the Device You can decide the following Maximum power a PSE is allowed to supply to a PD During device operation to change the mode from Class Power Limit to Port Limit and vice versa The power values per port that were configured for the Port Limit mode are retained NOTE Changing the mode from Class Limit to Port limit and vice versa when the device is operational forces the Powered Device to reboot Maximum port limit allowed as a per port numerical limit in mW Port Limit mode To generate a trap when a PD tries to consume too much and at what percent of the maximum power this trap is generated The PoE specific hardware automatically detects the PD class and its power limit according to the class of the device connected to each specific port Class Limit mode If at any time during the connectivity an attached PD requires more power from the device than the configured allocation allows no matter if the device is in Class Limit or Port Limit mode the device does the following Maintains the up down status of the PoE port link Turns off power delivery to the PoE port Logs the reason for turning off power Generates an SNMP trap A CAUTION Consider th
461. of the following ways to identify the SSH server By IP Address lf this is selected enter the IP address of the server in the fields below By Name lf this is selected enter the name of the server in the Server IP Address Name field 465 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security SSH Client 22 SSH Client Configuration Through the GUI IP Version lf you selected to specify the SSH server by IP address select whether that IP address is an IPv4 or IPv6 address IP Address Type lf the SSH server IP address is an IPv6 address select the IPv6 address type The options are Link Local The IPv6 address uniquely identifies hosts on a single network link A link local address has a prefix of FE80 is not routable and can be used for communication only on the local network Only one link local address is supported If a link local address exists on the interface this entry replaces the address in the configuration Global The IPv6 address is a global Unicast IPV6 type that is visible and reachable from other networks Link Local Interface Select the link local interface from the list of interfaces Server IP Address Name Enter either the IP address of the SSH server or its name depending on what was selected in Server Definition Fingerprint Enter the fingerprint of the SSH server copied from that server STEP 4 Click
462. omain in the network can be defined as trusted Within that domain packets are marked with 802 1p priority and or DSCP to signal the type of service they require Nodes within the domain use these fields to assign the packet to a specific output queue The initial packet classification and marking of these fields is done in the ingress of the trusted domain Workflow to Configure Basic QoS Mode To configure Basic QoS mode perform the following 1 Select Basic mode for the system by using the QoS Properties page 2 Select the trust behavior using the Global Setting page The device supports CoS 802 1p trusted mode and DSCP trusted mode CoS 802 1p trusted mode uses the 802 1p priority in the VLAN tag DSCP trusted mode use the DSCP value in the IP header Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 502 Quality of Service QoS Basic Mode If there is any port that as an exception should not trust the incoming CoS mark disable the QoS state on that port using the Interface Settings page Enable or disable the global selected trusted mode at the ports by using the Interface Settings page If a port is disabled without trusted mode all its ingress packets are forward in best effort It is recommended that you disable the trusted mode at the ports where the CoS 802 1p and or DSCP values in the incoming packets are not trustworthy Otherwise it might negatively affect the perfo
463. ommunity are defined by a group defined in the Groups page You can configure the group with a specific security model The access rights of a group are Read Write and Notify To define SNMP communities Click SNMP gt Communities This page contains a table of configured SNMP communities and their properties Click Add This page enables network managers to define and configure new SNMP communities SNMP Management Station Click User Defined to enter the management station IP address that can access the SNMP community Click All to indicate that any IP device can access the SNMP community IP Version Select either IPv4 or IPv6 IPv6 Address Type Select the supported IPv6 address type if IPv6 is used The options are 533 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version SNMP Defining SNMP Communities 26 Link Local The IPv6 address uniquely identifies hosts on a single network link A link local address has a prefix of FE80 is not routable and can be used for communication only on the local network Only one link local address is supported If a link local address exists on the interface this entry replaces the address in the configuration Global The IPv6 address is a global Unicast IPV6 type that is visible and reachable from other networks Link Local Interface lf the IPv6 address type is Link Local select whether it is received throu
464. on Security 802 1X Authentication This section describes 802 1X authentication It covers the following topics Overview of 802 1X Authenticator Overview Common Tasks 802 1X Configuration Through the GUI Defining Time Ranges lt 300 500 gt Authentication Method and Port Mode Support lt 300 500 gt Overview of 802 1X 802 1x authentication restricts unauthorized clients from connecting to a LAN through publicity accessible ports 802 1x authentication is a client server model In this model network devices have the following specific roles Client or supplicant Authenticator Authentication server Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 381 Security 802 1X Authentication Overview of 8021X This is described in the figure below Client Authenticaticator Authentication Server 370574 Client A network device can be either a client supplicant authenticator or both per port Client or Supplicant A client or supplicant is a network device that requests access to the LAN The client is connected to an authenticator If the client uses the 802 1x protocol for authentication it runs the supplicant part of the 802 1x protocol and the client part of the EAP protocol No special software is required on the client to use MAC based or web based authentication Authenticator An authenticator is a network device that provides network
465. on of sensitive data Sx200 Sx300 Sx500 and SG500X SG500XG ESW2 550X series switches that have the same passphrase are able to decrypt each other s sensitive data encrypted with the key generated from the passphrase A passphrase must comply with the following rules _Length Between 8 16 characters 444 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security Secure Sensitive Data Management 2 1 SSD Properties Character Classes The passphrase must have at least one upper case character one lower case character one numeric character and one special character e g S Default and User defined Passphrases All devices come with a default out of the box passphrase that is transparent to users The default passphrase is never displayed in the configuration file or in the CLI GUI If better security and protection are desired an administrator should configure SSD on a device to use a user defined passphrase instead of the default passphrase A user defined passphrase should be treated as a well guard secret so that the security of the sensitive data on the device is not compromised A user defined passphrase can be configured manually in plain text It can also be derived from a configuration file See Sensitive Data Zero Touch Auto Configuration A device always displays user defined passphrases encrypted Local Passphrase A device maintains a local passph
466. onfigure the relaying of UDP packets received from a specific IPv4 interface with a specific destination UDP port add a UDP Relay Click IP Configuration gt IPv4 Management and Interfaces gt UDP Relay IP Helper Click Add Select the Source IP Interface to where the device is to relay UDP Broadcast packets based on a configured UDP destination port The interface must be one of the IPv4 interfaces configured on the device Enter the UDP Destination Port number for the packets that the device is to relay Select a well known port from the drop down list or click the port radio button to enter the number manually Enter the Destination IP Address that receives the UDP packet relays If this field is 0 0 0 0 UDP packets are discarded If this field is 255 255 255 255 UDP packets are flooded to all IP interfaces Click Apply The UDP relay settings are written to the Running Configuration file DHCP v4 Snooping Relay DHCP v4 Snooping DHCP snooping provides a security mechanism to prevent receiving false DHCP response packets and to log DHCP addresses It does this by treating ports on the device as either trusted or untrusted A trusted port is a port that is connected to a DHCP server and is allowed to assign DHCP addresses DHCP messages received on trusted ports are allowed to pass through the device Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 279 IP Con
467. only the frame is classified to the VLAN based on the PVID Port VLAN Identifier configured at the ingress port where the frame is received The frame is discarded at the ingress port if Ingress Filtering is enabled and the ingress port is nota member of the VLAN to which the packet belongs A frame is regarded as priority tagged only if the VID in its VLAN tag is 0 Frames belonging to a VLAN remain within the VLAN This is achieved by sending or forwarding a frame only to egress ports that are members of the target VLAN An egress port may be a tagged or untagged member of a VLAN The egress port Adds a VLAN tag to the frame if the egress port is a tagged member of the target VLAN and the original frame does not have a VLAN tag Removes the VLAN tag from the frame if the egress port is an untagged member of the target VLAN and the original frame has a VLAN tag 196 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version VLAN Management 1 3 VLANs VLAN Roles VLANs function at Layer 2 All VLAN traffic Unicast Broadcast Multicast remains within its VLAN Devices attached to different VLANs do not have direct connectivity to each other over the Ethernet MAC layer Devices from different VLANs can communicate with each other only through Layer 3 routers An IP router for example is required to route IP traffic between VLANs if each VLAN represents an IP subnet The IP
468. only tagged traffic belonging to unauthenticated VLANs is bridged When a port is authorized untagged and tagged traffic from all hosts connected to the port is bridged based on the static VLAN membership port configuration You can specify that untagged traffic from the authorized port will be remapped to a VLAN that is assigned by a RADIUS server during the authentication process Tagged traffic is dropped unless it belongs to the RADIUS assigned VLAN or to the unauthenticated VLANs Radius VLAN assignment on a port is set in the Port Authentication page Multi Sessions Mode Unlike the single host and multi host modes a port in the multi session mode does not have an authentication status This status is assigned to each client connected to the port This mode requires a TCAM lookup Since Layer 3 mode switches see Multi Sessions Mode Support do not have a TCAM lookup allocated for multi sessions mode they support a limited form of multi sessions mode which does not support guest VLAN and RADIUS VLAN attributes The maximum number of authorized hosts allowed on the port is configured in the Port Authentication page Tagged traffic belonging to an unauthenticated VLAN is always bridged regardless of whether the host is authorized or not Tagged and untagged traffic from unauthorized hosts not belonging to an unauthenticated VLAN is remapped to the guest VLAN if it is defined and enabled on the VLAN or is dropped if the guest VLAN
469. ontrol Lists An Access Control List ACL is an ordered list of classification filters and actions Each single classification rule together with its action is called an Access Control Element ACE Each ACE is made up of filters that distinguish traffic groups and associated actions A single ACL may contain one or more ACEs which are matched against the contents of incoming frames Either a DENY or PERMIT action is applied to frames whose contents match the filter The device supports a maximum of 512 ACLs and a maximum of 512 ACEs Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 474 24 Access Control Access Control Lists NOTE NOTE When a packet matches an ACE filter the ACE action is taken and that ACL processing is stopped If the packet does not match the ACE filter the next ACE is processed If all ACEs of an ACL have been processed without finding a match and if another ACL exists it is processed in a similar manner If no match is found to any ACE in all relevant ACLs the packet is dropped as a default action Because of this default drop action you must explicitly add ACEs into the ACL to permit the desired traffic including management traffic such as Telnet HTTP or SNMP that is directed to the device itself For example if you do not want to discard all the packets that do not match the conditions in an ACL you must explicitly add a lowest priori
470. ools To define an excluded address range Click IP Configuration gt IPv4 Management and Interfaces gt DHCP Server gt Excluded Addresses to display the Excluded Addresses page The previously defined excluded IP addresses are displayed To add a range of IP addresses to be excluded click Add and enter the fields Start IP Address First IP address in the range of excluded IP addresses End IP Address Last IP address in the range of excluded IP addresses Static Hosts You might want to assign some DHCP clients a permanent IP address that never changes This client is then known as a static host 296 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration 1 7 DHCP Server To manually allocate a permanent IP address to a specific client STEP 1 Click IP Configuration gt Pv4 Management and Interfaces gt DHCP Server gt Static Hosts to display the Static Hosts page The static hosts are displayed STEP 2 To add a static host click Add and enter the fields P Address Enter the IP address that was statically assigned to the host Host Name Enter the host name which can be a string of symbols and an integer Mask Enter the static host s network mask Network Mask Check and enter the static host s network mask Prefix Length Check and enter the number of bits that comprise the address prefix Identifi
471. or message appears and the Login page remains displayed on the window If you are having problems logging in please see the Launching the Configuration Utility section in the Administration Guide for additional information Select Don t show this page on startup to prevent the Getting Started page from being displayed each time that you log on to the system If you select this option the System Summary page is opened instead of the Getting Started page HTTP HTTPS You can either open an HTTP session not secured by clicking Log In or you can open an HTTPS secured session by clicking Secure Browsing HTTPS You are asked to approve the logon with a default RSA key and an HTTPS session is opened There is no need to input the username password prior to clicking the Secure Browsing HTTPS button For information on how to configure HTTPS see SSL Server Password Expiration The New Password page appears The first time you access the device with the default username cisco and password cisco This page forces you to replace the factory default password When the password expires this page forces you to select a new password Logging Out By default the application logs out after ten minutes of inactivity You can change this default value as described in the Defining Idle Session Timeout section Unless the Running Configuration is copied to the Startup Configuration rebooting the device will remove all changes mad
472. or the community string are encrypted Therefore SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 are not secure In SNMPv3 the following security mechanisms can be configured Authentication The device checks that the SNMP user is an authorized system administrator This is done for each frame Privacy SNMP frames can carry encrypted data Thus in SNMPv3 there are three levels of security No security No authentication and no privacy Authentication Authentication and no privacy Authentication and privacy SNMPv8 provides a means of controlling the content each user can read or write and the notifications they receive A group defines read write privileges and a level of security It becomes operational when it is associated with an SNMP user or community NOTE To associate a non default view with a group first create the view in the Views page To create an SNMP group STEP 1 Click SNMP gt Groups This page contains the existing SNMP groups and their security levels STEP 2 Click Add STEP 3 Enter the parameters Group Name Enter a new group name 529 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version SNMP Creating SNMP Groups 26 Security Model Select the SNMP version attached to the group SNMPv1 v2 or v3 Three types of views with various security levels can be defined For each security level select the views for Read Write and Notify by enterin
473. orm the following steps To enable the Smartport feature on the interface open the Smartport gt Interface Settings page Select the interface and click Edit Select the Smartport type that is to be assigned to the interface in the Smartport Application field Set the macro parameters as required Click Apply 168 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Smartport Common Smartport Tasks 11 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 Workflow3 To adjust Smartport macro parameter defaults and or bind a user defined macro pair to a Smartport type perform the following steps Through this procedure you can accomplish the following View the macro source Change parameter defaults Restore the parameter defaults to the factory settings Bind a user defined macro pair a macro and its corresponding anti macro to a Smartport type 1 Open the Smartport gt Smartport Type Settings page 2 Select the Smartport Type 3 Click View Macro Source to view the current Smartport macro that is associated with the selected Smartport Type 4 Click Edit to open a new window in which you can bind user defined macros to the selected Smartport type and or modify the default values of the parameters in the macros bound to that Smartport type These parameter default values are used when Auto Smartport applies the selected Smartport type if a
474. otification Filter The Notification Filter page contains notification information for each filter The table is able to filter notification entries by Filter Name STEP 2 Click Add STEP 3 Enter the parameters Filter Name Enter a name between 0 30 characters Object ID Subtree Select the node in the MIB tree that is included or excluded in the selected SNMP filter The options to select the object are as follows Select from list Enables you to navigate the MIB tree Press the Up arrow to go to the level of the selected node s parent and siblings press the Down arrow to descend to the level of the selected node s children Click nodes in the view to pass from one node to its sibling Use the scrollbar to bring siblings in view If Object ID is used the entered object identifier is included in the view if the Include in filter option is selected STEP 4 Select or deselect Include in filter If this is selected the selected MIBs are included in the filter otherwise they are excluded STEP 5 Click Apply The SNMP views are defined and the running configuration is updated Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 540 SNMP SNMP Notification Filters 541 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 26 SNMP Notification Filters Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Ma
475. our queues possible and all four queues are WRR and the default weights are used queue 1 receives 1 15 of the bandwidth assuming all queues are saturated and there is congestion queue 2 receives 2 15 queue 3 receives 4 15 and queue 4 receives 8 15 of the bandwidth The type of WRR algorithm used in the device is not the standard Deficit WRR DWRR but rather Shaped Deficit WRR SDWRR The queuing modes can be selected in the Queue page When the queuing mode is by strict priority the priority sets the order in which queues are serviced starting with Queue 4 or Queue 8 the highest priority queue and going to the next lower queue when each queue is completed When the queuing mode is Weighted Round Robin queues are serviced until their quota has been used up and then another queue is serviced It is also possible to assign some of the lower queues to WRR while keeping some of the higher queues in strict priority In this case traffic for the strict priority queues is always sent before traffic from the WRR queues Only after the strict priority queues have been emptied is traffic from the WRR queues forwarded The relative portion from each WRR queue depends on its weight To select the priority method and enter WRR data STEP 1 Click Quality of Service gt General gt Queue STEP 2 Enter the parameters Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 494 25 Qu
476. ours The Startup Configuration is identical to the Running Configuration Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration File Management 4 System Files Only the system can copy the Startup Configuration to the Mirror Configuration However you can copy from the Mirror Configuration to other file types or to another device The option of automatically copying the Running Configuration to the mirror configuration can be disabled in the Configuration Files Properties page Backup Configuration A manual copy of a configuration file used for protection against system shutdown or for the maintenance of a specific operating state You can copy the Mirror Configuration Startup Configuration or Running Configuration to a Backup Configuration file The Backup Configuration exists in Flash and is preserved if the device is rebooted Firmware The program that controls the operations and functionality of the device More commonly referred to as the image Boot Code Controls the basic system startup and launches the firmware image Language File The dictionary that enables the web based configuration utility windows to be displayed in the selected language Flash Log SYSLOG messages stored in Flash memory File Actions The following actions can be performed to manage firmware and configuration files Upgrade the firmware or boot code or repl
477. owest IP address among the dynamic IP addresses If there are no dynamic addresses the software chooses the lowest IP address among the static IP addresses None Do not advertise the management IP address Manual Advertise Select this option and the management IP address to be advertised We recommend you select this option when the device is in Layer 3 system mode and the device is configured with multiple IP addresses this is always true on SG500X ESW2 550X devices IP Address lIf Manual Advertise was selected select the Management IP address from the addresses provided STEP 3 Enter the relevant information and click Apply The port settings are written to the Running Configuration file LLDP MED Network Policy LLDP Media Endpoint Discovery LLDP MED is an extension of LLDP that provides the following additional capabilities to support media endpoint devices Some of the features of the LLDP Med Network Policy are Enables the advertisement and discovery of network polices for real time applications such as voice and or video Device location discovery to allow creation of location databases and in the case of Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Emergency Call Service E 91 1 by using IP Phone location information Troubleshooting information LLDP MED sends alerts to network managers upon Port speed and duplex mode conflicts QoS policy misconfigurations 100 Cisco Small Business 200 30
478. p is saved to the Running Configuration file Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 530 26 SNMP Managing SNMP Users Managing SNMP Users STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 An SNMP user is defined by the login credentials username passwords and authentication method and by the context and scope in which it operates by association with a group and an Engine ID The configured user have the attributes of its group having the access privileges configured within the associated view Groups enable network managers to assign access rights to a group of users instead of to a single user A user can only belong to a single group To create an SNMPv3 user the following must first exist An engine ID must first be configured on the device This is done in the Engine ID page AnSNMPv8 group must be available An SNMPv3 group is defined in the Groups page To display SNMP users and define new ones Click SNMP gt Users This page contains existing users Click Add This page provides information for assigning SNMP access control privileges to SNMP users Enter the parameters User Name Enter a name for the user Engine ID Select either the local or remote SNMP entity to which the user is connected Changing or removing the local SNMP Engine ID deletes the SNMPv3 User Database To receive inform messages and request information you must de
479. packet is forwarded Typically this is the address of a neighboring router It can be one of the following types Link Local An IPv6 interface and IPv6 address that uniquely identifies hosts on a single network link A link local address has a prefix of FE80 is not routable and can be used for communication only on the local network Only one link local address is supported If a link local address exists on the interface this entry replaces the address in the configuration Global An IPv6 address that is a global Unicast IPV6 type that is visible and reachable from other networks Point to Point A Point to point tunnel Metric Value used for comparing this route to other routes with the same destination in the IPv6 router table All default routes have the same value _Lifetime Time period during which the packet can be sent and resent before being deleted Route Type How the destination is attached and the method used to obtain the entry The following values are Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 313 17 IP Configuration IPv6 Management and Interfaces Locakt A directly connected network whose prefix is derived from a manually configured device s IPv6 address Dynamic tThe destination is an indirectly attached remote IPv6 subnet address The entry was obtained dynamically via the ND or ICMP protocol Static
480. page Configuring the SNTP Mode The device can be in active and or passive mode see SNTP Modes for more information To enable receiving SNTP packets from all servers on the subnet and or to enable transmitting time requests to SNTP servers STEP 1 Click Administration gt Time Settings gt SNTP Multicast Anycast STEP 2 Select from the following options SNTP IPv4 Multicast Client Mode Client Broadcast Reception Select to receive system time IPv4 Multicast transmissions from any SNTP server on the subnet SNTP IPv6 Multicast Client Mode Client Broadcast Reception Select to receive system time IPv6 Multicast transmissions from any SNTP server on the subnet SNTP IPv4 Anycast Client Mode Client Broadcast Transmission Select to transmit SNTP IPv4 synchronization packets requesting system time information The packets are transmitted to all SNTP servers on the subnet SNTP IPv6 Anycast Client Mode Client Broadcast Transmission Select to transmit SNTP IPv6 synchronization packets requesting system time information The packets are transmitted to all SNTP servers on the subnet STEP 3 Ifthe system is in Layer 3 system mode click Add to select the interface for SNTP reception transmission 80 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration Time Settings 6 Configuring System Time STEP 4 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STE
481. page To enable IGMP Snooping and identify the device as an IGMP Snooping Querier ona VLAN Click Multicast gt IGMP Snooping Enable or disable the IGMP Snooping status When IGMP Snooping is enabled globally the device monitoring network traffic can determine which hosts have requested to receive Multicast traffic The device only performs IGMP Snooping if both IGMP snooping and Bridge Multicast filtering are enabled Select a VLAN and click Edit Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 259 Multicast Configuring IGMP Snooping There can be only one IGMP Querier in a network The device supports standards based IGMP Querier election Some of the values of the operational parameters of this table are sent by the elected querier The other values are derived from the device STEP 4 Enter the parameters VLAN ID Select the VLAN ID on which IGMP snooping is defined IGMP Snooping Status Enable or disable the monitoring of network traffic for the selected VLAN Operational IGMP Snooping Status Displays the current status of the IGMP Snooping for the selected VLAN MRouter Ports Auto Learn Enable or disable auto learning of the ports to which the Mrouter is connected Query Robustness Enter the Robustness Variable value to be used if this device is the elected querier Operational Query Robustness Displays the robustness variab
482. page If a packet CoS level and DSCP tag are mapped to separate queues the Trust mode determines the queue to which the packet is assigned If internal DSCP values are different from those used on incoming packets map the external values to internal values by using the Out of Profile DSCP Mapping page This in turn opens the DSCP Remarking page 2 Create ACLs as described in Create ACL Workflow 3 If ACLs were defined create class maps and associate the ACLs with them by using the Class Mapping page 4 Create a policy using the Policy Table page and associate the policy with one or more class maps using the Policy Class Map page You can also specify the QoS if needed by assigning a policer to a class map when you associate the class map to the policy Single Policer Create a policy that associates a class map with a single policer by using the Policy Table page and the Class Mapping page Within the policy define the single policer Aggregate Policer Create a QoS action for each flow that sends all matching frames to the same policer aggregate policer by using the Aggregate Policer page Create a policy that associates a class map with the aggregate policer by using the Policy Table page 5 Bind the policy to an interface by using the Policy Binding page Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 506 Quality of Service QoS Advanced Mode
483. panning Tree is disabled on an interface Path Cost Default Values Selects the method used to assign default path costs to the STP ports The default path cost assigned to an interface varies according to the selected method Short Specifies the range 1 through 65 535 for port path costs Long Specifies the range 1 through 200 000 000 for port path costs Bridge Settings Priority Sets the bridge priority value After exchanging BPDUs the device with the lowest priority becomes the Root Bridge In the case that all bridges use the same priority then their MAC addresses are used to determine the Root Bridge The bridge priority value is provided in increments of 4096 For example 4096 8192 12288 and so on Hello Time Set the interval in seconds that a Root Bridge waits between configuration messages Max Age Set the interval in seconds that the device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to redefine its own configuration Forward Delay Set the interval in seconds that a bridge remains ina learning state before forwarding packets For more information refer to Defining Spanning Tree Interface Settings Designated Root Bridge ID The bridge priority concatenated with the MAC address of the device Root Bridge ID The Root Bridge priority concatenated with the MAC address of the Root Bridge Root Port The port that offers the lowest cost path from this bridge to
484. played to the left of the Save application link indicates that Running Configuration changes have been made that have not yet been saved to the Startup Configuration file The flashing of the red X can be disabled on the Copy Save Configuration page Click Save to display the Copy Save Configuration page Save the Running Configuration file by copying it to the Startup Configuration file type on the device After this save the red X icon and the Save application link are no longer displayed When the device is rebooted it copies the Startup Configuration file type to the Running Configuration and sets the device parameters according to the data in the Running Configuration Username Displays the name of the user logged on to the device The default username is cisco The default password is cisco Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Getting Started Window Navigation Application Link Name Description Language Menu This menu provides the following options Select a language Select one of the languages that appear in the menu This language will be the web based configuration utility language Download Language Add a new language to the device Delete Language Deletes the second language on the device The first language English cannot be deleted Debug Used for translation purposes If you select this op
485. playing Optical Module Status Configuring Port and VLAN Mirroring Viewing CPU Utilization and Secure Core Technology Chapter 8 Administration Discovery Bonjour 51 51 53 55 55 55 56 56 56 56 58 59 59 59 60 60 62 63 64 65 73 73 75 77 78 80 80 Cisco Small Business 300 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Contents LLDP and CDP 81 Configuring LLDP 82 Configuring CDP 102 Chapter 9 Administration Unidirectional Link Detection 112 UDLD Overview 112 UDLD Operation 113 Usage Guidelines 116 Dependencies On Other Features 116 Default Settings and Configuration 117 Before You Start 117 Common UDLD Tasks 117 Configuring UDLD 118 Chapter 10 Port Management 122 Configuring Ports 122 Setting Port Configuration 123 Link Aggregation 127 PoE 134 Configuring Green Ethernet 134 Chapter 11 Smartport 143 Overview 143 What is a Smartport 144 Smartport Types 144 Smartport Macros 147 Macro Failure and the Reset Operation 148 How the Smartport Feature Works 149 Auto Smartport 149 Error Handling 153 Cisco Small Business 300 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide 3 Contents Default Configuration Relationships with Other Features and Backwards Compatibility Common Smartport Tasks Configuring Smartport Using The Web based Interface Built in Smartport Macros Chapter 12 Port Management PoE PoE on the Device Configuring PoE Properties Configuring PoE Settings Chapter 13
486. ports a maximum of 10 absolute time ranges All time specifications are interpreted as local time Daylight Saving Time does not affect this To ensure that the time range entries take effect at the desired times the system time must be set The time range feature can be used for the following Limit access of computers to the network during business hours for example after which the network ports are locked and access to the rest Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration Time Settings 6 Configuring System Time STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 1 STEP 2 of the network is blocked see Chapter 9 Configuring Ports and Chapter 9 Configuring LAG Settings Limit PoE operation to a specified period Absolute Time Range To define an absolute time range Click Administration gt Time Settings gt Time Range The existing time ranges are displayed To add a new time range click Add Enter the following fields Time Range Name Enter a new time range name Absolute Starting Time To define the start time enter the following Immediate Select for the time range to start immediately Date Time Enter the date and time that the Time Range begins Absolute Ending Time To define the start time enter the following Infinite Select for the time range to never end Date Time Enter the date
487. ports can be forwarded only to unprotected egress ports Protected port filtering rules are also applied to packets that are forwarded by software such as snooping applications Port protection is not subject to VLAN membership Devices connected to protected ports are not allowed to communicate with each other even if they are members of the same VLAN Both ports and LAGs can be defined as protected or unprotected Protected LAGs are described in the Configuring LAG Settings section Member in LAG If the port is a member of a LAG the LAG number appears otherwise this field is left blank STEP 6 Click Apply The Port Settings are written to the Running Configuration file Error Recovery Settings This page enables automatically reactivating a port that has been shutdown because of an error condition To configure error recovery settings STEP 1 Click Port Management gt Error Recovery Settings STEP 2 Enter the following fields Automatic Recovery Interval Select to enable the error recovery mechanism for the port security err disable state 128 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Port Management Link Aggregation 9 Port Security Select to enable the error recovery mechanism for the port security err disable state 802 1x Single Host Violation Select to enable error recovery mechanism for the 802 1x error disable state A
488. possible If a device is aged out no longer receiving advertisements from other devices the interface configuration is changed according to its Persistent Status If the Persistent Status is enabled the interface configuration is retained If not the Smartport Type reverts to Default Enabling Auto Smartport Auto Smartport can be enabled globally in the Properties page in the following ways Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 163 17 Smartport Auto Smartport Enabled This manually enables Auto Smartport and places it into operation immediately Enable by Auto Voice VLAN This enables Auto Smartport to operate if Auto Voice VLAN is enabled and in operation Enable by Auto Voice VLAN is the default NOTE In addition to enabling Auto Smartport globally you must enable Auto Smartport at the desired interface as well By default Auto Smartport is enabled at all the interfaces See Voice VLAN for more information on enabling Auto Voice VLAN Identifying Smartport Type If Auto Smartport is globally enabled in the Properties page and at an interface in the Interface Settings page the device applies a Smartport macro to the interface based on the Smartport type of the attaching device Auto Smartport derives the Smartport types of attaching devices based on the CDP and or LLDP the devices advertise If for example an IP phone is atta
489. pplicable to an interface 5 In the Edit page modify the fields 6 Click Apply to rerun the macro if the parameters were changed or Restore Defaults to restore default parameter values to built in macros if required Workflow4 To rerun a Smartport macro after it has failed perform the following steps In the Interface Settings page select an interface with Smartport type Unknown Click Show Diagnostics to see the problem Troubleshoot then correct the problem Consider the troubleshooting tip below Click Edit A new window appears in which you can click Reset to reset the interface Return to the main page and reapply the macro using either Reapply for devices that are not switches routers or APs or Reapply Smartport Macro for switches routers or APs to run the Smartport Macro on the interface Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 169 Smartport Configuring Smartport Using The Web based Interface A second method of resetting single or multiple unknown interfaces is STEP 1 Inthe Interface Settings page select the Port Type equals to checkbox STEP 2 Select Unknownand click Go STEP 3 Click Reset All Unknown Smartports Then reapply the macro as described above TIP The reason that the macro failed might be a conflict with a configuration on the interface made prior to applying the macro most often encountered with security and storm
490. pplications A loopback interface does not support bridging it cannot be a member of any VLAN and no layer 2 protocol can be enabled on it The IPv6 link local interface identifier is 1 When the switch is in Layer 2 system mode the following rules are supported Only one loopback interface is supported Two IPv4 interfaces can be configured one on a VLAN or Ethernet port and one on the loopback interface If the IPv4 address was configured on the default VLAN and the default VLAN is changed the switch moves the IPv4 address to the new default VLAN Configuring a Loopback Interface To configure an IPv4 loopback interface do the following In Layer 2 enable Loopback Interface and configure its address in Administration gt Management Interface gt IPv4 Interface page In Layer 3 add a loopback interface in IP Configuration gt IPv4 Management and Interfaces gt IPv4 Interface To configure an IPv6 loopback interface do the following In Layer 2 add a loopback interface in the Administration gt Management Interface gt IPv6 Interfaces page Configure the IPv6 address of that interface in the Administration gt Management Interface gt IPv6 Addresses page This page is not available in SG500X ESW2 550X and SG500XG devices Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 271 IP Configuration IPv4 Management and Interfaces In Layer 3
491. pplied to these frames see QoS Advanced Mode 475 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Access Control 2 4 Defining MAC based ACLs Creating ACLs Workflow To create ACLs and associate them with an interface perform the following 1 Create one or more of the following types of ACLs a MAC based ACL by using the MAC Based ACL page and the MAC Based ACE page b IP based ACL by using the IPv4 Based ACL page and the IPv4 Based ACE page c IPv6 based ACL by using the IPv6 Based ACL page and the IPv6 Based ACE page 2 Associate the ACL with interfaces by using the ACL Binding page Modifying ACLs Workflow An ACL can only be modified if it is not in use The following describes the process of unbinding an ACL in order to modify it 1 If the ACL does not belong to a QoS Advanced Mode class map but it has been associated with an interface unbind it from the interface using the ACL Binding page 2 If the ACL is part of the class map and not bound to an interface then it can be modified 3 Ifthe ACL is part of a class map contained in a policy bound to an interface you must perform the chain of unbinding as follows Unbind the policy containing the class map from the interface by using Policy Binding Delete the class map containing the ACL from the policy using the Configuring a Policy Edit Delete the class map containing the ACL by u
492. protocol Configure the device to receive configuration information from a specific file on a specific server Note the following regarding the DHCP auto configuration process A configuration file that is placed on the TFTP SCP server must match the form and format requirements of the supported configuration file The form and format of the file are checked but the validity of the configuration parameters is not checked prior to loading it to the Startup Configuration In IPv4 to ensure that the device configuration functions as intended due to allocation of different IP addresses with each DHCP renew cycle it is recommended that IP addresses be bound to MAC addresses in the DHCP 54 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration File Management 4 Auto Configuration via DHCP server table This ensures that each device has its own reserved IP address and other relevant information To configure auto configuration STEP 1 Click Administration gt File Management gt DHCP Auto Configuration STEP 2 Enter the values Auto Configuration Via DHCP Select this field to enable DHCP Auto Configuration This feature is enabled by default but can be disabled here Download Protocol Select one of the following options Auto By File Extension Select to indicate that auto configuration uses the TFTP or SCP protocol depending on the exten
493. ptions to select the object are as follows Select from list Enables you to navigate the MIB tree Press the Up arrow to go to the level of the selected node s parent and siblings press the Down arrow to descend to the level of the selected node s children Click nodes in the view to pass from one node to its sibling Use the scrollbar to bring siblings in view User Defined Enter an OID not offered in the Select from list option STEP 4 Select or deselect Include in view If this is selected the selected MIBs are included in the view otherwise they are excluded STEP 5 Click Apply STEP 6 In order to verify your view configuration select the user defined views from the Filter View Name list The following views exist by default Default Default SNMP view for read and read write views DefaultSuper Default SNMP view for administrator views Other views can be added Object ID Subtree Displays the subtree to be included or excluded in the SNMP view Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 528 SNMP Creating SNMP Groups Object ID Subtree View Type Displays whether the defined subtree is included or excluded in the selected SNMP view Creating SNMP Groups In SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 a community string is sent along with the SNMP frames The community string acts as a password to gain access to an SNMP agent However neither the frames n
494. r SSH Client See Security SSH Client Configuring TCP UDP Services The TCP UDP Services page enables TCP or UDP based services on the device usually for security reasons The device offers the following TCP UDP services HTTP Enabled by factory default HTTPS Enabled by factory default SNMP Disabled by factory default Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 351 Security Configuring TCP UDP Services Telnet Disabled by factory default S SH Disabled by factory default The active TCP connections are also displayed in this window To configure TCP UDP services STEP 1 Click Security gt TCP UDP Services STEP 2 Enable or disable the following TCP UDP services on the displayed services HTTP Service Indicates whether the HTTP service is enabled or disabled HTTPS Service Indicates whether the HTTPS service is enabled or disabled SNMP Service Indicates whether the SNMP service is enabled or disabled Telnet Service Indicates whether the Telnet service is enabled or disabled SSH Service Indicates whether the SSH server service is enabled or disabled The TCP Service Table displays the following fields for each service Service Name Access method through which the device is offering the TCP service Type IP protocol the service uses Local IP Address Local IP address through which the device
495. r 1310 nm wavelength supports up to 40 km MGBLX1 1000BASE LX SFP transceiver for single mode fiber 1310 nm wavelength supports up to 10 km MGBSX1 1000BASE SX SFP transceiver for multimode fiber 850 nm wavelength supports up to 550 m MGBT1 1000BASE T SFP transceiver for category 5 copper wire supports up to 100 m To view the results of optical tests click Administration gt Diagnostics gt Optical Module Status This page displays the following fields Port Port number on which the SFP is connected Description Description of optical transceiver Serial Number Serial number of optical transceiver PID VLAN ID VID ID of optical transceiver Temperature Temperature Celsius at which the SFP is operating Voltage SFP s operating voltage Current SFP s current consumption Output Power Transmitted optical power Input Power Received optical power Transmitter Fault Remote SFP reports signal loss Values are True False and No Signal N S Loss of Signal Local SFP reports signal loss Values are True and False Data Ready SFP is operational Values are True and False 88 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration Diagnostics 7 Configuring Port and VLAN Mirroring Configuring Port and VLAN Mirroring STEP 1 Port mirroring is used on a network device to send a copy of network packets seen on o
496. r credentials Click System Credentials to go to the SSH User Authentication page where the user password can be set once for all future use Use SSH Client One Time Credentials Enter the following Username Enter a username for this copy action Password Enter a password for this copy NOTE The username and password for one time credential will not saved in configuration file 40 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration File Management 4 Upgrade Backup Firmware Language Select one of the following Save Actions Upgrade Specifies that the file type on the device is to be replaced witha new version of that file type located on a TFTP server Backup Specifies that a copy of the file type is to be saved to a file on another device Enter the following fields File Type Select the destination file type Only valid file types are shown The file types are described in the Files and File Types section SCP Server Definition Select whether to specify the SCP server by IP address or by domain name IP Version Select whether an IPv4 or an IPv6 address is used IPv6 Address Type Select the IPv6 address type if used The options are Link Local The IPv6 address uniquely identifies hosts on a single network link A link local address has a prefix of FE80 is not routable and can be used for communication only on the local n
497. r Class Limit System Settings To enter system settings STEP 1 Click Administration gt System Settings STEP 2 View or modify the system settings System Description Displays a description of the device System Location Enter the location where the device is physically located System Contact Enter the name of a contact person Host Name Select the host name of this device This is used in the prompt of CLI commands Use Default The default hostname System Name of these switches is switch1 23456 where 123456 represents the last three bytes of the device MAC address in hex format User Defined Enter the hostname Use only letters digits and hyphens Host names cannot begin or end with a hyphen No other symbols punctuation characters or blank spaces are permitted as specified in RFC1033 1034 1035 System Mode Select the system mode of this device NOTE If you change the system mode after clicking Apply the system will require a reboot and the startup configuration file will be gone after the boot L2 Select to place the device in Layer 2 system mode L3 Select to place the device in Layer 3 system mode 62 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration Console Settings Autobaud Rate Support 5 Custom Banner Settings The following banners can be set Login Banner Enter text t
498. r IP v4 IPv6 Address Type Select the IPv6 address type if IPv6 is used The options are Link Local The IPv6 address uniquely identifies hosts on a single network link A link local address has a prefix of FE80 is not routable and can be used for communication only on the local network Only one link local address is supported If a link local address exists on the interface this entry replaces the address in the configuration Global The IPv6 address is a global Unicast IPV6 type that is visible and reachable from other networks Link Local Interface lf the IPv6 address type is Link Local select the interface through which it is received DNS Server IP Address Enter the DNS server IP address Preference Select a value that determines the order in which the domains are used from low to high This effectively determines the order in which unqualified names are completed during DNS queries STEP 5 Click Apply The DNS server is saved to the Running Configuration file Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 317 17 IP Configuration Domain Name STEP 1 Search List The search list can contain one static entry defined by the user the DNS Settings page and dynamic entries received from DHCP v4 and DHCPV6 servers To view the domain names that have been configured on the device Click IP Configuration gt Domain Name gt Search
499. r SSH option in the Download Backup Configuration Log page Workflow2 To import the public private keys from one device to another Generate a public private key in the SSH User Authentication page Set the SSD properties and create a new local passphrase in the Secure Sensitive Data Management gt Properties page Click Details to view the generated encrypted keys and copy them including the Begin and End footers from the Details page to an external device Copy the public and private keys separately Log on to another device and open the SSH User Authentication page Select the type of key required and click Edit Paste in the public private keys Click Apply to copy the public private keys onto the second device Workflow3 To change your password on an SSH server Identify the server in the Change User Password on SSH Server page Enter the new password Click Apply Workflow4 To define a trusted server Enable SSH server authentication in the SSH Server Authentication page Click Add to add a new server and enter its identifying information Click Apply to add the server to the Trusted SSH Servers table 463 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security SSH Client 22 SSH Client Configuration Through the GUI SSH Client Configuration Through the GUI This section describes the pages used to configure the SSH Client feature SSH
500. r is defined if the policer is to be shared with more than one class Policers on a port cannot be shared with other policers in another device Each policer is defined with its own QoS specification with a combination of the following parameters A maximum allowed rate called a Committed Information Rate CIR measured in Kbps An amount of traffic measured in bytes called a Committed Burst Size CBS This is traffic that is allowed to pass as a temporary burst even if it is above the defined maximum rate An action to be applied to frames that are over the limits called out of profile traffic where such frames can be passed as is dropped or passed but remapped to a new DSCP value that marks them as lower priority frames for all subsequent handling within the device Assigning a policer to a class map is done when a class map is added to a policy If the policer is an aggregate policer you must create it using the Aggregate Policer page Defining Aggregate Policers An aggregate policer applies the QoS to one or more class maps therefore one or more flows An aggregation policer can support class maps from different policies and applies the QoS to all its flow s in aggregation regardless of policies and ports The device supports aggregate policers and single policers only when operating in Layer 2 mode in devices that support a separate Layer 2 system mode To define an aggregate policer Click Quality of
501. r the device It also displays the current power savings To enable Green Ethernet and EEE and view power savings STEP 1 Click Port Management gt Green Ethernet gt Properties STEP 2 Enter the values for the following fields Energy Detect Mode Disabled by default Click the checkbox to enable Short Reach Globally enable or disable Short Reach mode if there are GE ports on the device NOTE If Short Reach is enabled EEE must be disabled Port LEDs Select to enable the port LEDs When these are disabled they do not display link status activity etc Power Savings Displays the percentage of power saved by running Green Ethernet and Short Reach The power savings displayed is only relevant to the power saved by Short Reach and Energy Detect modes The EEE power savings is dynamic by nature since it is based on port utilization and is therefore not taken into consideration The power saving calculation is performed by comparing the maximum power consumption without power savings to the current consumption Cumulative Energy Saved Displays the amount of energy saved from the last device reboot This value is updated each time there is an event that affects power saving 802 3 Energy Efficient Ethernet EEE Globally enable or disable EEE mode 142 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Port Management 9 Configuring Green Ethernet STEP 3 Clic
502. r the number of minutes that must pass before a non responsive RADIUS server is bypassed for service requests If Use Default is selected the device uses the default value for the dead time If you enter O minutes there is no dead time Usage Type Enter the RADIUS server authentication type The options are Login RADIUS server is used for authenticating users that ask to administer the device 802 1X RADIUS server is used for 802 1x authentication Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 341 18 Security Management Access Method All RADIUS server is used for authenticating user that ask to administer the device and for 802 1X authentication STEP 6 To display sensitive data in plaintext form in the configuration file click Display Sensitive Data As Plaintext STEP 7 Click Apply The RADIUS server definition is added to the Running Configuration file of the device Management Access Method Access profiles determine how to authenticate and authorize users accessing the device through various access methods Access Profiles can limit management access from specific sources Only users who pass both the active access profile and the management access authentication methods are given management access to the device There can only be a single access profile active on the device at one time Access profiles consist of one or more rules The
503. rase which is the passphrase of its Running Configuration SSD normally performs encryption and decryption of sensitive data with the key generated from the local passphrase The local passphrase can be configured to be either the default passphrase or a user defined passphrase By default the local passphrase and default passphrase are identical It can be changed by administrative actions from either the Command Line Interface if available or the web based interface It is automatically changed to the passphrase in the startup configuration file when the startup configuration becomes the running configuration of the device Whena device is reset to factory default the local passphrase is reset to the default passphrase Configuration File Passphrase Control File passphrase control provides additional protection for a user defined passphrase and the sensitive data that are encrypted with the key generated from the user defined passphrase in text based configuration files The following are the existing passphrase control modes Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 445 Security Secure Sensitive Data Management SSD Properties Unrestricted default h The device includes its passphrase when creating a configuration file This enables any device accepting the configuration file to learn the passphrase from the file Restricted The device restricts its pa
504. rating normally Fail Fan is not operating correctly N A Fan ID is not applicable for the specific model Fan Direction On relevant devices The direction that the fans are working in for example Front to Back Diagnostics See Administration Diagnostics Discovery Bonjour See Bonjour Discovery LLDP See Configuring LLDP Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 69 o Administration Discovery CDP Discovery CDP See Configuring CDP Ping is a utility used to test if a remote host can be reached and to measure the round trip time for packets sent from the device to a destination device Ping operates by sending Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP echo request packets to the target host and waiting for an ICMP response sometimes called a pong It measures the round trip time and records any packet loss To ping a host STEP 1 Click Administration gt Ping STEP 2 Configure ping by entering the fields Host Definition Select whether to specify the source interface by its IP address or name This field influences the interfaces that are displayed in the Source IP field as described below IP Version lf the source interface is identified by its IP address select either IPv4 or IPv6 to indicate that it will be entered in the selected format Source IP Select the source interface whose IPv4 address will be us
505. ration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration 1 7 IPv4 Management and Interfaces DHCP Snooping Binding Database See How the DHCP Snooping Binding Database is Built for a description of how dynamic entries are added to the DHCP Snooping Binding database Note the following points about maintenance of the DHCP Snooping Binding database The device does not update the DHCP Snooping Binding database when a station moves to another interface If a port is down the entries for that port are not deleted When DHCP Snooping is disabled for a VLAN the binding entries that were collected for that VLAN are removed If the database is full DHCP Snooping continue to forward packets but new entries are not created Note that if the IP source guard and or ARP inspection features are active the clients that are not written in the DHCP Snooping Binding database are not be able to connect to the network To add entries to the DHCP Snooping Binding database STEP 1 Click IP Configuration gt IPv4 Management and Interfaces gt DHCP Snooping Relay gt DHCP Snooping Binding Database To see a subset of entries in the DHCP Snooping Binding database enter the relevant search criteria and click Go The fields in the DHCP Snooping Binding Database are displayed These are described in the Add page except for the IP Source Guard field Status Active IP Source Guard is active on the device Inactive IP So
506. ration file See Auto Configuration via DHCP Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 43 Administration File Management Download Backup Configuration Log STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 Downloading or Backing up a Configuration or Log File To backup or restore the system configuration file Click Administration gt File Management gt Download Backup Configuration Log Select the Transfer Method If you selected via TFTP enter the parameters Otherwise skip to STEP 4 Select either Download or Backup as the Save Action Download Save Action Specifies that the file on another device replaces a file type on the device Enter the following fields a Server Definition Select whether to specify the TFTP server by IP address or by domain name b IP Version Select whether an IPv4 or an IPv6 address is used NOTE If the server is selected by name in the Server Definition there is no need to select the IP Version related options c IPv6 Address Type Select the IPv6 address type if used The options are Link Local The IPv6 address uniquely identifies hosts on a single network link A link local address has a prefix of FE80 is not routable and can be used for communication only on the local network Only one link local address is supported If a link local address exists on the interface this entry replaces the address in the configuration
507. re enabled auto Smartport mode is enabled Basic QoS with trusted DSCP is enabled and all ports are members of default VLAN 1 which is also the default Voice VLAN In addition Dynamic Voice VLAN mode is the default to Auto Voice VLAN with enabling based on trigger and Auto Smartport is the default to be enabled depending on Auto Voice VLAN Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 213 13 VLAN Management Voice VLAN NOTE NOTE Voice VLAN Triggers When the Dynamic Voice VLAN mode is Enable Auto Voice VLAN Auto Voice VLAN becomes operational only if one or more triggers occur Possible triggers are static voice VLAN configuration voice VLAN information received in neighbor CDP advertisement and voice VLAN information received in the Voice VLAN Discovery Protocol VSDP If desired you can activate Auto Voice VLAN immediately without waiting for a trigger When Auto Smartport is enabled depending on Auto Voice VLAN mode Auto Smartport is enabled when Auto Voice VLAN becomes operational If desired you can make Auto Smartport independent of Auto Voice VLAN The default configuration list here applies to switches whose firmware version supports Auto Voice VLAN out of the box It also applies to unconfigured switches that have been upgraded to the firmware version that supports Auto Voice VLAN The defaults and the voice VLAN triggers are designed to have n
508. re refreshed every 60 seconds Counter Set The options are Set 1 Displays the statistics for Set 1 that contains all interfaces and queues with a high DP Drop Precedence Set 2 Displays the statistics for Set 2 that contains all interfaces and queues with a low DP Interface Queue statistics are displayed for this interface Queue Packets were forwarded or tail dropped from this queue Drop Precedence Lowest drop precedence has the lowest probability of being dropped Total Packets Number of packets forwarded or tail dropped Tail Drop Packets Percentage of packets that were tail dropped STEP 2 Click Add STEP 3 Enter the parameters Counter Set Select the counter set Set 1 Displays the statistics for Set 1 that contains all interfaces and queues with a high DP Drop Precedence Set 2 Displays the statistics for Set 2 that contains all interfaces and queues with a low DP Interface Select the ports for which statistics are displayed The options are Port Selects the port on the selected unit number for which statistics are displayed All Ports Specifies that statistics are displayed for all ports Queue Select the queue for which statistics are displayed Drop Precedence Enter drop precedence that indicates the probability of being dropped Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 518
509. reate the Binding database and are handled as described below If DHCP Snooping is not enabled all ports are trusted by default How the DHCP Snooping Binding Database is Built The following describes how the device handles DHCP packets when both the DHCP client and DHCP server are trusted The DHCP Snooping Binding database is built in this process DHCP Trusted Packet Handling 5 Switch S 5 DHCP Client 6 IP Address DHCP Server Network Device 2 345143 The actions are Device sends DHCPDISCOVER to request an IP address or DHCPREQUEST to accept an IP address and lease Device snoops packet and adds the IP MAC information to the DHCP Snooping Binding database Device forwards DHCPDISCOVER or DHCPREQUEST packets DHCP server sends DHCPOFFER packet to offer an IP address DHCPACK to assign one or DHCPNAK to deny the address request Device snoops packet If an entry exists in the DHCP Snooping Binding table that matches the packet the device replaces it with IP MAC binding on receipt of DHCPACK 286 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration IPv4 Management and Interfaces 17 STEP 6 Device forwards DHCPOFFER DHCPACK or DHCPNAK The following summarizes how DHCP packets are handled from both trusted and untrusted ports The DHCP Snooping Binding database is stored in non volatile memory D
510. regate traffic between various customers while preserving the customer VLAN tags Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 197 13 VLAN Management Configuring Default VLAN Settings Customer traffic is encapsulated with an S tag with TPID 0x8100 regardless of whether it was originally c tagged or untagged The S tag allows this traffic to be treated as an aggregate within a provider bridge network where the bridging is based on the S tag VID S VID only The S Tag is preserved while traffic is forwarded through the network service provider s infrastructure and is later removed by an egress device An additional benefit of QinQ is that there is no need to configure customers edge devices QinQ is enabled in the VLAN Management gt Interface Settings page VLAN Configuration Workflow To configure VLANs 1 If required change the default VLAN by using the Configuring Default VLAN Settings section 2 Create the required VLANs by using the Creating VLANs section 3 Set the desired VLAN related configuration for ports and enable QinQ on an interface using the Configuring VLAN Interface Settings section 4 Assign interfaces to VLANs by using the Configuring Port to VLAN section or the Configuring VLAN Membership section 5 View the current VLAN port membership for all the interfaces in the Configuring VLAN Membership section Configuring Default VLAN
511. ria Discard Delete the packet Bridge Forward the packet to all VLAN members Click Apply A new MAC address is reserved Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 249 Multicast This section describes the Multicast Forwarding feature and covers the following topics Multicast Forwarding Defining Multicast Properties Adding MAC Group Address Adding IP Multicast Group Addresses Configuring IGMP Snooping MLD Snooping Querying IGMP MLD IP Multicast Group Defining Multicast Router Ports Defining Forward All Multicast Defining Unregistered Multicast Settings Multicast Forwarding Multicast forwarding enables one to many information dissemination Multicast applications are useful for dissemination of information to multiple clients where clients do not require reception of the entire content A typical application is a cable TV like service where clients can join a channel in the middle of a transmission and leave before it ends The data is sent only to relevant ports Forwarding the data only to the relevant ports conserves bandwidth and host resources on links Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 250 Multicast Multicast Forwarding 16 NOTE For Multicast forwarding to work across IP subnets nodes and routers must be Multicast capable A Multicast
512. ries Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security IP Source Guard 18 DHCP Snooping must be globally enabled in order to enable IP Source Guard on an interface IP source guard can be active on an interface only if DHCP Snooping is enabled on at least one of the port s VLANs The interface is DHCP untrusted All packets on trusted ports are forwarded If a port is DHCP trusted filtering of static IP addresses can be configured even though IP Source Guard is not active in that condition by enabling IP Source Guard on the port When the ports status changes from DHCP untrusted to DHCP trusted the static IP address filtering entries remain in the Binding database but they become inactive Port security cannot be enabled if source IP and MAC address filtering is configured on a port IP Source Guard uses TCAM resources and requires a single TCAM rule per IP Source Guard address entry If the number of IP Source Guard entries exceeds the number of available TCAM rules the extra addresses are inactive Filtering If IP Source Guard is enabled on a port then DHCP packets allowed by DHCP Snooping are permitted If source IP address filtering is enabled IPv4 traffic Only traffic with a source IP address that is associated with the port is permitted Non IPv4 traffic Permitted Including ARP packets Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Int
513. rk by the CPE MUX Workflow 1 Configure an access port as a customer port using the VLAN Management gt Interface Settings page See QinQ for more information 2 Configure the network port as a trunk or general port with subscriber and Multicast TV VLAN as tagged VLANS using the VLAN Management gt Interface Settings page 3 Create a Multicast TV VLAN with up to 4094 different VLAN s The VLAN creation is done via the regular VLAN management configuration 4 Associate the customer port to a Multicast TV VLAN using the Port Multicast VLAN Membership page 5 Map the CPE VLAN C TAG to the Multicast TV VLAN S Tag using the CPE VLAN to VLAN page Mapping CPE VLANs to Multicast TV VLANs To support the CPE MUX with subscribers VLANs subscribers may require multiple video providers and each provider is assigned a different external VLAN CPE internal Multicast VLANs must be mapped to the Multicast provider external VLANs 228 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version VLAN Management 1 3 Customer Port Multicast TV VLAN After a CPE VLAN is mapped to a Multicast VLAN it can participate in IGMP snooping To map CPE VLANs STEP 1 Click VLAN Management gt Customer Port Multicast TV VLAN gt CPE VLAN to VLAN STEP 2 Click Add STEP 3 Enter the following fields CPE VLAN Enter the VLAN defined on the CPE box Multicast TV VL
514. rmance of your network Configuring Global Settings The Global Settings page contains information for enabling Trust on the device see the Trust Mode field below This configuration is active when the QoS mode is Basic mode Packets entering a QoS domain are classified at the edge of the QoS domain To define the Trust configuration STEP 1 Click Quality of Service gt QoS Basic Mode gt Global Settings STEP 2 Select the Trust Mode while the device is in Basic mode If a packet CoS level and DSCP tag are mapped to separate queues the Trust mode determines the queue to which the packet is assigned CoS 802 1p traffic is mapped to queues based on the VPT field in the VLAN tag or based on the per port default CoS 802 1p value if there is no VLAN tag on the incoming packet the actual mapping of the VPT to queue can be configured in the mapping CoS 802 1p to Queue page DSCP AIll IP traffic is mapped to queues based on the DSCP field in the IP header The actual mapping of the DSCP to queue can be configured in the DSCP to Queue page If traffic is not IP traffic it is mapped to the best effort queue CoS 802 1p DSCP Either CoS 802 1p or DSCP whichever has been set STEP 3 Select Override Ingress DSCP to override the original DSCP values in the incoming packets with the new values according to the DSCP Override Table When Override Ingress DSCP is enabled the device uses the new DSCP values for egress queueing It
515. rnal Version 27 Status and Statistics View Log 28 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration System Log This section describes the System Log feature which enables the device to generate multiple independent logs Each log is a set of messages describing system events The device generates the following local logs Log sent to the console interface Log written into a cyclical list of logged events in the RAM and erased when the device reboots Log written to a cyclical log file saved to the Flash memory and persists across reboots In addition you can send messages to remote SYSLOG servers in the form of SNMP traps and SYSLOG messages This section covers the following sections Setting System Log Settings Setting Remote Logging Settings Viewing Memory Logs Setting System Log Settings You can enable or disable logging on the Log Settings page and select whether to aggregate log messages You can select the events by severity level Each log message has a severity level marked with the first letter of the severity level concatenated with a dash on each side except for Emergency that is indicated by the letter F For example the log message INIT I InitCompleted has a severity level of I meaning Informational Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Intern
516. rnal Version 239 Spanning Tree Mapping VLANs to a MSTP Instance Switches intended to be in the same MST region are never separated by switches from another MST region If they are separated the region becomes two separate regions This mapping can be done in the VLAN to MST Instance page Use this page if the system operates in MSTP mode To define MSTP STEP 1 Click Spanning Tree gt STP Status and Global Settings Enable MSTP STEP 2 Click Spanning Tree gt MSTP Properties STEP 3 Enter the parameters Region Name Define an MSTP region name Revision Define an unsigned 16 bit number that identifies the revision of the current MST configuration The field range is from O to 65535 Max Hops Set the total number of hops that occur in a specific region before the BPDU is discarded Once the BPDU is discarded the port information is aged out The field range is from 1 to 40 IST Master Displays the regions master STEP 4 Click Apply The MSTP properties are defined and the Running Configuration file is updated Mapping VLANs to a MSTP Instance The VLAN to MSTP Instance page enables you to map each VLAN to a Multiple Spanning Tree Instance MSTI For devices to be in the same region they must have the same mapping of VLANs to MSTIs NOTE The same MSTI can be mapped to more than one VLAN but each VLAN can only have one MST Instance attached to it Configuration on this page and all of the MS
517. rofile DSCP the device remaps the original DSCP value of the out of profile IP packets with a new value based on the Out of Profile DSCP Mapping Table The device uses the new values to assign resources and the egress queues to these packets The device also physically replaces the original DSCP value in the out of profile packets with the new DSCP value To use the out of profile DSCP exceed action remap the DSCP value in the Out Of Profile DSCP Mapping Table Otherwise the action is null because the DSCP value in the table remaps the packets to itself by factory default This feature changes the DSCP tags for incoming traffic switched between trusted QoS domains Changing the DSCP values used in one domain sets the priority of that type of traffic to the DSCP value used in the other domain to identify the same type of traffic These settings are active when the system is in the QoS basic mode and once activated they are active globally For example Assume that there are three levels of service Silver Gold and Platinum and the DSCP incoming values used to mark these levels are 10 20 and 30 respectively If this traffic is forwarded to another service provider that has the same three levels of service but uses DSCP values 16 24 and 48 Out of Profile DSCP Mapping changes the incoming values as they are mapped to the outgoing values Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version
518. rom the list TFTP Server IP Address Name Enter the IP address or the domain name of the TFTP server For Upgrade Source File Name Enter the name of the source file For Backup Destination File Name Enter the name of the backup file STEP 4 If you selected via HTTP HTTPS you can only Upgrade Enter the parameters as described in this step File Type Select one of the following file types Firmware Image Select this to upgrade the firmware image Language Select this to upgrade the language file File Name Click Browse to select a file or enter the path and source file name to be used in the transfer STEP 5 If you selected via SCP Over SSH see SSH Client Authentication for instructions Then enter the following fields only unique fields are described for non unique fields see the descriptions above Remote SSH Server Authentication To enable SSH server authentication which is disabled by default click Edit This takes you to the SSH Server Authentication page to configure the SSH server and return to this page Use the SSH Server Authentication page to select an SSH user authentication method password or public private key set a username and password on the device if the password method is selected and generate an RSA or DSA key if required SSH Client Authentication Client authentication can be done in one of the following ways Use SSH Client System Credentials Sets permanent SSH use
519. router might be a traditional router where each of its interfaces connects to only one VLAN Traffic to and from a traditional IP router must be VLAN untagged The IP router can be a VLAN aware router where each of its interfaces can connect to one or more VLANs Traffic to and from a VLAN aware IP router can be VLAN tagged or untagged Adjacent VLAN aware devices exchange VLAN information with each other by using Generic VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP As a result VLAN information is propagated through a bridged network VLANs on a device can be created statically or dynamically based on the GVRP information exchanged by devices A VLAN can be static or dynamic from GVRP but not both For more information about GVRP refer to the GVRP Settings section Some VLANs can have additional roles including Voice VLAN For more information refer to the Voice VLAN section Guest VLAN Set in the Edit VLAN Authentication page Default VLAN For more information refer to the Configuring Default VLAN Settings section Management VLAN in Layer 2 system mode systems For more information refer to the Layer 2 IP Addressing section QinQ QinQ provides isolation between service provider networks and customers networks The device is a provider bridge that supports port based c tagged service interface With QinQ the device adds an ID tag known as Service Tag S tag to forward traffic over the network The S tag is used to seg
520. rsion VLAN Management 1 3 Voice VLAN Static User defined voice VLAN configuration defined on the device CDP UC that advertised voice VLAN configuration is running CDP LLDP UC that advertised voice VLAN configuration is running LLDP Voice VLAN D The identifier of the advertised or configured voice VLAN Voice VLAN ID The identifier of the current voice VLAN CoS 802 1p The advertised or configured CoS 802 1p values that are used by the LLDP MED as a voice network policy DSCP The advertised or configured DSCP values that are used by the LLDP MED as a voice network policy Best Local Source Displays whether this voice VLAN was used by the device The following options are available Yes The device uses this voice VLAN to synchronize with other Auto Voice VLAN enabled switches This voice VLAN is the voice VLAN for the network unless a voice VLAN from a higher priority source is discovered Only one local source is the best local source No tThis is not the best local source STEP 3 Click Refresh to refresh the information on the page Configuring Telephony OUI OUls are assigned by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Incorporated IEEE Registration Authority Since the number of IP phone manufacturers is limited and well known the known OUI values cause the relevant frames and the port on which they are seen to be automatically assigned to a Voice VLAN
521. rt part of internal VLAN 4095 a reserved VID Excluded The interface is currently not a member of the VLAN This is the default for all the ports and LAGs The port can join the VLAN through GVRP registration Tagged tThe interface is a tagged member of the VLAN Untagged The interface is an untagged member of the VLAN Frames of the VLAN are sent untagged to the interface VLAN Multicast TV VLAN The interface used for Digital TV using Multicast IP The port joins the VLAN with a VLAN tag of Multicast TV VLAN See Access Port Multicast TV VLAN for more information PVID Select to set the PVID of the interface to the VID of the VLAN PVID is a per port setting STEP 4 Click Apply The interfaces are assigned to the VLAN and written to the Running Configuration file You can continue to display and or configure port membership of another VLAN by selecting another VLAN ID Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 203 13 VLAN Management Defining VLAN Membership Configuring VLAN Membership The Port VLAN Membership page displays all ports on the device along with a list of VLANs to which each port belongs If the port based authentication method for an interface is 802 1x and the Administrative Port Control is Auto then Until the port is authenticated it is excluded from all VLANs except guest and unauthenticated ones In the
522. rtport macros for each device type Applying a Smartport Type to an Interface When Smartport types are applied to interfaces the Smartport types and configuration in the associated Smartport macros are saved in the Running Configuration File If the administrator saves the Running Configuration File into the Startup Configuration File the device applies the Smartport types and the Smartport macros to the interfaces after reboot as follows If the Startup Configuration File does not specify a Smartport type for an interface its Smartport type is set to Default If the Startup Configuration File specifies a static Smartport type the Smartport type of the interface is set to this static type If the Startup Configuration File specifies a Smartport type that was dynamically assigned by Auto Smartport Ifthe Auto Smartport Global Operational state the interface Auto Smartport state and the Persistent Status are all Enable the Smartport type is set to this dynamic type Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 161 Smartport Macro Failure and the Reset Operation Else the corresponding anti macro is applied and the interfaces status is set to Default Macro Failure and the Reset Operation A Smartport macro might fail if there is a conflict between the existing configuration of the interface and a Smartport macro When a Smartport macro fails a SYSLOG messag
523. rusted devices For example the links SwitchC H3 SwitchB H4 and SwitchA SwitchD on Figure 7 form the perimeter while links SwitchA SwitchB SwitchB SwitchC and SwitchA R1 are inner links inside the protected area Figure 7 IPv6 First Hop Security Perimeter H1 H2 Switch D IPv6 FHS R1 IPv6 FHS IPv6 FHS Switch C Switch B IPv6 FHS IPv6 FHS 370573 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security IPV6 First Hop Security 2 O Router Advertisement Guard The device role command in the Neighbor Binding policy configuration screen specifies the perimeter Each IPv6 First Hop Security switch establishes binding for neighbors partitioned by the edge In this way binding entries are distributed on IPv6 First Hop Security devices forming the perimeter The IPv6 First Hop Security devices can then provide binding integrity to the inside of the perimeter without setting up bindings for all the addresses on each device Router Advertisement Guard Router Advertisement RA Guard is the first FHS feature that treats trapped RA messages RA Guard supports the following functions Filtering of received RA CPA and ICMPv6 redirect messages Validation of received RA messages Filtering of Received RA CPA and IPCMvV6 redirect Messages
524. ry numbers in the to field 3 Click Apply to save the changes and click Close to return to the main page After selecting an entry in the table click Delete to remove Details Click to display the details associated with the entry selected Edit Select the entry and click Edit The Edit page appears and the entry can be modified 1 Click Apply to save the changes to the Running Configuration 2 Click Close to return to the main page Go Enter the query filtering criteria and click Go The results are displayed on the page Refresh Clich Refresh to refresh the counter values Test Click Test to perform the related tests Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Getting Started Window Navigation Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 11 Getting Started Window Navigation Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Status and Statistics This section describes how to view device statistics It covers the following topics System Summary Viewing Ethernet Interfaces Viewing Etherlike Statistics lt 300 500 gt Viewing GVRP Statistics Viewing 802 1X EAP Statistics lt 300 500 gt Viewing TCAM Utilization Health Managing RMON View Log System Summary See System Settings
525. s It may be required to generate a new certificate to replace the default certificate found on the device To create a new certificate Click Security gt SSL Server gt SSL Server Authentication Settings Information appears for certificate 1 and 2 in the SSL Server Key Table These fields are defined in the Edit page except for the following fields Valid From Specifies the date from which the certificate is valid Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 349 18 Security SSL Server Valid To Specifies the date up to which the certificate is valid Certificate Source Specifies whether the certificate was generated by the system Auto Generated or the user User Defined STEP 2 Select an active certificate STEP 3 Click Generate Certificate Request STEP 4 Enter the following fields Regenerate RSA Key Select to regenerate the RSA key Key Length Enter the length of the RSA key to be generated Common Name Specifies the fully qualified device URL or IP address If unspecified defaults to the lowest IP address of the device when the certificate is generated Organization Unit Specifies the organization unit or department name Organization Name Specifies the organization name Location Specifies the location or city name State Specifies the state or province name Country Specifies the country name Duration Sp
526. s multi re mapped to are re dropped are re mapped to are re bridged based are sessions the guest mapped to dropped the RADIUS mapped on the static bridged VLAN the guest unless assigned to the VLAN based on VLAN they VLAN Radius configuration the static unless belongs VLAN VLAN they to the unless configurat belongs to unauthent they ion the icated belongs unauthent VLANs to the icated unauthent VLANs icated VLANs Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 409 19 Security 802 1X Authentication Authentication Method and Port Mode Support 410 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security IPV6 First Hop Security This section describes how First Hop Security FHS works and how to configure it in the GUI It covers the following topics First Hop Security Overview Router Advertisement Guard Neighbor Discovery Inspection DHCPv6 Guard Neighbor Binding Integrity Attack Protection Policies Global Parameters and System Defaults Common Tasks Default Settings and Configuration Default Settings and Configuration Configuring First Hop Security through Web GUI Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 410 Security IPV6 First Hop Security First Hop Security Overview 20 First Hop Security Overview IPv6 FHS
527. s not used starting from 4094 To configure the IPv4 addresses STEP 1 Click IP Configuration gt IPv4 Management and Interfaces gt IP v4 Interface This page displays the following fields in the IPv4 Interface Table _Interface Interface for which the IP address is defined IP Address Type IP address defined as static or DHCP Dynamic IP Address Received from DHCP server Static Entered manually IP Address Configured IP address for the interface _Mask Configured IP address mask Status Results of the IP address duplication check Tentative tThere is no final result for the IP address duplication check Valid The IP address collision check was completed and no IP address collision was detected Valid Duplicated The IP address duplication check was completed and a duplicate IP address was detected Duplicated A duplicated IP address was detected for the default IP address 274 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration 1 7 IPv4 Management and Interfaces Delayed The assignment of the IP address is delayed for 60 second if DHCP Client is enabled on startup in order to give time to discover DHCP address Not Received Relevant for DHCP Address When a DCHP Client starts a discovery process it assigns a dummy IP address 0 0 0 0 before the real address is obtained This dummy address has the
528. s a DHCP v6 stateless configuration client When DHCPVv6 messages are received from the server for example when you press the Restart button on IPv6 Interfaces page When DHCPv6 information is refreshed by the device After rebooting the device when stateless DHCPV6 client is enabled When the DHCPV6 server packets contain the configuration filename option DHCP Server Options DHCP messages might contain the configuration server name address and the configuration file name path these are optional options These options are found in the Offer message coming from the DHCPV4 servers and in the Information Reply messages coming from DHCPV6 servers Backup information configuration server name address and configuration file name path can be configured in the Auto Configuration page This information is used when the DHCP v4 message does not contain this information but it is not used by DHCP v6 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 51 Administration File Management Auto Configuration via DHCP NOTE Auto Configuration Download Protocol TFTP or SCP The Auto Configuration download protocol can be configured as follows Auto By File Extension Default If this option is selected a user defined file extension indicates that files with this extension are downloaded using SCP over SSH while files with other extensions are downloaded using T
529. s a graphic view of the device and displays device status hardware information firmware version information general PoE status and other items Displaying the System Summary To view system information click Status and Statistics gt System Summary The System Summary page contains system and hardware information System Information System Description A description of the system System Location Physical location of the device Click Edit to go the System Settings page to enter this value System Contact Name of a contact person Click Edit to go the System Settings page to enter this value Host Name Name of the device Click Edit to go the System Settings page to enter this value By default the device hostname is composed of the word device concatenated with the three least significant bytes of the device MAC address the six furthest right hexadecimal digits System Uptime Time that has elapsed since the last reboot 60 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration System Settings Current Time Current system time Base MAC Address Device MAC address Jumbo Frames Jumbo frame support status This support can be enabled or disabled by using the Port Settings page of the Port Management menu NOTE Jumbo frames support takes effect only after it is enabled and after the device is rebooted TCP UDP Services Status
530. s an authorized client Only one host can be authorized on a port When a port is unauthorized and the guest VLAN is enabled untagged traffic is remapped to the guest VLAN Tagged traffic is dropped unless it belongs to the guest VLAN or to an unauthenticated VLAN If a guest VLAN is not enabled on the port only tagged traffic belonging to the unauthenticated VLANs is bridged When a port is authorized untagged and tagged traffic from the authorized host is bridged based on the static VLAN membership port configuration Traffic from other hosts is dropped A user can specify that untagged traffic from the authorized host will be remapped to a VLAN that is assigned by a RADIUS server during the authentication process Tagged traffic is dropped unless it belongs to the RADIUS assigned VLAN or the unauthenticated VLANs Radius VLAN assignment on a port is set in the Security gt 802 1X MAC Web Authentication gt Port Authentication page Multi Host Mode A port is authorized if there is if there is at least one authorized client 384 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security 802 1X Authentication 1 Authenticator Overview When a port is unauthorized and a guest VLAN is enabled untagged traffic is remapped to the guest VLAN Tagged traffic is dropped unless it belongs to the guest VLAN or to an unauthenticated VLAN If guest VLAN is not enabled on a port
531. s are as follows Permit Forward packets that meet the ACE criteria Deny Drop packets that meet the ACE criteria Shutdown Drop packets that meet the ACE criteria and disable the port to which the packets were addressed Ports are reactivated from the Port Management page Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 484 Access Control IPv6 Based ACLs Time Range Select to enable limiting the use of the ACL to a specific time range Time Range Name lIf Time Range is selected select the time range to be used Time ranges are described in the lt 300 500 gt Time Range section Protocol Select to create an ACE based ona specific protocol Select Any IPv6 to accept all IP protocols Otherwise select one of the following protocols TCP Transmission Control Protocol Enables two hosts to communicate and exchange data streams TCP guarantees packet delivery and guarantees that packets are transmitted and received in the order they were sent UDP UvUser Datagram Protocol Transmits packets but does not guarantee their delivery ICMP Matches packets to the Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP Protocol ID to Match Enter the ID of the protocol to be matched Source IP Address Select Any if all source address are acceptable or User defined to enter a source address or range of source addresses Source IP Address Va
532. s are written to the Running Configuration file Defining Host and Session Authentication The Host and Session Authentication page enables defining the mode in which 802 1X operates on the port and the action to perform if a violation has been detected See Port Host Modes for an explanation of these modes 400 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security 802 1X Authentication 1 8021X Configuration Through the GUI STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 To define 802 1X advanced settings for ports Click Security gt 802 1X MAC Web Authentication gt Host and Session Authentication 802 1X authentication parameters are described for all ports All fields except the following are described in the Edit Host and Session Authentication page Number of Single Host Violations Displays the number of packets that arrive on the interface in single host mode from a host whose MAC address is not the supplicant MAC address Select a port and click Edit Enter the parameters Interface Enter a port number for which host authentication is enabled Host Authentication Select one of the modes These modes are described above in Port Host Modes The following fields are only relevant if you select Single in the Host Authentication field Single Host Violation Settings Action on Violation Select the action to be applied to packets arriving in
533. s delay using the algorithm described in RFC 2030 78 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration Time Settings Configuring System Time 6 Source How SNTP server was defined for example manually or from DHCPV6 server Interface lInterface on which packets are received STEP 3 Toadda Unicast SNTP server enable SNTP Client Unicast STEP 4 Click Add STEP 5 Enter the following parameters Server Definition Select if the SNTP server is going to be identified by its IP address or if you are going to select a well known SNTP server by name from the list NOTE To specify a well known SNTP server the device must be connected to the Internet and configured with a DNS server or configured so that a DNS server is identified by using DHCP See DNS Settings IP Version Select the version of the IP address Version 6 or Version 4 IPv6 Address Type Select the IPv6 address type if IPv6 is used The options are Link Local The IPv6 address uniquely identifies hosts on a single network link A link local address has a prefix of FE80 is not routable and can be used for communication only on the local network Only one link local address is supported If a link local address exists on the interface this entry replaces the address in the configuration Global The IPv6 address is a global Unicast IPV6 type that is visible and reachable
534. s higher priority than auto voice VLAN that was learned from external sources STEP 3 Click Apply The VLAN properties are written to the Running Configuration file NOTE Displaying Auto Voice VLAN Settings If Auto Voice VLAN mode is enabled use the Auto Voice VLAN page to view the relevant global and interface parameters You can also use this page to manually restart Auto Voice VLAN by clicking Restart Auto Voice VLAN After a short delay this resets the voice VLAN to the default voice VLAN and restarts the Auto Voice VLAN discovery and synchronization process on all the switches in the LAN that are Auto Voice VLAN enabled This only resets the voice VLAN to the default voice vlan if the Source Type is in the Inactive state To view Auto Voice VLAN parameters Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 219 VLAN Management Voice VLAN STEP 1 Click VLAN Management gt Voice VLAN gt Auto Voice VLAN The Operation Status block on this page shows the information about the current voice VLAN and its source Auto Voice VLAN Status Displays whether Auto Voice VLAN is enabled Voice VLAN ID The identifier of the current voice VLAN Source Type Displays the type of source where the voice VLAN is discovered by the root device CoS 802 1p Displays CoS 802 1p values to be used by the LLDP MED as a voice network policy DSCP Displays DS
535. s mode the period is defined per client During the quiet period the switch does not accept or initiate authentication requests The period is only applied to 802 1x based and Web based authentications You can also specify the maximum number of login attempts before the quiet period is started A value of O specifies the unlimited number of login attempts The duration of the quiet period and the maximum number of login attempts can be set in the Port Authentication page Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 393 19 Security 802 1X Authentication Common Tasks Common Tasks STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 STEP 6 STEP 7 STEP 8 STEP 9 STEP 10 STEP 11 STEP 12 STEP 13 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 Workflow 1 To enable 802 1x authentication on a port Click Security gt 802 1X MAC Web Authentication gt Properties Enable Port based Authentication Select the Authentication Method Click Apply and the Running Configuration file is updated Click Security gt 802 1X MAC Web Authentication gt Host and Session Select the required port and click Edit Set the Host Authentication mode Click Apply and the Running Configuration file is updated Click Security gt 802 1X MAC Web Authentication gt Port Authentication Select a port and click Edit Set the Administrative Port Control field to Auto Define
536. s not support UDLD or The neighbor does not receive traffic from the local device The UDLD action in this case depends on the UDLD mode of the device as explained below UDLD supports the following modes of operation Normal Ifthe link is unidirectional the port is shut down Ifthe link is undetermined the port is not shut down Its status is changed to undetermined and a notification is sent Aggressive If the link is unidirectional or undetermined the port is shut down Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 147 Port Management Unidirectional Link Detection UDLD Operation UDLD is enabled on a port when one of the following occurs The port is a fiber port and UDLD is enabled globally The port is a copper port and you specifically enable UDLD on it How UDLD Works When UDLD is enabled on a port the following actions are performed UDLD initiates the detection state on the port In this state UDLD periodically sends messages on every active interface to all neighbors These messages contain the device ID of all known neighbors It sends these messages according to a user defined message time UDLD receives UDLD messages from neighboring devices It caches these messages until the expiration time 3 times message time has passed If a new message is received before the expiration time the information in that message replaces th
537. s that are used if no values are set in a policy If required either configure a user defined policy or add rules to the default policies for the feature Attach the policy to a VLAN port or LAG using either the Policy Attachment VLAN or Policy Attachment Port pages Neighbor Discovery Inspection Work Flow In the ND Inspection Settings page enter the list of VLANs on which this feature is enabled In this same page set the global configuration values that are used if no values are set in a policy Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 423 20 Security IPV6 First Hop Security Default Settings and Configuration STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP If required either configure a user defined policy or add rules to the default policies for the feature Attach the policy to a VLAN port or LAG using either the Policy Attachment VLAN or Policy Attachment Port pages Neighbor Binding Work Flow In the Neighbor Bindings Settings page enter the list of VLANs on which this feature is enabled In this same page set the global configuration values that are used if no values are set in a policy If required either configure a user defined policy or add rules the default policies for the feature Add any manual entries required in the Neighbor Binding Table page Attach the policy to a VLAN port or LAG using either the Pol
538. s the time zone you have configured This acronym appears in the Actual Time field Daylight Savings Settings Select how DST is defined Daylight Savings Select to enable Daylight Saving Time Time Set Offset Enter the number of minutes offset from GMT ranging from 1 1440 The default is 60 Daylight Savings Type Click one of the following USA DST is set according to the dates used in the USA Furopean DST is set according to the dates used by the European Union and other countries that use this standard By Dates DST is set manually typically for a country other than the USA or a European country Enter the following parameters kecurring DST occurs on the same date every year Selecting By Dates allows customization of the start and stop of DST 76 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration Time Settings 6 Configuring System Time From Day and time that DST starts To Day and time that DST ends Selecting Recurring allows different customization of the start and stop of DST From Date when DST begins each year Day Day of the week on which DST begins every year Week Week within the month from which DST begins every year Month Month of the year in which DST begins every year Time The time at which DST begins every year To Date when DST ends each year For example DST ends lo
539. saved to the Running Configuration file To define the member or candidate ports in a LAG STEP 1 Select the LAG to be configured and click Edit STEP 2 Enter the values for the following fields LAG Select the LAG number LAG Name Enter the LAG name or a comment LACP Selectto enable LACP on the selected LAG This makes it a dynamic LAG This field can only be enabled after moving a port to the LAG in the next field 132 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Port Management Link Aggregation 9 Port List Move those ports that are to be assigned to the LAG from the Port List to the LAG Members list Up to eight ports per static LAG can be assigned and 16 ports can be assigned to a dynamic LAG STEP 3 Click Apply LAG membership is saved to the Running Configuration file Configuring LAG Settings The LAG Settings page displays a table of current settings for all LAGs You can configure the settings of selected LAGs and reactivate suspended LAGs by launching the Edit LAG Settings page To configure the LAG settings or reactivate a suspended LAG STEP 1 Click Port Management gt Link Aggregation gt LAG Settings STEP 2 Selecta LAG and click Edit STEP 3 Enter the values for the following fields LAG Select the LAG ID number Description Enter the LAG name or a comment LAG Type Displays the port type that comprises
540. sco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 311 IP Configuration IPv6 Management and Interfaces Sequence Number Specifies the place of the prefix within the prefix list Select one of the following options Auto Numbering Puts the new IPV6 prefix after the last entry of the prefix list The sequence number equals the last sequence number plus 5 If the list is empty the first prefix list entry is assigned the number 5 and subsequent prefix list entries increment by 5 User Defined Puts the new IPV6 prefix into the place specified by the parameter If an entry with the number exists it is replaced by the new one Rule Type Enter the rule for the prefix list Permit Permits networks that matches the condition Deny Denies networks that matches the condition Description Text IPv6 Prefix IP route prefix Prefix Length IP route prefix length Greater Than Minimum prefix length to be used for matching Select one of the following options No Limit No minimum prefix length to be used for matching User Defined Minimum prefix length to be matched Lower Than Maximum prefix length to be used for matching Select one of the following options No Limit No maximum prefix length to be used for matching User Defined Maximum prefix length to be matched Description Enter a description of the prefix list STEP 4
541. select the time range to be used Time ranges are defined in the lt 300 500 gt Time Range page Power Priority Level Select the port priority low high or critical for use when the power supply is low For example if the power supply is running at 99 usage and port 1 is prioritized as high but port 3 is prioritized as low port 1 receives power and port 3 might be denied power Administrative Power Allocation This field appears only if the Power Mode set in the PoE Properties page is Port Limit If the Power mode is Power Limit enter the power in milliwatts allocated to the port Max Power Allocation This field appears only if the Power Mode set in the PoE Properties page is Power Limit Displays the maximum amount of power permitted on this port 192 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Port Management PoE 1 2 Configuring PoE Settings Class tThis field appears only if the Power Mode set in the PoE Properties page is Class Limit The class determines the power level Class Maximum Power Delivered by Device Port 0 15 4 watt 1 4 0 watt 2 70 watt 3 15 4 watt 4 30 0 watt Power Consumption Displays the amount of power in milliwatts assigned to the powered device connected to the selected interface Overload Counter Displays the total number of power overload occurrences Short Counter Displa
542. set to Not Trusted the default CoS values configured on the interface is ignored and all the traffic goes to queue 1 See the Quality of Service gt QoS Advanced Mode gt Global Settings page for details If you have a policy on an interface then the Default Mode is irrelevant the action is according to the policy configuration and unmatched traffic is dropped STEP 4 Select Override Ingress DSCP to override the original DSCP values in the incoming packets with the new values according to the DSCP Override Table When Override Ingress DSCP is enabled the device uses the new DSCP values for egress queueing It also replaces the original DSCP values in the packets with the new DSCP values 507 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Quality of Service QoS Advanced Mode 25 NOTE The frame is mapped to an egress queue using the new rewritten value and not by the original DSCP value STEP 5 If Override Ingress DSCP was enabled click DSCP Override Table to reconfigure DSCP See the DSCP Override Table page for details Configuring Out of Profile DSCP Mapping When a policer is assigned to a class maps flows you can specify the action to take when the amount of traffic in the flow s exceeds the QoS specified limits The portion of the traffic that causes the flow to exceed its QoS limit is referred to as out of profile packets If the exceed action is Out of P
543. sing Defining Class Mapping Only then can the ACL be modified as described in this section Defining MAC based ACLs MAC based ACLs are used to filter traffic based on Layer 2 fields MAC based ACLs check all frames for a match Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 476 Access Control Defining MAC based ACLs MAC based ACLs are defined in the MAC Based ACL page The rules are defined in the MAC Based ACE page To define a MAC based ACL STEP 1 Click Access Control gt MAC Based ACL This page contains a list of all currently defined MAC based ACLs STEP 2 Click Add STEP 3 Enter the name of the new ACL in the ACL Name field ACL names are case sensitive STEP 4 Click Apply The MAC based ACL is saved to the Running Configuration file Adding Rules to a MAC based ACL NOTE Each MAC based rule consumes one TCAM rule Note that the TCAM allocation is performed in couples such that for the first ACE 2 TCAM rules are allocated and the second TCAM rule is allocated to the next ACE and so forth To add rules ACEs to an ACL STEP 1 Click Access Control gt Mac Based ACE STEP 2 Select an ACL and click Go The ACEs in the ACL are listed STEP 3 Click Add STEP 4 Enter the parameters ACL Name Displays the name of the ACL to which an ACE is being added Priority Enter the priority of the ACE ACEs with higher priority are processed firs
544. sion 65 Administration Rebooting the Device Reboot Reboots the device Since any unsaved information in the Running Configuration is discarded when the device is rebooted you must click Save in the upper right corner of any window to preserve current configuration across the boot process If the Save option is not displayed the Running Configuration matches the Startup Configuration and no action is necessary The following options are available Immediate Reboot immediately Date Enter the date month day and time hour and minutes of the schedule reboot This schedules a reload of the software to take place at the specified time using a 24 hour clock If you specify the month and day the reload is scheduled to take place at the specified time and date If you do not specify the month and day the reload takes place at the specified time on the current day if the specified time is later than the current time or on the next day if the specified time is earlier than the current time Specifying 00 00 schedules the reload for midnight The reload must take place within 24 days NOTE This option can only be used if the system time has either been set manually or by SNTP In Reboot within the specified number of hours and minutes The maximum amount of time that can pass is 24 days Reboot to Factory Defaults Reboots the device by using the factory default configuration This process erases the Startup Con
545. sion of the configuration file If this option is selected the extension of the configuration file does not necessarily have to be given If it is not given the default extension is used as indicated below File Extension for SCP lf Auto By File Extension is selected you can indicate a file extension here Any file with this extension is downloaded using SCP If no extension is entered the default file extension scp is used TFTP Only Select to indicate that only the TFTP protocol is to be used for auto configuration SCP Only Select to indicate that only the SCP protocol is to be used for auto configuration SSH Settings for SCP When using SCP for downloading the configuration files select one of the following options Remote SSH Server Authentication Click on the Enable Disable link to navigate to the SSH Server Authentication page There you can enable authentication of the SSH server to be used for the download and enter the trusted SSH server if required SSH Client Authentication Click on the System Credentials link to enter user credentials in the SSH User Authentication page STEP 3 Enter the following optional information to be used if no configuration file name was received from the DHCP server Backup Server Definition Select By IP address or By name to configure the server Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 55
546. ss 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Port Management 9 UDLD STEP 5 Click Apply The Running Configuration file is updated UDLD See Port Management Unidirectional Link Detection PoE See Port Management PoE Configuring Green Ethernet This section describes the Green Ethernet feature that is designed to save power on the device It contains the following sections Green Ethernet Overview Setting Global Green Ethernet Properties Setting Green Ethernet Properties for Ports Green Ethernet Overview Green Ethernet is a common name for a set of features that is designed to be environmentally friendly and to reduce the power consumption of a device Green Ethernet is different from EEE in that green ethernet energy detect is enabled on all devices where only the Gigabyte ports are enable with EEE The Green Ethernet feature can reduce overall power usage in the following ways Energy Detect Mode On an inactive link the port moves into inactive mode saving power while keeping the Administrative status of the port Up Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 137 Port Management Configuring Green Ethernet Recovery from this mode to full operational mode is fast transparent and no frames are lost This mode is supported on both GE and FE ports Short Reach Mode This feature pro
547. ss is a global Unicast IPV6 type that is visible and reachable from other networks Link Local Interface Select the link local interface if IPv6 Address Type Link Local is selected from the pull down list Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 538 SNMP Notification Recipients Recipient IP Address Name Enter the IP address or server name of where the traps are sent UDP Port Enter the UDP port used to for notifications on the recipient device Notification Type Select whether to send traps or informs If both are required two recipients must be created Timeout Enter the amount of time Seconds the device waits before re sending informs traps Timeout Range 1 300 default 15 Retries Enter the number of times that the device resends an inform request Retries Range 1 255 default 3 User Name Select from the drop down list the user to whom SNMP notifications are sent In order to receive notifications this user must be defined on the SNMP User page and its engine ID must be remote Security Level Select how much authentication is applied to the packet NOTE The Security Level here depends on which User Name was selected If this User Name was configured as No Authentication the Security Level is No Authentication only However if this User Name has assigned Authentication and Privacy on the User page the security level
548. ssphrase from being exported into a configuration file Restricted mode protects the encrypted sensitive data in a configuration file from devices that do not have the passphrase This mode should be used when a user does not want to expose the passphrase in a configuration file After a device is reset to the factory default its local passphrase is reset to the default passphrase As a result the device will be not able to decrypt any sensitive data encrypted based on a user defined passphrase entered from a management session GUI CLI or in any configuration file with restricted mode including the files created by the device itself before it is reset to factory default This remains until the device is manually reconfigured with the user defined passphrase or learns the user defined passphrase from a configuration file Configuration File Integrity Control A user can protect a configuration file from being tampered or modified by creating the configuration file with Configuration File Integrity Control It is recommended that Configuration File Integrity Control be enabled when a device uses a user defined passphrase with Unrestricted Configuration File Passprhase Control A CAUTION Any modification made to a configuration file that is integrity protected is considered tampering A device determines whether the integrity of a configuration file is protected by examining the File Integrity Control command in the file s SSD Contro
549. st gt MAC Group Address Enter the parameters VLAN ID Equals To Set the VLAN ID of the group to be displayed MAC Group Address Equals To Set the MAC address of the Multicast group to be displayed If no MAC Group Address is specified the page contains all the MAC Group Addresses from the selected VLAN Click Go and the MAC Multicast group addresses are displayed in the lower block Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 255 Multicast Adding MAC Group Address Entries that were created both in this page and in the IP Multicast Group Address page are displayed For those created in the IP Multicast Group Address page the IP addresses are converted to MAC addresses STEP 4 Click Add to add a static MAC Group Address STEP 5 Enter the parameters VLAN ID Defines the VLAN ID of the new Multicast group MAC Group Address Defines the MAC address of the new Multicast group STEP 6 Click Apply the MAC Multicast group is saved to the Running Configuration file To configure and display the registration for the interfaces within the group select an address and click Details The page contains VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the Multicast group MAC Group Address The MAC address of the group STEP 7 Select the port or LAG to be displayed from the Filter Interface Type menu STEP 8 Click Go to display the port or LAG membership STEP 9 Sel
550. status of Not Received STEP 2 Click Add STEP 3 Select one of the following fields Interface Select Port LAG or VLAN as the interface associated with this IP configuration and select an interface from the list IP Address Type Select one of the following options Dynamic IP Address Receive the IP address from a DHCP server Static IP Address Enter the IP address STEP 4 SelectDynamic Address or Static Address STEP 5 If Static Address was selected enter the IP Address for this interface and enter one of the following Network Mask IP mask for this address Prefix Length Length of the IPv4 prefix STEP 6 Click Apply The IPv4 address settings are written to the Running Configuration file IPv4 Routes When the device is in Layer 3 system mode this page enables configuring and viewing IPv4 static routes on the device When routing traffic the next hop is decided on according to the longest prefix match LPM algorithm A destination IPv4 address may match multiple routes in the IPv4 Static Route Table The device uses the matched route with the highest subnet mask that is the longest prefix match Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 275 17 IP Configuration IPv4 Management and Interfaces To define an IP static route STEP 1 Click IP Configuration gt IPv4 Management and Interfaces gt IP v4 Routes STE
551. sted in order to make use of this feature 272 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration IPv4 Management and Interfaces 17 To configure a static IP address configure the following fields IP Address Enter the IP address and configure one of the following Mask fields Network Mask Select and enter the IP address mask Prefix Length Select and enter the length of the IPv4 address prefix Loopback Interface Select to enable the configuration of a loopback interface see Loopback Interface Loopback IP Address Enter the IPv4 address of the loopback interface Enter one of the following fields for the loopback interface Loopback Mask Enter the mask of the IPv4 address of the loopback interface Prefix Length Enter the prefix length of the IPv4 address of the loopback interface Administrative Default Gateway Select User Defined and enter the default gateway IP address or select None to remove the selected default gateway IP address from the interface Operational Default Gateway Displays the current default gateway status NOTE If the device is not configured with a default gateway it cannot communicate with other devices that are not in the same IP subnet If a dynamic IP address is retrieved from the DHCP server select those of the following fields that are enabled Renew IP Address Now The device dynamic
552. stem mode This provides more network flexibility than the Layer 2 system mode in which only a single IP address can be configured Operating in Layer 3 system mode the device can be reached at all its IP addresses from the corresponding interfaces A predefined default route is not provided in Layer 3 system mode To remotely manage the device a default route must be defined All DHCP assigned default gateways are stored as default routes In addition you can manually define default routes This is defined in the IPv4 Static Routes and IPv6 Routes pages All the IP addresses configured or assigned to the device are referred to as Management IP addresses in this guide If the pages for Layer 2 and Layer 3 are different both versions are displayed 270 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration 1 7 Overview Loopback Interface Overview The loopback interface is a virtual interface whose operational state is always up If the IP address that is configured on this virtual interface is used as the local address when communicating with remote IP applications the communication will not be aborted even if the actual route to the remote application was changed The operational state of a loopback interface is always up You define an IP address either IPv4 or IPv6 on it and use this IP address as the local IP address for IP communication with remote IP a
553. stration Guide Internal Version 482 Access Control IPv6 Based ACLs DSCP to Match Differentiated Serves Code Point DSCP to match P Precedence to match IP precedence is a model of TOS type of service that the network uses to help provide the appropriate QoS commitments This model uses the 3 most significant bits of the service type byte in the IP header as described in RFC 791 and RFC 1349 ICMP If the IP protocol of the ACL is ICMP select the ICMP message type used for filtering purposes Either select the message type by name or enter the message type number Any All message types are accepted Select from list Select message type by name ICMP Type to Match Number of message type to be used for filtering purposes ICMP Code The ICMP messages can have a code field that indicates how to handle the message Select one of the following options to configure whether to filter on this code Any Acceptall codes User Defined Enter an ICMP code for filtering purposes IGMP If the ACL is based on IGMP select the IGMP message type to be used for filtering purposes Either select the message type by name or enter the message type number Any All message types are accepted Select from list Select message type by name IGMP Type to match Number of message type that is to be used for filtering purposes STEP 5 Click Apply The IPv4 based ACE is saved to the Running
554. t EAP Length Error Frames Received EAPOL frames with an invalid Packet Body Length received on this port Last EAPOL Frame Version Protocol version number attached to the most recently received EAPOL frame Last EAPOL Frame Source Source MAC address attached to the most recently received EAPOL frame To clear statistics counters Click Clear Interface Counters to clear the selected interfaces counters Click Clear All Interface Counters to clear the counters of all interfaces Viewing TCAM Utilization The device architecture uses a Ternary Content Addressable Memory TCAM to support packet actions in wire speed TCAM holds the rules produced by applications such as ACLs Access Control Lists Quality of Service QoS IP Routing and user created rules Some applications allocate rules upon their initiation Additionally processes that initialize during system boot use some of their rules during the startup process To view TCAM utilization click Status and Statistics gt TCAM Utilization The TCAM Utilization page shows the following fields Maximum TCAM Entries for IPv4 and Non IP Rules Maximum TCAM Entries available IP v4 Routing In Use Number of TCAM entries used for IP v4 routing 18 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Status and Statistics 2 Health Maximum Number of available TCAM entries that can be used for
555. t One is the highest priority Action Select the action taken upon a match The options are Permit Forward packets that meet the ACE criteria Deny Drop packets that meet the ACE criteria Shutdown Drop packets that meet the ACE criteria and disable the port from where the packets were received Such ports can be reactivated from the Port Settings page 477 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Access Control Defining MAC based ACLs 24 Time Range Select to enable limiting the use of the ACL to a specific time range Time Range Name lIf Time Range is selected select the time range to be used Time ranges are defined in the lt 300 500 gt Time Range section Destination MAC Address Select Any if all destination addresses are acceptable or User defined to enter a destination address or a range of destination addresses Destination MAC Address Value Enter the MAC address to which the destination MAC address is to be matched and its mask if relevant Destination MAC Wildcard Mask Enter the mask to define a range of MAC addresses Note that this mask is different than in other uses such as subnet mask Here setting a bit as 1 indicates don t care and 0 indicates to mask that value NOTE Given a mask of 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 11111111 which means that you match on the bits where there is O and don t match on the bits where t
556. t VLAN ID membership can share the same Multicast stream by joining the ports to the same Multicast VLAN ID The network port connected to the Multicast server is statically configured as a member in the Multicast VLAN ID The network ports which through subscribers communicate with the Multicast server by sending IGMP messages receive the Multicast streams from the Multicast server while including the Multicast TV VLAN in the Multicast packet header For this reasons the network ports must be statically configured as the following Trunk or general port type see Configuring VLAN Interface Settings Member on the Multicast TV VLAN The subscriber receiver ports can be associated with the Multicast TV VLAN only if it is defined in one of the two following types Access port Customer port See Customer Port Multicast TV VLAN lt 300 500 gt One or more IP Multicast address groups can be associated with the same Multicast TV VLAN Any VLAN can be configured as a Multicast TV VLAN A port assigned to a Multicast T V VLAN Joins the Multicast TV VLAN Packets passing through egress ports in the Multicast TV VLAN are untagged 224 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version VLAN Management 1 3 Access Port Multicast TV VLAN The port s Frame Type parameter is set to Admit All allowing untagged packets see Configuring VLAN Interface Settings
557. t can learn new MAC addresses Forwarding the port on this instance is in Forwarding mode The port can forward traffic and learn new MAC addresses Boundary The port on this instance is a boundary port It inherits its state from instance 0 and can be viewed on the STP Interface Settings page Port Role Displays the port or LAG role per port or LAG per instance assigned by the MSTP algorithm to provide STP paths Root Forwarding packets through this interface provides the lowest cost path for forwarding packets to the root device Designated tThe interface through which the bridge is connected to the LAN which provides the lowest root path cost from the LAN to the Root Bridge for the MST instance Alternate The interface provides an alternate path to the root device from the root interface Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 243 Spanning Tree Defining MSTP Interface Settings Backup tThe interface provides a backup path to the designated port path toward the Spanning Tree leaves Backup ports occur when two ports are connected in a loop by a point to point link Backup ports also occur when a LAN has two or more established connections to a shared segment Disabled tThe interface does not participate in the Spanning Tree Boundary The port on this instance is a boundary port It inherits its state from instance 0 and can
558. t group of ports Port The port identifier UDLD State tThe possible states are Disabled UDLD is disabled on all fiber ports of the device Normal Device shuts down an interface if it detects that the link is unidirectional It issues a notification if the link is undetermined Aggressive Device shuts down a port if the link is unidirectional or undetermined Bidirectional State Select the value of this field for the selected port The possible states are Detection The latest UDLD state of the port is in the process of being determined Expiration time has not yet expired since the last Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 153 10 Port Management Unidirectional Link Detection Configuring UDLD STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 1 determination if there was one or since UDLD began running on the port so that the state is not yet determined Bidirectional tTraffic sent by the local device is received by its neighbor and traffic from the neighbor is received by the local device Undetermined The state of the link between the port and its connected port cannot be determined either because no UDLD message was received or the UDLD message did not contain the local device ID in it Disabled UDLD has been disabled on this port Shutdown The port has been shut down because its link with the connected device is unidir
559. t is the IANA enterprise number Fifth octet Set to 3 to indicate the MAC address that follows Last 6 octets MAC address of the device None No engine ID is used User Defined Enter the local device engine ID The field value is a hexadecimal string range 10 64 Each byte in the hexadecimal character strings is represented by two hexadecimal digits Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 526 SNMP Configuring SNMP Views All remote engine IDs and their IP addresses are displayed in the Remote Engine ID table STEP 3 Click Apply The Running Configuration file is updated The Remote Engine ID table shows the mapping between IP addresses of the engine and Engine ID To add the IP address of an engine ID STEP 4 Click Add Enter the following fields Server Definition Select whether to specify the Engine ID server by IP address or name IP Version Select the supported IP format IPv6 Address Type Select the IPv6 address type if IPv6 is used The options are Link Local The IPv6 address uniquely identifies hosts on a single network link A link local address has a prefix of FE80 is not routable and can be used for communication only on the local network Only one link local address is supported If a link local address exists on the interface this entry replaces the address in the configuration Global The IPv6 ad
560. t received from the interface 94 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration Discovery 8 Configuring LLDP NOTE NOTE CDP and LLDP end devices such as IP phones learn the voice VLAN configuration from CDP and LLDP advertisements By default the device is enabled to send out CDP and LLDP advertisement based on the voice VLAN configured at the device Refer to the Voice VLAN and Auto Voice VLAN sections for details CDP LLDP does not distinguish if a port is ina LAG If there are multiple ports ina LAG CDP LLDP transmit packets on each port without taking into account the fact that the ports are ina LAG The operation of CDP LLDP is independent of the STP status of an interface If 802 1x port access control is enabled at an interface the device transmits and receives CDP LLDP packets to and from the interface only if the interface is authenticated and authorized If a port is the target of mirroring then according to CDP LLDP it is considered down CDP and LLDP are link layer protocols for directly connected CDP LLDP capable devices to advertise themselves and their capabilities In deployments where the CDP LLDP capable devices are not directly connected and are separated with CDP LLDP incapable devices the CDP LLDP capable devices may be able to receive the advertisement from other device s only if the CDP LLDP incapable devices flood the C
561. tacks employed by the device is the use of SCT SCT is enabled by default on the device and cannot be disabled The Cisco device is an advanced device that handles management traffic protocol traffic and snooping traffic in addition to end user TCP traffic SCT ensures that the device receives and processes management and protocol traffic no matter how much total traffic is received This is done by rate limiting TCP traffic to the CPU There are no interactions with other features SCT can be monitored in the Denial of Service gt Denial of Service Prevention gt Security Suite Settings page Details button Types of DoS Attacks The following types of packets or other strategies might be involved in a Denial of Service attack TCP SYN Packets These packets often have a false sender address Each packets is handled like a connection request causing the server to spawna half open connection by sending back a TCP SYN ACK packet Acknowledge and waiting for a packet in response from the sender address response to the ACK Packet However because the sender address is false the response never comes These half open connections saturate the number of available connections that the device is able to make keeping it from responding to legitimate requests TCP SYN FIN Packets SYN packets are sent to create a new TCP connection TCP FIN packets are sent to close a connection A packet in which both SYN and FIN flags are s
562. tatistics were taken from this sample Drop Events Dropped packets due to lack of network resources during the sampling interval This may not represent the exact number of dropped packets but rather the number of times dropped packets were detected Bytes Received Octets received including bad packets and FCS octets but excluding framing bits Packets Received Packets received including bad packets Multicast and Broadcast packets Broadcast Packets Good Broadcast packets excluding Multicast packets Multicast Packets Good Multicast packets received CRC Align Errors CRC and Align errors that have occurred Undersize Packets Undersized packets less than 64 octets received Oversize Packets Oversized packets over 2000 octets received Fragments Fragments packets with less than 64 octets received excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Jabbers Total number of received packets that were longer than 2000 octets This number excludes frame bits but includes FCS octets that had either a bad FCS Frame Check Sequence with an integral number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS with a non integral octet Alignment Error number Collisions Collisions received Utilization Percentage of current interface traffic compared to maximum traffic that the interface can handle Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 23 Status and
563. te the key to decrypt the sensitive data in the source configuration file Any SSD configurations that are not found are reset to the default If there is an SSD control block in the source configuration file and the file contains plaintext sensitive data excluding the SSD configurations in the SSD control block the file is accepted Running Configuration File A Running Configuration file contains the configuration currently being used by the device A user can retrieve the sensitive data encrypted or in plaintext from a running configuration file subject to the SSD read permission and the current SSD read mode of the management session The user can change the Running Configuration by copying the Backup or Mirror Configuration files through other management actions via CLI XML SNMP and so on A device applies the following rules when a user directly changes the SSD configuration in the Running Configuration If the user that opened the management session does not have SSD permissions meaning read permissions of either Both or Plaintext Only the device rejects all SSD commands When copied from a source file File SSD indicator SSD Control Block Integrity and SSD File Integrity are neither verified nor enforced When copied from a source file the copy will fail if the passphrase in the source file is in plaintext If the passphrase is encrypted it is ignored When directly configuring the passphrase non file copy in the Run
564. ted then the default values need to be maintained CoS 802 1p Select a CoS 802 1p value that to be used by LLDP MED as a voice network policy Refer to Administration gt Discovery gt LLDP gt LLDP MED Network Policy for additional details DSCP Selection of DSCP values that to be used by the LLDP MED as a voice network policy Refer to Administration gt Discovery gt LLDP gt LLDP MED Network Policy for additional details 218 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version VLAN Management Voice VLAN 13 Dynamic Voice VLAN Select this field to disable or enable voice VLAN feature in one of the following ways Enable Auto Voice VLAN Enable Dynamic Voice VLAN in Auto Voice VLAN mode Enable Telephony OUF Enable Dynamic Voice VLAN in Telephony OUI mode Disable Disable Auto Voice Vlan or Telephony OUI Auto Voice VLAN Activation If Auto Voice VLAN was enabled select one of the following options to activate Auto Voice VLAN mmediate Auto Voice VLAN on the device is to be activated and put into operation immediately if enabled By External Voice VLAN Trigger Auto Voice VLAN on the device is activated and put into operation only if the device detects a device advertising the voice VLAN NOTE Manually re configuring the voice VLAN ID CoS 802 1p and or DSCP from their default values results in a static voice VLAN which ha
565. ter the following fields Message Time Enter the interval between two sent UDLD messages This field is relevant for both fiber and copper ports 152 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Port Management Unidirectional Link Detection 1 O Configuring UDLD Fiber Port UDLD Default State This field is only relevant for fiber ports The UDLD state of copper ports must be set individually in the UDLD Interface Settings page The possible states are Disabled UDLD is disabled on all ports of the device Normal Device shuts down an interface if the link is unidirectional If the link is undetermined a notification is issued Aggressive Device shuts down an interface if the link is unidirectional or undetermined STEP 3 Click Apply to save the settings to the Running Configuration file UDLD Interface Settings Use the UDLD Interface Settings page to change the UDLD state for a specific port Here the state can be set for copper or fiber ports To copy a particular set of values to more than one port set that value for one port and use the Copy button to copy it to the other ports To configure UDLD for an interface STEP 1 Click Port Management gt UDLD gt UDLD Interface Settings Information is displayed for all ports on which UDLD is enabled or if you have filtered only a certain group of ports information is displayed for tha
566. terminates and processes all incoming LLDP packets as required by the protocol The LLDP protocol has an extension called LLDP Media Endpoint Discovery LLDP MED which provides and accepts information from media endpoint devices such as VolP phones and video phones For further information about LLDP MED see LLDP MED Network Policy LLDP Configuration Workflow Following are examples of actions that can be performed with the LLDP feature and in a suggested order You can refer to the LLDP CDP section for additional guidelines on LLDP configuration LLDP configuration pages are accessible under the Administration gt Discovery LLDP menu 1 Enter LLDP global parameters such as the time interval for sending LLDP updates using the LLDP Properties page 2 Configure LLDP per port by using the Port Settings page On this page interfaces can be configured to receive transmit LLDP PDUs send SNMP notifications specify which TLVs to advertise and advertise the device s management address 3 Create LLDP MED network policies by using the LLDP MED Network Policy page 96 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration Discovery Configuring LLDP 8 4 Associate LLDP MED network policies and the optional LLDP MED TLVs to the desired interfaces by using the LLDP MED Port Settings page 5 If Auto Smartport is to detect the capabilities of LLDP devices enabl
567. ternal interfaces using NS and NA messages Before creating an NBI NDP local binding the device sends a DAD NS message querying for the address involved If a host replies to that message with an NA message the device that sent the DAD NS message infers that a binding for that address exists in another device and does not create a local binding for it If no NA message is received as a reply to the DAD NS message the local device infers that no binding for that address exists in other devices and creates the local binding for that address 418 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security IPV6 First Hop Security 2 O Attack Protection NBI NDP supports a lifetime timer A value of the timer is configurable in the Neighbor Binding Settings page The timer is restarted each time that the bound IPv6 address is confirmed If the timer expires the device sends up to 2 DAD NS messages with short intervals to validate the neighbor NB Integrity Policy In the same way that other IPv6 First Hop Security features function NB Integrity behavior on a interface is specified by an NB Integrity policy attached to an interface These policies are configured in the Neighbor Binding Settings page Attack Protection The section describes attack protection provided by IPv6 First Hop Security Protection against IPv6 Router Spoofing An IPv6 host can use the received RA messages for
568. teway PV6 FRAG Matches packets belonging to the IPv6 over IPv4 Fragment Header DRP nter Domain Routing Protocol RSVP ReSerVation Protocol AH Authentication Header PV6 CMP nternet Control Message Protocol F GRP Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol OSPF Open Shortest Path First P P IP in IP PlM Protocol Independent Multicast L27P Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol S IS IGP specific protocol Protocol ID to Match lInstead of selecting the name enter the protocol ID Source IP Address Select Any if all source address are acceptable or User defined to enter a source address or range of source addresses Source IP Address Value Enter the IP address to which the source IP address is to be matched 481 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Access Control IPv4 based ACLs 24 Source IP Wildcard Mask Enter the mask to define a range of IP addresses Note that this mask is different than in other uses such as subnet mask Here setting a bit as 1 indicates don t care and 0 indicates to mask that value NOTE Given a mask of 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 11111111 which means that you match on the bits where there is O and don t match on the bits where there are 1 s You need to translate the 1 s to a decimal integer and you write O for each four zeros In this example since 1111 1111 255 the mask would be
569. th the exception of BPDU data or learn MAC addresses Listening The portis in Listening mode The port cannot forward traffic and cannot learn MAC addresses Learning The port is in Learning mode The port cannot forward traffic but it can learn new MAC addresses Forwarding the port is in Forwarding mode The port can forward traffic and learn new MAC addresses Designated Bridge ID Displays the bridge priority and the MAC address of the designated bridge Designated Port ID Displays the priority and interface of the selected port Designated Cost Displays the cost of the port participating in the STP topology Ports with a lower cost are less likely to be blocked if STP detects loops Forward Transitions Displays the number of times the port has changed from the Blocking state to Forwarding state Speed Displays the speed of the port _LAG Displays the LAG to which the port belongs If a port is a member of a LAG the LAG settings override the port settings STEP 4 Click Apply The interface settings are written to the Running Configuration file Configuring Rapid Spanning Tree Settings Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP enables a faster STP convergence without creating forwarding loops The RSTP Interface Settings page enables you to configure RSTP per port Any configuration that is done on this page is active when the global STP mode is set to RSTP or MSTP 236 Cisco Smal
570. th the rising and falling thresholds must be configured in the alarm After a rising threshold is crossed no rising events are generated until the companion falling threshold is crossed After a falling alarm is issued the next alarm is issued when a rising threshold is crossed One or more alarms are bound to an event which indicates the action to be taken when the alarm occurs The Alarms page provides the ability to configure alarms and to bind them with events Alarm counters can be monitored by either absolute values or changes delta in the counter values Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 25 Status and Statistics Managing RMON To enter RMON alarms STEP 1 Click Status and Statistics gt RMON gt Alarms All previously defined alarms are displayed The fields are described in the Add RMON Alarm page below In addition to those fields the following field appears Counter Value Displays the value of the statistic during the last sampling period STEP 2 Click Add STEP 3 Enter the parameters Alarm Entry Displays the alarm entry number Interface Select the type of interface for which RMON statistics are displayed Counter Name Select the MIB variable that indicates the type of occurrence measured Sample Type Select the sampling method to generate an alarm The options are Absolute lf the threshold is crossed an alarm
571. the Root Bridge This is significant when the bridge is not the root Root Path Cost The cost of the path from this bridge to the root Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 233 Spanning Tree Defining Spanning Tree Interface Settings Topology Changes Counts The total number of STP topology changes that have occurred Last Topology Change The time interval that elapsed since the last topology change occurred The time appears in a days hours minutes seconds format STEP 3 Click Apply The STP Global settings are written to the Running Configuration file Defining Spanning Tree Interface Settings The STP Interface Settings page enables you to configure STP on a per port basis and to view the information learned by the protocol such as the designated bridge The defined configuration entered is valid for all flavors of the STP protocol To configure STP on an interface STEP 1 Click Spanning Tree gt STP Interface Settings STEP 2 Select an interface and click Edit STEP 3 Enter the parameters _Interface Select the Port or LAG on which Spanning Tree is configured TP Enables or disables STP on the port Edge Port Enables or disables Fast Link on the port If Fast Link mode is enabled on a port the port is automatically set to Forwarding state when the port link is up Fast Link optimizes the STP protocol convergence
572. the device and TCAM Entries is the total number of TCAM entries being used for the IP addresses Routes Count is the number of routes recorded on the device and TCAM Entries is the total number of TCAM entries being used for the routes Total Displays the number of TCAM entries which are currently being used Maximum Entries Select one of the following options Use Default The number of TCAM entries available for IP entries is 25 of the TCAM size User Defined Enter a value Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 67 Administration Health Health STEP 2 You must save your current configuration before changing the TCAM Allocation Settings NOTE Asummary of the TCAM entries actually in use and available is displayed at the bottom of this page For an explanation of the fields see lt 300 500 gt Viewing TCAM Utilization Save the new settings by clicking Apply This checks the feasibility of the TCAM allocation If it is incorrect an error message is displayed If it is correct the allocation is saved to the Running Configuration file and a reboot is performed The Health page monitors the fan status on all devices with fans Depending on the model there are one or more fans on a device Some models have no fans at all On devices on which a temperature sensor is assembled for protecting the device hardware in case it overheats the follo
573. the Auto Configuration feature enables a device to download configuration files from a TFTP SCP server To use this feature the device must be configured as a DHCP v4 client in which case auto configuration from a DHCP v4 server is supported and or a DHCP v6 client in which case auto configuration from a DHCPV6 server is supported By default the device is enabled as a DHCP client when the Auto Configuration via DHCP feature is enabled The Auto Configuration process also supports downloading a configuration file that includes sensitive information such as RADIUS server keys and SSH SSL keys by using the Secured Copy Protocol SCP and the Secure Sensitive Data SSD feature See Security Secure Sensitive Data Management 50 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration File Management 4 Auto Configuration via DHCP Auto Configuration via DHCP V4 is triggered in the following cases After reboot when an IP address is allocated or renewed dynamically using DHCP v4 Upon an explicit DHCP v4 renewal request and if the device and the server are configured to do so Upon automatic renewal of the DHCP V4 lease Auto Configuration via DHCPV6 is triggered when the following conditions are fulfilled When a DHCPV6 server sends information to the device This occurs in the following cases When an interface which is IPv6 enabled is defined a
574. the LAG Administrative Status Set the selected LAG to be Up or Down Operational Status Displays whether the LAG is currently operating Link Status SNMP Traps Select to enable generation of SNMP traps notifying of changes to the link status of the ports in the LAG Time Range Select to enable the time range during which the port is in Up state When the time range is not active the port is in shutdown If a time range is configured it is effective only when the port is administratively Up If a time range is not yet defined click Edit to go to the Time Range page Time Range Name Select the profile that specifies the time range Operational Time Range State Displays whether the time range is currently active or inactive Reactivate Suspended LAG Select to reactivate a port if the LAG has been disabled through the locked port security option or through ACL configurations Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 133 Port Management Link Aggregation Administrative Auto Negotiation Enables or disable auto negotiation on the LAG Auto negotiation is a protocol between two link partners that enables a LAG to advertise its transmission speed and flow control to its partner the Flow Control default is disabled It is recommended to keep auto negotiation enabled on both sides of an aggregate link or disabled on both sides while ensuring that link spee
575. the authentication methods Click Apply and the Running Configuration file is updated Workflow 2 To configure traps Click Security gt 802 1X MAC Web Authentication gt Properties Select the required traps Click Apply and the Running Configuration file is updated Workflow 3 To configure 802 1x based or Web based authentication Click Security gt 802 1X MAC Web Authentication gt Port Authentication Select the required port and click Edit Enter the fields required for the port The fields in this page are described in Defining 802 1X Port Authentication 394 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security 802 1X Authentication 1 Common Tasks STEP 4 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 Click Apply and the Running Configuration file is updated Use the Copy Settings button to copy settings from one port to another Workflow 4 To configure the quiet period Click Security gt 802 1X MAC Web Authentication gt Port Authentication Select a port and click Edit Enter the quiet period in the Quiet Period field Click Apply and the Running Configuration file is updated Workflow 5 To configure the guest VLAN Click Security gt 802 1X MAC Web Authentication gt Properties Select Enable in the Guest VLAN field Se
576. the desired manually defined network policies for the outgoing LLDP packets using the LLDP MED Port Settings Configuring LLDP MED Port Settings The LLDP MED Port Settings page enables the selection of the LLDP MED TLVs and or the network policies to be included in the outgoing LLDP advertisement for the desired interfaces Network Policies are configured using the LLDP MED Network Policy page If LLDP MED Network Policy for Voice Application LLDP MED Network Policy Page is Auto and Auto Voice VLAN is in operation then the device automatically generates an LLDP MED Network Policy for Voice Application for all the ports that are LLDP MED enabled and are members of the voice VLAN To configure LLDP MED on each port Click Administration gt Discovery LLDP gt LLDP MED Port Settings This page contains LLDP MED settings including enabled TLVs for all ports The message at the top of the page indicates whether the generation of the LLDP MED Network Policy for the voice application is automatic or not see LLDP Overview Click on the link to change the mode To associate additional LLDP MED TLV and or one or more user defined LLDP MED Network Policies to a port select it and click Edit Enter the parameters Interface Select the interface to configure LLDP MED Status Enable disable LLDP MED on this port 102 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Versio
577. the device and to define the types of frames that are counted towards this limit When the rate of Broadcast Multicast or Unknown Unicast frames is higher than the user defined threshold frames received beyond the threshold are discarded To define Storm Control Click Security gt Storm Control All the fields on this page are described in the Edit Storm Control page except for the Storm Control Rate Threshold It displays the percent of the total available bandwidth for unknown Unicast Multicast and Broadcast packets before storm control is applied at the port The default value is 10 of the maximum rate of the port and is set in the Edit Storm Control page STEP 2 Selecta port and click Edit STEP 3 Enter the parameters Interface Select the port for which storm control is enabled Storm Control Select to enable Storm Control Storm Control Rate Threshold Enter the maximum rate at which unknown packets can be forwarded The default for this threshold is 10 000 for FE devices and 100 000 for GE devices Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 353 18 Security Configuring Port Security Storm Control Mode Select one of the modes Unknown Unicast Multicast amp Broadcast Counts unknown Unicast Broadcast and Multicast traffic towards the bandwidth threshold Multicast amp Broadcast Counts Broadcast and Multicast traff
578. the device is updated STEP 7 Toconfigure and display the registration of an IP group address select an address and click Details The VLAN ID IP Version IP Multicast Group Address and Source IP Address selected are displayed as read only in the top of the window You can select the filter type Interface Type equals to Select whether to display ports or LAGs STEP 8 For each interface select its association type The options are as follows Static Attaches the interface to the Multicast group as a static member Forbidden Specifies that this port is forbidden from joining this group on this VLAN None Indicates that the port is not currently a member of this Multicast group on this VLAN This is selected by default until Static or Forbidden is selected STEP 9 Click Apply The Running Configuration file is updated Configuring IGMP Snooping NOTE To support selective Multicast forwarding IPv4 Bridge Multicast filtering must be enabled in the Properties page and IGMP Snooping must be enabled globally and for each relevant VLAN in the IGMP Snooping page By default a Layer 2 device forwards Multicast frames to all ports of the relevant VLAN essentially treating the frame as if it were a Broadcast With IGMP Snooping the device forwards Multicast frames to ports that have registered Multicast clients The device supports IGMP Snooping only on static VLANs It does not support IGMP Snooping on dy
579. the egress queue number for all the matching packets Police Type Available in Layer 2 system mode only Select the policer type for the policy The options are None No policy is used Single tThe policer for the policy is a single policer Aggregate tThe policer for the policy is an aggregate policer Aggregate Policer Available in Layer 2 system mode only If Police Type is Aggregate select a previously defined in the Aggregate Policer page aggregate policer If Police Type is Single enter the following QoS parameters Ingress Committed Information Rate CIR Enter the CIR in Kbps See a description of this in the Bandwidth page Ingress Committed Burst Size CBS Enter the CBS in bytes See a description of this in the Bandwidth page Exceed Action Select the action assigned to incoming packets exceeding the CIR The options are None No action Drop Packets exceeding the defined CIR value are dropped Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 514 25 Quality of Service QoS Advanced Mode Out of Profile DSCP IP packets exceeding the defined CIR are forwarding with a new DSCP derived from the Out Of Profile DSCP Mapping Table STEP 5 Click Apply NOTE STEP STEP STEP STEP STEP 2 3 4 5 Policy Binding The Policy Binding page shows which policy profile is bound and to whic
580. the following steps STEP 1 Open the Port Management gt UDLD Global Settings page a Enter the Message Time b Select either Disabled Normal or Aggressive as the global UDLD status Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 151 10 Port Management Unidirectional Link Detection Configuring UDLD STEP 2 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 1 Click Apply Workflow2 To change the UDLD configuration of a fiber port or to enable UDLD on a copper port perform the following steps Open the Port Management gt UDLD Global Settings page a Selecta port b Select either Default Disabled Normal or Aggressive as the port s UDLD status If you select Default the port receives the global setting Click Apply Workflow3 To bring a port up after it was shut down by UDLD and automatic reactivation was not configured Open the Port Management gt Error Recovery Settings page a Selecta port b Click Reactivate Configuring UDLD STEP 1 STEP 2 The UDLD feature can be configured for all fiber ports at one time in the UDLD Global Settings page or per port in the UDLD Interface Settings page UDLD Global Settings The Fiber Port UDLD Default State is only applicable to fiber ports The Message Time field is applicable to both copper and fiber ports To configure UDLD globally Click Port Management gt UDLD gt UDLD Global Settings En
581. the selected Smartport type The macro must have already been paired with an anti macro Pairing of the two macros is done by name and is described in the Smartport Macro section Macro Parameters Displays the following fields for three parameters in the macro Parameter Name Name of parameter in macro Parameter Value Current value of parameter in macro This can be changed here Parameter Description Description of parameter You can restore the default parameter values by clicking Restore Defaults Click Apply to save the changes to the running configuration If the Smartport macro and or its parameter values associated with the Smartport type are modified Auto Smartport automatically reapplies the macro to the interfaces currently assigned with the Smartport type by Auto Smartport Auto Smartport does not apply the changes to interfaces that were statically assigned a Smartport type 172 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Smartport Configuring Smartport Using The Web based Interface 1 1 NOTE There is no method to validate macro parameters because they do not have a type association Therefore any entry is valid at this point However invalid parameter values may cause errors to occur when the Smartport type is assigned to an interface applying the associated macro Smartport Interface Settings Use the Interface Settings page to
582. ther remote managers can use this address to obtain information related to the local device The address consists of the following elements Address Subtype Type of management IP address that is listed in the Management Address field for example IPv4 Address Returned address most appropriate for management use typically a Layer 3 address Interface Subtype Numbering method used for defining the interface number Interface Number Specific interface associated with this management address Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 105 Administration Discovery Configuring LLDP MAC PHY Details Auto Negotiation Supported Port speed auto negotiation support status Auto Negotiation Enabled Port speed auto negotiation active status Auto Negotiation Advertised Capabilities Port speed auto negotiation capabilities for example 1OOOBASE T half duplex mode 100BASE TX full duplex mode Operational MAU Type Medium Attachment Unit MAU type The MAU performs physical layer functions including digital data conversion from the Ethernet interfaces collision detection and bit injection into the network for example 100BASE TX full duplex mode 802 3 Details 802 3 Maximum Frame Size The maximum supported IEEE 802 3 frame size 802 3 Link Aggregation Aggregation Capability Indicates whether the interface can be
583. they VLAN they configuration the static belong to belong to belong to VLAN the guest the the configurat VLAN or unauthent RADIUS ion to the icated VLAN or unauthent VLANs to the icated unauthent VLANs icated VLANs Multi Frames are Frames Frames are Frames Frames are Frames Frames are Frames host re mapped to are dropped are re mappedto are bridged based are the guest dropped dropped the Radius dropped on the static bridged VLAN unless unless assigned unless VLAN based on they they VLAN they configuration the static belongs to belongs belongs VLAN the guest to the to the configurat VLAN or unauthent Radius ion to the icated VLAN or unauthent VLANs to the icated unauthent VLANs icated VLANs Lite N S N S Frames are Frames N S N S Frames are Frames multi dropped are bridged based are sessions dropped on the static bridged unless VLAN based on they configuration the static belongs VLAN to the configurat unauthent ion icated VLANs 408 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security 802 1X Authentication Authentication Method and Port Mode Support 19 Unauthenticated Traffic Authenticated Traffic With Guest VLAN Without Guest VLAN With Radius VLAN Without Radius VLAN Untagged Tagged Untagged Tagged Untagged Tagged Untagged Tagged Full Frames are Frames Frames are Frames Frames are Frames Frames are Frame
584. thorized the supplicant but did not provide a supplicant VLAN the supplicant is rejected Static lIf the RADIUS server authorized the supplicant but did not provide a supplicant VLAN the supplicant is accepted Guest VLAN Select to indicate that the usage of a previously defined guest VLAN is enabled for the device The options are Selected Enables using a guest VLAN for unauthorized ports If a guest VLAN is enabled the unauthorized port automatically joins the VLAN selected in the Guest VLAN ID field in the 802 1X Port Authentication page 398 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security 802 1X Authentication 1 8021X Configuration Through the GUI After an authentication failure and if guest VLAN is activated globally on a given port the guest VLAN is automatically assigned to the unauthorized ports as an Untagged VLAN Cleared Disables guest VLAN on the port 802 1X Based Authentication 802 1X authentication is the only authentication method performed on the port MAC Based Authentication Port is authenticated based on the supplicant MAC address Only 8 MAC based authentications can be used on the port NOTE For MAC authentication to succeed the RADIUS server supplicant username and password must be the supplicant MAC address The MAC address must be in lower case letters and entered without the or separators for examp
585. tication States The port administrative state determines whether the client is granted access to the network The port administrative state can be configured in the Security gt 802 1X MAC Web Authentication gt Port Authentication page The following values are available force authorized Port authentication is disabled and the port transmits all traffic in accordance with its static configuration without requiring any authentication The switch sends the 802 1x EAP packet with the EAP success message inside when it receives the 802 1x EAPOL start message This is the default state Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 383 Security 802 1X Authentication Authenticator Overview force unauthorized Port authentication is disabled and the port transmits all traffic via the guest VLAN and unauthenticated VLANs For more information see Defining Host and Session Authentication The switch sends 802 1x EAP packets with EAP failure messages inside when it receives 802 1x EAPOL Start messages auto Enables 802 1 x authentications in accordance with the configured port host mode and authentication methods configured on the port Port Host Modes Ports can be placed in the following port host modes configured in the Security gt 802 1X MAC Web Authentication gt Host and Authentication page Single Host Mode A port is authorized if there i
586. ties page enables selecting either the Port Limit or Class Limit PoE mode and specifying the PoE traps to be generated These settings are entered in advance When the PD actually connects and is consuming power it might consume much less than the maximum power allowed Output power is disabled during power on reboot initialization and system configuration to ensure that PDs are not damaged To configure PoE on the device and monitor current power usage STEP 1 Click Port Management gt PoE gt Properties STEP 2 Enter the values for the following fields Power Mode Select one of the following options Port Limit The maximum power limit per each port is configured by the user Class Limit The maximum power limit per port is determined by the class of the device which results from the Classification stage NOTE When you change from Port Limit to Class Limit or vice versa you must disable PoE ports and enable them after changing the power configuration Traps Enable or disable traps If traps are enabled you must also enable SNMP and configure at least one SNMP Notification Recipient Power Trap Threshold Enter the usage threshold that is a percentage of the power limit An alarm is initiated if the power exceeds this value 190 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Port Management PoE 1 2 Configuring PoE Settings The followin
587. tion all web based configuration utility labels disappear and in their place are the IDs of the strings that correspond to the IDs in the language file NOTE To upgrade a language file use the Upgrade Backup Firmware Language page Logout Click to log out of the web based switch configuration utility About Click to display the device name and device version number Help Click to display the online help The SYSLOG Alert Status icon appears when a SYSLOG message above the critical severity level is logged Click the icon to open the RAM Memory page After you access this page the SYSLOG Alert Status icon is no longer displayed To display the page when there is not an active SYSLOG message Click Status and Statistics gt View Log gt RAM Memory Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Getting Started 1 Window Navigation Management Buttons The following table describes the commonly used buttons that appear on various pages in the system Button Name Description Use the pull down menu to configure the number of entries per page Showing 1 20 of 20 20 perpage Indicates a mandatory field Add Click to display the related Add page and add an entry toa table Enter the information and click Apply to save it to the Running Configuration Click Close to return to the main page Click Save to display the Copy Sa
588. tion file all users are allowed to access the file A user with Both read permission can access all mirror and backup configuration files However if the current read mode of the session is different than the file SSD indicator the user is presented with a prompt indicating that this action is not allowed A user with Plaintext Only permission can access mirror and backup configuration files if their file SSD Indicator shows Exclude or Plaintext Only sensitive data A user with Encrypted Only permission can access mirror and backup configuration files with their file SSD Indicator showing Exclude or Encrypted sensitive data A user with Exclude permission cannot access mirror and backup configuration files with their file SSD indicator showing either encrypted or plaintext sensitive data The user should not manually change the file SSD indicator that conflicts with the sensitive data if any in the file Otherwise plaintext sensitive data may be unexpectedly exposed 450 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security Secure Sensitive Data Management 2 1 Configuration Files NOTE Sensitive Data Zero Touch Auto Configuration SSD Zero touch Auto Configuration is the auto configuration of target devices with encrypted sensitive data without the need to manually pre configure the target devices with the passphrase whose key is used to encrypted the se
589. tion is updated ICMP Filtering The ICMP Filtering page enables the blocking of ICMP packets from certain sources This can reduce the load on the network in case of an ICMP attack To define ICMP filtering Click Security gt Denial of Service Prevention gt ICMP Filtering Click Add Enter the parameters Interface Select the interface on which the ICMP filtering is being defined IP Address Enter the IPv4 address for which the ICMP packet filtering is activated or select A I Addresses to block ICMP packets from all source addresses If you enter the IP address enter either the mask or prefix length Network Mask Select the format for the subnet mask for the source IP address and enter a value in one of the field Mask Select the subnet to which the source IP address belongs and enter the subnet mask in dotted decimal format Prefix Length Select the Prefix Length and enter the number of bits that comprise the source IP address prefix Click Apply The ICMP filtering is defined and the Running Configuration is updated IP Fragmented Filtering The IP Fragmented page enables blocking fragmented IP packets To configure fragmented IP blocking Click Security gt Denial of Service Prevention gt IP Fragments Filtering Click Add Enter the parameters Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 365 Security DHCP Snoopi
590. tion is completed The 802 3az EEE TLV is used to fine tune system wake up and refresh durations Availability of 802 3az EEE Please check the release notes for a complete listing of products that support EEE 140 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Port Management 9 Configuring Green Ethernet Default Configuration By default 802 3az EEE and EEE LLDP are enabled globally and per port Interactions Between Features The following describe 802 3az EEE interactions with other features If auto negotiation is not enabled on the port the 802 3az EEE operational status is disabled The exception to this rule is that if the link speed is 1gigabyte EEE still be enabled even though Auto Negotiation is disabled If 802 3az EEE is enabled and the port is going Up it commences to work immediately in accordance with the maximum wake time value of the port On the GUI the EEE field for the port is not available when the Short Reach Mode option on the port is checked Ifthe port speed on the GE port is changed to 10Mbit 802 3az EEE is disabled This is supported in GE models only 802 3az EEE Configuration Workflow This section describes how to configure the 802 3az EEE feature and view its counters STEP 1 Ensure that auto negotiation is enabled on the port by opening the Port Management gt Port Settings page a Selecta port and open the E
591. tised Default Router Preference value The following values are acceptable low medium and high see RFC4 191 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 427 Security IPV6 First Hop Security Configuring First Hop Security through Web GUI To create an RA Guard policy or to configure the system defined default policies click Add and enter the above parameters If required click either Attach Policy to VLAN or Attach Policy to Interface DHCPv6 Guard Settings Use the DHCPv6 Guard Settings page to enable the DHCPv6 Guard feature on a specified group of VLANs and to set the global configuration values for this feature If required a policy can be added or the system defined default DHCP v6 Guard policies can be configured in this page To configure DHCPv6 Guard on ports or LAGs STEP 1 Click Security gt First Hop Security gt DHCPv6 Guard Settings STEP 2 Enter the following global configuration fields DHCPv6 Guard VLAN List Enter one or more VLANs on which DHCP v6 Guard is enabled Minimal Preference This field indicates whether the DHCPv6 Guard policy will check the minimum advertised preference value of the packet received No Verification Disables verification of the minimum advertised preference value of the packet received User Defined Verifies that the advertised preference value is greater than or equal to this value This valu
592. to the General Queries Last Member Query Counter Enter the Last Member Query Count to be used if the device cannot derive the value from the messages sent by the elected querier Operational Last Member Query Counter Displays the operational value of the Last Member Query Counter Last Member Query Interval Enter the Maximum Response Delay to be used if the device cannot read Max Response Time value from Group Specific queries sent by the elected querier Operational Last Member Query Interval The Last Member Query Interval sent by the elected querier Immediate Leave When enabled reduces the time it takes to block unnecessary MLD traffic sent to a device port STEP 5 Click Apply The Running Configuration file is updated Querying IGMP MLD IP Multicast Group The IGMP MLD IP Multicast Group page displays the IPv4 and IPv6 group address learned from IGMP MLD messages Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 263 16 Multicast Defining Multicast Router Ports There might be a difference between information on this page and for example information displayed in the MAC Group Address page Assuming that the system is in MAC based groups and a port that requested to join the following Multicast groups 224 1 1 1 and 225 1 1 1 both are mapped to the same MAC Multicast address 01 00 5e 0 1 0 1 0 1 In this case there is a single entry in the
593. to various clients within that subnet When a client requests an IP address the device as DHCP server allocates an IP address according to the following Directly attached Client The device allocates an address from the network pool whose subnet matches the subnet configured on the device s IP interface from which the DHCP request was received Remote Client The devices takes an IP address from the network pool whose first relay subnet which is connected directly to the client matches the subnet configured on one of switches IP interfaces Up to eight network pools can be defined To create a pool of IP addresses and define their lease durations Click IP Configuration gt IPv4 Management and Interfaces gt DHCP Server gt Network Pool to display the Network Pool page The previously defined network pools are displayed Click Add to define a new network pool Note that you either enter the Subnet IP Address and the Mask or enter the Mask the Address Pool Start and Address Pool End Enter the fields Pool Name Enter the pool name Subnet IP Address Enter the subnet in which the network pool resides 294 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version IP Configuration DHCP Server 17 Mask Enter one of following Network Mask Check and enter the pool s network mask Prefix Length Check and enter the number of bits th
594. traffic is permitted See Interactions with Other Features for more information about enabling IP Source Guard on interfaces To configure IP Source Guard on interfaces 368 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security IP Source Guard 18 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 NOTE STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 Click Security gt IP Source Guard gt Interface Settings Select port LAG from the Filter field and click Go The ports LAGs on this unit are displayed along with the following IP Source Guard Indicates whether IP Source Guard is enabled on the port DHCP Snooping Trusted Interface Indicates whether this is a DHCP trusted interface Select the port LAG and click Edit Select Enable in the IP Source Guard field to enable IP Source Guard on the interface Click Apply to copy the setting to the Running Configuration file Binding Database IP Source Guard uses the DHCP Snooping Binding database to check packets from untrusted ports If the device attempts to write too many entries to the DHCP Snooping Binding database the excessive entries are maintained in an inactive status Entries are deleted when their lease time expires and so inactive entries may be made active See DHCP v4 Snooping Relay lt 300 500 gt The Binding Database page only displays the entries in the DHCP Snooping Binding database defined on IP Source
595. trap to the remote log server when the alarm goes off Time Displays the time of the event This is a read only table in the parent window and cannot be defined Owner Enter the device or user that defined the event Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Status and Statistics Managing RMON 2 STEP 4 STEP 5 STEP 1 STEP 2 Click Apply The RMON event is saved to the Running Configuration file Click Event Log Table to display the log of alarms that have occurred and that have been logged see description below Viewing the RMON Events Logs The Event Log Table page displays the log of events actions that occurred Two types of events can be logged Log or Log and Trap The action in the event is performed when the event is bound to an alarm see the Alarms page and the conditions of the alarm have occurred Click Status and Statistics gt RMON gt Events Click Event Log Table This page displays the following fields Event Entry No Event s log entry number Log No Log number within the event Log Time Time that the log entry was entered Description Description of event that triggered the alarm Defining RMON Alarms RMON alarms provide a mechanism for setting thresholds and sampling intervals to generate exception events on any counter or any other SNMP object counter maintained by the agent Bo
596. trol The device is a RADIUS client that can use a RADIUS server to provide centralized security An organization can establish a Remote Authorization Dial In User Service RADIUS server to provide centralized 802 1X or MAC based network access control for all of its devices In this way authentication and authorization can be handled on a single server for all devices in the organization The device can act as a RADIUS client that uses the RADIUS server for the following services Authentication Provides authentication of regular and 802 1X users logging onto the device by using usernames and user defined passwords Authorization Performed at login After the authentication session is completed an authorization session starts using the authenticated username The RADIUS server then checks user privileges Accounting Enable accounting of login sessions using the RADIUS server This enables a system administrator to generate accounting reports from the RADIUS server Accounting Using a RADIUS Server The user can enable accounting of login sessions using a RADIUS server The user configurable TCP port used for RADIUS server accounting is the same TCP port that is used for RADIUS server authentication and authorization Defaults The following defaults are relevant to this feature No default RADIUS server is defined by default If you configure a RADIUS server the accounting feature is disabled by default
597. trusted Ports TLV CoS for Untrusted Ports lf Extended Trust is disabled on the port this fields displays the Layer 2 CoS value meaning an 802 1D 802 1p priority value This is the COS value with which all packets received on an untrusted port are remarked by the device Power TLV Request ID Last power request ID received echoes the Request ID field last received in a Power Requested TLV It is O if no Power Requested TLV was received since the interface last transitioned to Up Power Management ID Value incremented by 1 or 2 to avoid 0 each time any one of the following events occur Available Power or Management Power Level fields change value A Power Requested TLV is received with a Request ID field which is different from the last received set or when the first value is received The interface transitions to Down Available Power Amount of power consumed by port Management Power Level Displays the supplier s request to the powered device for its Power Consumption TLV The device always displays No Preference in this field Displaying CDP Neighbors Information The CDP Neighbors Information page displays CDP information received from neighboring devices After timeout based on the value received from the neighbor Time To Live TLV during which no CDP PDU was received from a neighbor the information is deleted To view the CDP neighbors information STEP 1 Click Administration gt Dis
598. ty ACE into the ACL that permits all the traffic If GMP MLD snooping is enabled on a port bound with an ACL add ACE filters in the ACL to forward IGMP MLD packets to the device Otherwise IGMP MLD snooping fails at the port The order of the ACEs within the ACL is significant since they are applied in a first fit manner The ACEs are processed sequentially starting with the first ACE ACLs can be used for security for example by permitting or denying certain traffic flows and also for traffic classification and prioritization in the QOS Advanced mode A port can be either secured with ACLs or configured with advanced QoS policy but not both There can only be one ACL per port with the exception that it is possible to associate both an IP based ACL and an IPv6 based ACL with a single port To associate more than one ACL with a port a policy with one or more class maps must be used The following types of ACLs can be defined depending on which part of the frame header is examined MAC ACL Examines Layer 2 fields only as described in Defining MAC based ACLs P ACL Examines the Layer 3 layer of IP frames as described in Pv4 based ACLs IPv6 ACL Examines the Layer 3 layer of IPv4 frames as described in Defining IPv6 Based ACL If a frame matches the filter in an ACL it is defined as a flow with the name of that ACL In advanced Qos these frames can be referred to using this Flow name and QoS can be a
599. ty Level lf unsecure messages are not dropped select the security level below which messages are not forwarded No Verification Disables verification of the security level User Defined Specify the security level of the message to be forwarded STEP 3 If required click Add to create an ND Inspection policy STEP 4 Enter the following fields Policy Name Enter a user defined policy name Device Role Select either Server or Client to specify the role of the device attached to the port for ND Inspection Inherited Role of device is inherited from either the VLAN or system default client Client Role of device is client Host Role of device is host Drop Unsecure See above Minimal Security Level See above Validate Source MAC Specify whether to globally enable checking source MAC address against the link layer address Inherited lInherit value from VLAN or system default disabled Enable Enable checking source MAC address against the link layer address Disable Disable checking source MAC address against the link layer address 430 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security IPV6 First Hop Security 2 O Configuring First Hop Security through Web GUI STEP 5 If required click either Attach Policy to VLAN or Attach Policy to Interface Neighbor Binding Settings The Neighbor Binding table is
600. uard supports the following functions Filtering of received DHCPv6 messages DHCP Guard discards DHCPV6 reply messages received on interfaces whose role is client The interface role is configured in the DHCP Guard Settings page Validation of received DHCPv6 messages DHCPv6 Guard validates DHCPv6 messages that match the filtering based on the DHCPv6 Guard policy attached to the interface If amessage does not pass verification it is dropped If the logging packet drop configuration on the FHS common component is enabled a rate limited SYSLOG message is sent Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security IPV6 First Hop Security 2 O Neighbor Binding Integrity Neighbor Binding Integrity Neighbor Binding NB Integrity establishes binding of neighbors A separate independent instance of NB Integrity runs on each VLAN on which the feature is enabled Learning Advertised IPv6 Prefixes NB Integrity learns IPv6 prefixes advertised in RA messages and saves it in the Neighbor Prefix table The prefixes are used for verification of assigned global IPv6 addresses By default this validation is disabled When it is enabled addresses are validated against the prefixes in the Neighbor Binding Settings page Static prefixes used for the address validation can be added in the Neighbor Binding Table page Neighbor Binding Table Overflow When there is no
601. uch as UC3xx 5xx and from switches that advertise voice VLAN in CDP or VSDP VSDP is a Cisco defined protocol for voice service discovery Unlike Telephony OUI mode that detects voice devices based on telephony OUI Auto Voice VLAN mode depends on Auto Smartport to dynamically add the ports to the voice VLAN Auto Smartport if enabled adds a port to the voice VLAN if it detects an attaching device to the port that advertises itself as a phone or media end points through CDP and or LLDP MED Voice End Points To have a voice VLAN work properly the voice devices such as Cisco phones and VoIP endpoints must be assigned to the voice VLAN where it sends and receives its voice traffic Some of the possible scenarios are as follows A phone endpoint may be statically configured with the voice VLAN Aphone endpoint may obtain the voice VLAN in the boot file it downloads from a TFTP server A DHCP server may specify the boot file and the TFTP server when it assigns an IP address to the phone Aphone endpoint may obtain the voice VLAN information from CDP and LLDP MED advertisements it receives from their neighbor voice systems and switches The device expects the attaching voice devices to send voice VLAN tagged packets On ports where the voice VLAN is also the native VLAN voice VLAN untagged packets are possible Auto Voice VLAN Auto Smartports CDP and LLDP Defaults By factory defaults CDP LLDP and LLDP MED on the device a
602. umber of allowed devices on the port Default Values are Snative_vlan Default VLAN Smax_hosts 10 the port type cannot be detected automatically the default mode is trunk smartport switchport trunk native vlan Snative_vlan port security max max_hosts port security mode max addresses port security discard trap 60 smartport storm control broadcast level 10 smartport storm control include multicast smartport storm control broadcast enable spanning tree portfast no_host no_host macro description No host no smartport switchport trunk native vlan smartport switchport trunk allowed vlan remove all no port security no port security mode no port security max no smartport storm control broadcast enable no smartport storm control broadcast level no smartport storm control include multicast spanning tree portfast auto 180 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Smartport Built in Smartport Macros 11 ip_camera ip_camera macro description ip_camera macro keywords native_vlan macro key description S native_vlan The untag VLAN which will be configured on the port Default Values are Snative_vlan Default VLAN switchport mode access switchport access vlan native_vlan Single host port security max 1 port security mode max addresses port security discard trap 60
603. upport the authentication method 392 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security 802 1X Authentication 1 Authenticator Overview Violation Mode In single host mode you can configure the action to be taken when an unauthorized host on authorized port attempts to access the interface This is done in the Host and Session Authentication page The following options are available restrict Generates a trap when a station whose MAC address is not the supplicant MAC address attempts to access the interface The minimum time between the traps is 1 second These frames are forwarded but their source addresses are not learned protect Discard frames with source addresses that are not the supplicant address shutdown Discard frames with source addresses that are not the supplicant address and shutdown the port You can also configure the device to send SNMP traps with a configurable minimum time between consecutive traps If seconds 0 traps are disabled If minimum time is not specified it defaults to 1 second for the restrict mode and 0 for the other modes Quiet Period The Quiet period is a period when the port single host or multi host modes or the client multi sessions mode cannot attempt authentication following a failed authentication exchange In single host or multi host mode the period is defined per port and in the multi session
604. upported or is Disabled on a Neighbor If UDLD is not supported or disabled on a neighbor then no UDLD messages are received from that neighbor In this case the device cannot determine whether the link is unidirectional or bidirectional The status of the interface is then set to undetermined The actions taken by the device depend on whether the UDLD mode is normal or aggressive Inconsistent UDLD Mode in Local and Neighboring Device It is possible for the local device and its neighbor to be set to a different UDLD mode normal aggressive The UDLD mode is not contained in the UDLD messages so that the local device does not know the UDLD mode of the neighbor and vice versa If the UDLD modes are different on the local and neighbor device the devices act as follows When the UDLD state of the link is bidirectional or unidirectional both devices shut down their ports When the UDLD state of the port is undetermined the side with the normal UDLD mode merely issues a notification while the side with the aggressive UDLD mode shuts down the port If both devices are in normal mode the port is not shut down when its state is undetermined Reactivating a Shutdown Port You can reactivate a port that was shut down by UDLD in one of the following ways Automatically You can configure the system to automatically reactivate ports shut down by UDLD in the Port Management gt Error Recovery Settings page In this case when
605. urce Guard is not active on the device Reason No Problem No Resource No Snoop VLAN Trust Port STEP 2 To add an entry click Add Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 291 17 IP Configuration DHCP Server STEP 3 Enter the fields VLAN ID VLAN on which packet is expected MAC Address MAC address of packet IP Address IP address of packet Interface Unit Slot Interface on which packet is expected Type tThe possible field values are Dynamic Entry has limited lease time Static Entry was statically configured Lease Time lIf the entry is dynamic enter the amount of time that the entry is to be active in the DHCP Database If there is no Lease Time check Infinite STEP 4 Click Apply The settings are defined and the device is updated DHCP Server The DHCPv4 Server feature enables you to configure the device as a DHCP v4 server A DHCP V4 server is used to assign IPv4 address and other information to another device DHCP client The DHCPv4 server allocates IPv4 addresses from a user defined pool of IPv4 addresses These can be in the following modes Static Allocation The hardware address or client identifier of a host is manually mapped to an IP address This is done in the Static Hosts page Dynamic Allocation A client obtains a leased IP address for a specified period of time that can be infinite
606. ures ACL and advanced QoS policies are not active when a port has DoS Protection enabled on it An error message appears if you attempt to enable DoS Prevention when an ACL is defined on the interface or if you attempt to define an ACL on an interface on which DoS Prevention is enabled A SYN attack cannot be blocked if there is an ACL active on an interface Default Configuration The DoS Prevention feature has the following defaults The DoS Prevention feature is disabled by default SYN FIN protection is enabled by default even if DoS Prevention is disabled If SYN protection is enabled the default protection mode is Block and Report The default threshold is 30 SYN packets per second All other DoS Prevention features are disabled by default Configuring DoS Prevention The following pages are used to configure this feature Security Suite Settings Before activating DoS Prevention you must unbind all Access Control Lists ACLs or advanced QoS policies that are bound to a port ACL and advanced QoS policies are not active when a port has DoS Protection enabled on it To configure DoS Prevention global settings and monitor SCT Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 359 Security Denial of Service Prevention STEP 1 Click Security gt Denial of Service Prevention gt Security Suite Settings The Security Suite Settings displays CP
607. usiness 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Port Management Link Aggregation Every LAG has the following characteristics All ports ina LAG must be of the same media type To add a port to the LAG it cannot belong to any VLAN except the default VLAN Ports ina LAG must not be assigned to another LAG No more than eight ports are assigned to a static LAG and no more than 16 ports can be candidates for a dynamic LAG All the ports in a LAG must have auto negotiation disabled although the LAG can have auto negotiation enabled When a port is added to a LAG the configuration of the LAG is applied to the port When the port is removed from the LAG its original configuration is reapplied Protocols such as Spanning Tree consider all the ports in the LAG to be one port Default Settings and Configuration Ports are not members of a LAG and are not candidates to become part of a LAG Static and Dynamic LAG Workflow After a LAG has been manually created LACP cannot be added or removed until the LAG is edited and a member is removed Only then the LACP button become available for editing To configure a static LAG perform the following actions 1 Disable LACP on the LAG to make it static Assign up to eight member ports to the static LAG by selecting and moving the ports from the Port List to the LAG Members list Select the load balancing algorithm for the LAG Perform thes
608. vant search criteria and click Go ARP Inspection ARP enables IP communication within a Layer 2 Broadcast domain by mapping IP addresses to a MAC addresses A malicious user can attack hosts switches and routers connected to a Layer 2 network by poisoning the ARP caches of systems connected to the subnet and by intercepting traffic intended for other hosts on the subnet This can happen because ARP allows a gratuitous reply from a host even if an ARP request was not received After the attack all traffic from the device under attack flows through the attacker s computer and then to the router switch or host 370 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security 1 ARP Inspection The following shows an example of ARP cache poisoning ARP Cache Poisoning Switch HostC Man in the middle IC MC 345140 Hosts A B and C are connected to the switch on interfaces A B and C all of which are on the same subnet Their IP MAC addresses are shown in parentheses for example Host A uses IP address IA and MAC address MA When Host A needs to communicate with Host B at the IP layer it broadcasts an ARP request for the MAC address associated with IP address IB Host B responds with an ARP reply The switch and Host A update their ARP cache with the MAC and IP of Host B Host C can poison the ARP caches of the switch Host A and Host B by broadcasting forge
609. ve Configuration page and save the Running Configuration to the Startup Configuration file type on the device Apply Click to apply changes to the Running Configuration on the device If the device is rebooted the Running Configuration is lost unless it is saved to the Startup Configuration file type or another file type Click Save to display the Copy Save Configuration page and save the Running Configuration to the Startup Configuration file type on the device Cancel Click to reset changes made on the page Clear All Click to clear the statistic counters for all interfaces Interfaces Counters Clear Interface Click to clear the statistic counters for the selected Counters interface Clear Logs Clears log files Clear Table Clears table entries Close Returns to main page If any changes were not applied to the Running Configuration a message appears Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 9 Getting Started Window Navigation Button Name Description Copy Settings Delete A table typically contains one or more entries containing configuration settings Instead of modifying each entry individually it is possible to modify one entry and then copy the selected entry to multiple entries as described below 1 Select the entry to be copied Click Copy Settings to display the popup 2 Enter the destination ent
610. ve LLDP frame transmissions due to changes in the LLDP local systems MIB Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 97 Administration Discovery Configuring LLDP STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 1 STEP 2 Chassis ID Advertisement Select one of the following options for advertisement in the LLDP messages MAC Address Advertise the MAC address of the device Host Name Advertise the host name of the device In the Fast Start Repeat Count field enter the number of times LLDP packets are sent when the LLDP MED Fast Start mechanism is initialized This occurs when a new endpoint device links to the device For a description of LLDP MED refer to the LLDP MED Network Policy section Click Apply The LLDP properties are added to the Running Configuration file Editing LLDP Port Settings The Port Settings page enables activating LLDP and SNMP notification per port and entering the TLVs that are sent in the LLDP PDU The LLDP MED TLVs to be advertised can be selected in the LLDP MED Port Settings page and the management address TLV of the device may be configured To define the LLDP port settings Click Administration gt Discovery LLDP gt Port Settings This page contains the port LLDP information Select a port and click Edit This page provides the following fields Interface Select the port to edit Administrative Status Select the L
611. vice class offering all Class 1 and Class 2 features plus location 911 Layer 2 device support and device information management capabilities PoE Device Type Port PoE type for example powered PoE Power Source Port power source PoE Power Priority Port power priority PoE Power Value Port power value Hardware Revision Hardware version Firmware Revision Firmware version Software Revision Software version Serial Number Device serial number Manufacturer Name Device manufacturer name Model Name Device model name Asset ID Asset ID Location Information Civic Street address Coordinates Map coordinates latitude longitude and altitude ECS ELIN Emergency Call Service ECS Emergency Location Identification Number ELIN Network Policy Table Application Type Network policy application type for example Voice VLAN ID VLAN ID for which the network policy is defined Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 107 Administration Discovery Configuring LLDP VLAN Type VLAN type for which the network policy is defined The possible field values are Tagged l ndicates the network policy is defined for tagged VLANs Untagged ndicates the network policy is defined for untagged VLANs User Priority Network policy user priority DSCP Network policy DSCP Displaying LLDP Neighbors Information The
612. vides for power savings on a short length of cable After cable length is analyzed the power usage is adjusted for various cable lengths If the cable is shorter than 50 meters the device uses less power to send frames over the cable thus saving energy This mode is only supported on RJ45 GE ports it does not apply to Combo ports This mode is globally disabled by default It cannot be enabled if EEE mode is enabled see below In addition to the above Green Ethernet features the 802 3az Energy Efficient Ethernet EEE is found on devices supporting GE ports EEE reduces power consumption when there is no traffic on the port See 802 3az Energy Efficient Ethernet Feature for more information available on GE models only EEE is enabled globally by default On a given port if EEE is enabled short reach mode be disabled If Short Reach Mode is enabled EEE be grayed out These modes are configured per port without taking into account the LAG membership of the ports The device LEDs are power consumers Since most of the time the devices are in an unoccupied room having these LEDs lit is a waste of energy The Green Ethernet feature enables you to disable the port LEDs for link speed and PoE when they are not required and to enable the LEDs if they are needed debugging connecting additional devices etc On the System Summary page the LEDs that are displayed on the device board pictures are not affected by disabling the LEDs
613. which increases network security Set Match if the flag is SET Unset Match if the flag is Not SET Dont care lIgnore the TCP flag Type of Service tThe service type of the IP packet ICMP If the ACL is based on ICMP select the ICMP message type that is used for filtering purposes Either select the message type by name or enter the message type number If all message types are accepted select Any Any All message types are accepted Select from list Select message type by name from the drop down list ICMP Type to Match Number of message type that is to be used for filtering purposes ICMP Code The ICMP messages may have a code field that indicates how to handle the message Select one of the following options to configure whether to filter on this code Any Accept all codes User Defined Enter an ICMP code for filtering purposes STEP 5 Click Apply Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 486 24 Access Control Defining ACL Binding Defining ACL Binding NOTE STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 NOTE When an ACL is bound to an interface port LAG or VLAN its ACE rules are applied to packets arriving at that interface Packets that do not match any of the ACEs in the ACL are matched to a default rule whose action is to drop unmatched packets Although each interface can be bound to only one ACL multiple inter
614. which the last session was authenticated Authentication Server RADIUS server MAC Address Displays the supplicant MAC address VLAN ID Port s VLAN Locked Clients To view clients who have been locked out because of failed login attempts and to unlock a locked client Click Security gt 802 1X MAC Web Authentication gt Locked Client The following fields are displayed Interface Port that is locked MAC Address Displays the current port authorization state If the state is Authorized the port is either authenticated or the Administrative Port Control is Force Authorized Conversely if the state is Unauthorized then the port is either not authenticated or the Administrative Port Control is Force Unauthorized Remaining Time Sec The time remaining for the port to be locked STEP 2 Selecta port STEP 3 Click Unlock 402 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Security 802 1X Authentication 1 8021X Configuration Through the GUI Web Authentication Customization This page enables designing web based authentication pages in various languages You can add up to 4 languages NOTE Up to 5HTTP users and one HTTPS user can request web based authentication at the same time When these users are authenticated more users can request authentication To add a language for web based authentication STEP 1 Click Security gt
615. wing Aggregated Policer Statistics To view aggregated policer statistics Click Quality of Service gt QoS Statistics gt Aggregate Policer Statistics This page displays the following fields Aggregate Policer Name Policer on which statistics are based In profile bytes Number of in profile packets that were received Out of profile bytes Number of out of profile packets that were received Click Add Select an Aggregate Policer Name one of the previously created Aggregate Policers for which statistics are displayed Click Apply An additional request for statistics is created and the Running Configuration file is updated Viewing Queues Statistics The Queues Statistics page displays queue statistics including statistics of forwarded and dropped packets based on interface queue and drop precedence To view Queues Statistics Click Quality of Service gt QoS Statistics gt Queues Statistics This page displays the following fields Refresh Rate Select the time period that passes before the interface Ethernet statistics are refreshed The available options are No Refresh Statistics are not refreshed 15 Sec Statistics are refreshed every 15 seconds Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Quality of Service 2 5 Managing QoS Statistics 30 Sec Statistics are refreshed every 30 seconds 60 Sec Statistics a
616. wing actions are performed by the device if it overheats and during the cool down period after overheating Event Action At least one temperature The following are generated sensor exceeds the Warning threshold SYSLOG message SNMP trap At least one temperature The following are generated sensor exceeds the Critical threshold SYSLOG message SNMP trap The following actions are performed System LED is set to solid amber if hardware supports this Disable Ports When the Critical temperature has been exceeded for two minutes all ports will be shut down On devices that support PoE Disable the PoE circuitry so that less power is consumed and less heat is emitted 68 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version Administration Diagnostics Event Action Cool down period after the After all the sensors cool down to Warning Critical threshold was Threshold minus 2 degree C the PHY will be re exceeded all Sensors are enabled and all ports brought back up lower than the Warning threshold 2 C If FAN status is OK the ports are enabled On devices that support PoE the PoE circuitry is enabled To view the device health parameters click Status and Statistics gt Health The Health page displays the following fields Fan Status Fan status The following values are possible OK Fan is ope
617. y LLDP gt LLDP Port Status STEP 2 Click LLDP Local Information Detail to see the details of the LLDP and LLDP MED TLVs sent to the neighbor STEP 3 Click LLDP Neighbor Information Detail to see the details of the LLDP and LLDP MED TLVs received from the neighbor Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 103 Administration Discovery Configuring LLDP LLDP Port Status Global Information Chassis ID Subtype Type of chassis ID for example MAC address Chassis ID Identifier of chassis Where the chassis ID subtype is a MAC address the MAC address of the device appears System Name Name of device System Description Description of the device in alpha numeric format Supported System Capabilities Primary functions of the device such as Bridge WLAN AP or Router Enabled System Capabilities Primary enabled function s of the device Port ID Subtype Type of the port identifier that is shown LLDP Port Status Table Interface Port identifier LLDP Status LLDP publishing option LLDP MED Status Enabled or disabled Local PoE Local PoE information advertised Remote PoE PoE information advertised by the neighbor of neighbors Number of neighbors discovered Neighbor Capability of 1st Device Displays the primary functions of the neighbor for example Bridge or Router Displaying LLDP Local Information To view the LLD
618. y ARP Inspection STEP 1 Click Security gt ARP Inspection gt Properties Enter the following fields ARP Inspection Status Select to enable ARP Inspection ARP Packet Validation Select to enable the following validation checks Source MAC Compares the packets source MAC address in the Ethernet header against the senders MAC address in the ARP request This check is performed on both ARP requests and responses Destination MAC Compares the packets destination MAC address in the Ethernet header against the destination interfaces MAC address This check is performed for ARP responses IP Addresses Compares the ARP body for invalid and unexpected IP addresses Addresses include 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 and all IP Multicast addresses Log Buffer Interval Select one of the following options Retry Frequency Enable sending SYSLOG messages for dropped packets Entered the frequency with which the messages are sent Never Disabled SYSLOG dropped packet messages STEP 2 Click Apply The settings are defined and the Running Configuration file is updated Defining Dynamic ARP Inspection Interfaces Settings Packets from untrusted ports LAGs are checked against the ARP Access Rules table and the DHCP Snooping Binding database if DHCP Snooping is enabled see the DHCP Snooping Binding Database page By default ports LAGs are ARP Inspection untrusted To change the ARP trusted status of
619. ype to an interface and the interface is not configured to be Auto Smartport Persistent then its Smartport type is re initialized to Default in the following cases A link down up operation is performed on the interface The device is restarted All devices attached to the interface have aged out which is defined as the absence of CDP and or LLDP advertisement from the device for a specified time period Unknown If a Smartport macro is applied to an interface and an error occurs the interface is assigned the Unknown status In this case the Smartport and Auto Smartport features do not function on the interface until you correct the error and applies the Reset action performed in the Interface Settings pages that resets the Smartport status See the workflow area in Common Smartport Tasks section for troubleshooting tips NOTE Throughout this section the term aged out is used to describe the LLDP and CDP messages via their TTL If Auto Smartport is enabled and persistent status is disabled and no more CDP or LLDP messages are received on the interface before both TTLs of the most recent CDP and LLDP packets decrease to 0 then the anti macro is run and the Smartport type returns to default Smartport Macros A Smartport macro is a script of CLI commands that configure an interface appropriately for a particular network device Smartport macros should not be confused with global macros Global macros configure
620. ys the total number of power shortage occurrences Denied Counter Displays number of times the powered device was denied power Absent Counter Displays the number of times that power was stopped to the powered device because the powered device was no longer detected Invalid Signature Counter Displays the times an invalid signature was received Signatures are the means by which the powered device identifies itself to the PSE Signatures are generated during powered device detection classification or maintenance STEP 4 Click Apply The PoE settings for the port are written to the Running Configuration file Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version 193 Port Management PoE Configuring PoE Settings 194 Cisco Small Business 200 300 and 500 Series Managed Switch Administration Guide Internal Version VLAN Management This section covers the following topics VLANs Configuring Default VLAN Settings Creating VLANs Configuring VLAN Interface Settings Defining VLAN Membership GVRP Settings lt 300 500 gt VLAN Groups lt 300 500 gt Voice VLAN Access Port Multicast TV VLAN Customer Port Multicast TV VLAN lt 300 500 gt VLANs A VLAN is a logical group of ports that enables devices associated with it to communicate with each other over the Ethernet MAC layer regardless of the physical LAN segment of the bridged network to which they are conn

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

塩分分析計 SAT-500（PDF:894KB）  フォナック コムパイロットⅡ 取扱説明書  User's Manual  NV-600LM/RM 超高速VDSL2モデム  Suunto Zoop Computer Diver  Instruction manual - E  ST300s取扱説明書  DP 340x MOTOTRBO Portable - Basic Service Manual  Manuale di insallazione/ Manuale dell`utente  Samsung 삼성 스마트오븐  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file